Escolar Documentos
Profissional Documentos
Cultura Documentos
SECTION
Letters and Syllables...................................... 1-15
Alphabet,1; Vowels,2,3; Diphthongs,4; Conso-
nants,6,7;Phonetic Variations,8,9;Syllables,10,
11;Quantity,12-14;Accentuation,15.
Parts of Speech............................................ 16
Inflection of the Substantive........................ 17-71
Definitions,18;Gender,19-21;Number,22;
Cases,23-25;Declensions,26;Endings,27;First
Declension,29,30;Second Declension,31-34;Third
Declension,35-60;Fourth Declension,61,62;Fifth
Declension,63,64;Greek Substantives,65,66;Ir-
regular Substantives,67-71.
Inflection of the Adjective........................ 72-90
Definition,72;First and Second Declension,73-
76; Pronominal Adjectives,76; Third Declension,
77-83;Irregular Adjectives,84,85;Comparison of
Adjectives,86-90.
Adverbs ........................................... 91-93
Formation of Adverbs,91,92;Comparison,93.
Numerals............................................ 94-98
Cardinals,94;Ordinals,94;Distributives,97;
Adverbs,98.
Pronouns ............................................ 99-111
Personal,100-102;Determinative,103;Demon-
strative,104;Relative,105;Interrogative,106;In-
definites,107; Adjectives,108; Correlative,109-111.
Inflection of the Verb ................................112-175
Definitions,112,113; Endings,114,115; Inflection
of ease,116,117; of prodesse,118; of posse,119.Reg-
ular Verbs,120-167; Division,120; Rules for forming
Tenses,121.First Conjugation,122; Second Conju-
gation,123,124; Third Conjugation,125,126; Fourth
viii CONTENTS.
SECTION
Conjugation,127;Deponents,128;Periphrastic,
129; Notes,130,131.Formation of the Stems,132-
135; Change in Conjugation,136; List of Verbs,
137-167.Irregular Verbs,168-174; ire,169,2; quire,
nequire,170; ferre,171; edere,172; fieri,173; velle,
nolle,malle,174; Defective Verbs,175.
Formation of Words ......................................176-200
Simple Words,179-192; Substantives,180,181;
Adjectives,182; Substantives without Suffixes,183;
Suffixes,184-189; Verbs,190-192;Compound Words,
193-200; Substantives,194-198; Verbs,199,200.
SYNTAX.
Simple Sentence ...........................................202-471
Subject,203,204; Predicate,205-209; Concord,
210,211; Voices,212-221.Tenses,222-252; Present,
227-230; Imperfect,231-234; Perfect,235-240; Plu-
perfect,241; Future,242,243; Future Perfect,244,
245; Periphrastic,246-251; Tenses in Letters,252.
Moods,253-283; Indicative,254; Subjunctive,255-
265;Imperative,266-275;Tenses in Moods and Verbal
Substantives,276-283.
Simple Sentence Expanded....................................284-471
Multiplication of the Subject ......285-287
Qualification of the Subject ......288-325
Adjectives,289-303; Numerals,292-295; Compara-
tives and Superlatives,296-303: Pronouns,304-319;
Personal.304; Demonstrative,305-307; Determina-
tive and Reflexive,308-311;Possessive,312;Indefi-
nite,313-319; Apposition,320-325; Predicative Attri-
bution and Apposition,325.
Multiplication of Predicate 326
Qualification of Predicate 327-449
The Cases 328-418
Accusative,328-343; Dative,344-359; Genitive,
360-383; Ablative,384-410; Locative,411; Preposi-
tions,412-418; with Accusative,416; with Ablative,
417; with Accusative and Ablative,418.
Infinitive 419-424
Subject,422; Object,423; Predicate,424.
CONTENTS.ix
SECTION
Gerund and Gerundive 425-433
Genitive,428; Dative,429; Accusative,430; Abla-
tive,431;with Prepositions,432,433.
Supine 434-436
Accusative,435; Ablative,430.
Participles 437,438
Adverbs 439-449
Negatives,441-449.
Incomplete(Interrogative) Sentence 450-471
Direct Simple Questions,453-457; Direct Disjunc-
tive Questions,458,459;Indirect Questions,460;
Moods in Direct,402-466; Moods in Indirect,467.
Compound Sentence ............................................472-670
Coordinate Sentence 473-503
Copulative,474-482; Adversative,483-491;Dis-
junctive,492-497; Causal and Illative,498-503.
Subordinate Sentences .......504-670
Moods in,508; Sequence of Tenses,509-519; Re-
flexive in,520-522.
Object Sentences 523-537
Introduced by quod,524,525;in Accusative and
Infinitive,526,527,532-535; in Nominative and
Infinitive,528; in Participle,536,537.
Causal Sentences ........538-542
Introduced by quod,quia,etc.,539-541;by quod,
with verbs of Emotion,542.
Sentences of Design and Tendency ....543-558
Final,544-550; Pure Final,545; Complementary
Final,546-549; After verbs of Fear,550.
Consecutive,551; Pure Consecutive,552; Comple-
mentary Consecutive,553-557; Exclamatory Ques-
tions,558.
Temporal Sentences 559-588
Antecedent Action,561-567; Iterative Action,566,
567; Contemporaneous Action,568-573; Subsequent
Action,574-577;Sentences with cum,578-588.
Conditional Sentences 589-602
Logical,595; Ideal,596; Unreal,597; Incomplete,
598-601;Of Comparison,602.
Concessive Sentences ....603-609
x CONTENTS.
SECTION
Relative Sentences ..610-637
Concord,614-621;Tenses,622,623;Moods,624-
637.
Comparative Sentences 638-644
Correlative,642;with atque or ac,643;with quam,
644.
The Abridged Sentence 645-663
Historical Infinitive,647;Oratio Obliqua,648;
Moods in,650-652; Tenses in,653-655; Conditional
Sentences in,656-659 : Pronouns,660;Partial Ob-
liquity,662,663.
Participial Sentences 664-670
Arrangement of Words and Clauses ...............................671-687
Figures of Syntax and Rhetoric .................................688-700
Principal Rules of Syntax ...Pp.437-444
PROSODY.
Quantity ............................................702-717
General Rules,702-706 : of Final Syllables,707-
713; of Stem Syllables,714;of Compounds,715;in-
Early Latin,716,717.
Figures of Prosody ...................................718-728
Versification ........................................729-827
Definition,729-754;Versus Italicus,755;Saturnian
Verse,756; Iambic Rhythms,757-767; Trochaic
Rhythms,768-776;Anapaestic Rhythms,777-782;
Dactylic Rhythms,783-789;Logacedic Rhythms,
790-805;Cretic and Bacchic Rhythms,806-814;
Ionic Rhythms,815-819;Compound Verses,820-
823;Cantica,824,825;Metres of HORACE,826,827.
PAGES
Appendix ............................................491-493
Roman Calendar,Roman Weights and Measures,
Roman Money,Roman Names.
Index of Verbs....................................... 494-502
General Index ........................................503-546
LATIN GRAMMAR.
ETYMOLOG
Y.
Alphabet
.
1.THE Latin alphabet has twenty-three letters : A B C D E F G H I K L M N O P Q
R S T V X Y Z
REMARKS.1.The sounds represented by C and K were originally distinct,C having th
e sound of G,but they gradually approximated each other,until C supplanted K exc
ept in a few words,such as Kalendae,Kaeso,which were usually abbreviated,Kal.,K.
The original force of C is retained only in C.(for Gaius) and Cn.(for Gnaeus).
2.J,the consonantal form of I,dates from the middle ages.V represented also the
vowel u in the Latin alphabet;and its resolution into two letters V for the cons
onant,and U for the vowel also dates from the middle ages.For convenience,V and
U are still distinguished in this grammar.
3.Y and Z were introduced in the time of Cicero to transliterate Greek υ and ζ.In ea
rly Latin was represented by (occasionally by i or oi),and ζ by ss or s.¥Z had occ
rred in the earliest times,b t had been lost,and its place in the alphabet taken
by G,which was introd ced after C acq ired the so nd of K.
NOTE.The Latin names for the letters were : a,be,ce,de,e,ef,ge,ha,i,ka,el,em,en,
o,pe,q (= c ),er,es,te, ,ex(ix),to be prono nced according to the r les given in
3,7.For Y the so nd was sed,for Z the Greek name(eta).
Vowels.
2.The vowels are a,e,i,o, ,(y);and are divided :
1.According to their q ality(i.e.,the position of the organs sed in pron nciati
on),into
g tt ral(or back),a,o, ;palatal(or front),e,i,(y).
2.According to their q antity or prolongation(i.e.,the time req ired for pron nc
iation),into
long ( -- );short (v)
[2 VOWELS--DIPHTHONGS--CONSONANTS.]
REMARK.Vowels whose q antity shifts in poetry are called common(see 13),and are
disting ished th s :
by preference short; by preference long.
3. So nds of the Vowels.
a = a in father. o = o in bone.
e = e in prey. = oo in moon.
i = i in caprice. y = in s r(French),German e.
REMARK.The short so nds are only less prolonged in pron nciation than the long s
o nds,and have no exact English eq ivalents.
Diphthongs.
4.There are b t few diphthongs or do ble so nds in Latin.The theory of the dipht
hong req ires that both elements be heard in a sl r. The tendency in Latin was t
o red ce diphthongs to simple so nds; for example,in the last cent ry of the rep
blic ae was gliding into e,which took its place completely in the third cent ry
A.D.Hnce arose freq ent variations in spelling : as glaeba and gleba,sod; so ob
oedire and obedire,obey;faen m(foem n) and fen m,hay.
ae = aye(ah-eh).ei = ei in feint(drawled).
oe = oy in boy. e = e in Spanish deda(eh-oo).
a = o in o r. ( i = we,almost).
NOTE.Before the time of the Gracchi we find ai and oi instead of ae and oe.
5.The sign (Diaeresis Greek =separation) over the second vowel shows that each s
o nd is to be prono nced separately;aer,air; Oenoma s,aloe.
Consonants.
6.Consonants are divided :
1.According to the principal organs by which they are prono nced,into
Labials(lip-so nds) : b,p,(ph),f,v,m. Dentals(tooth-so nds): d,t,(tb.),1,n,r,
s. G tt rals(throat-so nds) : g,c,k,q ,(ch),h,n(see 7).
NOTE.Instead of dental and g tt ral,the terms ling al and palatal are often sed
.
2.According to their prolongation,into A.Semi-vowels : of which
l,m,n,r,are liq ids(m and n being nasals).
h is a breathing.
s is a sibilant.
[CONSONANTS-PHONETIC-VARIATIONS.3]
B.M tes : to which belong
P-m tes,p, b,(ph),f, labials.
T-m tes,t, d,(th), dentals.
K-m tes,k, c, q , g,(ch), g tt rals.
Those on the same line are said to be of the same organ.. M tes are f rt
her divided into
Ten es(thin,smooth) : p,t,k,c,q , hard(s rd).
Mediae(middle) : b,d,g, soft(sonant).
[Aspiratae(aspirate,ro gh): ph,th,ch,] aspirate.
Those on the same line are said to be of the same order. The aspirates w
ere introd ced in the latter part of the second cent ry B.C.in the transliterati
on of Greek words,and thence extended to some p re Latin words;as,p lcher,Gracch
s.
3.Do ble consonants are : = d in ade;x=cs(ks),gs;i and between two vowels
are do ble so nds,half vowel,half consonant.
So nds of the Consonants.
7.The consonants are so nded as in English,with the following exceptions :
C is hard thro gho t = k.
Ch is not a gen ine Latin combination(6,2).In Latin words it is a k;in G
reek words a kh,commonly prono nced as ch in German.
G is hard thro gho t,as in get,give.
H at the beginning of a word is b t slightly prono nced;in the middle of
a word it is almost imperceptible.
I consonant(J) has the so nd of a broad y;nearly like y in y le.
N has a g tt ral nasal so nd before c,g,q,as in anchor,ang ish.
Q = kw(nearly);before o,q = c.In early Latin q was not followed by .
Later,when o was weakened to ,q was replaced by c; th s q om became c m.Still
later q replaced c,yielding q m.
R is trilled.
S and X are always hard,as in hiss,axe.
T is hard thro gho t;never like t in nation.
U consonant(V) is prono nced like the vowel,b t with a sl r.In the third
cent ry A.D.it had nearly the so nd of o r w.In Greek it was freq ently transli
terated by O ;so O alerios = Valeri s.
Phonetic Variations in Vowels and Consonants.
8.Vowels.
1.Weakening.In the formation of words from roots or stems short vowels show a te
ndency to weaken;that is,a tends to become e
[4 PHONETIC VARIATIONS.]
and then i,or o and then ,while o tends towards e or i,and towards i This occ
rs most freq ently in compo nd words,to a less degree in words formed by s ffix
es.Diphthongs are less freq ently weakened and long vowels very rarely.The princ
ipal r les for these changes are as follows,b t it m st be remembered that to al
l there are more or less freq ent exceptions :
A.--1.In the second part of compo nd words,and in red plicated words,the root-vo
wel a is weakened to e,which s ally passes over into i in open syllables(11,R.)
,and often to before l and labial m tes : conscendo(scando);concido(cado);des
lto(salto);fefelli(fallo). 2.As final vowel of the stem a is weakened in the fir
st part of a compo nd word, s ally to i,rarely to o or : aq ilifer(aq ila-);ca
sidic s (ca sa-).3.In or before s ffixes,a becomes i: domit s(doma-).
NOTE.A freq ently resists change,especially in verbs of the First and Second Con
j gations : as,separare(parare);circ miacere(iacere);so satisfacere (facere) and
others.
E.--1.In the second part of compo nd words,root vowel e is s ally retained in a
close(11,R.) syllable,and weakened to i in an open syllable;b t it is invariabl
y retained before r : inflecto(flecto);obtineo(teneo);adverto(verto).2.In or bef
ore s ffixes,and in the final syllable of a word,it also becomes i : genitor(gen
e-); ndecim(decem).
I--.At the end of a word i is changed to e : mare(mari).
O.--1.In composition final stemvowel o is s ally weakened to i; before labials
sometimes to : agricola(agro-);a r fex( s ally a rifex).2.In s ffixes,and in f
inal syllables,it is weakened to i : amicitia (amico-);gracilis(also gracil -s).
U.--In composition final stemvowel is s ally weakened to i; the same weakenin
g occ rs sometimes within a word or before a s ffix : manifest s(also man -fest
s);lacrima(early lacr ma).
AE,AU.--In the second part of a compo nd word root-diphthong ae is s ally weake
ned to i,b t often there is no change;a is occasionally changed to : exq iro(
q aero);concl do(cla do).
2.Omission.--Vowels are freq ently omitted both in simple and compo nd words,eit
her within the word(syncope) or at the end(apocope) : dextera and dextra;princep
s(for primceps,from primiceps);pergo (for perrego); t( ti);ne (neve).
3.Epenthesis.--Vowels are sometimes inserted to ease the pron nciation,b t s al
ly before liq ids or in foreign words : ager(agro-) see 31;Daphine(= Daphne);dra
ch ma(= drachma).
4.Assimilation.--Two vowels in adjoining syllables tend to become like each othe
r; this assimilation is s ally regressive(i.e.,of the first to the second),espe
cially when l separates them;it is rarely progressive.Compare facilis with fac l
,familia with fam l s,bene with bon s.
[PHONETIC VARIATIONS.5]
5.A vowel before a liq id tends to become ,less often o or e :
ad lescens and adolescens;
v lg s and volg s;
dec m s(decem);
compare temp s with temporis;peperi(from pario),etc.
9.Consonants.
1.Assimilation.--When two consonants come together in Latin,they tend to assimil
ate one to the other.This assimilation is s ally regressive;sometimes it is pro
gressive.It is either complete,that is,the two consonants become the same;or par
tial,that is,the one is made of the same order or same organ as the other.These
changes occ r both in inflection and in composition,b t they are especially note
worthy in the last consonant of prepositions in composition.
Script m for scrib-t m(regressive partial);accedere for ad-cedere (regressive co
mplete);c rs m for c r-t m(progressive partial);celerrim s for celersim s(progre
ssive complete).
2.Partial Assimilation.(a) The sonants g and b,before the s rd t,or the sibilant
s,often become s rds(c,p );the s rds p,c,t before liq ids sometimes become sona
nts(b,g,d);the labials p,b before n become m; the labial m before the g tt rals
c,q,g,h,i(j),the dentals t,d,s,and the labials f,v,becomes n;the dental n before
labials p,b,m,becomes m;rect m(for reg-t m);scripsi(for scrib-si);segment m (fo
r sec-ment m);somn s(for sop-n s);princeps(for prim-ceps).
NOTE.Similar is the change of q(q ) to c before t or s : coct m(for coq -t m).
(b) After l and r,t of the s ffixes tor,t s,t m,becomes s by progressive assimil
ation : c rs m(for c r-t m).
3.Complete Assimilation.There are many varieties,b t the most important principl
e is that a m te or a liq id tends to assimilate to a liq id and to a sibilant :
p ella(p er);c rrere(for c r-sere);cessi (for ced-si);corolla(corona),etc.
4.Prepositions.--
Ab takes the form
a before m or v,and in af i; appears as
a in a fero,a f gio;as
abs before c,t;as as before p.
Ad is assimilated before c,g,l,p,r,s,t,with more or less reg larity;
before gn,sp,sc,st,st often appears as a.
Ante appears rarely as anti.
C m appears as
com before b,m,p;
con before c,d,f,g,i,q,s,v;co before gn,n;
assimilated sometimes before l and r.
Ex becomes
e before b,d,g,i(j),l,m,n,r,v;ef or
ec,before f.
In s ally becomes
im before b,m,p;before l,r it is occasionally
assimilated; the same holds good of the negative prefix in.
Ob is s ally assimilated before c,f,g,p;appears as
o in omitto,operio,
obs in obsolesco,and
os in ostendo.
S b is assimilated before c,f,g,p,r;appears as
s s in a few words,as s scipio;occasionally
s before s,as s spicio.
Trans sometimes becomes
tra before d,i(j),n;
tran before s.
Amb-(inseparable) loses b before a consonant,and
am is sometimes assimilated.
Circ m sometimes drops m before i.
Dis becomes
dif before f;
dir before a vowel;
[6 PHONETIC VARIATIONS--SYLLABLES.]
di before consonants,except c,p,q,t,s,followed by a vowel,when it is s
ally nchanged.
The d of red and sed is s ally dropped before consonants.
NOTE.In early Latin assimilation is m ch less common than in the classical perio
d.
5.Dissimilation.¥To avoid the harshness of so nd when two syllables begin with the
same letter,the initial letter of the one is often changed;this is tr e especia
lly of liq ids,b t occasionally of other letters :
sing laris(for sing -la-lis);
meridie(for medi-die).
NOTE.This principle often reg lates the se of -br m or -b l m,and of -cr m or -
c l m in word formation(181,6) : compare
peric l m with sim lacr m.
6.Omission.--(a) When a word closes with a do bled consonant or a gro p of conso
nants,the final consonant is reg larly dropped in Latin;sometimes after the prec
eding consonant has been assimilated to it.In the middle of a word,after a long
syllable,ss and ll are simplified;ll is sometimes simplified after a short vowel
,which is then lengthened if the syllable is accented(compensatory lengthening);
b t if the syllable is naccented,s ch lengthening need not take place.In this c
ase other do bled consonants may also be simplified.
fel(for fell);
lac(for lact);
vigil(for vigils);
lapis(for lapids,lapiss);
misi(for missi);
villa
and
vilic s;
b t
c rr s
and
c r lis.
NOTE.X is retained,even after l and r,as in calx,arx;also ps,bs,
as in stirps, rbs;ms is fo nd in hiems only.
(b) In the tendency to easier pron nciation consonants are often dropped both at
the beginning and in the middle of a word : stim l s(for stigm l s);pastor(for
pasctor);aio(for ahio);nat s(for gnat s,retained in early Latin,rarely later);la
t s(for tlat s),etc.
7.Epenthesis.--Between m and l,m and s,m and t,a p is generated : exempl m(eximo
);compsi(como);empt s(emo).
8.Metathesis or transposition of consonants occ rs sometimes in Latin,especially
in Perfect and S pine forms : cerno;Pf .crevi,etc.
Syllables.
10.The syllable is the nit of pron nciation;it consists of a vowel,or a vowel a
nd one or more consonants.
A word has as many syllables as it contains separate vowels and diphthon
gs.
In dividing a word into syllables,a consonant,between two vowels,belongs
to the second :
amo,I love;
lixa,a s tler,従軍商人.
[SYLLABLES QUANTITY.7]
Any combination of consonants that can begin a word (incl ding mn, nder
Greek infl ence) belongs to the following vowel;in other combinations the first
consonant belongs to the preceding vowel :
asper,ro gh;
fa st s,l cky;
libri,books;
amnis,river.
REMARKS.1.The combinations incapable of beginning a word are
(a) do bled consonants :
sicc s,dry;
(b) a liq id and a consonant :
alm s,fostering;
ambo,both;
ang is,snake;
arbor,tree.
2.Compo nds are treated by the best grammarians as if their parts were separate
words :
abigo,I drive off;
resp blica,commonwealth.
11.The last syllable of a word is called the ltimate (
ltima,last);
the next to the last the pen lt(
paene,almost,
and ltima);the one before the pen lt,the antepen lt (
ante,before,
and paen ltima).
REMARK.A .syllable is said to be open when it ends with a vowel; close,when it e
nds with a consonant.
Q antity.
12.1.A syllable is said to be long by nat re,when it contains a long vowel or di
phthong :
mos,c stom;
cael m,heaven.
REMARKS.1.A vowel before nf,ns,gm,gn,is long by nat re :
Infelix, nl cky;
mensa,table;
agmen,train;
agn s,lamb.
In many cases,however,the n has disappeared from the written word;so in some s b
stantival terminations : os(Acc.Pl.,2d decl.), s(Acc.Pl.,4th decl.);in adjective
s in os s(
formos s,shapely,
for formons s);in the n merical termination esim s(= ensim s).See 95,N.5.
2.Before i consonant(j) a vowel is long by nat re :
Pompei s,Pompey;
except in compo nds of
i g m,yoke(bi-i g s,two-horse),
and in a few other words.
NOTE.--From abo t 134 to abo t 74 B.C.a,e, ,were often represented by as,ee ;i
by ei.From the time of A g st s to the second cent ry i was indicated by a leng
thened i.From S lla's time ntil the third cent ry long vowels(rarely,however,i)
were indicated by an Apex(').
2.A syllable is said to be long by position,when a short vowel is followed by tw
o or more consonants,or a do ble consonant :
ars,art;
coll m,neck;
abr mpo,I break off;
per mare,thro gh the sea;
nex,m rder.
[8 ACCENTUATION.]
3.A syllable is said to be short when it contains a short vowel,which is not fol
lowed by two or more consonants :
loc s,place;
tab la,pict re.
REMARK.--A vowel is short by nat re when followed by another vowel,or by nt,nd:
de s,God;
innocentia,innocence;
amand s,to be loved.
13.A syllable ending in a short vowel,followed by a m te with l or r,is said to
be common(
anceps,do btf l) :
tenebrae,darkness.
REMARK.--In prose s ch syllables are always short.In poetry they were short in e
arly times,common in the A g stan period.
14.Every diphthong,and every vowel derived from a diphthong,or contracted from o
ther vowels,is long:
saev s,cr el;
concl de,I sh t p(from cla do,I sh t);
cogo(from co-ago),I drive together.
Accent ation.
15.1.Dissyllabic words have the accent or stress on the pen lt :
eq os( = eq s),horse.
2.Polysyllabic words have the accent on the pen lt,when the pen lt is long;on th
e antepen lt,when the pen lt is short or common :
mandare,to commit;
mandere,to chew;
integr m,entire;
circ mdare,to s rro nd;
s perstites,s rvivors.
REMARKS.1.The little appendages(enclitics),
q e,ve,ne,
add an accent to the ltimate of words accented on the antepen lt :
l minaq e,"and lights";
fl minave,"or rivers";
vomerene ? from a plo ghshare ?
Dissyllables and words accented on the pen lt are said to shift their accent to
the final syllable before an enclitic :
egomet,I indeed;
amareve,or to love,;
b t it is more likely that the ordinary r le of accent ation was followed.
2.Compo nds(not prepositional) of facere and dare retain the accent on the verba
l form :
calefacit,温 る
ven mdare.sell
3.Vocatives and genitives of s bstantives in i s of the second declension,as wel
l as genitives of s bstantives in i m,retain the accent on the same syllable as
the nominative :
Vergili.
NOTE.Other exceptions will be noted as they occ r.In the older lang age the acce
nt was not bo nded by the antepen lt :
accipio (accipio) ,
conc tio(conc tio).揺 る
[PARTS OF SPEECH INFLECTION.9]
Parts of Speech.
16.The Parts of Speech are the No n(S bstantive and Adjective),the Prono n,the V
erb,and the Particles(Adverb,Preposition,and Conj nction),defined as follows :
1 .The S bstantive gives a name :
vir,a man;
Cocles,Cocles;
don m,a gift.
2.The Adjective adds a q ality to the S bstantive :
bon s vir,a good man.
3.The Prono n points o t witho t describing :
hic,this;
ille,that;
ego,I.
4.The Verb expresses a complete tho ght,whether assertion,wish,or command;
amat,he loves;
amet,may he love;
ama,love tho !
5.The Adverb shows circ mstances.
6.The Preposition shows local relation.
7.The Conj nction shows connection.
REMARKS.1.S bstantive is short for no n-s bstantive,and adjective for no n-adjec
tive.S bstantives are often loosely called no ns.
2.The Interjection is either a mere cry of feeling : ah! ah ! and does not belon
g to lang age,or falls nder one of the above-mentioned classes.
3.The Particles are mainly m tilated forms of the no n and prono n.
NOTES.1.The difference between s bstantive and adjective is largely a difference
of mobility;that is,the s bstantive is fixed in its application and the adjecti
ve is general.
2.No n and prono n have essentially the same inflection;b t they are commonly se
parated,partly on acco nt of the difference in signification,partly on acco nt o
f certain pec liarities of the pronominal forme.
Inflection.
17.Inflection(Inflexio,bending) is that change in the form of a word(chiefly in
the end) which shows a change in the relations of that word.The no n,prono n,and
verb are inflected;the particles are not capable of f rther inflection.
The inflection of no ns and prono ns is called declension,and no ns and prono ns
are said to be declined.
The inflection of verbs is called conj gation,and verbs are said to be conj gate
d.
[10 THE SUBSTANTIVE GENDER.]
The S bstantive.
18.A S bstantive is either concrete or abstract;concrete when it gives the name
of a person or thing;abstract when it gives the name of a q ality;as
amicitia,friendship.
Concrete s bstantives are either proper or common : Proper when they are proper,
or pec liar,to certain persons,places,or things:
Horati s,Horace;
Neapolis,Naples;
Pad s,Po.
Common when they are common to a whole class :
domin s,a lord;
rbs,a city;
amnis,a river.
Gender of S bstantives.
19.For the names of animate beings,the gender is determined by the signification
;for things and q alities,by the termination.
Names of males are masc line;names of females,feminine.
Masc line :
Rom l s;
I ppiter;
vir,man;
eq s,horse.
Feminine :
Cornelia;
I no;
femina,woman;
eq a,mare.
20.Some classes of words,witho t nat ral gender,have their gender determined by
the signification :
1.All names of months and winds,most names of rivers,and many names of mo ntains
are masc line;as :
Aprilis,April,the opening month;
Aq ilo,the north wind;
Albis,the River Elbe;
Athos,Mo nt Athos.
REMARKS.1.Names of months,winds,and rivers were looked pon as adjectives in agr
eement with masc line s bstantives nderstood(
mensis,month;
vent s,wind;
fl vi s,amnis,river).
2.Of the rivers,
Allia,
Lethe,
Matrona,
Sagra,
Styx
are feminine;
Alb la,
Acheron,
Gar mna
vary,being sometimes masc line,sometimes feminine.
3.Of the mo ntains,
Alpes,the Alps,
is feminine;so,too,s ndry (Greek) names in a(G.ae),e(G.es) :
Aetna( s ally),
Calpe,
Cyllene,
Hybla,
Ida,
Ossa( s ally),
Oeta( s ally),
Rhodope,
Pholoe,
Pyrene,
and
Carambis,
Peloris.
Pelion and Soracte( s ally),and names of mo ntains in a(G.or m),as
Maenala(G.Maenalor m),are ne ter.
II.Names of co ntries(terrae,fem.),islands(ins lae,fem.),cities( rbes,fem.),plan
ts(plantae,fem.),and trees
[GENDER NUMBER,11]
(arbores,fem.),are feminine: Aegypt s,Egypt;Rhod s,Rhodes;pir s,a pear-tree;abie
s,a fir-tree.
REMARKS.1.Names of co ntries and islands in s(os)(Gr.i) are masc line,except Ae
gypt s,Chi s,Chersones s,Cypr s,Delos,Epir s,Lemnos,Lesbos,Peloponnes s,Rhod s,S
amos,Bospor s(the co ntry).
2.Many Greek names of cities follow the termination.Towards the end of the rep b
lic many feminine names change the ending - s to - m and become ne ter :
Abyd s and Abyd m,
Sag nt s and Sag nt m.
3.Most names of trees with stems in -tro(N.-ter) are masc line :
oleaster,wild olive;
pinaster,wild pine.
So also most shr bs :
d m s,bramble-b sh;
rh s,s mach.漆
Ne ter are
acer,maple;
laser,a plant;
papaver,poppy(also masc.in early Latin);
rob r,oak;
siler,willow;
siser,skirret(occasionally masc.)、 ゴ ジ ;
s ber,cork-tree;
t ber,m shroom.
B.-Sibilant Stems.
47.The Nominative has no additional s,and changes in masc lines e to i,and in ne
ters e or o to before s.
In the obliq e cases,the s of the stem s ally passes over,between two vowels,in
to r(rhotacism).
There are the following varieties of stems :
1.-as,-aris :
mas,male.
-as,-dsis :
vas(n.),vessel.
-as,-assis :
as(m.),a copper(vowel long in Nom.by compensatory lengthening),and some
of its compo nds(with change of vowel),as
bes,semis.
2.-es,-erist
Ceres,Ceres.
-is,-eris :
cinis,ashes;
c c mis,c c mber(see 57,R.i),
p lvis(occasionally p lvis),d st;
vomis,plo ghshare(see 45,R.2).
- s,-eris : Ven s,and occasionally
pign s,pledge(see 4).
3.-is,-iris :
glis,dormo se(動物./0).
4.-os,-osis : old Latin
ianitos,(ianitor),doorman
labos,(labor)
clamos(clamor,see 45,N.).
-os,-ossis :
os(n.),bone.
-os,-or is :
flos,flower;
glos,sister-in-law;
lepos,charm;
mos(m.),c stom;
-os(n.),mo th;
ros,dew.
- s,-oris :
corp s,body;
dec s,grace;
pign s,pledge,
and twelve others;on rob s (see 45,R.2).
5.- s,- ris:
Lig s,Lig rian.
- s,- ris:
tell s(f.),earth;
m s(m.),mo se;
the ne ters:
cr s,leg;
i s,right;
p s,p s(膿);
r s,co ntry;
t s,incense.
6.aes,aeris,brass.
[CONSONANT STEMS.23]
48.SINGULAR. PLURAL. SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
N.A.V. gen s,kind(n.), genera, corp s,body(n.), corpora,
G. generis, gener m, corporis
, corpor m,
D. generi, generib s, corpori,
corporib s,
Ab. genere. generib s. corpore.
corporib s.
REMARK.As,a copper,and os,bone,form the Gen.PL in -i m,after
the sage of vowel stems(see 38,2).So also
m s,mo se.
49.R le of Gender.Masc line are s bstantives in -is (-eris),and -os,-oris: excep
t
os,mo th(G.oris),
which is ne ter.
Ne ter are s bstantives in - s(G.-eris,-oris),and in - s (G.- ris);except
tell s,earth(G.tell ris),which is feminine;
and the masc lines,
lep s,hare(G.leporis);
m s,mo se(G.m ris).
C.M te Stems.
50.All masc lines and feminines of m te stems have s in the Nominative.Before s
a P-m te is retained,a K-m te combines with it to form x,a T-m te is dropped.
Most polysyllabic m te stems change their final vowel i into e in the Nominative
.
The stems show variations as follows : X
51.Stems in a P-m te.
1.-abs,-abis :
trabs,beam;
Arabs.
-aps,-apis :
[daps],feast.
2.-ebs,ebis :
plebs,commons.
3.-eps,-ipis :
princeps,chief,and fo rteen others.
-ips,-ipis : stips,dole.
4.-ops,-opis :
[ops],power.
5.-eps, pis :
a ceps,fowler(野鳥猟者),and the old Latin
manceps,contractor.
6.-rbs,-rbis :
rbs,city.
7.-rps,-rpis :
stirps,stock.
SG. N. princeps,chief(m.), PL. principes,
G. principis, princip m,
D. principl, principib s.
Ac. principem, principes,
V. princeps, principes,
Ab. principe. principib s.
52.Stems in a K-m te.
1.-ax,-acis:
fax,torch,and many Greek words in -ax,
Atax,proper name,
-ax,-acis :
fornax,f rnace;
limax,snail;
pax,peace;
and Greek
cordax,trochaic meter
thorax.breast plate
[24 THIED DECLENSION.]
2.-ex,-ecis :
faenisex,mower;
nex,m rder;
[prex],prayer;
[resex],st mp.
-ex,-ecis :
allex(also allec),brine(塩水);
vervex,wether(去勢羊).
-ex,-egis :
grex,herd;
aq ilex,water-inspector.
-ex,-egis :
interrex;
lex,law;
rex,king.
3.-ex,-icis :
a spex,soothsayer,and abo t forty others.
-ex,-igis :
remex,rower.
-ix,icis :
cervix,neck,and abo t thirty others;
verbals in -ix,as
victrix.
-ix,-icis :
appendix,appendix,and ten others.
-ix,-igis :
strix,screech-owl;also many foreign proper names,as D mnorix,which may,h
owever,be forms in -ix,-igis.
4.-ox,-ocis :
celox,c tter;小舟
vox,voice.
-ox,-ocis :
Cappadox,Cappadocian.
-ox,-ogis :
Allobrox,Allobrogian.
5.- x,- cis:
cr x,cross;
d x,leader;
n x,n t.
- x,- cis:
l x,light;
ball x,gold-d st;
Poll x.
- x,- gis :
coni x(- nx),spo se.
- x,- gis :
fr x,fr it.
6.-rx,-rcis :
arx,citadel;
merx,wares(商品).
-lx,-lcis :
falx,sickle;
calx,heel,lime.
-nx,-ncis :
lanx,dish;
compo nds of - nx,as
q inc nx,and a few names of animals;
phalanx has G.phalangis.
7.Unclassified :
nix(G.nivis),snow;
bos(G.bovis;see 71),ox;
[fa x] (G.fa cis),throat;
faex(G.faecis),dregs.
SG. N. rex,king(m.). PL. reges,
G. regis, reg m,
D. regi, regib s,
Ac. regem, reges,
V. rex, reges,
Ab. rege, regib s.
53.Stems in a T-m te
1.-as,-atis : many feminine abstracts,as
aetas,age;
some proper names,as
Maecenas.-as,-atis :
anas,d ck.
-as,-adis :
vas,bail;<=>
lampas,torch.
2.-es,-etis:
indiges,patron deity(守護神);
interpres,interpreter;
praepes,bird;
seges,crop;
teges,mat.
-es,-etis :
abies,fir;
aries,ram;
paries,wall.
-es,-etis :
q ies,q iet;
req ies,rest.
-es,-edis :
pes,foot,and its compo nds.
-es,-edis :
heres,heir;
merces,hire.
3.-es,-itis :
antistes,overseer;
caespes,sod(芝),and some fifteen others,
-es,-idis :
obses,hostage;
praeses,protector.
-is,-itis :
lis,s it.
-is,-idis :
capis,bowl;
cassis,helmet,net
and nearly forty others,mostly Greek.
4.-os,-otis :
cos,whetstone;
dos,dowry;
nepos,grandson;
sacerdos,priest.
-os,-odis :
c stos,g ard.
5.- s,- tis :
gl s,gl e,
and some abstracts :
i vent s,yo th;
sal s,safety;
senect s,old age;
servit s,servit de;
virt s,manliness.
- s,- dis :
pec s,sheep.
- s,- dis :
inc s,anvil;
pal s,marsh;
s bsc s,tenon(CD).
[CONSONANT STEMS.25]
6.-aes,-aedis :
praes,s rety(保証).
-a s,-a dis :
la s,praise;
fra s,fra d.
7.-is,-itis :
p ls,porridge.
-ns,-ntis :
infans,infant;
dens,tooth;
fons,fo ntain;
mens,mo ntain;
frons,brow;
pons,bridge;
gens,tribe;
lens,lentil;
mens,mind;
r dens,rope;
torrens,torrent.
-s,-ntis : latinised Greek words like
gigas,giant.
-rs,-rtis :
ars,art;
cohors,cohort,
fors,chance;
Mars;
mors,death;
sors,lot.
8.Unclassified :
cor(G.cordis),heart;
nox(G.noctis),night;
cap t (G.capitis),head;
lac(G.lactis),milk.
SG.N.aetas,age,(f.). PL. aetates, SG. pes,foot(m.). PL.
pedes,
G. aetatis, aetat m, pedis,
ped m,
D. aetati, aetatib s, pedi, pedib s,
Ac. aetatem, aetates, pedem,
pedes,
V. aetas, aetates, pes,
pedes,
Ab. aetate, aetatib s. pede, pedib s.
54.Many s bstantives of this class were originally vowel stems (see 56),and show
their origin by having the termination -i m in the Gen.Pl.and -i in the Abl.Sin
g lar.Some not originally vowel stems do the same.(See 38,2.)
Monosyllabic m te stems,with the characteristic preceded by a consonant,have the
Gen.PL in -i m :
rbi m,of cities;
arci m,of citadels;
monti m,of mo ntains;
parti m,of parts;
nocti m,of the nights.
B t - m is also fo nd in
gent m(ATTIUS),
part m(ENNIUS); so always op m.
Monosyllabic m te stems,with characteristic preceded by a long vowel or diphthon
g,vary : dot-i m,lit-i m,fa c-i ni,fra d- m(-i m),la d- m(-i m).B t praed- m,voc
m.
Monosyllabic m te stems with characteristic preceded by a short vowel have - m;b
t fac-i m,n c- m(-i m),niv-i m(- m).
The polysyllabic stems in -nt and -rt have more freq ently -i m,as
clienti m(- m),of clients;
cohorti m(- m),of companies.
So
ad lescenti m(- m),amanti m(- m),Infanti m(- m),parent m(-i m),serpenti
m(- m),torrenti m(- m);r dent m(-i m);b t only q adrant m.
Of other polysyllabic stems feminine stems in -at have freq ently both - m and -
i m,as aetat m and aetati m,civitat m and civitati m,etc.; the rest have s ally
- m : b t artifex,(h)ar spex,extispex,i dex,s pplex,coni x,remex,and s ally fo
rnax have -i m.Forceps,manceps,m niceps,princeps have - m.Pal s has s ally pal
di m.
NOTES.1.The acc sative lentim from [lens] is occasionally fo nd,and partim from
pars,as an adverb.
2.Sporadic ablatives in -i occ r as follows : animanti(Cic.), bidenti(L cr.), tr
identi(SIL.,VERG.),capiti,consonanti(gram.),heredi(inscr.),legi(inscr.),lenti(TI
TIN.,COL.),l ci(early),menti(COL.),occipiti(PERS.,A s.),pad (VARRO),parti,r dent
i(VITR.).sorti,torrenti(SEN.).
[26 THIED DECLENSION.]
55.R le of Gender.M te stems,with Nominative in s,are feminine.
1.Exceptions in a k-m te.,
Masc lines are s bstantives in -ex,-ex,-ix,and - nx;except
cortex,bark,
forfex,shears,
fr tex,shr b,
imbrex,tile,
latex,fl id,
obex,bolt,
silex,flint,
varix,varicose vein(静脈瘤),
which are sometimes masc line,sometimes feminine;and
faex,dregs,
forpex,tongs,
lex,law,
nex,sla ghter,
vibex,weal,and forms of
[prex],prayer,which are feminine.
calx,heel,and
calx,chalk,
are sometimes masc line,sometimes feminine.
2.Exceptions in a t-m te.
Masc line are s bstantives in -es,-itis,except
merges(f.),sheaf(束); also
pes,foot,and its compo nds;
paries,wall;
lapis,stone.
Masc lines in -ns are :
dens,tooth,and its compo nds;
fons,spring;
mons,mo ntain;
pons,bridge,;
r dens,rope;
torrens,torrent;
also some s bstantivised adjectives and participles.
Ne ters are only :
cor,heart,
lac,milk,and
cap t,head.
II.-VOWEL STEMS.
1 .Vowel Stems in i.
56.Masc lines and feminines form their Nominative in s. Some feminines change,in
the Nominative,the stemvowel i into e.
Ne ters change,in the Nominative,the stem-vowel i into e.This e is generally dro
pped by polysyllabic ne ters after l and r.
Stems in i have Genitive Pl ral in -i m.
Ne ter stems in i have the Ablative Sing lar in i,and Nominative Pl ral in -ia.
The varieties of stems are :
1.-is,-is : nearly one h ndred s bstantives,like
civis,citien.
2.-es,-is : thirty-five,like
v lpes,fox.
Some of these have also variant nominatives in -is in good sage.
3.-e,-is : some twenty ne ters,as
mare,sea.
4.,-is : twenty-fo r ne ters,which form Nominative by dropping the stem characte
ristic and shortening the preceding vowel :
animal,-alis,animal;
calcar(G-.calcaris),sp r.
5.For s bstantives in -er,-ris,see 44,2.Irreg lar is
senex,(G.senis;see 57,R.3),old man.
[VOWEL STEMS.27]
SG.N.collis,hill, t rris,tower.v lpes,fox. mare,sea.animal,living being.
G.collis, t rris, v lpis, maris, animalis,
D.colll, t rri, v lpi, mari, animali,
Ac.collem, t rrim(em), v lpem, mare, animal,
V.collis, t rris, v lpes, mare, animal,
Ab.colle, t rri(e), v lpe, mari, animali,
[VOWEL STEMS.29]
B.NOMINATIVES ENDING WITH s,OR x(cs,gs).
NOM.GEN. NOM.GEN.
-as *-as-is vas, dish. -is *-lt-is p ls, porridge
.
*-ar-is mas, male.m(p)s *-m-is hiems,
winter.
*ass-is as, a copper. -ns -nd-is frons,
leafy branch.
-at-is aetas. age. -nt-is frons, forehead.-as
*-ad-is v as, s rety. -rs -rd-is co cors,
concordant.
*-at-is anas. d ck. -rt-is pars, part.
-aes*-aed-is praes, s rety. -bs -b-is rbs, city.
*aer-is aes, brass. -ps -p-is stirps,
stalk.
a s -a d-is fra s, cheatery. -eps -ip-is princeps,chief.
-es -is n bes, clo d. *- p-is a ceps, fowler.
-ed-is pes, foot. -ax -ac-is pax,
peace.
*-er-is Ceres, Ceres. -ax *-ac-is fax,
torch.
-et-is abies, fir. -aex -aec-is faex, dregs.
-et-is q ies, rest. -a x -a c-is [fa x,] throat.
-es -et-is seges, crop. -ex -ec-is nex, death.
-id-is obses, hostage. -ic-is i dex, j dge.
-it-is miles, soldier. -eg-is grex, flock.
-is -is amnis, river. *-ig-is remex, rower.
-id-is lapis, stone. -ex *-ec-is allex, pickle.
-in-is sang is,blood. *-ic-is vibex(ix
),weal
-er-is cinis, ashes. -eg-is rex, king.
-is *-it-is lis, s it at law. -ix -ic-is cervix, neck.
*-ir-is glis, dormo se. -ix -ic-is calix,
c p.
-os *-od-is c stos, keeper. *-ig-is strix, screech-
owl.
or-is flos, flower. *-iv-is nix,
snow.
-ot-is cos, whetstone. -ox -oc-is vox,
voice.
*-ov-is bos, ox. -ox *-oc-is
praecox, early-ripe.
-os *oss-is os, bone. *-og-is Allobrox
, Allobrogian.
- s *- d-is pec s, cattle,sheep. *-oct-is nox, night.
*- r-is Lig s, a Lig rian. - x -c-is cr x, cross.
-or-is. corp s, body. - g-is coni x, spo se.
-er-is scel s, crime. - x - c-is l x, light.
- s - -is s s, swine* - g-is [fr x,]
fr it.
- d-is inc s, anvil. -ix -ic-is falx, sickle.
- r-is i s, right. -nx -nc-is lanx, dish..
- t-is sal s, weal. -rx -rc-is arx, citadel.
C.NOMINATIVES ENDING WITH A MUTE.
-ac *-act-is
lac,milk.
- t *-it-is
cap t,head.
-ec *-ec-is
allec,pickle(68,12).
D.NOMINATIVES ENDING WITH A VOWEL.
-e -i-s mare,sea.
-o -on-is Saxo,Saxon.
-o -on-is ¥¥ pavo,peacock.
-in-is homo,man.
*-n-is caro,flesh.
[FIFTH DECLENSION.31]
62.R le of Gender.S bstantives in - s are masc line; those in - are ne ter.
EXCEPTIONS.Feminines are
ac s,needle( s ally),
dom s,ho se,
Id s(pl.),the Ides,
man s,hand,
pen s,vict als(also m.食料),
portic s,piaa(広場),
q inq atr s(pl.),festival of Minerva,
trib s,tribe.
Early and late Latin show some f rther variations.
FIFTH DECLENSION.31
63.The stem ends in -e;Nominative in s.
In the Genitive and Dative Sing lar -e has been shortened after a consonant.
In the Acc sative Sing lar we find always e.
The ending in the Genitive Sing lar is that of the Second Declension,-i;the othe
r endings are those of the Third.
MASCULINE. FEMININE
.
SG.N.dies,day. PL.dies, SG.res,thing. PL.res
,
G.diei, dier m, rei, rer m,
D.diei, dieb s, rei, reb s,
Ac.diem, dies, rem,
res,
V.dies, dies, res,
res,
Ab.die. dieb s. re.
reb s.
REMARKS.1.Pl ral: Gen.,Dat.,All.Common in b t two s bstantives,dies,res.Late Lat
in shows also specieb s,and very rarely speb s and acieb s.
2.Many words of the Fifth Declension have a parallel form,which follows the Fir
st Declension,as mollitigs,softness,and mollitia.Where this is the case,forms o
f the Fifth Declension are s ally fo nd only in the Nom.,Acc.,and Abl.Sing lar
.
NOTES.1.Sing lar : Genitive.The older ending -g-s is fo nd sporadically in earl
y Latin,b t s ally the ending -g-i,which became later -8-1 after consonants,tho
gh early poets show n mero s examples of rgl,spgi,fidel.gl was occasionally sc
anned as one syllable,whence arose the contraction g,which is retained not nfre
q ently in the classical period;so acig(CAES.,SALL.),die(Pi-,CAES.,SALL.,LIVY,la
ter),fidg(PL.,HOR.,Ov.,late Prose),and other less certain cases; Jocc rsvery rar
ely,principally in early Latin(b t dil,VERG.,pernicil,Cic.).Plebes,in combinatio
n with trib n s,aedilis,scit m,often shows a Gen.plebl(plebei).
2.Dative.The contraction -g is fo nd,b t less often than in the Gen.; awe (SALL.
);die,facig(early Latin);fidg(early Latin,CAES.,SAXL.,LIVY),pernicig (LIVY),and
a few other forms.The Dat.in -i is fo nd very rarely in early Latin.
64.R le of Gender.-- S bstantives of the Fifth Declension are feminine except d
ies(which in the Sing,is common,and in the Pl.masc line),and meridies(m.),midday
.
[32 DECLENSION OF GREEK SUBSTANTIVES.]
Declension of Greek S bstantives.
65.Greek s bstantives,especially proper names,are commonly Latinised,and decline
d reg larly according to their stem-characteristic.Many s bstantives,however,eit
her retain their Greek form excl sively,or have the Greek and Latin forms side b
y side.These variations occ r principally in the Sing lar,in the Pl ral the decl
ension is s ally reg lar.
Sing lar Forms of Greek S bstantives.
First Declension.
N. Penelope, Leonidas, Anchises,
G. Penelopes, Leonidae, Anchisae,
D. Penelopae, Leonidae, Anchlsae,
Ac. Penelopen, Leonidam,an, Anchisen,am,
V. Penelope, Leonida, Anchlse,a,a,
Ab. Penelopa. Leonida. Anchisa.
Second Declension.
N. Delos, s, Ilion, m, Panth s, Androgeos, s,
G. Deli, Ilii, Panthi, Androgei,
D. Delo, Ilio, Pantho, Androgeo,
Ac. Delon, m, Ilion, m, Panth n, Androgeon,o,ona
V. Dele, Ilion, m, Panth , Androgeos,
Ab. Delo. Ilio. Paatho. Androgeo.
Third Declension.
N. Solon,Solo, aer,air. Xenophon, Atlas,
G. Solonis, aeris, Xenophontis, Atlantis,
D. Soloni, aeri, Xenophonti, Atlanti,
Ac. Solona,em, aera,em, Xenophonta,em, Atlanta,
V. Solon, aer, Xenophon, Atla,
Ab. Solone. aere. Xenophonte. Atlante.
N. Thales, Paris, heros,hero,
G. Thal-etis,-is, Paridis,os, herois,
D. Thal-eti,-i, Paridī,i, heroi,
Ac. Thal-eta,-en,-em, Par-ida,-im,-in, heroa,em,
V. Thale, Pari,Paris, heros,
Ab. Thale. Paride. heroe.
Mixed Declensions.
ii.iii. ii.iii. ii.iii.
N. Orphe s, Athos, Oedip s,
G. Orphei,ei, Atho,onis, Oedip-odis,-i,
D. Orpheo, Atho, Oedipodi,
Ac.Orphe m,ea, Atho,on,onem, Oedip- m,-oda
V. Orphe , Athos, Oedipe,
Ab.Orpheo. Athone. Oedip-ode,-o.
[IRREGULAR SUBSTANTIVES.33]
ii. iii. ii. iii. iii. iv.
N. Achilles,ens, Socrates, Dido,
G. Achillis,ei,i,eos, Socratis,i, Did s,onis,
D. Achilli, Socrati,
Dido,oni,
Ac. Achillem,ea,en, Socraten,em, Dido,onem,
V. Achilles,e,e ,e, Socrate,es, Dido,
Ab. Achille,e,i. Socrate. Dido,one
.
REMARKS.1.In the Gen.PL -en and -eon are fo nd in the titles of books;as,Georgi
con,Metamorphoseon.
2.Many Greek names,of the Third Declension in Latin,pass over into the First De
clension in the Pl ral;as,Th cydidas,Hyperidae,and many names in -crates;as SSc
rates;Pl.,Socratae(also SOcrates).
3.In transferring Greek words into Latin,the Acc sative Sing lar was sometimes
taken as the stem :
So κρατερ,Acc.κρατερα,(punch) bowl.
c,cis(msc.),nd c(c) c(fm.).
Σαλαμισ,,Acc.Σαλαμινα,m .
m ,m
,
d m
,e.
66.NOTE.1.
gur: Ge
tve.The Greek term
to
oeo(oo) pper rrey
ery Lt
,but u(ou) more freque
t,e pecy
geogrphc
me ,etc. The
term
to
-o (ος) is rare except in feminine patrnymics in -is,-as,(G.-ids,-ad
s).
2.Dative.The ending -i is very rare;and rarer still is the Dat.in - frm femini
nes in -,and Dat.in -y frm Nminatives in -ys.
3.Accusative.-a.is the mst cmmn terminatin in the Third Declensin,and is f
und regularly in sme wrds therwise Latinised;as aera,aethera.Stems in - us
ually have -,very rarely -n.
4.Plural.In the Secnd Declensin e is fund ccasinally in the Nm.,in early
Latin;as,adelphe.The Third Declensin shws frequently es in the Nm.and as i
n the Accusative;als ccasinally e in the Nm.and Acc.f neuters,and -si(but
nly in the pets) in the Dative.
5.Fr ther peculiarities,nt bservable in the paradigms,the dictinaries shul
d be cnsulted.Smetimes the frms are merely transliteratins f Greek cases.
IRREGULAR SUBSTANTIES. 1.Redundant Substantives.(Abundantia.)
67.A.Hetergeneus Substantives,r thse whse gender varies : 1.The variatin
ccurs in several cases in either number r in bth.
abrtnum,-us,a plant(rare), clipeus,-um,shield,
aevm(urn),-us,age, cllum,-us,neck,
baculum,-us,staff, cstum,-us,a plant(rare)
,
balteus,-um,girdle, frum,-us,market,
buxus,-um,bx-wd(rare), gladius,-um,swrd,
[calamister],-um,curling-irn(rare),¥ intibus,-um,succry(rare),
caseus,-um,cheese, iugulum,-us,cllar-bne,
cavm(um),-us,cavity, nardum,-us,nard(rare),
cingulum,-us,belt, nasus,-um,nse,
[34 IRREGULAR SUBSTANTIES.]
palatum,-us,palate, thesaurus,-um,treasure,
pileus,-um,cap, uterus,-um,wmb,
sagum,-us,clak, vallus,-um,palisade,
tergum,-us,back, and many thers.
2.The gender varies in Singular and Plural.
a.The Plural has -a smetimes,while the Singular ends in -us(r -er) : clivus,hi
ll,icus,jest,lcus(lca,lcalities;lci,usually passages in bks,tpics),and
many thers,especially names f places.
b.The Plural has -i,while the Singular ends in -um : filum,thread,frenum,bit,ras
trum,he,and many thers.
68.B.Heterclites,r substantives which shw different stems with the same Nmin
ative;Metaplasts,r thse which have certain frms frm anther than the Nminat
ive stem.
1.1st,2d. esseda,-um,charit, margarita,-um,pearl,
strea,-um,yster,
2.1st,5th. duritia,-es,hardness, materia,-es,matter,
and many thers.See 63,R.2.
3.2d,1st. mendum,-a,fault, sertum,-a,wreath.
The fllwing frm their Plural accrding t the First Declensin nly :
balneum,bath,
delicium,pleasure,
epulum,banquet,
fulmentum,prp.
4.2d,3d. sequester,trustee, Mulciber,ulcan.
5.2d,4th.Many names f trees f the Secnd Declensin have certain cases accrd
ing t the Furth;never,hwever,the Gen.and Dat.Pl.,and very rarely the Dat.Sin
g.; as
crnus,cupressus,fagus,ficus,laurus,myrtus,pinus,and a few thers.
Als
angiprtus,alley,
clus,distaff,
dmus,huse,
and a large number f substantives f the Furth Declensin which have ne r tw
cases f the Secnd;s
arcus has G.arci;
cnatus(-um),iussus(-tun),vultus have Nm.Pl.in a;
senatus has Gen.Sing,senati.See 61,RR,NN.
Finally,sme substantives f the Secnd Declensin frm individual cases accrdi
ng t the Furth :
fasti(Ac.pl.fastus),fretum(N.fretus,Ab.fretu),lectus(G.lectus),tributum(
N.tributus),and thers.
6.2d,5th. diluvium,-es,fld.
7.3d.2d. as,vessel,and vasum;
palumbes,pigen,and palumbus;
[iuger],acre,and iugerum;
all Greek nuns in -a(G.atis),as pema,pem(G.pematis),but PL Gen.pematrum,Da
t.Abl.pematis.
8.3d,5th.Fames,hunger,
tabes,crruptin,
have Abl.fame,tabe;
requies,quiet(G.-etis)
has Acc.requiem,Abl.requie;
satias(G.atis) is early and late fr satietas,sufficiency,
and a frm saties is cited frm late authrs;
plebs(G.plebis),cmmns,and plebes(G.plebei).
9.4th,3d.
Specus,cave,
has ccasinally frms f the Third Declensin.
10.2d,3d,1st.esper,evening,
has Acc.vesperum;Dat.Abl.vesper;Pl.Nm.vespera f the Secnd Declensin;Acc.ves
peram;Abl.vespera f the First; Gen.vesperis; Abl.vespere;Lc.vespere,vesperi f
the Third.
11.4th,2d,3d. Penus,fd,(G.us).
Frms f the Secnd Declensin are rare; f the Third early and late.
12.ariatins in the same Declensin :
femur(G.femris,feminis,etc.);
iecur (G.iecris.iecinris,etc.);
pecus,early,als pecu(G.peris,pecudis,etc.).
Als allec and allex,baccar and baccaris,cassis and cassida,lac and lacte (early
),panis and pane(early),rete and retis,satias and satietas.
[IRREGULAR SUBSTANTIES.35]
II.Defective Substantives.
I.SUBSTANTIES DEFECTIE IN NUMBER.
69.A.Substantives used in Singular nly:Singularia tantum.
Mst abstract substantives,and names f materials;such as
iustitia, justice, aurum,gld.
B.Substantives used in Plural nly : Pluralia tantum.
altaria,ium, altar(sing.late). insidiae, ambuscad
e.
ambages, rund abut. lactes, intestin
es(腸).
angustiae, straits. lamenta, lamentat
ins.
antae, dr-psts. lautmiae, stne-qu
arries(石切り場).
antes, rws(f vines), liberi, children.
arma,rum, arms. manes, shades f the de
ad.
armamenta,rum, tackle. manubiae, spils.
bellaria,rum, dessert. minae, threats.
bigae,quadrigae, tw-hrse,fur-hrse menia,ium, twn-wall.
charit(sing.late), nundinae(-num), market.
cancelli, lattice. nuptiae,
wedding.
casses, tils(snare). palpebrae, eyelids(
sing.late).
caulae, pening. parentalia, festival fr dea
d
cervices, neck(sing,early,late,
relatins.
and pet.).
parietinae, ruins.
cibaria, victuals. penates,
the Penates.
claustrum, lck(sing.late). phalerae, trapping
s(馬飾り).
clitellae, pack-saddle. praecrdia,rum,diaphragm.
cdicilli, a shrt nte. praestrigiae, jugglers'tricks.
cmpedes, fetters. preces,-um, prayer.
crepundia,rum, rattle. primitiae, first-fruits.
cunae, cradle. quisquiliae, rubbish.
divitiae, riches. reliquiae,
remains.
dumeta,rum, thrn-bush. renes, kidneys.
epulae(epulum), banquet. salinae, salt-pits.
excubiae, watching. scalae,
stairway.
exsequiae, funeral prcessin, sents, brambles(野ばら).
exta,rum, the internal rgans, splia,rum, spils(sing,late
,and
exuviae, equipments.
pet.). facetiae, witticism(sing,ear- spnsalia,ium,
betrthal.
ly and late). suppetiae, succr(early and
late)
fasti(fastus), calendar. talaria,ium, winged sandals.
fauces, gullet. tenebrae, darkness
.
feriae, hlidays. thermae, warm bat
hs.
flabra, breezes. tnsillae, tnsils.
fres, dr(sing,early, trmina, clic.
late and pet.). tricae, tricks.
fraga,rum, strawberries. utensilia,ium, necessaries.
grates, thanks. valvae, flding-
drs.
hiberna, winter quarters. verbera,um,
scurging(sing.pet and late).
Idus,Kalendae, Ides,Calends,
Nnae, Nnes. vindiciae, a legal
claim.
incunabula, swaddling-clthes, virgulta,rum, shrubbery.
indutiae, truce. viscera,
entrails(sing,pet
inferiae, sacrifices fr the dead.
and late).
[36 IRREGULAR SUBSTANTIES.]
NOTES.1.Fur f these have the Abl.Sing,in -e: ambage,cmpede,fauce,prece.
2.Names f persns r twns,and cllectives and the like,may be either singulari
a tantum,as
Iuppiter;
Rma;
capillus,hair;
r pluralia tantum,as
maires,ancestrs;
Quirites;
liberi,children;
pulmnes,lungs.
Many f these are nt included in the abve list,which is meant t cntain nly
the principal frms.
Akin t pluralia tantum are :
C.Substantives used in Plural with a special sense : Heterlga.
aedes,is, temple(better aedis), aedes, huse,pa
lace.
aqua, water, aquae, mineral springs.
auxilium, help, auxilia,auxiliaries,reinfrcements.
carcer, prisn, carceres,barriers.
castrum, frt, castra,camp.
cera, wax, cerae,waxen tablets.
cmitium, place f assemblage, cmitia,assemblage fr vting.
cpia, abundance, cpiae,frces,trps.
delicium, pleasure, deliciae,pet.
facultas, capability. facultates,gds.
finis, end,limit, fines,territry,brders.
frtuna, frtune, frtunae,pssessins.
habena, strap, habenae,reins.
impedimentum,hindrance, impedimenta,baggage.
littera, letter(f the alphabet), litterae,epistle,literature.
ludus, game,schl, ludi,public games.
pera, wrk, perae,wrkmen.
pars, part, partes,als rle.
rstrum, beak, rstra,the tribunal at Rme.
srs, lt, srtes,als racle.
tabula, bard,tablet, tabulae,als accunts.
vigilia, a night-watch, vigiliae,pickets.
2.SUBSTANTIES DEFECTIE IN CASE.
70.A.Substantives ccurring in nly ne case :
Gen.dicis,frm ,
Acc.Infitias (ire),(t) lie;
pessum(ire),(t) perish;
Abl.pnd,in weight;
spnte,f free will;
tab,crruptin(Gen.late);and many verbals in u,as
accitu,admnitu,arcessitu,cactu,cmpressu,cncessu,dmitu,inductu,
interpsitu,invitatu,iussu (ther frms late),iniussu,mandatu,missu,
natu,permissu,prmptu,rgatu.
A few thers ccur ccasinally in ante-classical and pst-classical Latin.
B.Substantives with nly tw cases :
fas,nefas,Sing.N.Ac.;
Instar,Sing.N.Ac.;
interneci,Sing.Ac.Ab.;
naucum,Sing.G.Ac.;
secus,Sing.N.Ac.;
spinter,Sing. N.Ac.;
suppetiae,Plur.N.Ac.,and a few thers.
Sme verbals in -us have in Plural nly Nm.and Acc.,as
impetus,mnitus.
Greek neuters in -s have nly Nm.and Acc.Singular.
C.Substantives with three cases :
faex,Sing.N.,D.,Plur.Ab.;
virus,slime;Sing. N.,G.,Ab.
D.Defective substantives with mre than three cases are numerus,but in the clas
sical perid the mst imprtant are:
calx(lime),cs,[daps],dica,[dici],flamen(blast),
frum,[frux],[indag],later,lux,[ps],s(muth),
pax,remex,vis(pwer),[vix],
and mst substantives f the Fifth Declensin.The Nminatives in brackets d nt
ccur,but nly blique cases.
E. Nem,nbdy,substitutes fr Gen.and Abl.
nullius hminis,and null hmine.
In the Dat.and Acc.it is nrmal;
nemini,neminem.
[ADJECTIES.37]
71. III.Peculiarities.
as,assis(m.), a cpper. iter,itineris(n.), way,rut
e.
auceps,aucupis, fwler. iecur,iecris(n.), liver.
bs(fr bvs),bvis(c.),x,cw. iecinris,iecineris,icineris.
G.Pl.bum. Iuppiter, Ivis.
D.Ab.bubus,bbus. mel,mellis(n.), hney.
caput,capitis(n.), head. nix,nivis(f .), snw.
anceps,ancipitis, tw-headed. s,ssis(n.), bne(48 R.).
praeceps,-cipitis,headlng. s,ris(n.), muth.
car,carnis(f.), flesh. pllis,pllinis(m.), flur.
PL G.carnium. sanguis,sanguinis(m.), Wd.
Ceres,Cereris, Ceres. senex,senis, ld man.
far,farris(n.) spelt. supellex,supellectilis(f.),furniture.
fel,fellis(n.), gall(胆汁). enus,eneris, enus.
femur,femris(n.), thigh.
feminis.
ADJECTIES.
72.The adjective adds a quality t the substantive.Adjectives have the same decl
ensin as substantives,and accrding t the stem-characteristic are f the First
and Secnd,r Third Declensin. Adjectives f the First and Secnd Declensin.
73.Stems in - fr masculine and neuter,-a fr feminine; nminative in -us,-a,-u
m;(er),-a,-um.The same variatins in terminatin ccur as in the substantives;ex
cept that adjectives in -ius frm Singular Genitive and cative regularly.See 3
3,R.1 and 2.
Bnus,bna,bnum,gd.
M. F. N. M.
F. N.
SG.N. bnus, bna, bnum. PL. bni, bnae, bna.
G. bni, bnae, bni. bnrum, bnarum,
bnrum.
D. bn, bnae, bn. bnis, bnis, bnis.
Ac. bnum, bnam, bnum. bns, bnas, bna.
. bne, bna, bnum. bni, bnae, bna.
Ab. bn, bna, bn. bnis, bnis, bnis.
Miser,misera,miserum,wretched.
SG.N.miser, misera, miserum. PL. miseri, miserae,
misera.
G. miseri, miserae, miseri. miserrum,miserarum,mise
rrum,
D. miser, miserae, miser. miseris, miseris,
miseris.
Ac. miserum, miseram, miserum. misers,
miseras, misera.
. miser, misera, miserum. miseri, miserae,
misera.
Ab. miser, misera, miser. miseris, miseris,
miseris.
[38 ADJECTIES.]
Piger,pigra,pigrum,slw.
SG.N.piger, pigra, pigrum. PL. pigri, pigrae, pigra.
G. pigri, pigrae, pigri. pigrrum, pigrarum,
pigrrum.
D. pigr, pigrae, pigr, pigris, pigris, pigris.
Ac. pigrum, pigram, pigrum. pigrs, pigras, pigra.
. piger, pigra, pigrum. pigri, pigrae, pigra.
Ab. pigr, pigra, pigr. pigris, pigris, pigris.
REMARK.Fr irregularities in the declensin f
amb,bth,
du,tw,
see 95;fr
meus,my,
see 100,R.1.
74.Stems in -r fllw the same principle in the frmatin f the Nminative mas
culine as the substantives,except that -us is retained in
ferus,wild,
prperus,quick,
praeprperus,praepsterus,absurd,
inferus,lwer(infer is early),
superus,upper(super is early),
and a few thers in late Latin; als when -r is preceded by a lng vwel;as,
austerus,harsh,
maturus,early,
prcerus,tall,
purus,pure,
severus,serius,
sincerus,sincere,
serus,late,
verus,true.
REMARKS.1.Dextera,dexterum,etc.,right,are fund side by side with dextra,dextrum
,etc.,thrughut the language(see 8,2).CAESAR uses nly the shrter frm.
2.A few adjectives f this class lack the Nm.Sing,whlly r in part;s there is
n ceterus r psterus in the classical perid.
75.NOTES ON THE CASES.
1.The Gen.Sing,in -i frm adjectives in -ius ccurs ccasinally in inscriptins
and in late authrs.The Gen.Sing.fem,in early Latin had smetimes ai,and in ins
criptins ccasinally -aes and -as.
2.The Dat.Sing.fem,in early Latin ccasinally ended in -ai,and in the ldest in
scriptins in -a.
3.In early inscriptins the -d f the Abl.is ccasinally retained.
4.ery rarely in early inscriptins des the Nm.PL masc.end in -eis,and in ne
case the Nm.Pl.fem f a perfect participle ends in -ai.
5.In petry,but at all perids,we find -um alngside f -rum and -arum in the G
en.Plural.
6.In the Dat.and Abl.PL -iis frm adjectives in -ius is ften cntracted t is;
usually in names f mnths and in adjectives frmed frm prper names.In early i
nscriptins -abus is fund ccasinally fr -is in the Dat.and Abl.PL feminine.
76.The s-called prnminal adjectives
alter,ne f the tw;
alteruter(a cmbinatin f alter and uter),either f the tw;
alius,ther;
neuter,neither;
nullus,nne;
slus, sle;
ttus,whle;
ullus,any;
unus,ne;
uter,which f the tw,
and their cmpunds,shw the fllwing variatins in declensin
[ADJECTIES.39]
1.They usually make the Gen.Sing,in -ius fr all genders.(alterius,alterutrius,
alius,neutrius,nullius,slius,ttius,ullius,unius,utrius)
REMARKS.1.The Gen.alius is very rare,and as a pssessive its place is usually ta
ken by
alienus.
2.The i f the ending -ius(except in alius) culd be shrtened in pe
try.This was usually the case with
alter,
and regularly in the cmpunds f
uter;as,utriusque.
NOTE.The regular frms are early and rare;in classical prse nly nulli(Cic. Rs
c.Cam.16,48) and ccasinally aliae.
2.They usually make the Dat.Sing,in -i.
(alteri,alterutri,alii,neutri,nulli,sli, tti,ulli,uni,utri)
NOTE.Regular frms are smetimes fund,but in classical prse nly
alterae,
null,
tt,
and perhaps
ttae.
alī
is fo nd in early Latin for alii.
3.In the compo nd
alter ter
we find s ally both parts declined; sometimes the second only.
4.Ali s makes Nom.and Acc.Sing,ne ter irreg larly : ali d.
NOTE.Alis and alid,for ali s and ali d,are early and rare;the latter,however, oc
c rs several times in LUCR,and once in CATULLUS.
NUMERALS.
NUMERAL ADJECTIVES.
94.The Cardinal n merals answer the q estion q ot, how many? and are the n mbers
sed in co nting.The Ordinal n merals are derived from these and answer the q e
stion q ot s,which one in the series ? They are as follows :
1.CARDINAL,NUMBERS. 2.ORDINAL NUMBERS.
1 I n s, na, n m prim s,-a,- m(prior)
2 II d o,d ae,d o sec nd s(alter)
3 III tres,tria terti s
4 IV q att or q art s
5 V q inq e q int s
6 VI sex sert s
7 VII septem septim s
[50 NUMERALS.]
1.CABDINAL NUMBERS. 2.ORDINAL NUMBERS.
8 VIII octo octav s
9 IX novem non s
10 X decem decim s
11 XI nidecim ndecim s
12 XII d odecim d odecim s
13 XIII tredecim terti s decim s
14 XIV q att ordecim q art s decim s
15 XV q indecim q int s decim s
16 XVI sedecim sext s decim s
17 XVII septendecim septim s decim s
18 XVIII d odeviginti d odevicesim s
19 XIX ndeviginti ndevicesim s
20 XX viginti vicesiimis
21 XXI viginti n s vicesim s prim s
22 XXII viginti d o vicesim s sec nd s
23 XXIII viginti tres vicesim s terti s
24 XXIV viginti q att or vicesim s q art s
25 XXV viginti q inq e vicesim s q int s
26 XXVI viginti sex vicesim s set s
27 XXVII viginti septem vicesim s septim s
28 XXVIII d odetrinta d odetricesim s
29 XXIX ndetriginta ndetricesim s
30 XXX triginta tricesim s
40 XL q adraginta q adragesim s
50 L q inq aginta q inq agesim s
60 LX sexaginta sexagesim s
70 LXX sept aginta sept agesim s
80 LXXX octoginta octogesim s
90 xc nonaginta nonagesim s
100 C cent m centesim s
101 CI cent m et n s centesim s prim s
115 CXV cent m et q indecim centesim s(et) q int s decim s
120 CXX cent m et viginti centesim s vicesim s
121 CXXI cent m viginti n s centesim s vicesim s prim s
200 CC d centi,-ae,-a d centesim s
300 CCC trecenti trecentesim s
400 CCCC q adringenti q adringentesim s
500 D(I⊃) q ingenti q ingentesim s
600 DC sescenti sescentesim s
700 DCC septingenti septingentesim s
800 DCCC octingenti octingentesim s
900 DCCCC nongenti nongentesim s
1000 M(CI⊃) mille millesim s
[NUMERALS.51]
1.CARDINAL NUMBERS. 2.ORDINA
L NUMBERS.
1001 MI mille et n s millesim s prim s
1101 MCI mille cent m n s millesim s centesim s prim s
1120 MCXX mille cent m viginti millesim s centesim s vicesim s
1121 MCXXI miUe cent m viginti n s millesim s centesim s vicesim s prim
s
1200 MCC mille d centi millesim s d centesim s
2000 MM d o milia(millia) bis millesim s
bina milia
2222 d o milia d centi vi- bis millesim s d centesim s
ginti d o vicesim s sec nd s
5000 I⊃⊃ q inq e milia q inq ies millesim s
q ina milia
10,000 CCI⊃⊃ decem milia decies millesim s
dena milia
21,000 n m et viginti milia semel et vicies millesim s
100,000 cent m milia centies millesim s
centena milia [milia
1,000,000 decies centena(cent m) decies centies millesim s
M and F.
N.
N.d o,two, d ae, d o, tres,three, tria.
G.d or m, d ar m, d or m, tri m, tri m.
D.d ob s, d ab s, d ob s, trib s, trib s.
A.d os,d o, d as, d o, tres,tris, tria.
Ab.d ob s, d ab s, d ob s, trib s, trib s.
Like d o is declined
ambo,-ae,-o,both.
REMARKS.1.For the declension of n s see 76.It occ rs also in pl ral forms in co
nnection with pl ralia tant m,as
nis litteris(Cic. Att,v.9,2),
or with another n meral in the sense only;in the latter sense also with s bstant
ives.
2.The Gen.of the h ndreds,
d centi,etc,.,ends in - m and not -or m. This m st be disting ished from
the se of the ne ter sing lar in - m as a collective,as
argenti sescent m(L c.),a six h ndred of silver.
3.The Pl.milia,mili m,milib s,are treated almost always as s bstantives,the adje
ctival form being the Sing lar.
NOTES.1.The form oinos for n s is fo nd in early Latin.A Voc. ne is occasional
(CAT.,37,17).
2.For d ae late Latin shows occasionally d o,and in inscriptions d a,for ne ter
[52 NUMERALS.]
d o,is sometimes fo nd.The Gen.
d m(old d om)
for d or m is not nfreq ent.In the Dat.and Abl.,
d o
is fo nd in inscriptions,and for ambob s occasionally
ambis.
In the Acc.Pl.masc.,
d o and ambo for d os and ambos are q ite common in early Latin,and also
in classical times,b t the better forms are
d os,ambos.
3.Q attor is fo nd for q att or occasionally in inscriptions,and in early poetry
q att or was sometimes scanned as a dissyllable.
4.In inscriptions the forms
meilia and millia
are also fo nd.
5.In regard to spelling of the Ordinals we find in early Latin
q inct s as well as q int s;
sept m s and dec m s
reg larly,and often the endings -ensim s and -ens m s in Ordinals from vicesim s
on.
PRONOUNS.
99.Prono ns point o t witho t describing.
NOTE.The prono n is not a word sed instead of a no n.The no n says too m ch,for
all no ns(proper as well as common) are originally descriptive;the prono n simp
ly points o t.The no n says too little,beca se it cannot express person,as ego,
I,t ,tho ;it cannot express local app rtenance,as hic,this(here),ille,that(there
).
A.PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
100.I.Personal Prono ns of the First Person.
SUBSTANTIVE. POSSESSIVE.
SG.-N.ego, I,
G. mei, of me, me s,-a,- m,mine or my.
D. mihi, to,for me,
Ac.me, me,
Ab.me, from,with,by me.
PL.- N.nos, we.
G.nostri. of s.
nostr m, noster,nostra,nostr m,o r or o rs.
D.nobis, to,for s.
Ac.nos, s,
Ab.nobis, from,with,by s.
REMARKS.I.The Voc.Sing.masc.of me s is
mi,
except when me s is sed with a s bstantive which does not change its form in th
e Voc.; th s,
me s ocell s(PLAUT.; possibly,however,appositional),b t mi anime.
2.Nostr m in the Gen.Pl.is the form for the Partitive Genitive.
NOTES.1.Early Latin shows the following : SG.,N.ego;G.mis;D.mi,mihei (inscr.);mi
he(inscr.);Ac.med,meme;Ab.med(meme is do btf l);Pl.,N.Ac. enos(in Carmen Arvale
only);G.nostror m,nostrar m(for nostr m);D.Ab. nobeis(inscr.).
2.In late Latin
mi also serves for the Voc.Sing.fem,and Voc.Pl.masc.
Me m,nostr m,in the Gen.Pl.of the Possessives,are not nfreq ent in earl
y Latin.
3.The forms of me s,of t i and t os,of s i and s os,very freq ently s ffer Syni
esis(727) in early Latin.
4.On the combination of these prono ns with -met and -pte see 103,N.2,3.
[56 PRONOUNS]
101.II.Personal Prono ns of the Second Person.
SUBSTANTIVE. POSSESSIVE.
SG.N.V. t , tho ,
G. t i, of thee,
D. tibi, to,for thee, t s(t os),-a,- m(t om),thy or thine.
Ac. te, thee,
Ab. te, from,with,by thee.
PL.N.vos, ye or yo ,
G.vestri, of yo ,
vestmm, vester(archaic voster),vestra,vestr m,
D.vobis, to,for yo , yo r or yo rs.
Ac.vos, yo ,
Ab.vobis, from,with,by yo .
NOTES.1.Early forms are : G.tis;D.tibei(inscr.),tibe(inscr.);Ac.Ab.ted,
tete;PL.G.vostri,vostror m,-ar m.
2.Vestr m is for the Partitive Genitive.
3.T om and vostrom in the Gen.PL of the Possessives are rare and confined
to early Latin.
4.On Syniesis see 100,N.3.On combination with -met or -pte see 102,N.2,3.
III.Personal Prono ns of the Third Person.
102.The original personal prono n of the third person, together with its possess
ive,is sed only as a reflexive in Latin,and therefore lacks a Nominative.Its pl
ace is taken in the obliq e cases by the Determinative is(103).
DETERMINATIVE.
SUBSTANTIVE. POSSESSIVE.
SG.N.[is,ea,id], he,she,it, s pplied by the Genitive.
G. ei s, of him, ei s,his,hers,its.
etc.
PL.N.[ei,ii,i;eae,ea], they,
G. eor m,ear m,eor m, of them, eor m,ear m,eor m,their or theirs,
etc.
REFLEXIVE.
SUBSTANTIVE. POSSESSIVE.
SG.-N.--
G. s i, of him,her,it(self), s s(s os),-a,- m(s om),his,
D. sibi, to,for,him(self),her(self), her(s),its(own).
Ac.se,sese, him(self),her(self),
Ab.se,sese, from,with,by him(self).
PL.N.
G. s i,of them(selves), s s(s os),-a,- m(s om),their
D. sibi,to,for them(selves), (own),theirs.
Ac.se,sese,them(selves),
Ab.se,sese,from,with,by them(selves).
[PRONOUNS.57]
NOTES.1.Inscriptions show sibei.The se of sese in classical prose is reg lated
mainly by artistic reasons.S om in Gen.Pl.from s s is rare and early.
2.The enclitic -met may be added to all the forms of ego(except nostr m),to all
the forms of t (except t and vestr m),to sibi,se,and some forms of s s;
egomet,I myself.
Instead of t met,
t te
is fo nd;from which early poets formed occasionally
t temet,t timet.
Met is also occasionally appended to forms of me s (early) and t s(late).
8.The enclitic -pte is joined very rarely to forms of the Personal Prono n(mepte
, PL.,Men.1059);more often to the Abl.Sing,of the Possessives;it is especially c
ommon with s o;
s opte ingenio,by his own geni s.
4.From noster and vester and also from c i s,whose ? are formed the Gentile adje
ctives of one ending :
nostras,of o r co ntry;
vestras,of yo r co ntry;
c ias, of whose co ntry ?
G.nostratis,vestratis,c iatis.
103. B.DETERMINATIVE PRONOUNS.
1.is,he,that.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
N.is, ea, id, ii,ei,i, eae, ea,
G.ei s, ei s, ei s, eor m, ear m, eor m,
D.ei, ei, ei, iis,eis,is,
Ac.e m, eam, id, eos, eas, ea,
Ab.eo, ea, eo. iis,eis,is.
NOTE.
The following variations in the forms are fo nd :
N.it for id(post-cl.);
G.eii s(inscr.),ei s(early poetry);
D.eiei(inscr.),ei,ei(early poetry),eae (f .);
Ac.em,im(early),for e m;
PL N.eis,eeis,ieis,iei(early and rare),for ei; the s al classical form is ii;
G.e m(inscr.) for eor m;
D.eieis,eeis,ieis(inscr.),ib s(early poetry and rare);the s al classical form i
s iis.
The early forms s m, sam,sos,sas,for e m,eam,eos,eas,are cited by FESTUS.
Acc.and Abl.Sing,and Gen.PL often s ffer Syniesis in early poetry.
2.Idem(is + dem),the same.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
¥N.idem, eadem, idem, idem,eidem,iidem, eaedem, eadem,
¥G.ei sdem, ei sdem,ei sdem, eor ndem, ear ndem, eor ndem,
D.eidem, eidem, eidem, isdem,eisdem,iisdem,
Ac.e ndem, eandem, idem, eosdem, easdem, eadem,
Abl.eodem, eadem, eodem, isdem,eisdem,iisdem.
NOTE.Variations in form : N.eidem,isdem(inscr.,early) for idem;D.idem (inscr.) f
or eidem; PL N.idem(more s al in poetry),eisdem,isdem(inscr.); D.Ab.iisdem(rare
),eisdem( ncommon in classical prose).Syniesis is common.
3.ipse(perhaps is + pse),he,self.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
N. ipse, ipsa, ips m, ipsi, ipsae, ipsa,
G. ipsi s, ipsi s, ipsi s, ipsor m, ipsar m, ipsor m.
D. ipsi, ipsi, ipsi, ipsis, ipsis, ipsis,
Ac.ips m, ipsam, ips m, ipsos, ipsas, ipsa,
Ab.ipso, ipsa. ipso. ipsis, ipsis, ipsis.
[58 PRONOUNS.]
NOTES.1.In the earlier time the first part of ipse was also declined,th s : N. e
apse;Ac.e mpse,eampse;Ab.eopse,eapse. Other forms are do btf l.
2.For ipse the form
ips s
was very commonly employed in early Latin,b t fades o t with TERENCE,and later i
s only sporadic.
3.Inflectional variations are : D.ipso,ipsae(late);PL N.ipsei(inscr.).The few ot
her forms are ncertain.Ipsi s is dissyllabic twice in TERENCE.
4.PLAUTUS shows ipsissim s(comp.Gr.a totatos),and in late Latin ipsim s and ipsi
ma are fo nd.A post-Ciceronian colloq ialism was isse,issa.
5.Ipse combines with -met : ipsemet and ipsimet(N.PL),both rare.
104. C.DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
I.Demonstrative Prono n for the First Person.
hic,this.
SG.N. hic, haec, hoc, PL.hi, hae, haec,these,
G. h i s, h i s, h i s, hor m, har m hor m,
D. h ic, h ic, h ic, his, his, his,
Ac. h nc, hanc, hoc, hos, has, haec,
Abl. hoc, hac, hoc. his, his, his.
NOTES.1.The f ll forms of hic in -ce are still fo nd in limited n mbers in early
Latin;
G. hoi sce(in the phrase h i sce modi,the form is common in the cl
assical period and later);
D. hoice(inscr.);
PL N. heisce,hisce(not ncommon);
G. hor nce(rare);
D.,Ab.hisce(in PLAUT.and TER. s ally before vowels);
Ac. hosce,hasce(not ncommon;occasionally in Cic.).
2.Other variations in form are :
G. h i s and hūīūs(in early poetry for metrical reasons);
D. hae(rare and early);
Ac. honc;
PL N. hei,heis for hi,
¥¥ haec for hae(hi PLAUT.and TER.reg larly before vowels or h,occasionally
before consonants;occasionally also in classical times and later);
G.hor nc,har nc(early).
PL N.hic for hi and D.Ab.hib s for his are do btf l.
3.Hic combines with -ne.Us ally -ne was appended to
hice,etc.,and the e weakened to i.
Sometimes -ne is added directly to the reg lar forms.The examples are freq ent i
n early Latin,b t occ r also in Cic.and later writers :
hicine,haecine,hocine,h icine,h ncine,hancine,hocine,hacine,haecine(N.PL
fem.), haecine(N.PL ne t.),hiscine,hoscine,hascine;
also
hicne,haecne,hocne,h i sne,h ncne,hancne,hocne,hacne,haecne,hosne,hasne.
II.Demonstrative Prono n for the Second Person.
iste,that.
SG,.N. iste, ista, ist d, PL. isti, istae, ista,
G. isti s, isti s, isti s, istor m, istar m,
istor m,
D. isti, isti, isti, istis, istis, istis,
Ac. ist m, istam, ist d, istos, istas, ista,
Abl. isto, ista, isto. istis, istis, istis.
NOTES.1.The Dat.Sing,shows isto in late and istae in early Latin.
2.iste combines with -ce.
In a very few cases(three times in early,once in late Latin) this -ce is retain
ed nchanged,b t s ally it is shortened to -c.
The following forms occ r,all except
"ist c"(more common than ist d in classical Latin)
and
"istaec"(ne ter,occasionally in Cic.,Ep.and later),being wholly confined
to early and late Latin.
[PRONOUNS.59]
Strengthened Interrogatives.
S bstantive,q isnam ? who,pray ? q idnam ? what,pray ?
ecq is ? is there any one who ? ecq id ?
Adjective, q inam ? q aenam ? q odnam ? which,pray ?
ecq i? ecq a?(ecq ae)? ecq od?
REMARK.In the poets q i is sometimes fo nd as a s bstantive for q is in independ
ent sentences.In dependent sentences the se always fl ct ates.A difference in m
eaning can hardly be made other than that q i is generally sed in m ch the same
sense as q alis.On the other hand,q is is often sed as an adjective for q i; s
ally,however,the s bstantive which follows is best looked pon as in apposition
.In the classical period q i is the normal form for the adjective in dependent q
estions.
NOTES.1.Inscriptions show here and there
q it and q ot for q id and q od.
Q id is sometimes sed for q od,b t s ally in the phrase
q id nomen tibi est
and only in early Latin.Sometimes q ae seems to be sed as a s bstantive,b t ano
ther explanation is always possible.
2.In the obliq e cases the same variations occ r as in the obliq e cases of the
relative.The Abl.
q i means how ?
3.For the declension of ter see 76.
4.The possessive
c i s(q oi s),-a,- m
was sed both as relative and as interrogative.It is freq ent in PLAUT.and TER.,
b t rare in other a thors.
[PRONOUNS.61]
CORRELATIVES.
109.I.CORRELATIVE PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.
INTERROGATIVES. DEMONSTRATIVES. RELATIVES.
q is ? who ? is, that, q i,
who.
q alis ? of what kind ? talis, s ch(of that kind) q alis, as(of wh
ich kind).
q ant s ? how m ch ? tant s, so m ch, q ant s,
as m ch.
q ot ? how many ? tot, so many, q ot,
as many.
[CORRELATIVE.63]
110.II.CORRELATIVE PRONOMINAL ADVERBS.
1.Pronominal adverbs of place.
bi ? where ? ibi, there.
bi, where.
q a ? where, hic,hae, here,this way. q a,wher
e,which
which way ? way.
istic,istac, there,that way.
illic,illac, there,yonder way.
nde ? whence ? inde, thence. nde,whe
nce.
hinc, hence.
istinc, thence.
illinc, thence,from yonder.
q o? whither ? eo, thither.
q o,whither.
h c,(hoc,) hither.
ist c,(istoc,) thither.
ill c,(illoc,) thither,yonder.
2.Pronominal adverbs of time.
q ando ? when ? t m, then. q ando, when.
t nc,at that time, q om,c m.
n nc, now.
q otiens ? how often ? totiens, so often. q otiens,as often as.
3.Pronominal adverbs of manner.
q omodo ? q i ? how ? ita,sic, so,th s. t, ti,a
s.
q am ? how m ch ? tam, so m ch.
q am,as.
111. III.COMPOUNDS OF THE RELATIVE FORMS.
1.The relative prono ns become indefinite by prefixing ali-:
aliq ant s,somewhat great;
aliq ot,several,some;
alic bi,somewhere;
alic nde,from somewhere;
aliq ando,at some time.
2.The simple relatives become niversal
by do bling themselves,or by s ffixing -c nq e(-c mq e),sometimes -q e :
q ant sc nq e, however great;
q alisc nq e, of whatever kind;
q otq ot, however many;
bic nq e, wheresoever;
q andoc nq e,q andoq e,whenever;
q otiesc nq e, however often;
t t, in whatever way;
tc nqoe, howsoever;
q amq am, however,altho gh.
3.Many of the relatives are f rther compo nded with -vis or -libet :
q ant slibet,
q ant svis, as great as yo please;
bivis, where yo will;
q amvis, as yo please,tho gh.
[64 THE VERB.]
THE VERB.
112.The inflection given to the verbal stem is called Conj gation,and expresses
:
1.Person and N mber;
2.Voice Active or Passive.
The Active Voice denotes that the action proceeds from the s bject :
amo,I love.
The Passive Voice denotes that the s bject receives the action of the Verb :
amor,I am loved.
3.Tense Present,Imperfect,F t re,Perfect,Pl perfect,F t re Perfect.
The Present, amo,I love;
F t re, amabo,I shall love;
P re Perfect, amavi,I have loved;
F t re Perfect, amavero, I shall have loved,
are called Principal Tenses.
The Imperfect, amabam,I was loving;
Historical Perfect, amavi,I loved;
Pl perfect, amaveram,I had loved,
are called Historical Tenses.
REMARK.The P re and Historical Perfects are identical in form.
4.Mood Indicative,S bj nctive,Imperative.
The Indicative Mood is the mood of the fact :
amo,I love.
The S bj nctive Mood is the mood of the idea :
amem, may I love,I may love;
amet, may he love,he may love ;
si amet,if he sho ld love.
The Imperative Mood is the mood of command :
ama,love tho !
For f rther distinctions see Syntax.
5.These forms belong to the Finite Verb.O tside of the Finite Verb,and akin to
the no n,are the verbal forms called
Infinitive,S pine,Participle,Ger nd.
The Infinitive active and the S pine are related to the no n,the former being or
iginally a Dative or Locative and the S pine showing two cases,Acc sative and Ab
lative.
No adeq ate niform translation can be given,b t for the general meaning see pa
radigms.
113.A large n mber of Verbs have the passive form b t are active in meaning :
[THE VERB.65]
hortor,I exhort.
These are called deponent(from deponere,to lay aside).
114.The Inflection of the Finite Verb is effected by the addition of personal e
ndings to the verb stems.
1.The personal endings are mostly pronominal forms,which serve to indicate not o
nly person,b t also n mber and voice.They are :
ACTIVE.PASSIVE.
SG. 1.-m(or a vowel,coalescing with -r.
the characteristic ending);Pf .i,
2.-s; Pf.-s-ti; Impv.-to(d) or want -ris or -re; Impv.-re or -tor.
ing,
3.-t;Impv.to(d), -t r;Impv.-tor.
PL. 1.-m s, -m r.
2.-tis;Pf .-s-tis-;Impv.-te or -tote, -mini.
3.-nt;Pf .er nt or ere;Impv.-nto(d), -nt r;Impv.-ntor.
2.The personal endings are added directly to the stem in the Present Indicative
and Imperative only,except in the third conj gation,in some forms of the F t re
Indicative.In the other tenses certain modifications occ r in the stem,or tens
e signs are employed :
(a) In the Present S bj nctive final a of .the stem is changed to ē(e); final e to
ea(ea);final i to ia(ia);final e to ā(a).In the F t re Indicative final e is chan
ged to a or ē(e);final i to ia(iē,ie).
(b) The tense signs are : for the Imperfect Indicative,bā(ba);for the Imperfect S
bj nctive,rē(re);for the F t re Indicative in a and e verbs bi(b,b );for the Perfe
ct Indicative,ī(i);for the Perfect S bj nctive,-eri;for the Pl perfect Indicative,
erā(era);for the Pl perfect S bj nctive,issē(isse);for the F t re Perfect Indicative
,eri(er).
3.The stem itself is vario sly modified;either by change of vowel or by addition
of s ffixes,and appears in the following forms :
(a) The Present stem;being the stem of the Present,Imperfect,and F t re tenses.T
hese forms are called the Present System.
(b) The Perfect stem;being the stem of the Perfect,Pl perfect,and F t re Perfect
tenses.These forms are called the Perfect System.
(c) The S pine* stem;being the stem of the F t re Active and Perfect Passive Par
ticiples and of the S pine.These forms are called the S pine System,
NOTE.For details as to the formation of these stems,see 132 ff.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
* This designation is retained beca se it is an established termin s technic s;a
s a matter of fact the S pine stem is not the stem of the Participles.
[66 THE VERB.]
115.1.The Perfect,Pl perfect,and F t re Perfect tenses in the Passive are formed
by the combination of the Perfect Passive Participle with forms of the verb s m
,I am.
2.The F t re Passive Infinitive is formed by the combination of the S pine with
the Present Passive Infinitive of
eo,I go.
3.The infinite parts of the verb are formed by the addition of the following end
ings to the stems :
ACTIVE. PASSIVE.
INFINITIVE. Pr.-re, ri,i
Pf.-isse, -t m(-tam,-t m),esse
F t.-t r m(-a,-am),esse, -t m iri.
PARTICIPLES.Pr.-ns (G.-ntis),
Pf.- -t s(-ta,-t m).
F t.-t r s(-a,- m).
GERUND. GERUNDIVE. SUPINE.
-ndi(-do,-d m,-do). -nd s(-a,- m). -t m;-t
116. THE VERB s m,I am.
(Pres.stem es-,Perf.stem f -)
PRESENT.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
SG.1.s m, I am, sim, I be,
2.es, tho art, sis, tho be,
3.est, he,she,it is. sit, he,she,it be.
PL.1.s m s, we are, sim s, we be,
2.estis, yo are, ¥sitis, yo be,
3.s nt, they are. sint, they be.
IMPERFECT.
SG.1.eram, I was, essem, I were (forem)
2.eras, tho wast, esses, tho wert (fores)
3.erat, he was. esset, he were (foret)
PL.1.eram s, we were, essem s,we were,
2.eratis, yo were, essetis,yo were,
3.erant, they were, essent, they were (forent)
FUTURE,
SG.1.ero, ¥¥I shall be,
2.eris, tho wilt be,
3.erit, he will be.
PL.1.erim s, we shall be,
2.eritis, yo will be,
3.er nt, they mil be.
[THE VERB.67]
PERFECT.
SG.1.f i, ¥ I have been,I f erim,I have,may have,been,
was,
2.f isti, tho hast been, f eris,tho have,mayest have,
tho wast, been,
3.f it, he has been,he f erit,he have,may have,been.
was.
PL.1.f im s, we have been,we f erim s,we have,may have,been,
were,
2.f istis, yo have been, f eritis,yo have,may have,
yo were, been,
3.f er nt,f ere,they have f erint,they have,may have,
been,they were. been.
PLUPERFECT.
SG. 1.f eram, I had been, f issem, I had,might have,been,
2.f eras, tho hadst been, f isses, tho hadst,mightst have,
3.f erat, he had been. f isset, he had,might have,been.
PL. 1.f eram s,we had been, f issem s, we had,might have,been,
2.f eratis,yo had been, f issetis, yo had,might have,been,
3.f erant, they had been. f issent, they had,might have,been.
FUTURE PERFECT.
SG. 1.f ero, I shall have been,
2.f eris, tho wilt have been,
3.f erit, he will have been.
PL. 1.f erim s, we shall have been,
2.f eritis, yo will have been,
3.f erint, they will have been.
IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE.
PRESENT. FUTURE. PRES.esse,to be,
SG. 1. PERF.f isse,to have been,
2.es,be tho , esto,tho shalt be, FUT.f t r m(-am,- m) esse
3, esto,he shall be. (fore),to be abo t to
be.
PL. 1., PARTICIPLE.
2.este,be ye, estote,yo shall be,
3-, s nto,they shall be. FUT.f t r s,-a,- m,abo t
to be.
[68 THE VERB.]
NOTES.1.Early forms are :
(a) In the Pres.Ind.es for es;reg larly in PLAUTUS and TERENCE,b t the q antity
of the vowel is disp ted.
(b) In the Pres.S bjv.
siem,sies,siet,sient;
reg lar in inscriptions ntil the first cent ry B.C.and common in early poets ch
iefly for metrical reasons;side by side with this occ r
f am,f as,f at,f ant
(also LUCR,iv.,637,VERG.x.,108,LIV. xxv.,12,6),which are taken p again by very
late poete.
Sit
is also common.
(c) In the Impf .S bjv.the forms
forem,fores,foret,forent
were probably in very early times eq ivalent to f t r s essem,etc.; and occasion
ally this force seems to be still present in the later period,especially in SALL
UST; s ally,however,they are eq ivalent to
essem,esses,esset,essent;
in the Inf.
fore
always remained the eq ivalent of fat r m esse.
(d) In all the Perfect forms the original length was f -,which is still fo nd oc
casionally in early Latin.
(e) Early and principally legal are the rare forms
escit,escet,esit,for erit;
-essint for er nt.
2.The Pres.Part,ie fo nd only in the compo nds;
ab-sens,absent,and praesens,present.
117. COMPOUNDS OF s m,I am.
abs m, I am away,absent. Pf. obs m, I am against,I h rt.Pf .
(abf i) af i. obf i or off i,
ads m, I am present.Pf. aff i. poss m, I am able.
des m, I am wanting. praes m,I am over,I s perintend.
ins m, I am in. pros m, I am for,I profit.
inters m, I am between. s bs m, I am nd
er.No Pf .
s pers m
,I am,or remain,over.
These are all inflected like s m;b t pros m and poss m req ire special treatment
by reason of their composition.
Pros m,I profit.
118.In the forms of pros m,prod is sed before vowels.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT. pros m,prodes,prodest, prosim,
pros m s,prodestis,pros nt,
IMPERFECT. proderam,
prodessem,
FUTURE. prodero,
PERFECT. prof i,
prof erim,
PLUPERFECT. prof eram, prof iss
em.
F t.PERF. prof ero,
INFINITIVE.PRES,prodesse;FUT.prof t r m esse(fore);PERF.prof isse.
Poss m,I am able,I can.
119.Poss m is compo nded of pot(potis,pote) and s m; t becomes s before s;in the
perfect forms,f(potf i) is lost.
[THE VERB.69]
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
SG. 1.poss m,I am able,can, possim,I be able.
2.potes, possis,
3.potest. possit.
PL. 1.poss m s, possim s,
2.potestis, possitis,
3.poss nt. possint.
IMPERFECT.
SG.1.poteram,I was able,co ld, possem,I were,might be,able.
2.poteras, posses,
3.poterat. posset.
PL.1.poteram s, possem s,
2.poteratis, possetis,
3.poterant. possent.
FUTURE.
SG. 1.potero,I shall be able.
2.poteris,
3.poterit.
PL. 1.poterim s,
2.poteritis,
3.poter nt.
PERFECT.
SG.1.pot i,I have been able, pot erim,I have,may have,been able.
2.pot isti, pot eris,
3.pot it. pot erit.
PL. 1.pot im s, pot erim s,
2.pot istis, pot eritis,
3.pot er nt. pot erint.
PLUPERFECT .
SG. 1.pot eram,I had been able. pot issem, I had,might have,been able.
2.pot eras, pot isses,
3.pot erat. pot isset.
PL. 1.pot eram s, pot issem s,
2.pot eratis, pot issetis,
3.pot erant. pot issent.
[70 REGULAR VERBS.]
FUTURE PERFECT.
SG.1.pot ero,I shall have been PL.1.pot erim s,
2.pot eris, [able, 2.pot eritis,
3.pot erit. 3.pot erint.
INFINITIVE.PRES.,posse,to be able.PERF.,pot isse,to have been able.
NOTES.1.In the early Latin the f sion of the two parts of the compo nd has not f
lly taken place;we accordingly find not nfreq ently :
potis s m,
potis es,
potis est,
potis s nt;
potis siem,
potis sis,
potis sit,
potis sint;
potis erat;
pote f isset;
and sometimes(even in classical and A g stan poete)
potis and pote alone,
the cop la being omitted.Partial f sion is seen in Inf.
potesse,potisse;S bjv. potisit(inscr.),potisset.
2.Occasional passive forms(followed by a passive infinitive) are fo nd in early
Latin(not in PLAUT.or TER.) and LUCRETIUS :
potest r,
posset r,
possit r,
poterat r.
Poterint for poter nt is do btf l.
PERFECT.
Have loved,did love. Have,may have,loved,
SG. 1.amavi, amaverim,
2.amavisti, amaveris,
3.amavit, amaverit.
PL. 1.amavim s, amaverim s,
2.amavistis, amaveritis,
3.amaver nt(amere), amaverint.
[REGULAR VERBS.73]
First Conj gation.
ACTIVE.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCT
IVE.
PLUPERFECT.
Had loved. Had,might have,loved.
SG.1.amaveram, amavissem,
2.amaveras, amavisses,
3.amaverat, amavisset.
PL.1.amaveram s, amavissem s,
2.amaveratis, amavissetis,
3.amaverant, amavissent.
FUTURE PERFECT.
Shall have loved.
SG.1.amavero,
2.amaveris,
3.amaverit.
PL.1.amaverim s,
2.amaveritis,
3.amaverint.
IMPERATIVE.
PRESENT. FUTURE.
SG.1.,,
2,ama, love tho , amato, tho shalt love,
3.. amato, he shall love.
PL.1.,
2.amate,love ye, amatote, ye shall love.
3., amanto, they shall love.
INFNITIVE.
PRES.amare,to love.
PERF.amavisse,to have loved.
FUT.amat r m,am, m esse,to be abo t to love.
GERUND. SUPINE.
N.[amare],loving.
G.amandi,of loving.
D.amando,to loving.
Ac.[amare], Ac.amat m,to love.
(ad) amand m, loving,to love.
Ab.amando, by loving. Ab.amat ,to love,in the loving.
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT.N.amans(G.amantis),loving.
FUTURE.amat r s,a, m,being abo t to love.
[74 REGULAR VERBS.]
First Conj gation.
PASSIVE.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCT
IVE.
PRESENT.
Am loved. Be,may be,loved.
SG.1.amor amer
2.amaris(amare) ameris(amere)
3.amat r amet r.
PL.I.amam r amem r
2.amamini amemini
3.amant r ament r.
IMPERFECT.
Was loved. Were,might be,lo
ved.
SG.1.amabar amarer
2.amabaris(amabare) amareris(amarere)
3.amabat r amaret r.
PL.1.amabam r amarem r
2.amabamini amaremini
3.amabant r amarent r
FUTURE.
Shall be loved.
SG.1.amabor
2.amaberis(amabare)
3.amabit r.
PL.1.amabim r
2.amabimini
3.amab nt r.
PERFECT.
Have been loved,was loved.¥¥¥¥Have,may have,been loved.
SG.1.amat s,a, m s m amat s,a, m sim
2. es sis
3 est sit
PL.1.amati,ae,a s m s amati,ae,a sim s
2. estis sitis
3. s nt sint.
[REGULAR VERBS.75]
First Conj gation.
PASSIVE.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
PLUPERFECT.
Had been loved. Had,might have,been loved.
SG. 1.amat s,a,am eram amat s,a,am essem
2. eras esses
3. erat esset
PL.1.amati,ae,a eram s amati,ae,a essemas
2. eratis essetis
3. erant. esseiit.
FUTURE PERFECT.
Shall have been loved.
SG.1.amat s,a, m ero
2. eris
3. erit.
PL.1.amati,ae,a erimas
2. eritis
3. erant.
IMPERATIVE.
PRESENT. FUTURE.
Sg.1.,,
2.amare,be tho loved. amator,tho shall be loved,
3., amator,he shall be loved.
PL.1.,,
2.amamini,be ye loved.,
3.. amantor,they shall be loved.
INFINITIVE.
PRES.amari,to be loved.
PERF.amat m,am,am esse,to have been loved.
FUT.amat m iri,to be abo t to be loved.
FUT.PF.amat m,am,am fore.
PARTICIPLE. GERUNDIVE.
PERF,amat s,a,am,loved. amand s,a,am,(one) to be loved.
[76 REGULAR VERBS.]
123. Second Conj gation.
CONJUGATION OF delere,to destroy(blot o t).
PRIN.PARTS : deleo,delere,delevi,delet m.
ACTIVE. PASSIVE.
INDIC. SUBJV INDIC. SUBJV.
PRSENT.
SG.deleo, deleam, deleor,
delear,
deles, deleas, deleris(delere), delearis(deleare),
delet, deleat, delet r, deleat r,
PL,delem s, deleam s, delem r, deleam r,
deletis, deleatis, delemini, deleamini,
delent. deleant. delent r. deleant r.
IMPERFECT.
SG. delebam, delerem, delebar,
delerer,
delebas, deleres, delebaris(delebare), delereris(delere
re),
delebat, deleret, delebat r, deleret r,
PL. delebam s, delerem s, delebam r, delerem r,
delebatis, deleretis, delebamini, deleremini,
delebant. delerent. delebant r, delerent r.
FUTURE.
SG. delebo, delebor,
delebis, deleberis(delebere),
delebit, delebit r,
PL. delebim s, delebim r,
delebitis, delebimini,
deleb nt. deleb nt r.
PERFECT.
SG.delevi, deleverim, delet s s m, delet
s sim,
delevisti, deleveris, es, sis
delevit, deleverit, est, sit. PL.
delevim s, deleverim s, deleti s m s, deleti sim s,
delevistis, deleveritis, estis, sitis,
delever nt(delevere) deleverint s nt, sint.
[REGULAR VERBS.77]
Second Conj gation.
ACTIVE.
PASSIVE.
INDIC. SUBJV. INDIC. SUBJV.
PLUPERFECT.
SG.deleveram, delevissem, delet s eram, delet s essem,
deleveras, delevisses, eras, esses,
deleverat, delevisset. erat, esset.
PL.deleveram s, delevissem s, deleti eram s, deleti essem s,
deleveratis, delevissetis, eratis, essetis,
deleverant, delevissent. erant, essent.
FUTURE PERFECT.
SG.delevero, delet s ero,
deleveris, eris,
deleverit, erit.
PL.deleverim s, deleti erim s,
deleveritis, eritis,
deleverint, er nt.
IMPERATIVE.
PRESENT. FUTURE.¥ PRESENT. FUTURE.
SG.
dele, deleto, delere, deletor,
deleto, deletor.
PL.
delete, deletote, delemini,
delento. delentor.
INFINITIVE.
PRES.delere. PRES. deleri.
PERF.delevisse. PERF. delet m,am, m esse.
FUT. delet r m,am, m esse. FUT. delet m iri.
FUT.PF. delet m,am, m fore.
GERUND. SUPINE. PARTICIPLES.
N.[delere], PRES.N.delens;G.delentis.
G.delendi. FUT. delet r s,a, m.
D.delendo. PERF. delet s,a, m.
Ac.[delere] Ac.delet m.
(ad) delend m. GERUNDIVE,
Ab.delendo. Ab.delet . delend s,a, m.
[78 REGULAR VERBS.]
124.Like delere,to destroy,
are conj gated only,
nere,to spin,
flere,to weep,
and the compo nds of
-plere,fill,
and
-olere grow (the latter with S pine in it m); also
ciere,to stir p.See 13 7(b).
All other verbs of the Second Conj gation retain the characteristic e in the Pre
sent System,b t drop it in the Perfect System, changing vi to i,and weaken it t
o i in the S pine System.
Second Conj gation.
CONJUGATION OF monere,to remind.
PRIN.PARTS : moneo,monere,mon i,monit m.
ACTIVE. PASSIVE.
INDIC. SUBJV. INDIC. SUBJV.
PRESENT.
SG. moneo, moneam, moneor, monear,
mones, moneas, moneris(monere), monearis(moneare
),
monet, moneat, monet r, moneat r,
PL. monem s, moneam s, monem r, moneam r,
monetis, moneatis, monemini, moneamini,
monent. moneant. monent r. moneant r.
IMPERFECT.
SG .monebam, monerem, monebar, monerer,
monebas, moneres, monebaris(monebare), monereris(monerere),
monebat, moneret, monebat r, moneret r,
PL.monebam s, monerem s, monebam r, monerem r,
monebatis, moneretis, monebamini, moneremini,
monebant. monerent. monebant r. monerent r.
FUTURE.
SG.monebo, monebor,
monebis, moneberis(monebere),
monebit, monebit r,
PL monebim s, monebim r,
monebitis, monebimini,
moneb nt. monob nt r.
PERFECT.
SG.mon i, mon erim, monit s s m, monit s sim,
mon isti, mon eris, es, sis,
mon it, mon erit, est, sit,
PL.mon im s, mon erim s, moniti s m s, moniti sim s
mon istis, mon eritis, estis, sitis,
mon er nt(mon erere). mon erint. s nt. sint.
[REGULAR VERBS.79]
Second Conj gation.
ACTIVE.
PASSIVE.
INDIC. SUBJV. INDIC. SUBJV.
PLUPERFECT.
Sg.mon eram, mon issem, monit s eram. monit s essem,
mon eras, mon isses, eras, esses,
mon erat, mon isset. erat, esset, :
PL.mon eram s, mon issem s, moniti eram s, moniti essem s,
mon eratis, mon issetis, eratis, essetis,
mon erant. mon issent. erant. essent.
FUTURE PERFECT.
SG. mon ero, monit s ero,
mon eris, eris,
mon erit, erit,
PL. mon erim s, moniti erim s,
mon eritis, eritis,
mon erint. er nt.
IMPERATIVE.
PRESENT. FUTURE. PRESENT.
FUTURE.
SG.
mone, moneto, monere, monetor,
PL.
moneto, monetor,
monete, monetete, monemini,
monento. monentor.
INFINITIVE.
PRES.monere. PRES.moneri
PERF.mon isse. PERF.monit m,am, m esse.
FUT.monit r m,am, m esse. FUT. monit m iri.
FUT.PF.monit m,am, m fore.
GERUND. SUPINE. PARTICIPLES.
N.[monere]. PRES. N.monens; G.monentis.
G.monendi. FUT. monit r s,a, m.
D.monendo. PERF. monit s,a, m.
Ac.[monere] ¥Ac.monit m.
(ad) monend m. GERUNDIV
E,
Ab.monendo. ¥Ab.monit . monend s,a, m,
[80 REGULAR VERBS.]
125. Third Conj gation.
CONJUGATION OF emere,to b y.
PRIN.PARTS : emo,emere,emi,em(p)t m.
ACTIVE. PASSIVE.
INDIC. SUBJV.¥¥¥ INDIC. SUBJV.
PRESENT.
SG emo, emam, emor, emar,
emis, emas, emeris(emere), emaris(emare),
emit, emat, emit r, emat r,
PL.emim s, emam s, emim r, emam r,
emitis, ematis, emimini. emamini,
em nt. emant. em nt r. emant r.
IMPERFECT.
SG.emebam, emerem. emebar, emerer,
emebas, emeres, emebaris(emebare), emereris(emerere),
emebat, emeret, emebat r, emeret r.
PL.emebam s, emerem s, emebam r, emerem r,
emebatis, emeretis, emebamini, emeremini,
emebant. emerent. emebant r. emerent r,
FUTURE.
SG.emam, emar,
emes, emeris(emere)(e=ē),
emet, emet r,
PL.emem s, emem r,
emetis, ememini,
ement ement r.
PERFECT.
SG.emi, emerim, empt s s m. empt s sim,
emisti, emeris, es, sis,
emit, emerit, est, sit,
PL.emim s, emerim s, empti s m s. empti sim s,
emistis, emeritis, estis. sitis.
emer nt(emere) emerint. sont. sint.
[REGULAR VERBS.81]
FUTURE.
SG.capiam, capiar,
capies, capiaris(capiare),
capiet, capiet r
PL.capiem s, capiem r
capietis, capiemini,
capient. capient r.
IMPERATIVE.
PRES. F t. PRES. FUT.
SG.cape capito, capere, capitor,
capito, capitor,
capite. capitote, capimini.
capi nto. capi ntor.
INFINITIVE
PRES.capere. capi.
PARTICIPLE. GERUND. GERUNDIVE.
PRES.capiens. G.capiendi. capiend s,a,t n.
[REGULAR VERBS.83]
127. Fo rth Conj gation.
CONJUGATION OF a dire,to hear.
PRIN.PARTS : a dio,a dire,a divi,a dit m.
ACTIVE. PASSIVE.
INDIC. SUBJV. INDIC. SUBJV.
PRESENT.
SG. a dio, a diam, a dior, a diar,
a dis, a dias, a diris(a dire), a diaris(a diare),
a dit, a diat, a dit r, a diat r,
PL. a dim s, a diam s, a dim r, a diam r,
a ditis, a diatis, a dimini, a diamini,
a di nt. a diant. a di nt r. a diant r.
IMPERFECT.
SG. a diebam, a direm, a diebar, a direr,
a diebas, a dires, a diebaris(a diebare), a direris(a direre),
a diebat, a diret, a diebat r, a diret r,
PL. a diebam s, a direm s, a diebam r, a direm r,
a diebatis, a diretis, a diobamini, a diremini,
a diebant. a dirent. a diebant r. a dirent r.
FUTURE.
SG. a diam, a diar,
a dies, a dieris(a diere),
a diet, a diet r,
PL. a diem s, a diem r,
a dietis, a diemini,
a dient. a dient r.
PERFECT.
SG. a divi, a diverim, a dit s s m, a dit s sim,
a divisti, a diveris, es, sis,
a divit, a diverit, est, sit,
PL. a divim s, a diverim s, a diti s m s, a diti sim s;
a divistis, a diveritis, estis, sitis,
a diver nt(a divere),a diverint. s nt. sint.
[84 REGULAR VERBS.]
Fo rth Conj gation.
ACTIVE.PASSIVE.
INDIC. SUBJV. INDIC. SUBJV.
PLUPERFECT.
SG. a diveram, a divissem, a dit s eram, a dit s essem,
a diveras, a divisses, eras, esses,
a diverat, a divisset, erat, esset,
PL. a diveram s, a divissem s, a diti eram s,a diti essem s
a diveratis, a divissetis, eratis, essetis,
a diverant, a divissent, erant, essent.
FUTURE PERPECT.
SG. a divero, a dit s ero,
a diveris, eris,
a diverit, erit,
PL. a diverim s, a diti erim s,
a diveritis, eritis,
a diverint. er nt.
IMPERATIVE.
PRESENT. FUTURE. PRESENT. FUTURE.
SG.
a di, a dito, a dire, a ditor,
a dito, a ditor,
PL.
a dite.; a ditote, a dimini.
a di nto, a di ntor.
INFINITIVE.
PRES.a dire. PRES.a diri.
PERF.a divisse. PERF.a dit m,am, m esse.
F t.a dit r m,am, m esse FUT.a dit m iri.
FUT.PF.a dit m,am, m fore.
GERUND. SUPINE. PARTICIPLES.
N.[a dire]. PRES. N.a diens,G.a dientis
G.a diendi. FUT. a dit r s,a, m.
D.a diendo. PERF. a dit s,a, m.
Ac.[a dire] Ac.a dit m.
(ad) a diend m.
Ab.a diendo. Ab.a dit . GERUNDIVE, a diend s,a, m.
[DEPONENT VERBS.85]
DEPONENT VERBS.
128.Deponent verbs have the passive form,b t are active in meaning.They have als
o the Present and F t re Active Participles,and the F t re Active Infinitive.Th
s a deponent verb alone can have a Present,F t re,and Perfect Participle,all wit
h active meaning.The Ger ndive,how ever,is passive in meaning as well as in form
.
The conj gation differs in no partic lar from that of the reg lar conj gation.
1.First Conj gation.
CONJUGATION OF hortari,to exhort.
PRIN.PARTS: hortor,hortari,hortat s s m.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCT
IVE.
PRESENT.
Exhort, Be exhorting,may exhort.
SG. hortor, horter,
hortaris(hortare), horteris(hortere),
hortat r, hortet r,
PL. hortam r, hortem r,
hortamini, hortemini,
hortant r. hortent r.
IMPERFECT.
Was exhorting. Were exhorting,might exhort.
SG. hortabar, hortarer,
hortabaris(hortabare), hortareris(hortarere),
hortabat r, hortaret r,
PL. hortabam r, hortarem r,
hortabamini, hortaremini,
hortabant r. hortarent r.
FUTURE. Shall exhort.
SG. hortabor,
hortaberis(hortabere),
hortabit r,
PL. hortabim r,
hortabimini,
hortab nt r.
[86 DEPONENT VERBS.]
PERFECT.
Have exhorted,exhorted. Have,may have,exhorted.
SG.hortat s,a, m s m, hortat s,a, m sim,
es, sis,
est, sit,
PL.hortati,ae,a s m s, hortati,ae,a sim s,
estis, sitis,
s nt. sint.
PLUPERFECT.
Had exhorted.Had, might have,exhorted.
SG.hortat s,a, m eram, hortat s,a, m essem,
eras, esses,
erat, esset,
PL.hortati,ae,a eram s, hortati,ae,a essem s,
eratis,
essetis,
erant. essen
t.
FUTURE PERFECT.
Shall have exhorted.
SG.hortat s,a, m ero,
eris,
erit,
PL.hortati,ae,a erim s,
eritis,
er nt.
IMPERATIVE.
PRESENT.
FUTURE.
SG.
hortare,exhort tho . hortator,tho shall exhort.
hortator,he shal
l exhort.
PL.
hortamini,exhort ye.
hortantor,they s
hall exhort.
INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLES.
PRES.hortari,to exhort. PRES.hortans,exhorting.
FUT.hortat r m,am, m esse, FUT.hortat r s,a, m,abo t
to be abo t to exhort.
to exhort.
PERF.hortat m,am, m esse,to PERF.hortat s,a, m,having
have exhorted.
exhorted.
F.P.hortat m,am, m fore. GERUNDIVE.
SUPINE. hortand s,a, m,[one] to
be
Ac.hortat m,to exhort,for ex- exhorted
.
horting. GERUND.
Ab.hortat ,to exhort,in the ex- G.hortandi,of exhorting.
horting.
[DEPONENT VERBS.87]
2.Second,Third,Fo rth Conj gations.
SYNOPSIS OF vereri,to fear; loq i,to speak; mentiri,to lie.
PRIN.PARTS : vereor,vereri,verit s s m; loq or,loq i,loc t s s m;
mentior,mentiri,mentit s s m.
INDICATIVE.
ii. iii.
iv.
PRES. vereor, loq or, mentior,
vereris(verere), loq eris(loq ere), mentiris(mentire
),
veret r loq it r mentit r
verem r loq im r mentim r
veremini loq imini
mentimini
verent r loq int r
menti nt r
IMPERF. verebar, loq obar, mentieba
r,
FUT. verebor, loq ar. mentiar,
PERF. verit s s m, loc t s s m, mentit s s m,
PLUPF. verit s eram, loc t s eram, mentit s eram,
FUT.PP. verit s ero, loc t s ero. mentit s ero,
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRES. verear, loq ar, mentiar,
verearis(vereare), loq aris(loq are) mentiaris(mentia
re)
etc. etc.
etc.
IMPERF.vererer, loq erer, mentirer
,
PERF. verit s sim, loc t s sim, mentit s sim,
PLUPF. verit s essem. loc t s essem. mentit s essem.
IMPERATIVE.
PRES. verere, loq ere, mentire,
FUT. veretor. loq itor. mentitor.
INFINITIVE.
PRES. vereri, loq i, mentiri,
FUT. verit r m esse, loc t r m esse, mentit r m esse,
PERF. verit m esse, loc t m esse, mentit m esse,
FUT.PP. verit m fore. loc t m fore. mentit m fore.
PARTICIPLES.
PRES. verens, loq ens, mentiens,
FUT. verit r s, loc t r s, mentit r s,
PERF verit s. loc t s. mentit s.
IMPERATIVE.
SG.2.fer, bear tho . ferto, tho shalt bear,
3 ferto, he shall bear,
PL.2.ferte, bear ye. fertote, ye shall bear,
3 fer nto, they shall bear.
INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLES.
PRES.ferre. PRES.ferens, bearing.
FUT.lat r m esse. FUT.lat r s.
PERF.t lisse.
GERUND, SUPINE,
ferendi,etc. lat m(t(o)lat m).
PASSIVE.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
I am borne. I be borne.
PRES.
SG.1.feror, PL. ferim r, SG.ferar, PL.feram r,
2.ferris, ferimini, feraris, feramini,
3.fert r, fer nt r. ferat r, ferant r.
IMPF. ferebar. ferrer.
FUT. ferar.
PERF. lat s s m. lat s sim.
PLUPF. lat s eram. lat s essem.
FUT.PF. lat s ero.
[118 IRREGULAR VERBS.]
IMPERATIVE.
SG. 2.ferre,be tho borne. fertor, tho shalt be borne
3. fertor, he shall be borne.
PL. 2.ferimini,be ye borne.
3. fer ntor, they shall be borne
INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.
PRES.ferri,to be borne. PERF.lat s,a, m,borne.
F t.lat m iri. GERUNDIVE.
PERF.lat m esse,to have been borne. ferend s.
COMPOUNDS.
affero, afferre, att li, allat m, to bear to.
a fero, a ferre, abst li, ablat m, to bear away.
confero,conferre, cont li. collat m, to collect.
differo,differre, dist li, dilat m, to p t off.
effero, efferre, ext li, elat m, to carry o t.
offero, offerre, obt li, oblat m, to offer.
NOTES.1.The Pf.t li was originally red plicated tet li.See 134,iii.,155. Traces
of this are seen in rett li.
2.S ffero,I ndergo,has the Pf.s stin i(s st li,s blat m,being appropriated to t
ollo).(155.)
5.edere,to eat.
172.In certain forms the endings beginning with s,t,and r are added directly to
the root(132);d before s(r) is dropped or assimilated(as ss),and before t become
s s.
PRIN.PARTS : edo,edere(esse),edi,es m.
ACTIVE.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
I eat. I be eating.
SG.1.edo, PL. edim s, SG. edam, PL. edam s,
2.edis,es, editis,estis, edas, edatis,
3.edit,est, ed nt. edat, edant.
IMPP.edebam, I ate. ederem,essem,I were eating
FUT.edam.
PBRF.edi. ederim.
PLUFF.ederam. edissem.
FUT.PF.edero.
[IRREGULAR VERRS.119]
IMPERATIVE.
SG.2.ede,es, eat tho . edito,esto, tho shalt eat.
3 edito,esto, he shall eat.
PL.2.edite,este, eat ye. editote,estote, ye shall eat.
3 ed nto, they shall eat
INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.
PRES.edere,esse,to eat. PRES.(edens).
FUT.es r m esse. FUT. es r s.
PERF.edisse.
GERUND. SUPINE.
edendi,etc. es m,es .
PASSIVE.
In the passive voice the only pec liarities are as follows:
Pr.Indic. Sing.Third,
edit r and est r.
Impf.S bjv.Sing.Third,
ederet r and esset r.
The Pf.Part,is
es s
and the Ger ndive
edend s.
NOTE.In the Pr.S bjv.Active,early Latin shows
edim,edis,edit,edim s, editis,edint.
Also
ess m and ess in the S p.,
ess r s in the F t.Part.
Comedere also shows comest s for comes s.
6.fieri,to become.
173.Fio is conj gated in the Present,Imperfect,and F t re, according to the fo r
th conj gation,b t in the S bj nctive Imperfect and in the Infinitive the stem i
s increased by e; th s,
fierem,I were becoming;
fieri,to become.
In these forms the i is short,b t else where it is long even before another vowe
l.
The Infinitive ends in ri,and the whole Verb in the Presentstem is treated as th
e Passive to facio,I make.The rest of the Passive is formed reg larly from facio
.
PRIN.PARTS : fio,fieri,fact s s m.
ACTIVE. PASSIVE.
PRES. facio, I make. INDIC.fio,I am made,I become.
fis,fit(fim s,fitis),fi nt.
IMPF. faciebam, I made. fiebam,I was made,I became.
FUT. faciam, I shall make. fiam, I shall be made(become).
PERF. feci. fact s s m.
PLUPF. feceram. fact s eram.
FUT.PF. fecero. fact s ero,
SUBJV.fiam,fias,fiat,etc.
fierem,fieres,etc.
etc.
INFINITIVE.
PRES. fieri.
PERF. fact m esse,to have become,
IMPERATIVE. FUT. f t r m esse or fore.
(fi),(fito). FUT.Pr. fact m fore.
(fite).
[DEFECTIVE VERBS.121]
IMPV. SG.noli,nolito.
PL.nolite,nolitote,nol nto.
INF.PR. velle, nolle, malle.
PF. vol isse, nol isse, mal isse.
PART, volens, nolens.
NOTES.1.To the time of CICERO,and occasionally later,
volt,voltis,are employed for v lt,v ltis.
In familiar lang age
si vis,si v ltis,were contracted to sis, s ltis;
vis was f rther combined with -ne into vin.
2. Nolo is a contraction of nevolo(= non volo),and in early Latin we find,a
long with the forms given above,also
nevis,nevolt;also occasionally we find
non velis, non velit,non velint,non vellem,for nolis,etc.;
b t the feeling is slightly different.
3. Malo = ma volo,from mag(mage,magis)-volo.Freq ently in PLAUT.,b t rarel
y in TER.,we find
mavolo,mavol nt,mavolet,mavelim,-is,-it,mavellem,
instead of malo,malim,malis,etc.
175. DEFECTIVE VERBS.
I .aio,I say aye.
INDIC. PRES.SG. 1.aio, 2.ais, 3.ait, PL.3.ai nt.
IMPF. ¥aiebam,etc.
PERF. 3 ait
SUBJV.PRES.SG. 2.aias, 3.aiat, 3.aiant.
PART, aiens(as adj.),affirmative. IMPV.ai.
NOTE.In early Latin ain(= aisne ?) was scanned often as a monosyllable;and in th
e Impf.,
aibam,aibas,aibat,aibant
were freq ently employed along with the normal forms.The Impv.is rare,and fo nd
only in early Latin.Pr.S bjv.aiam is emended into PL.,Ep.,281.
2.inq am,I say,q oth I.
INDIC. PRES, SG. 1.inq am, 2.inq is, 3.inq it.
PL. 1.inq im s, 2.inq itis, 3.inq i nt.
IMPF. SG. 3.inq iebat.
FUT. SG. 2.inq ies, 3.inq iet.
PERF. SG. 1.inq ii, 2.inq isti, 3.inq it.
IMPV.inq e,inq ito.
3.fari,to speak.
INDIC. PRES.fat r. FUT.fabor,fabit r. PERF.fat s s m,etc. IMPV.far
e.
PART. PRES.fans,fantis,fanti,fantem. GER.fandi,fando. SUP.fat .
NOTE.In addition to these,compo nds show also PRES.: -faris,-fam r,-famini, -fan
t r;IMPF.: -fabar,-fabant r;FUT.: -fabere,-fabim r;PART.: -fante and others.Thes
e forma,as well as the ncompo nded forms,tho gh occasionally fo nd in prose,are
pec liar to the poets ntil post-A g stan times.The Pf .Part,is sometimes sed
passively;so especially
fat m,fate;
effat s,designated.
[122 DEFECTIVE VERBS.]
4.havere(avere),salvere.
IMPV.have, salve,salvebis, hail tho !
haveto, salveto.
havete, salvete, hail ye !
INF.havere, salvere.
Corresponding to these are the forms of valere,vi.:
vale,valete,valere,farewell.
5.coepi,memini,odi,novi.
In se only in the Perfect-stem are
coepi,I have beg n,
which serves as a Perfect to incipio,and
memini,I remember,
odi,I hate,
novi(from nosco,see 131,3,140),I know,am aware,
cons evi(from cons esco),I am wont,
which have the force of Presents.
a.INDIC. coepi,I have beg n. SUBJV.coeperim.
coeperam. coepissem.
coepero. INF. coepisse,to have b
eg n.
NOTE.Early Latin shows coepio,coepias,coepiat,coepiam,coepere,coeperet. F t re P
articiple coept r s is Post-A g stan.incepi is anteclassical.
Passive forms coept s s m,etc.,occ r with the same meaning in combination with a
Passive Infinitive.See 423,N.3.
b.INDIC.memini, I remember. SUBJV. meminerim.
memineram. meminissem.
meminero.
INF. meminisse,to remember.
IMPV.SG.memento. PL. mementote.
c.INDIC. odi,I hate, SUBJV. oderim.
oderam. odissem.
odero. INF. odisse,to hate.
FUT.PART. os r s.
NOTE.Occasionally in early Latin,the poets,and later prose,deponent forms of the
Perfect are fo nd,os s s m,etc.For the Passive the phrase odio esse is sed.
d.INDIC. novi. SUBJV. noverim(norim).
noveram(noram). novissem(nossem).
novero(noro). INF. novisse(nosse) to know.
6.cedo,q aeso.
Other defective forms are :
SG. cedo,give !(old Impv.) PL.cette.
INDIC.PRES. q aeso,please(i.e.,I seek,beg), q aes m s.
NOTE.Other forms of q aeso are fo nd occasionally in early Latin,and sporadicall
y in Cic.,SALL.,and later;the Pf.forms have been attached to q aerere,137,c.
[FORMATION OF WORDS.123]
FORMATION OF WORDS.
176.By the formation of words is meant the way in which stems are made of roots,
new stems of old,and in which words are compo nded.
177.All roots of the Latin lang age are probably monosyllabic.* They can be asce
rtained only by scientific analysis.
The difference between Root and Stem has been set forth in 25,NN. Sometimes the
Stem is the same as the Root;especially in the Root Verbs(132).B t it is s ally
different.
178.Words are either simple or compo nd.
A simple word is one that is formed from a single root :
sol,s n;
stare,stand,stay.
A compo nd word is one that is made p of two or more roots :
solstiti m,s nstaying,solstice(夏至).
A.Simple Words.
179.Simple words are partly primitive,partly derivative or secondary.
1.Primitive words come from the root(語根),and as this s ally appears in the simplest
form of the verb-stem,primitive words are called verbals.Examples are the root-
verbal forms(134,ii.,132,135,i.), some s bstantives of the third declension,as
d x(d cs),leader,root d c(see 183,i),
many s bstantives of the first,second,and fo rth declensions,as :
scriba(scribo,I write),scribe(秘書).
2.Derivative words are formed from a no n-stem;hence called denominatives :
vet stas,age,from vetes(N.vet s),old.
NOTE.Denominative verbs incl de many verbs which cannot definitely be referred t
o any s bstantive;s ch as many freq entatives and intensives.In its narrower sig
nification the term refers to the special class of verbs made from s bstantives
in se.
180.S bstantives are generally formed by means of a s ffix. A s ffix is an addit
ion to a stem,and serves to define its meaning or show its relations.So from the
verbal stem
scrib (scribo,I write) comes scriptor,writer; scriptio(n),writing.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
* The theory of monosyllabic roots is adopted here as being somewhat more con ve
nient than the theory of polysyllabic roots,now held by some important scholars.
Of co rse it will be nderstood that the act al existence of mere roots can be
ass med only for a very early period in the development of lang age,long before
the indepen dent existence of Latin.
[124 FORMATION OF WORDS.]
S ffixes are either primary or secondary.A primary s ffix is one added to a root
(or verb stem) to form primitive words.A secondary s ffix is one sed in the for
mation of derivative words.Th s,
-tor in scriptor is a primary s ffix;
-tas in vet stas is secondary.
NOTES.1.By the fading o t of the difference between primary and secondary s ffix
es,primary s ffixes come to be sed sometimes to form secondary derivatives.
2.Consonant stems before consonant s ffixes ndergo the s al changes(9).So
scribtor becomes scriptor;
regs becomes rex.
Stems are sometimes extended by a vowel, s ally i,less often ,to facilitate pro
n nciation :
valid s,strong;
doc ment m,proof;
sometimes they change the stem vowel :
teg,cover;
toga,toga;
t g ri m,h t.
3.Vowel stems lengthen the final vowel :
ac -,sharpen;
ac men,sharp part,point.(尖っ¤個所、先)
The final vowel often disappears before the s ffix :
opta-,choose;
optio,choice.
M.eq os,horse;
F.alvos,belly;
N.arvom,field;
parvos,small.
Secondary :
M.patr s, ncle;
cervos, stag;
F.ian a,gate;
cern os,stooping;
aestivos,of the s mmer.
NOTE.IvoS is fo nd in vocivos(vac os),redivivos,etc.-vo is weakened to -vi in
pelvis,basin.
185.S ffixes with G tt rals.
1.-co,-ca(N.c s,ca,c m).This forms both adjectives and s bstantives,b t is s al
ly secondary.As primary it is fo nd in :
ioc s,jest;
loc s,place;
as secondary in :
medic s,physician;
pedica,fetter.
Adjectives are primary :
casc s,very old;
or secondary :
civic s,civic.
2.-aco,-aca(N.ac s,aca,ac m).Primary in
cloaca,sewer;(下水道)
secondary in
verbenaca,vervain,(植物名)
and in adjectives,as
merac s,p re.
[FORMATION OF WORDS.129]
3.-ico,-ica(N.ic s,ica,ic m).In s bstantives,s ch as : M.
mbilic s,navel;
F.lectica,litter;
rtica,nettle.
In adjectives,as :
amic s,friendly,etc.
4.- co,- ca(N. c s, ca, c m).Primary in the adjectives :
cad c s,tottering;
mand c s,voracio s;
secondary in
alb c s,asphodel;
and in s bstantives 'n- ca,as
er ca,caterpillar;
verr ca,wart.
NOTE.Similar is the secondary s ffix -inq o in
longinq os,distant;
propinq os,near.
5.-de(N.ax) forms s bstantives and adjectives;the latter expressing inclination.
Primary :
a dax,bold;
f gax,fleeing.
Secondary :
F.fornax,f rnace;
limax,snail;
verax,tr thf l.
6.-ec(N.ex) is fo nd in
vervex,wether.
7.-ic(N.ex) forms a n mber of s bstantives that are mainly masc line,except name
s of plants and trees.Primary :
M.apex,point;
cortex,bark;
F.ilex,holm-oak.
Secondary :
F.imbrex,g tter-tile.
8.-ic(N.ix) forms s bstantives and adjectives.Primary :
F.radix,root;
felix,happy.
Secondary :
cornix,crow,and feminines in -trix.
9.-oc (N.ox) is fo nd in the s bstantive
celox,yacht,
and in a n mber of adjectives :
atrox,ferocio s.
10.-aceo,-acea(N.ace s,acea,ace m),forms adjectives of material or likeness :
cretace s,chalk-like.
NOTE.Notice also the s ffix -acio,especially in proper names : Voracia.
11.-iceo,-icio(N.ice s,etc.,ici s,etc.),form adjectives in dicating material,the
latter s ffix also some indicating relation :
palmice s,of palms;
trib nici s,proceeding from a trib ne.
12.-icio(N.ici s,etc.) is fo nd in
novici s,new,
and in words of participial meaning coming from forms in -to,as
adventici s, stranger.
13.- ceo,- cio,occ rs in
pann ce s or pann ci s.(ぼろぼろの)
14.-cino and cin'io occ r(perhaps) in
vaticin s,prophetic,
and in some secondary ne ter s bstantives,which denote action or event,as
latrocini m,robbery.
15.-cro,-cri,-clo,-c lo(N.cer,sris,cl m,c l m) are fo nd in some adjectives with
participial force,and in a few ne ter s bstantives indicating,instr ment or loc
ality;as
alacer,q ick;
mediocris,mediocre;
pericl m(c l m),danger;
bac l m,stick(also m.);
sep lcr m,grave.
Also the primary
ridic l s,la ghable,
and the secondary
annic l s,aged.
[130 FORMATION OF WORDS.]
186.S ffixes with a Dental.
1.-d(N.(d)s).S bstantives only :
fra s,cheatery;(詐欺師)
merces,pay;
c stos,g ard.
2.-do,-di(N.d s,etc.,dis).A secondary s ffix sed especially for the formation o
f adjectives :
frigid s,cold;
viridis,blooming.
3.-to(-so)(N.t s,ta,t m).This forms s bstantives and adjectives,and is both prim
ary and secondary.Primary :
M.c bit s,elbow;
digit s,finger;
also s bstantives in ta after Greek analogy :
poeta,poet;
F.hasta,spear;
amita,a nt;
N.l t m,m d;
tect m,roof;
apt s,fit;
beat s,blessed.
Secondary :
M.na ta,sailor;
F.i venta,yo th;
N.dense growths in et m :
fr ticet m,copse;(雑木林)
i st s j st,
and passive adjectives like
barbat s,bearded.
4.-ti(si) [N.tis(sis)] forms primary and secondary s bstantives and adjectives.P
rimary :
M.f stis,cl b;
cassis,h ntingnet;
F.c tis,skin;
sitis,thirst;
fortis,brave;
mitis,mild.
Secondary : (1) in adjectives and s bstantives indicating home,origin, s ally pr
eceded by a,i,more rarely e :
Camers(Camertis),from Camerin m;
Arpinas(Arpinatis),of Arpin m;
nostras,from o r co ntry;
(2) in the form ensi(for entti) in adjectives of origin and locality :
Siciliensis,from Sicily;
castrensis,belonging to a camp.
5.-t(N.(t)s) forms primary and secondary s bstantives and adjectives.Primary :
M.comes,companion;
dens,tooth;
F.q ies,rest;
ars,art;
loc ples,wealthy;
with preceding e :
dives,rich.
Note also the Participles in ns.Secondary :
M.ales,bird;
eq es,horseman.
6.-ento(N.-ent s,etc.) forms s bstantives and adjectives;the latter are particip
ial in nat re.
M.vent s,wind;
F.polenta,cl ster;
N. ng ent m,salve;
cr ent s,bloody.
Secondary adjectives :
gracilent s,slender;
and by false analogy
corp lent s,corp lent,and the like.
7.-tat,-t t(M.tas,t s),forms secondary feminine abstracts and collectives :
civitas,citienship;
libertas,freedom;
i vent s,yo th;
virt s,manliness.
8.-tio,-tia,-tie(N.ti m,tia,ties),likewise form abstracts and collectives,some n
e ter,most masc line :
serviti m,slavery;
mollitia and mollities,gentleness,etc.
NOTES.1.In
initi m,beginning,and
spati m,room,
the s ffix is primary.
2.Many roots form vario s derivatives of similar meaning,th s :
d ritia,
d rities,
d ritas,hardness,etc.
9.-tico(N.tic s,etc.) forms secondary adjectives signifying pertaining to;
domestic s,domestic;
aq atic s,aq atic.
[FORMATION OF WORDS.131]
NOTE.In s ch s bstantives as cantic m,tritic m,the ending co has been ad
ded to a participial form in to(canto,trito).
10.-ter forms primary s bstantives of kinship; as,
pater,etc.
Different in formation is
soror,
which,like
xor,has no feminine ending.
11.-tor(-sor),F.tric(N.tor,trix),form s bstantives of agency,those in trix being
all secondary :
a ditor,hearer;
venatrix,h ntress;
-tor is secondary in
gladiator,etc.
12.-t ro -t ra,(N.t r s,etc.),forms participles in t r s,as amat r s,and feminin
e s bstantives denoting activity or office :
c lt ra,c ltivation;
cens ra,censorship,
13.-torio(sorio)(N.tori s,etc.),form ne ter s bstantives of place and instr ment
,and adjectives denoting that which pertains to the actor :
a ditori m,lect re hall;
aleatori s,pertaining to a dice player.
14.-tro,-tra(N.tra,tr m),forms s bstantives,mostly ne ter,of means:
aratr m,plo gh;
fenestra(f.),window.
From words like
monstr m,monster,
come by false analogy those in ster,as
pinaster,wild pine.
15.-tero,-tera(N.ter,tra,tr m) forms comparatives:
alter,other;
dexter,right;
noster,o r;
perhaps also adjectives of relation,app rtenance,or locality in -ster(Gr.stris),
s ch as :
pal ster(= pal dter),swampy;
eq ester,eq estrian;
campester,champaign;(平野)
terrester,of the earth,terrestrial.
16.-trino,-trina(N.trina,trin m),forms s bstantives of activity(f.),or of locali
ty(f.,n.) :
doctrina,instr ction;
pistrina,bakery;
pistrin m,(po nding) mill.
17.-till(-sili)(N.tilis,tile) forms primary adjectives of capacity and adaptatio
n,and with preceding a secondary adjectives of relation or belonging :
d ctilis,d ctile;(引き伸ば•る)
missilis,missile;
aq atilis,belonging to the water.
18.-terno(N.tern s,etc.) forms adjectives indicating time :
hestern s,of yesterday.
19.-t rno(N.t rn s,etc.) forms s bstantives and adjectives indicating contin anc
e,from which come proper names :
Sat rn s,Volt rn s,
tacit rn s,silent.
20.-tino,-tino(N.tin s,tin s,etc.),forms adjectives of time,the latter also of p
lace :
crastin s,of tomorrow;
intestin s,inner,intestine;
mat tin s,of early morning.
21.-t (-s )(N.t s,s s) forms s bstantives of action and its res lt :
advent s,arrival;
c rs s,co rse;
ort s,rising.
22.-at (N.at s) forms secondary s bstantives of office :
cons lat s,cons lship
senat s,senate.
[132 FORMATION OF WORDS.]
187. S ffixes with a Labial.
1.-bo,-ba(N.b s,etc.),forms s bstantives and adjectives :
M.morb s,disease;
F.barba,beard;
N.verb m,word;
prob s, pright.
2.-bro,bra(N.bra,br m),forms s bstantives indicating means or instr ment.Primary
:
F.dolabra,celt;(鑿)
libra,balance;(天秤)
terebra,borer;(錐)
N.cribr m,sieve.
Secondary :
candelabr m,candlestick.
NOTE.Very rare are masc lines;as,faber,wright;M lciber,V lcan.
(職人)
3.-b lo,-b la(N.b la,b l m),form s bstantives :
F.fab la,tale;
fib la(fig),brooch;( ׊チ)
N.pab l m,fodder;(飼料)
stab l m,stall.(家畜小屋)
4.-bill(N.bilis) forms adjectives,mostly of passive meaning in classical prose :
amabilis,lovable;
nobilis,noble;
flebilis,weeping.
188.S ffixes with an original S.
1.-is(N.is,G.eris) forms a few s bstantives:
vomis(also vomer),plo ghshare; (鋤の刃)
cinis,ashes;
p lvis,d st;
c c mis,c c mber.
2.- s(N. s,G.eris,oris) forms primary and secondary ne ter s bstantives.Primary
:
foed s,bond;(きずy)
gen s,race;
temp s,time.
Secondary :
pect s,breast;
f n s,f neral.
NOTE.Some s ch words have become monosyllabic,as
aes,
i s,
r s.
3.-os(or)(N.os,or,G.oris) forms many primary and a few secondary masc line abstr
acts.Primary :
flos,flower;
amor,love.
Secondary :
aegror,sickness.
NOTE.Noteworthy are
M.lepUS,hare;
F.arbos,tree(45 N.);
Ven s(G.Yeneris),
and the adjective
vet s(G.veteris),old.
4.-es(N.es,es,G.is,ei) forms a few s bstantives of the third and fifth declensio
n :
vates,bard;
fames,h nger;
plebes,people.
5.-oro(N.or s,etc.) forms secondary adjectives,as :
canor s,so nding;
honor s,hono rable;
and a few s bstantives,as :
a rora, morning; Flora,etc.
189.S ffixes with a Liq id.
1.-lo,-la(N.l s,etc.),forms many feminine and ne ter,and a few masc line s bstan
tives :
M.mal s,mast;
F.pila,pillar;
N.cael m(= caedl m),chisel;
fil m,thread.
2.-ilO,-ila(N.il s,etc.),forms primary and secondary s bstantives
[FORMATION OF WORDS.133]
and adjectives.
M.sibil s,hissing;
N.cael m(= cavil m,hollow),heaven;
n bil s,clo dy.
3.(-olo),- lo,- la(N. l s,etc.),form primary and secondary s bstantives,most of
which indicate instr ment,and primary adjectives indicating repeated action or t
endency:
M.ang l s,corner;
oc l s,eye;
F.reg la,r le;
teg la,tile;
N.iac l m,javelin;
spec l m,mirror;
bib l s,bib lo s;(酒好き)
cred l s,q ick to believe;
q er l s,complaining;
caer l s,bl e(secondary),and caer le s.
Also
fam l s,servant,
and the extension
familia,family.
4.-li(N.lis,le) occ rs in the s bstantive :
M.ca lis,stalk;
and in adjectives :
s btilis,fine;
incilis,c t in.
Secondary in
fidelis,faithf l.
5.-ili(N.ilis,ile) forms a few s bstantives and many adjectives indicating passi
ve capacity :
F.strigilis,scraper;
N.tegile,roof.
Also
vigil,watchman;
agilis,readily moved;
docilis,teachable.
Secondary in
h milis,low,
and in the terminations -tilis,-silis.
6.-olO, -ola(after e,i,v),- lo,- la(N.ol s, l s,etc.),form dimin tives :
alveol s,little belly;
filiol s,little son;
riv l s,brooklet;
reg l s,chief;
voc la,voice;
gran l m,grain;
alb l s,whitish;
parvol s,small.
7.-ello,-ella(N.ell s,etc.),forms dimin tives after l and by assimilation after
n,r :
popell s,tribelet;
tabella,tablet;
p ella,girl;
bell s(bon s),good;
misell s(miser),wretched.
Do bly dimin tive are
catell s,p ppy;
cistella,basket;
capitell m,head.
8.-illo,-illa(N.ill s,etc.),forms dimin tives,and is formed like ello,b t s all
y after a preceding i :
p lvill s,small c shion;
pistrilla,small mill;
sigill m,small image;
bovill s,bovine.
Also
codicilli,billets;
pa xill s,slight;
p sill s,tiny.
9.-olla,is fo nd in
corolla,wreath;
olla,jar(a la).
10.- llo,- lla,occ rs in
ll s,any.
S lla( = S r la),Cat ll s(Catonl s),
hom ll s(= homonl s,小人物).
11.(-colo),-c lo(N.c l s,etc.),forms dimin tives,especially after consonantal an
d e,i, stems :
M.flosc l s,floweret;
hom nc l s, manikin(irreg lar);
av nc l s, ncle(mother's brother,irreg lar);
F.spec la,little hope;
a ric la,ear;
arb sc la,little tree(irreg lar);
dom nc la,little ho se(irreg lar);
N.corc l m,(dear) heart;
m n sc l m,little gift.
Adjectives are
d lcic l s,sweetish,
and especially dimin tives from comparative stems,
meli sc l s.(すáしâa)
12.-cello(-cillo)(N.cell s,etc.) stands to c lo as ello to lo:
M. penicill s,-m,painter's br sh;
oscill m,little mo th;
mollicell s, softish.(やや柔らåa)
[134 FORMATION OF WORDS.]
13.- leo(N. le s) forms s bstantives that were originally adjectival :
ac le s,sting.
14.-ali,-ari(N.alis,aris,etc.),form secondary adjectives,some of which are s bst
antivised in the ne ter,and a few s bstantives :
venalis,venal;(買収èきる)
mortalis,mortal;
sing laris, niq e;
v lgaris,common;
canalis,canal;
animal,living being;
calcar,sp r.
15.-ela(-ella) forms primary and secondary s bstantives,most of which indicate a
ction:
loq ela(loq ella),talking;
candela,candle;
c stodela,watching.
16.-eli(N.elis,etc.) forms secondary s bstantives and adjectives:
card elis,linnet;(é ヒë)
cr delis,cr el.
REMARK.A f rther development of -eli is -elio,-elia : A reli s,
cont melia,cont mely.(侮辱)
17.-ili(N.ilis,ile) forms secondary s bstantives and adjectives :
M.aedilis,aedile;
N.c bile,co ch;
sedile,seat;
civilis,civic;
erilis, master's.
18.-mo,-ma(N.m s,etc.),forms primary s bstantives and primary and secondary adje
ctives.The feminine s bstantives express s ally the res lt of an action:
M.anim s,spirit;
calm s,calam s, stalk;
F.fama,fame;
flamma,flame;
N.arma,arms;
pom m,fr it.
Adjectives,primary:
alm s,fostering;
firm s,strong.
Secondary:
opim s,fat;
patrim s,matrim s,with father,mother,living.
19.-men,(N.men,G.minis) forms primary,ne ter s bstantives,mostly indicating acti
vity or res lts of activity :
agmen,train;
fl men,river;
b t
M.flamen,priest.
20.-mento(N.ment m) forms s bstantives(mostly primary) indicating instr ment :
aliment m,no rishment;
torment m,tort re.
NOTES.1.men and ment m are often formed from the same radical.In that case ment
m is the more common : teg men,teg ment m,covering.
2.Rare and archaic are feminines in -menta :
armenta = arment m.(家畜)
3.menti occ rs in
sementis(f ),seed = semen(n.).
21.-met(N.mes,G.mitis) forms a few masc line s bstantives :
trames,path;
fomes,f el;
limes,crosspath.
22.-mino,-mina,-mno,-mna(N.min s,etc.),form s bstantives :
M.termin s,bo ndary;
P.al mna,fosterda ghter;
femina,woman;
N.damn m,loss.
23.-mon(N.mo,G.monis) forms primary and secondary masc line s bstantives :
p lmo,l ng;
sermo,disco rse;
temo,pole(of a chariot).
24.-monio,-monia(N.monia,moni m),forms primary and
[FORMATION OF WORDS.135]
secondary s bstantives.Primary :
F.alimonia,no rishment;
q erimonia,complaint;
N.alimoni m,no rishment.
Secondary :
P.acrimonia,tartness;
N.matrimoni m,marriage.
25.-mor forms primary masc line s bstantives :
cremor,broth;
r mor,r mo r.
26.-mic(N.mex,G.micis) forms a few s bstantives :
cimex,b g;
p mex,p mice.
27.a.-no,-na(N.n s,etc.),forms primary and secondary adjectives;the primary are
participial in meaning;the secondary indicate material or relation,and occasiona
lly locality;when added to local comparatives and adverbs,distrib tive n merals
are also formed with this s ffix.Primary :
dign s,worthy;
plen s,f ll.
Secondary :
di rn s,daily;
fratern s,brotherly;
acern s,maple;
extern s,o ter;
bini,two each.
NOTE.Adjectives denoting material have also neo(= n'eo),as aene s, braen;Iligne
s,q erne s.
b.-no,-na(N.n s,etc.),forms primary and a few secondary s bstantives.Primary:
M.f rn s,oven;
p gn s,fist;
F.cena,meal;
lana,wool.
N.don m,gift;
regn m,kingdom.
Secondary :
M.trib n s,trib ne;
F.fort na,fort ne;
alb rn m,sapwood.
NOTE.This s ffix is extended in
pec nia,money.
28.-b ndo,-c ndo(N.b nd s,etc.,c nd s,etc.),form adjectives of activity :
c nctab nd s,delaying;
fac nd s,eloq ent.
29.-ni(N.nis) forms primary s bstantives and adjectives :
amnis, stream;
penis,tail;
panis.bread;
immanis,wild;
segnis,lay.
30.-ino,-ina(N.in s,etc.),forms primary and secondary s bstantives and adjective
s.Primary :
M.domin s,lord;
F.pagina, page;
licin s,c rled pwards.
Secondary :
M.pedicin s,foot;
F.fiscina,basket;
N.s cin m,amber;
faecin s,making dregs.
NOTE.The s ffix is extended in the proper name Licini S.
31.-ano,-ana(N.an s,etc.),forms secondary adjectives,some of which are s bstanti
vised.They indicate origin or app rtenance;
dec man s,belonging to the tenth;
h man s,h man;
altan s,seawind.
Primary in Volcan s,Diana.
32.-aneo(N.ane s,etc.) forms primary and secondary adjectives.Primary :
consentane s,harmonio s.
Secondary :
s bitane s,s dden.
This s ffix becomes anio(= an'io) in proper names :
Afrani s,
F ndani s.
33.-eno,-ena(N.en s,etc.),forms secondary s bstantives and
[136 FORMATION OF WORDS.]
adjectives :
M.Vibidien s;
F.catena,chain;
habena,rein;手綱
N.venen m,poison;
egen s,needy;
alien s,strange.
NOTE.This is extended to enon in
tolleno,(well) sweep.(はねòるó)
34.-ino,-ina(N.in s,etc.),forms primary and secondary s bstantives and adjective
s.Primary :
M.catin s,-m,dish;
F.rapina, rapine;
r ina,r in;
necopin s, nexpected.
Secondary:
M.p lvin s,c shion;
salin m,saltcellar,
and many feminines,especially those denoting shops and factories;
regina,q een;
c lina,kitchen;
officina,workshop;
agnin s,belonging to a lamb;
divin s,divine.
NOTE.An extension of this s ffix is fo nd in
ricini m,veil.
35.-en(N.en,G.inis) forms a few s bstantives :
M.pecten,comb;
N.gl ten,gl e.
36.-on(N.o,G.inis) forms a few s bstantives :
M.cardo,hinge;
margo,rim;
ordo,row;
F.aspergo,sprinkling;
virgo,maid;
caro, flesh.
NOTES.1.Noteworthy is homo,hominis,man,
2.This s ffix occ rs very commonly in compo nds forming feminine abstracts :
-edon(N.edo),
d lcedo,sweetness;
-idon(N.ido),
c pido,desire;
formido,fear;
- don(N. do)
test do,tortoise;
-t don(N.t do),
aegrit do, sickness;
-agon(N.ago),
imago,image;
- gon(N. go),
aer go,r st;
-igon(N.igo),
callgo,thick darkness;
origo,origin,etc.
37.-on(N.o,G.onis) forms primary and secondary s bstantives. The primary are no
ns of agency :
combibo,fellowdrinker;
praeco, herald;
tiro,recr it.
The secondary indicate often the possession of some bodily or mental pec liariti
es;
aleo,diceplayer;
cent rio, cent rion.
38.-ion(N.io) forms a few masc line and many feminine primary and secondary s bs
tantives.Primary :
M.p gio,dagger;
F.opinio, opinion;
regio,region.
Secondary :
M.pellio,f rrier(毛皮商人);
vespertilio, bat;
F.comm nio,comm nion.
NOTE.Especially freq ent are feminine abstracts in tio(sio) :
ambitio,ambi tion;
opp gnatio,siege.
Noteworthy are the secondary dimin tives,
hom ncio,小人
senecio.老人
39.-ono, -ona (N.on s,ona),forms few primary and many secondary s bstantives;the
masc lines indicate agents,especially person employed : M.
colon s,settler;
F.
matrona,matron;
Bellona.
40.-onio,-onia(N.oni s,etc.),forms s bstantives and adjectives : M.
Favoni s,ephyr;
Pomponi s,etc.;
ca poni s,belonging to a host.
Ne ters indicate the trade or shop :
f lloni m,f ller's shop.
41.-ro,-ra(N.(e)r,ra,r m),forms primary s bstantives and adjectives : M.
ager,field;
caper,goat;
m r s,ivall;
F.
la r s,la rel;
[FORMATION OF WORDS.137]
serra,saw;
N.
flagr m,whip;
labr m,lip;
clar s,bright;
p r s, clean.
Often a short vowel precedes : M.n mer s,n mber;F.camera, va lt;N.i ger m,meas r
e of land.So hilar s,joyo s;Uber, free;cam r s,va lted;sat r,f ll.
NOTES.1.Extensions are Merc ri s,t g ri m,h t.
2.In a n mber of primary s bstantives and adjectives simple r is preceded by a s
hort vowel : M.
later,tile;
anser,goose;
F.
m lier,woman;
N.
acer,maple;
ver(= veser),spring;
cic r,tame.
42.ri(N.(e)r,ris,G.ris) forms s bstantives and adjectives : M.
imber,rainstorm;
acer,sharp;
f nebris,f neral;
perhaps
celeber,thronged.
43.-aro forms adjectives,as :
avar s,greedy;
amar s,bitter.
44.-ari -ali(N.aris,alis,etc.),forms secondary s bstantives and adjectives;
-ari when the stem has l,
-ali when it has an r :
p gillares, tablets;
primipilaris,one who has been primipil s;第一歩兵百人隊長
some ne ters in ar (from -are) :
calcar,sp r;
exemplar,pattern;
p lvinar,(sacred) co ch;
a xiliaris,a xiliary;
militaris,military;
cons laris,cons lar.
45.-ario,-aria(N.ari s,etc.),forms s bstantives and adjectives.There are sometim
es collateral forms in -aris.The s bstantives, when masc line,indicate artisans;
when feminine,b siness or profession;when ne ter,the place where the work is ca
rried on.M.
argentari s,moneychanger;
ferrari s,iron-worker;
F.
argentaria, silver mine,bank or banking;
N.
apiari m,beehive;
pomari m,apple orchard.
46.-ero(N.er s,etc.) forms
sever s,earnest,
and the s bstantive
galer s,-m,bonnet.
47.-ari forms the s bstantive
sec ris,axe,
and by extension
pen ria,want.
48.The letter r appears often in combination with other s ffixes,as :
-erco in
l perc s,Pan;
noverca,stepmother;
-erto in
lacert s,arm;
lacert s,a liard;
-erbo in
acerb s,so r;
s perb s,pro d;
-ervo in
acervos,heap;
caterva,crowd;
-erna in
caverna,hollow;
l cerna, lamp;
-terna in
lanterna,lantern;
- rno in
alb rn s,white fish;
lab rn m,lab rn m(植物).
II.SIGNIFICATION OF COMPOUNDS.
196.Compo nd s bstantives and adjectives are divided according to their signific
ation into two main classes : Determinative and Possessive.
In Determinative compo nds one of the terms is s bordinate to the other.They fal
l into two classes : Attrib tive or Appositional,and Dependent.
197.1 Attrib tive compo nds.The first part is the attrib te of the second.
The first word is,(1) a s bstantive :
alipes,wingfoot(ed);
(2) an adjective :
magnanim s,greathearted;
latif ndi m,large estate;
(3) a n meral :
bienni m(i.e.,spati m),space of two years.
2.Dependent compo nds.In these the second word is simply limited by the other,it
s signification not being altered.
(a) The first word is :(i) an adjective :
meridies(from medidie = medio die),midday;
(2) an adverb :
benefic s(welldoing),beneficent;
malefic s,evildoing;
(3) a n meral :
tergemin s,triple;
(4) a particle :
disson s,harsh-so nding;
permagn s,very large;
indign s, nworthy;
(5) a verb-stem :
horrific s,horrible(horror-stirring).
(b) The first word gives a case relation,s ch as
(1) the Acc sative :
armiger = arma gerens,armo r-bearer;
agricola =.agr m colens(land tiller),h sbandman;
(2) the Genitive :
solstiti m = solis statio(s n staying),solstice;
(3) the Locative :
alienigena(born elsewhere),alien;
(4) the Instr mental :
tibicen = tibia canens,fl teplayer.
198.Possessive Compo nds are adjectival only,and are so called beca se they impl
y the existence of a S bject possessing the q ality indicated.
The first term is,
(1) a s bstantive :
ang iman s,(having a) snake hand(elephant) :
(2) an adjective :
flavicom s,(having) yellow hair;
(3) a n meral :
bifrons,(having) two front(s);
(4) a particle :
discors, discordant ;.
iners,inactive.
[142 FORMATION OF WORDS.]
NOTE.Notice that these divisions r n into each other;th s magnanim s is possessi
ve,attrib tive,and dependent.
199.Verb.
In Composition Improper the verb is joined to a verb,s btantive,or adverb.In Com
position Proper the verb is combined with a preposition.
200.1,Composition Improper .
(a) Verb with verb : This only takes place when the second part of the compo nd
is facio or fio(173,N.2).The first part of the compo nd is reg larly an intrans
itive of the second conj gation :
calefacio,calefio,warm,am warmed.
(b) Verb with s bstantive :
animadverto = anim m adverto,take notice;
man mitto,set free;
s capio,acq ire by se.
(c) Verb with adverb :
benedico,bless;
maledico,c rse;
malo,
nolo (for mage(magis)volo,ne- volo),
satisfacio,satisfy.
2.Composition Proper.
The verb combines with separable or inseparable prepositions Compare 413,R.3.
(a) With inseparable prepositions :
ambeo,go abo t;
amplector,enfold;
anhelo.draw deep breath,pant;
disc rro,r n apart;
dirimo, 160,1,and 715,R.1;
portendo,hold forth,portend(前兆とyる);
reddo,give back;
resolvo,resolve;
sei ngo,separate.
(b) With separable prepositions :
abeo,go away;
adeo,come p;
antec rro,r n in advance;
compono,p t together;
dec rro,r n down, finish a co rse;
excedo,overstep;
incl do,sh t in;
obd co,draw over;
peragro,wander thro gh;
posthabeo,keep in the backgro nd;
praedico,foretell;
praetereo,pass by;
prodeo,go forth;
praevideo,foresee;
s bicio,p t nder;
s bterf gio,flee from nder;
s pers m, remain over;
transgredior,pass beyond.
[143]
SYNTAX.
201.SYNTAX treats of the formation and combination of sentences. A sentence is t
he expression of a tho ght(sententia) in words. Sentences are divided into simpl
e and compo nd. A simple sentence is one in which the necessary parts occ r b t
once;for the compo nd sentence see 472. The necessary parts of the sentence are
the s bject and the predicate. The predicate is that which is said of the s bjec
t. The s bject is that of which the predicate is said.
L na f lget,The moon shines. L na is the s bject;f lget,the predicate.
REMARKS.1.The Interjection(16,R.2) and the Vocative case(23, 5) stand o tside th
e str ct re of the sentence,and therefore do not enter as elements into Syntax,e
xcept that the Vocative is s bject to the laws of Concord.See R.3.
2.The Vocative differs from the Nominative in form in the second declension only
,and even there the Nominative is sometimes sed instead,especially in poetry an
d solemn prose.
Almae fili s Maiae,H.,O.,I.2,43;son of mild Mala!
A di t , pop l s Alban s,L.,1.24,7;hear tho ,people of Alba !
O is prefixed to give emphasis to the address:
O formose p er,nimi m ne crede colori,V.,EC.2.17;O shapely boy! tr st no
t complexion all too m ch.
The Vocative is commonly interjected in prose,except in highly emotional pas3.On
the se of the Vocative of an adjective or participle in apposition,attrib tion
,or predication,see 289,325,R.1.
SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE.
202.The most simple form of the sentence is the finite verb :
s m,I am;
doces,tho teachest;
scribit,he writes.
[144 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE.]
REMARK.Here the form contains in itself all the necessary elements(compare 114),
the persons being indicated by the endings. From the expansion and modification
of the finite verb arise all the complicated forms of the compo nd sentence.
203.SUBJECT.The s bject of the finite verb is always in the Nominative Case,or s
o considered.
REMARKS.1.The s bj.of the Inf.is in the Acc sative(343,2). 2.The se of the Nom.
in Latin is the same as in English.
204.The s bject may be a s bstantive or a prono n,or some other word,phrase,or c
la se sed as a s bstantive :
De s m nd m g bernat,GOD steers the niverse.
Ego reges eieci,[C.] ad Her.,iv.53,66;I drove o t kings.
Sapiens res adversas non timet,THE SAGE does not fear adversity,
Victi in servit tem redig nt r,THE VANQUISHED are red ced to slavery.
Contendisse decor m est,Ov.,M.,ix.6;TO HAVE STRUGGLED is hono rable.
Magn m benefici m [est] nat rae q od necesse est mori,SEN.,E.M.,101,14;
it is a great boon of nat re,THAT WE MUST NEEDS DIE.
Vides habet d as syllabas,(the word) "VIDES" has two syllables.
NOTES.1.Masc line and feminine adjectives,and to a less degree participles, are
sed as s bstantives,b t with the following limitations :
(a) Many adjectives in -ari s and -ic s(the latter mostly Greek),designating of
fice or occ pation,and words expressing friendship,kinship,or other relationship
, are sed often as s bstantives both in the Sing,and the Pl.of the masc line an
d femi-nine :
aq ari s,waterman;
librari s,bookman(-seller,ivriler,etc.);
grammatic s,grammarian;
amic s,friend;
cognat s,kinsman;
soci s,partner.
Many of these have become almost wholly fixed as s bstantives,as amic s,friend.S
ee 16,N.1.
(b) Adjectives are very often sed as s bstantives in the masc.Pl.when they des
ignate a class :
pa peres,the poor;
divites,the rich.
In the obliq e cases of the Sing., this se is also not ncommon;b t in the Nom.
the s bstantive is generally expressed :
vir bon s,a good man;
m lier peregrina,a foreign woman.
So reg larly,if sed with a proper name :
Plato,doctissim s homo,the learned Plato.
Exceptions are rare and scattering in prose :
ego et s avissim s Cicero valem s,C.,Fam.,xiv.5,1.
(c) On the se of participles as s bstantives see 437,N.
(d) When persons are not meant,a s bstantive is nderstood :
cani(capilli),gray hairs;
calida(aq a),warm water;
dextra(man s),right hand.
2.Ne ter adjectives and participles are freely employed as s bstantives in both
n mbers;in the Pl. s ally in Nom.and Acc.,in the Sing,in all cases,b t especiall
y in connection with prepositions :
medi m,the midst;
extrem m,the end;
reliq om,the resid e;
f t r m,the f t re;
bon m,good;
bona,blessings,possessions;
mal m,evil;
mala,misfort nes.
The Pl ral is freq ently employed when the English idiom prefers the Sing lar :
vera,the tr th;
omnia,everything.
3.Adjectives of the Second Declension are sometimes sed as ne ter s bstantives
in the Gen.,after words of q antity or prono ns :
aliq id boni,something good;
nihil mali,nothing bad.
Adjectives of the Third Declension are th s employed only in combination with th
ose of the Second,and even then very rarely(369,R.i).
Us ally the adjective of the Third Declension draws the adjective of the Second
into its own constr ction :
Q id habet ista res a t laetabile a t glorios m ? C.,T sc.,1.21,49;what
is there to be glad of or to brag abo t in that ?
[SUBJECT-PREDICATE-COPULA.145]
pars,part;
vis(power),q antity(量);
m ltit do,crowd;
organied bodies more rarely.Also,b t not often,s ch words as
q isq e,
terq e,
nemo,etc.
Pars maior receperant sese,L.,xxxiv.47,6;the greater part had retired.
Omnis m ltit do abe nt,L.,xxiv.3,15;all the crowd depart.
[AGEEEMENT OF PREDICATE WITH SUBJECT.149]
Magna vis emin s missa telor m m lta nostris v lnera inferebant,
CAES.,B.C.,ii.6,5.(遠方åら投 られ¤大量の矢NMN軍の兵士¤ÿに¤く の負傷‡も¤らし¤)
Uterq e eor m ex castris exercit m ed c nt,CAES.,B.C.,iii.30,3.(彼らは両方とも陣地åら
NOTE.This sage is very common in comedy,b t extremely rare in model pro
se. LIVY shows a greater variety and a larger n mber of s bstantives than any ot
her a thor,and poets and late prose writers are free.Yet HORACE ses reg larly t
he Sing.with a collective,while VERGIL varies,often employing first a Sing.and t
hen a Pl.verb with the same s bstantive(as A.,ii.64).TACITUS often ses
q isq e with a Pl ral.
(b) The adjective predicate often follows the nat ral gender of the s bject;so e
specially with
milia.
This sage belongs pre-eminently to the historians.
Capita coni rationis virgis caesi(s nt),L.,x.1,3;the heads of the conspi
racy were flogged.
Samniti m caesi tria milia,Cf.L.,x.34,3; of the Sammies(there) were slai
n three tho sand.
The passive verb often agrees in gender with the predicate :
Non omnis error st ltitia dicenda est,C.,Div.,ii.43,90;not every false s
tep is to be called folly.
(c) The cop la often agrees with the n mber of the predicate("the wages of sin i
s death ") :
Amanti m irae(204,N.5)amoris integratio est,TER.,And.,555; lovers' q arr
els are love's renewal.
2.A s perlative adjective defined by a Partitive Gen.follows the gender of the s
bj.when it precedes:
Ind s,q i est omni m fl min m maxim s,C.,N.D.,ii.52,130;the Ind s,which
is the greatest of all rivers.
Otherwise it follows the Genitive;b t this sage is post-classic :
Velocissim m omni m animali m est delphin s,PLIN.,N.H.,ix.8,20; the dolp
hin is the swiftest of all animals.(Velocissim mはanimalと同じ中性è主格)
extrem m,
comm ne :
Omni m rer m(204,N.4) mors [est] extrem m,Cf.C.,Fam:,vi.21,1; death is t
he end of all things.
5.The demonstrative prono n is commonly attracted into the gender of the predica
te :
Negat Epic r s;hoc enim vostr m l men est,C.,Fin.,ii.22,70;Epic r s says
No;for he is yo r great light.
Ea non media sed n lla via est,L.,xxxii.,21,33;that is not a middle co r
se,b t no co rse at all.
[150 FORMS OF THE VERBAL PREDICATE.]
B t in negative sentences,and when the prono n is the predicate,there is no chan
ge.So in definitions :
Q id a t q ale [est] De s ? Cf.C.,N.D.,1.22,60;what or what manner of th
ing is God ?
Nec sopor ill d erat,V.,A.,iii.173( れは夢èはyåっ¤).
Q od ita erit gest m,id lex erit,C.,Ph.,1.10,26.(áþし‰行MれるáとN法とyる)
Exceptions are b t apparent.C.,O.,ii.38,157.
6.The adjective predicate sometimes agrees with a s bstantive in apposition to t
he s bject.So especially when the appositive is oppid m,civitas,and the like :
Corioli oppid m capt m [est],L.,ii.33,9; Corioli-town was taken.
Corinth m,toti s Graeciae l men,exstinct m esse vol er nt,C.,Imp.,5,11;t
hey wo ld have Corinth,the eye of all Greece,p t o t.
NOTES.1.Pec liar is the occasional se of the F t.participle in - r m for femini
nes in early Latin :
Altero(gladio) te occis r m ait(Casina), altero vilic m.PL.,Cas.,693.(一方の剣è}y¤
2.Age is often sed in early Latin as if it were an adverb,with the Pl ral;occas
ionally also cave :
Age modo fabricamini.PL.,Cas.,488.( }、準備にååれâ)
Akin is the se of a Voc.Sing,with a Pl.verb,which is occasionally fo nd in clas
sical prose also :
T m Scaevola;"q id est,Cotta ?" inq it,"q id tacetis?" C.,O.,1.35,160.(するとス ÿ
The se of
aliq is,some one of yo ,
in this way is early :
Aperite aliq is act t m(adv immediately) osti m,TER.,Ad.,634.(ÿれåすYに扉‡}ÿ‰く
3.Other less s al constr ctions ad sens m are : the se of a ne ter demonstrati
ve where a s bstantive of a different gender is expected,and the constr ction of
res
as if it were ne ter(both fo nd also in CICERO);the ne ter Sing lar s mming p a
preceding Pl ral :
In Graecia m sici flor er nt,discebantq e id(that [accomplishment]') omn
es, C.,T sc.,1.2,4.ギ シéèは音楽家N尊敬 れ、’ yN音楽‡学 ÿのè}るm
Servitia rep diabat,c i s(of which [class]) initio ad e m magnae copiae
conc rrebant, S.,C.,56,5( ÿ ナは当初自分の方に大勢集Xっ‰き¤奴隷¤ÿ‡仲間にするáと‡
Forms of the Verbal Predicate.
VOICES OF THE VERB.
212.There are two Voices in Latin -- Active and Passive.
REMARK.The Latin Passive corresponds to the Greek Middle,and,like the Greek Midd
le,may be explained in many of its ses as a Reflexive.
213.ACTIVE.--The Active Voice denotes that the action proceeds from the s bject.
Verbs sed in the Active Voice fall into two classes,as follows :
Verbs are called Transitive when their action goes over to an object(
transeo,I go over
);Intransitive when their action does not go beyond the s bject :
occīdere,to fell = to kill(Transitive);
occidere,to fall(Intransitive).
[PASSIVE VOICE.151]
REMARK.-Properly speaking,a Transitive Verb in Latin is one that forms a persona
l passive,b t the traditional division given above has its convenience,tho gh it
does not rest pon a difference of nat re,and a verb may be trans,or intrans.ac
cording to its se.So
(a) Transitive verbs are often sed intransitively,in which case they serve simp
ly to characterie the agent(動作主、行為者).This is tr e especially of verbs of movement;as
declinare,deviate
inclinare,lean
movere,move
m tare,change
vertere,t rn
and the like,and is fo nd at all periods.
(b) On the other hand,many intrans.verbs are often sed transitively.This occ rs
also at all periods,b t the Acc.is s ally the inner object(332).
(c) On the se of the Inf.active,where English ses the passive,see 532,N.2.
214.PASSIVE.¥The Passive Voice denotes that the s bject receives the action of the
verb.
The instr ment is p t in the Ablative.
Virgis caedet r,C.,Verr.,iii.28,69;he shall be beaten with rods.
[ignis] l mine prodit r s o,Ov.,Her.,15,8;the fire is betrayed by its ow
n light.
The agent is p t in the Ablative with ab(a).
Ab amicis prodim r,C.,Cl ent.,52,143;we are betrayed by friends.
Virgis caesi trib ni ab legato s nt,L.,xxix.18,13;the trib nes were beat
en with rods by the lie tenant.
REMARKS.1.Intrans.verbs of passive signification are constr ed as passives :
fame perire,C.,Inv.,ii.57,172,to perish of h nger(<pereo).So
vēnire,to be sold;(< vēneo)
vap lare(chiefly v lgar),to be beaten,ab aliq o,by some one.
Ab reo f stib s [vap lavit],Cf.QUINT.,ix.2,12; he was whacked with c dge
ls by the defendant.
Salvebis a meo Cicerone,C.,Att.,vi.2,10; greeting to yo from Cicero.
2.When the instr ment is considered as an agent,or the agent as an instr ment,th
e constr ctions are reversed :
Vinci a Vol ptate,C.,Off.,1.20,68;to be overcome by Dame Pleas re.
Patriciis i venib s saepserant latera,L.,iii.37,6;they had flanked him w
ith a g ard of patrician yo ths.(<saepio)
The latter constr ction is very rare in CICERO,and seems to belong pre-eminently
to the historians.
Animals,as independent agents,are treated like persons.
A cane non magno saepe tenet r aper,Ov.,Rem.Am.,422;a boar is often held
fast by a little dog.
Animals,as instr ments,are treated like things.
Compare
eq o vehi,to ride a horse(to be borne by a horse),with in eq o,on horseb
ack.
[152 VOICES OF THE VERB.]
215.The person in whose interest an action is done is p t in the Dative.Hence th
e freq ent inference that the person interested is the agent.See 354.
1.With the Perfect passive it is the nat ral inference,and common in prose.
Mihi res tota provisa est,C.,Verr.,iv.42,91;I have had the whole thing p
rovided for.
Carmina n lla mihi s nt scripta,Ov.,Tr.,v.12,35; poems I have none writt
en(I have written no poems).
2.With the Ger ndive it is the necessary inference,and the Dative is the reignin
g combination.
Nihil [est] homini tam timend m q am invidia,C.,Cl ent.,3,7;there is not
hing that one has to fear to the same extent as envy.
216.The Direct Object of the Active Verb(the Acc sative Case) becomes the S bjec
t of the Passive.
Alexander Dare m vicit,Alexander conq ered Dari s.
Dare s ab Alexandro vict s est,Dari s was conq ered by Alexander.
217.The Indirect Object of the Active Verb(Dative Case) cannot be properly sed
as the S bject of the Passive.The Dative remains nchanged,and the verb becomes
a Passive in the Third Person Sing lar(Impersonal Verb).This Passive form may ha
ve a ne ter s bject corresponding to the Inner object(333,i).
Active: Miseri invident bonis,The wretched envy the well-to-do.
Passive : mihi invidet r,I am envied, }
tibi invidet r,tho art envied, }
ei invidet r,he is envied, }
nobis invidet r,we are envied, }ab aliq o by so
me one
vobis invidet r,yo are envied, }
iis invidet r,they are envied. }
Nihil facile pers adet r invitis,QUINT.,IV.3,10;people are not easily pe
rs aded of anything against their will.
An lis nostris pl s q am animis credit r,SEN.,Sen.,III.15,3;o r seals ar
e more tr sted than o r so ls
REMARKS.1.In like manner a Gen.or Abl.in dependence pon an active verb cannot b
e made the s bj.of the passive.
2.On the exceptional sage of personal Ger ndives from intrans.verbs see 427,N.5
.
NOTES.1.The poets and later prose writers sometimes violate the r le, nder Greek
infl ence or in imitation of early sage :
C r invideor ?(for c r invidet r mihi?),H.,A.P.,56;
vix eq idem credar,Ov.,Tr.,III.10,35;
pers as s videt r esse,[C.] ad Her.,I.6,9.(Pers adeo hospitem,PETR.,62,2
,is perhaps an intentional solecism.)
[REFLEXIVE DEPONENT.153]
2.Similar liberties are taken by poets and late prose writers with the passive o
f other intrans.verbs,s ch as
concedere,
permittere,
praecipere,
pron ntiare :
Fatis n mq am concessa(= c i concess m est) moveri Camarina,V.,A.,iii.70
0.(形‡変hるáと‡運命にâっ‰決し‰許 れyåっ¤ / Šナ)
218.REFLEXIVE.Reflexive relations,when emphatic,are expressed as in English :
Omne animal se ips m diligit,C.,Fin.,v.9,24,Every living creat re loves
itself.
B t when the reflexive relation is more general,the passive(middle) is employed
:
lavor,I bathe,I bathe myself.
P rgari [neq iver nt],Cf.L.,xxiv.18,4;they co ld not clear themselves.
C m in mentem venit,ponor ad scribend m,C.,Fam.,ix.15,4; when the notion
strikes me,I set myself to writing.(気N向a¤ときに、私の名前N使Mれ‰aる )
NOTE.Some of these verbs approach the deponents,in that the reflexive me
aning of the passive extends also to some active forms;th s,from
vehor,I ride,we get the form
vehens,riding(rare) :
Ad lescentiam per medias la des q asi q adrigis vehentem,C.,Br.,97,331.(青春時代‡称賛
219.As the active is often sed to express what the s bject s ffers or ca ses to
be done,so the passive in its reflexive (middle) sense is often sed to express
an action which the s bject s ffers or ca ses to be done to itself :
trahor,I let myself be dragged;
tondeor,I have myself shaved.
D os Mysos [ins isti] in c le m,Cf.C.,Q.F.,1.2,2,5;yo sewed two Mysians
into a sack(had them sewn).(君はミ シé人‡二人袋詰 の刑にし¤)
Sine gemit ad r nt r,C.,T sc.,v.27.77;they let themselves be b rned wit
ho t a moan.
Dir it,aedificat,H.,Ep.,1.i,100;he is p lling down,he is b ilding.
Ipse docet q id agam; fas est et ab hoste doceri,Ov.,M.,iv.428;he himsel
f teaches (me) what to do;it is(b t) right to let oneself be ta ght even by an e
nemy(to take a lesson from a foe).
220.DEPONENT.The Deponent is a passive form which has lost,in most instances,its
passive(or reflexive) signification.It is commonly translated as a transitive o
r intransitive active :
hortor,I am exhorting(trans.);
morior,I am dying(intrans.).
NOTES.1.A n mber of intrans.verbs show also a Perfect Part.passive sed
actively;not,however,in classical prose combined with esse to take the place of
the reg lar Perfect.On the se of s ch participles as s bstantives,see 167,N.1.
Q id ca sae excogitari potest,c r te la t m vol erit,cenat m nol erit oc
cidere ? C.,Dei.,7,20.(ÿ y理由N考hられるとaþのèしょþå、王は}y¤‡入浴後に殺 þと
2.Many verbs show both active and deponent forms side by side.In this case the a
ctive forme belong more often to early a thors.See 163-167.
[154 TENSES.]
221.RECIPROCAL.--Reciprocal relations("one another") are expressed by inter,amon
g,and the personal prono ns,nos, s;vos,yo ;se,themselves.
Inter se amant,They love one another.
REMARKS.--1.Combinations of
alter alter m,ali s ali m, terq e alter m,and the like,also often give t
he reciprocal relation : sometimes there is a red ndancy of expression.
Placet Stoicis homines homin m ca sa esse generatos, t ipsi inter se ali
i aliis prodesse possent,C.,Off.,1.7,22;it is a tenet of the Stoics that men are
bro ght into the world for the sake of men,to be a blessing to one another.
2.Later writers se
invicem or
m t o,
inter se,
vicissim;
and early Latin shows occasionally
terq e
tr mq e.
Q ae omnia h c spectant, t invicem ardenti s diligam s,¥PLIN.,Ep.,vii.20,7
;all these things look to o r loving one another more fervently.
Uterq e triq est cordi,TER.,Ph.,800;either is dear to other.
TENSES.
222.The Tenses express the relations of time,embracing :
1.The stage of the action(d ration in time).
2.The period of the action(position in time).
The first tells whether the action is going on,or finished. The second tells whe
ther the action is past,present,or f t re.
Both these sets of relations are expressed by the tenses of the Indicative or De
clarative mood less clearly by the S bj nctive.
223.There are six tenses in Latin;
1.The Present,denoting contin ance in the present.
2.The F t re,denoting contin ance in the f t re.
3.The Imperfect,denoting contin ance in the past.
4.The Perfect,denoting completion in the present.
5.The F t re Perfect,denoting completion in the f t re.
6.The Pl perfect,denoting completion in the past.
224.An action may f rther be regarded simply as attained,witho t reference to it
s contin ance or completion.Contin ance and completion req ire a point of refere
nce for definition;attainment does not.This gives rise to the aoristic or indefi
nite stage of the action,which has no especial tenseform.
[TABLE OF TEMPORAL RELATIONS.155]
It is expressed by the Present tense for the present; by the F t re and F t re P
erfect tenses for the f t re; and by the Perfect tense for the past.
Of especial importance are the Indefinite or Historical Present and the Indefini
te or Historical Perfect(Aorist),which differ materially in syntax from the Defi
nite or P re Present and Perfect.
225.The Tenses are divided into Principal and Historical.The Principal Tenses ha
ve to do with the Present and F t re.The Historical Tenses have to do with the P
ast.
The Present,P re Perfect,F t re,and F t re Perfect are Principal Tenses.
The Historical Present,Imperfect,Pl perfect,and Historical Perfect are Historica
l Tenses.
The Historical Tenses are well embodied in the following distich :
Talia tentabat,sic et tentaverat ante,彼女は以前にも þしâþとl 流刑地に同行しâþ
Vixq e dedit victas tilitate man s.Ov.,Tr.,1.3,87. し‰し し 現実の前に負ÿ‡認
226. Table of Temporal Relations.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
ACTIVE.
Contin ance. Completion.
Attainment.
PEES.scribo, scripsi,
scribo,
I am writing. I have written. I write.
FUT.scribam, scripsero,
scribam(scripsere),
I shall be writing. I shall have written. I shall write.
PAST.scribebam, scripseram,
scripsi,
I was writing. I had written. I wrote.
PASSIVE.
Contin ance. Completion.
Attainment.
PRES.scribit r(epist la),scripta est, scribit r,
The letter is written has been written, is written.
(writing). is written.
FUT.scribet r, scripta erit, scribet
r,
The letter will be will have been, will be
written.
written(writing). will be written.
PAST.scribebat r, scripta erat scripta
est,
The letter was writ- had been written, was written,
ten(writing). was written.
[156 PRESENT TENSE.]
REMARK.The English passive is ambig o s.The same form is c rrently sed for cont
in ance,attainment,and completion.The context alone can decide.A convenient test
is the s bstit tion of the active.
{ Contin ance,Some one was writing a let
ter.
A letter was written : { Completion,Some one had written a letter.
{ Attainment,Some one wrote a letter.
Present Tense.
227.The Present Tense is sed as in English of that which is going on now(Specif
ic Present),and of statements that apply to all time,(Universal Present).
Specific Present :
A rib s teneo l p m,TER.,Ph.,506;I am holding a wolf by the ears.(絶体絶命è}る)
Universal Present :
Probitas la dat r et alget,J v.,1.74;honesty is bepraised and freees.(正直に生き‰も
D lce et decor m est pro patria mori,H.,O.,iii.2,13;sweet and seemly 'ti
s to die for fatherland.(祖国の¤ に死ぬáとは甘美è}り誉è}る)
So reg larly of the q oted views of a thors,the inscriptions of books,etc.:
De i ven m amore scribit Alcae s,C.,T sc.,iv.33,71;Alcae s writes concer
ning the love of yo ths.éÿ スl前 世紀Zス スmN少年に対する愛にòa‰書a‰aる
NOTES.1.The Specific Pr.is often to be translated by the English Progressive Pre
sent.The Universal Pr.is Aoristic,tr e at any point of time.
2.As contin ance involves the notion of incompleteness the Pr.(see 233) is sed
of attempted and intended action(Present of Endeavor努力の現在).B t on acco nt of the do ble
e of the Pr.this signification is less prominent and less important than in the
Impf .Do not mistake the Endeavor which lies in the verb for the Endeavor which
lies in the tense.
Peric l m vitant,C.,Rosc.Am.,1.1;they are trying to avoid danger.
In the example sometimes cited :
Q int s frater T sc lan m venditat,C.,Att.,1.14,7; Brother Q int s is "t
rying to sell" his T sc lan villa;
venditare itself means to offer for sale.Translate : intends to offer fo
r sale,if the notion lies in the Tense.
3.The Pr.when sed with a negative often denotes Resistance to Press re(233);thi
s is,however,colloq ial :
Tace:non taceo,PL.,Cas.,826;keep q iet! I WON'T.
4.The ambig ity of o r English passive often s ggests other translations.Use and
Wont make Law;hence the freq ent inference that what is done is what o ght to b
e done;what is not done is not to be done :
(De s) nec bene promeritis capit r,nec tangit r ira,LUCR.,ii.651;God is
not to be inveigled by good service,nor to ched by anger.神は人間の善行にâっ‰も怒りにâっ‰
228.The Present Tense is sed more rarely than in English in anticipation of the
f t re,chiefly in compo nd sentences :
Si vincim s,omnia t ta er nt,S.,C.,58,9;if we conq er(= shall conq er) e
verything will be safe.
Anteq am ad sententiam redeo de me pa ca dicam,C.,Cat.,iv.10,20;before I
ret rn to the s bject,I will say a few things of myself .
[IMPERFECT TENSE.157]
Imperfect Tense.
231.The Imperfect Tense denotes contin ance in the past:
p gnabam,I was fighting.
The Imperfect is employed to represent manners,c stoms,sit ations; to describe a
nd to partic larise.A good example is TER.,And.,74 ff.
SI. primo haec p dice vitam parce ac d riter agebat、シ ¥ の女も最初はòòXしく
[158 IMPERFECT TENSE.]
The Imperfect and the Historical Perfect serve to ill strate one another.The Imp
erfect dwells on the process; the Historical Perfect states the res lt.The Imper
fect co nts o t the items; the Historical Perfect gives the s m. A good example
is NEP.,ii.i,3.
232.The two tenses are often so combined that the general statement is given by
the Historical Perfect,the partic lars statement is given by the Historical Perf
ect,the partic lars of the action by the Imperfect :
(Verres) in for m venit;ardebant oc li;toto ex ore cr delitas eminebat,
C.,Verr.,v.62,161;Verres came into the for m,his eyes were blaaing,cr elty was
standing o t from his whole co ntenance.
233.The Imperfect is sed of attempted and interr pted,intended and expected act
ions(Imperfect of Endeavor).It is the Tense of Disappointment and(with the negat
ive) of Resistance to Press re.(Mere negation is reg larly Perfect.)
C riam relinq ebat,TAC.,Ann.,ii.34,1; He was for leaving the senate-ho s
e.
[Lex] abrogabat r,Cf.L.,xxxiv.i,7;the law was to be abrogated.
Sim l ostendebat r(an attempt was made to show) q omodo constit tionem r
eperiri oporteret,[C.] ad Her.,ii.i,2.(問題の状態‡見òÿる方法‡明らåにする)
Dicebat(positive) meli s q am scripsit(negative) Hortensi s, C.,Or.,38,1
32;Hortensi s spoke better than he wrote.
Adit m non dabat,NEP.,iv.3,3;he WOULD not grant access(dedit,DID not).Se
e also MART.,xi.105.
NOTES.1.The Impf.as the Tense of Evol tion is a Tense of Vision.B t in English,I
mpf.and Hist.Pf.coincide;hence the vario s translations to p t the reader in the
place of the spectator.
2.The contin ance is in the mind of the narrator;it has nothing to do with the a
bsol te d ration of the action.The mind may dwell on a rapid action or h rry ove
r a slow one.With definite n mbers,however large,the Hist.Pf.m st be sed, nless
there is a notion of contin ance into another stage(overlapping).
(Gorgias) cent m et novem vixit annos,QUINT.,iii.i,9;Gorgias lived one h
ndred and nine years.
Bienni m ibi perpet om misera ill m t li,TER.,Hec.,87;I bore him there -
poor me !.- for two long years together.
3.As the Tense of Disappointment,the Impf.is occasionally sed,as in Greek,to ex
press a startling appreciation of the real state of things(Imperfect of Awakenin
g). Greek infl ence is not nlikely.
T aderas,TER.,Ph.,858;(so it t rns o t that) yo were here(all the time
).
Peream male si non optim m erat,H.,S.,ii.i,6;perdition catch me if that
was not the best co rse(after all)(595).( れN最善èyåっ¤ら’じ に死 èもaa →きっと
Hence the modal se of debebam and poteram(254,R.2).
234.The Imperfect is sed as the English Pl perfect,which often takes a progress
ive translation;especially with
iam,
iam di ,
iam d d m,
[PERFECT TENSE.159]
Iam d d m tibi adversabar,PL.,Men.,420;I had long been opposing yo .
(Archias) domicili m Romae m ltos iam annos [habebat], Cf.C.,Arch.,4,7;A
rchias had been domiciled at Rome now these many years.(定住し‰aる)
REMARK.As the Hist.Pr.is sed in lively narrative,so the Hist.Inf.is sed in liv
ely description,parallel with the Imperfect(647).
Perfect Tense.
The Perfect Tense has two distinct ses :
1.P re Perfect. 2.Historical Perfect(Aor
ist).
1.PURE PERFECT.
235.The P re Perfect Tense expresses completion in the Present,and hence is some
times called the Present Perfect.
1.The P re Perfect differs from the Historical Perfect,in that the P re Perfect
gives from the point of view of the Present an instantaneo s view of the develop
ment of an action from its origin in the Past to its completion in the Present,t
hat is,it looks at both ends of an action,and the time between is regarded as a
Present.The Historical Perfect obliterates the intervening time and contracts be
ginning and end into one point in the Past.
2.An intermediate sage is that in which the Perfect denotes an action in the Pa
st(Historical),whose effect is still in force(P re).
236.Accordingly,the Perfect is sed :
1 .Of an action that is now over and gone.
Vixim s,C.,Fam.,xiv.4,5;we have lived(life for s has been}.
Fili m nic m habeo,immo hab i,TER.,Hea t.,94;I have an only son nay,hav
e had an only son.
Tempera q id faci nt : hanc volo,te vol i,MART.,vi.40,4;what difference
times make !(Time is) I want HER,(Time HAS BEEN) I wanted YOU.
2.Far more freq ently of the present res lt of a more remote action(res lting co
ndition) :
Eq m et m l m Br ndisii tibi reliq i,C.,Fam.,xvi.9,3;I have left a hors
e and m le for yo at Br nd si m(they are still there).
Perdidi spem q a me oblectabam,PL.,R d.,222;I've lost the hope with whic
h I entertained myself.
Act mst,peristi,TER.,E n.,54; it is all over; yo 're ndone.
REMARK.--The P re Pf.is often translated by the English Present :
novi,I have become acq ainted with,I know;
memini,I have recalled,.I remember;
odi,I have conceived a hatred of,I hate;
cons evi,I have made it a r le,I am acc stomed,etc.
[160 HISTORICAL PERFECT.]
Oder nt hilarem tristes tristemq e iocosi,H.,Ep.,1.18,89; the long-faced
hate the lively man,the jokers hate the long-faced man.
B t the Aorist force is sometimes fo nd :
Tace,inq it,ante hoc novi q am t nat s es,PHAED.,v.g,4;silence,q oth he
,I knew this ere that(=before) yo were born.
NOTE.The Pf.is sed of that which has been and shall be(Sententio s or Gnomic Pe
rfect,242,N.1),b t s ally in poetry,from CATULLUS on,and freq ently with an ind
efinite adjective or adverb of n mber or a negative.It is seldom an Aorist(Greek
).
Evertere domos totas optantib s ipsis di faciles,J v.,x.7;whole ho ses a
t the masters'own req est the(too) compliant gods overt rn.
Nemo repente f it torpissim s,J v.,11.83;none of a s dden(hath ever) rea
ch(ed) the depth of baseness.
237.As the Present stands for the F t re,so the Perfect stands for the F t re Pe
rfect.
(Br t s) si conservat s erit,vicim s,C.,Fam.,xii.6,2;Br t s ! if HE is s
aved,we are victorio s,we(shall) have gained the victory.
238. habeo or teneo,I hold,I have,with the Acc sative of the Perfect Particip
le Passive,
is not a mere circ mloc tion for the Perfect,b t lays pec liar stress on the mai
ntenance of the res lt.
Habeo stat t m,Cf.C.,Verr.,iii.41,95;I have resolved,and hold to my reso
l tion.
Perspect m habeo,Cf.C.,Fam.,iii.10,7;I have perceived,and I have f ll in
sight.
Exc sat m habeas me rogo,ceno domi,MART.,ii.79,2;I pray yo have me exc
sed,I dine at home.
2.HISTORICAL PERFECT.
239.The Historical or Indefinite Perfect(Aorist) states a past,action,witho t re
ference to its d ration,simply as a thing attained.
Milo dom m venit,calceos et vestimenta m tavit,pa lisper commorat s est,
C.,Mil.,10,28; Milo came home,changed shoes and garments,tarried a little while.
(Gorgias) cent m et novem vixit annos,QUINT.,iii.i,9(233,N.2).
Veni,vidi,vici,SUET.,I l.,37;I came,saw,overcame.
NOTE.The Pf.,as the "short hand " for the Pl pf.,is mainly post-Ciceronian,b t b
egins with CAESAR.It is never common:
s periorib s dieb s nona Caesaris legio castra eo loco pos it, CAES.,B.C
.,iii.66,2.
240.The Historical Perfect is the great narrative tense of the Latin lang age,an
d is best st died in long connected passages,and by caref l comparison with the
Imperfect.See C.,Off.,iii.27,100;T sc.,1.2,4.
[PLUPERFECT TENSE-FUTURE TENSE.161]
Pl perfect Tense.
241.The Pl perfect denotes Completion in the Past,and is sed of an action that
was completed before another was beg n.It is,so to speak,the Perfect of the Impe
rfect.Hence it is sed :
1.Of an action j st concl ded in the past.
Modo Caesarem regnantem videram s,C.,Ph.,ii.42,108;we had j st seen Caes
ar on the throne.
2.Of an action that was over and gone.
F erat inimic s,C.,Red.in Sen.,10,26;he had been my enemy.
3.Of a res lting condition in the past.
Massilienses portas Caesari cla serant,CAES.,B.C.,1.34,4;the Marseillese
had sh t their gates against Caesar.(Their gates were sh t.)
REMARK.When the Pf.of Res lting Condition is translated by an English Pr.(236,2,
R.),the Pl pf.is translated by an English Imperfect :
noveram,I had become acq ainted with,I knew;
memineram,I remembered;
oderam,I hated;
cons everam,I was acc stomed,etc.
NOTES.1 .Not nfreq ently in early Latin,rarely in classical prose,b t more ofte
n in the poets,the Pl pf.seems to be sed as an Aorist;so very often
dixerat : Nil eq idem tibi abst li.
EV.At ill d q od tibi abst leras cedo(175,6), PL.,A l.,635.(何も盗 èはaya }、
Non s m ego q i f eram,PROP.,1.12,11.See Ov.,Tr.,iii.ii,25.
2.The Periphrastic Pl pf.with habeo corresponds to the Perfect(238).It is rare,a
nd shows two forms,one with the Imperfect and one with the Pl pf.,the latter bei
ng post-classical.
Eq itat m,q em ex omni provincia coact m habebat,praemittit.CAES.,B.G.,1
.15,1.
M ltor m a res illa ling a attonitas hab erat,VAL.M.,iii.3.(áの言葉に多くの人の耳N
F t re Tense.
242.The F t re Tense denotes Contin ance in the F t re :
scribam,I shall be writing.
The F t re Tense is also sed to express indefinite action in the F t re :
scribam,I shall write.
REMARKS.1.In s bordinate cla ses the Latin lang age is more exact than the Engli
sh in the expression of f t re relations.
Donec eris felix,m ltes n merabis amicos,Ov.,Tr.,1.9,5;so long as yo shall
be(are) happy,yo will co nt many friends.
2.Observe especially the verbs volo,I will,and poss m,I can.
Odero si potero; si non,invit s amabo,Ov.,Am.,iii.ii,35;I will hate if I sha
ll be able(can);if not,I shall love against my will.
[162 FUTURE PERFECT TENSE.]
Q i adipisci veram gloriam volet,i stitiae f ngat r officiis, C.,Off.,ii.13,
43; whoso shall wish to obtain tr e glory,let him discharge the calls of j stice
.
3.The F t.is often sed in concl sions,especially in CICERO :
S nt illa sapientis;aberit igit r a sapiente aegrit do,C.,T sc.,iii.8,18.(áれらも賢者のも
NOTES.1.The F t.is sed sometimes as a gnomic(236,N.) tense :
Ha t fac l femina inveniet r bona,AFR.,7; nneth(= neath= hardly) a woman sh
all be fo nd that's good.(fac l=facile)
Et tremet sapiens et dolebit,et expallescet,SEN.,E.M.,71,29.2.
Observe the(principally comic) se of the F t re to indicate likelihood :
Verb m hercle hoc ver m erit,TER.,E n.,732;this will be God's own tr th.
243.The F t re is sed in an imperative sense,as in English,chiefly in familiar
lang age.
T nihil dices,H.,A.P.,385;yo will(are to) say nothing(do yo say nothi
ng).
C m volet accedes,c m te vitabit abibis,Ov.,A.A.,ii.529;when she wants y
o ,approach;and when she avoids yo ,begone,sir.
Non me appellabis,si sapis,PL.,Most.,515;
see C.,Fam.,v.12,10.Compare tet r and tat r,CORN.,ii.3,5.
Similar is the F t re in Asseverations(comic).
Ita me amabit I ppiter,PL.,Trin.,447;so help me God !
F t re Perfect Tense.
244.The F t re Perfect is the Perfect,both P re and Historical,transferred to th
e f t re,and embraces both completion and attainment:
fecero,TER.,Ph.,882;I shall have done it,or I shall do it(once for all);
videro,TER.,Ad.,538;I will see to it;
profecerit,C.,Fin.,iii.4,14; it will prove profitable.
REMARKS.--1.Hence,when the Pf.is sed as a Pr.,the F t.Pf.is sed as a F t re :
novero,I shall know;
cons evero,I shall be acc stomed;
odero,si potero,Ov.,Am.,iii.ii,35(242,R.2).
2.In s bordinate sentences,the Latin lang age is more exact than the English in
the se of the F t.Perfect;hence,when one action precedes another in the f t re,
the action that precedes is expressed by the F t.Perfect.
Q i prior strinxerit ferr m,ei s victoria erit,L.,xxiv.38,5;who first dr
aws the sword,his shall be the victory.
3.The F t.Pf.is freq ently sed in
volo,I will;
nolo,I will not;
poss m,I can;
licet,it is left free;
libet,it is agreeable;
placet,it is the pleas re;
whereas the English idiom familiarly employs the Present.
Si pot ero,faciam vobis satis,C.,Br.,5,21; if I can,I shall satisfy yo .
[PERIPHRASTIC TENSES.163]
4.The F t.Pf.in both cla ses denotes sim ltaneo s accomplishment or attainment;o
ne action involves the other.
Q i Antoni m oppresserit,is bell m confecerit,C.,Fam.,x.19,2; he who sha
ll have cr shed(cr shes) Antony,will have finished(will finish) the war.
[Ea] vitia q i f gerit,is omnia fere vitia vitaverit,C.,Or.,69,231;he wh
o shall have escaped these fa lts,will have avoided almost all fa lts.
Sometimes,however,the first seems to denote antecedence,the second finality.An I
mpv.is often sed in the first cla se.
Imm ta(verbor m collocationem),perierit tota res,C.,Or.,70,232; change t
he arrangement of the words,the whole thing falls dead.
NOTES.1.The independent se of the F t.Pf.is characteristic of Comedy,b t occ rs
occasionally later in familiar style.Sometimes it gives an air of positiveness
:
Bene merenti bene prof erit,male merenti par erit,PL.,Capt.,315;good des
ert shall have good iss e;ill desert shall have its d e.
Ego cras hic ero : cras hab ero, xor,ego tamen convivi m,PL.,Cas.,786.
N sq am facili s hanc miserrimam vitam vel s stentabo vel abiecero,¥C.,Att
.,iii.19,1.See also C.,Ac.,ii.44,135;L.,i.58,10.
2.The Periphrastic F t.Pf.with habeo is rare.It corresponds to the Pf.and Pl per
fect.
Q od si feceris,me maximo beneficio devinct m habebis,C.,Att.,xvi.16 B.9
.
245.As the F t re is sed as an Imperative,so the F t re Perfect approaches the
Imperative.
De te t videris;ego de me ipse profitebor,C.,Ph.,ii.46,118;do yo see t
o yo rself;I myself will define my position.
NOTE.This is confined in CICERO almost entirely to
videris,
which is s spicio sly like the familiar Greek f t re opsei,and is sed in the sa
me way.
Periphrastic Tenses.
246.The Periphrastic Tenses are formed by combining the vario s tenses of esse,t
o be,with participles and verbal adjectives.See 129.
I.PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION-ACTIVE VOICE.
247.The Periphrastic Tenses of the Active are chiefly combinations of esse and i
ts forms with the so-called F t re Participle Active.The F t re Participle is a
verbal adjective denoting capability and tendency.Compare amator and amat r s.Th
e translation is very vario s :
1.Script r s s m,I am abo t to write,I am to write,I p rpose to write,I
am likely to write.
2.Script r s eram,I was abo t to write,etc.
[164 PERIPHRASTIC TENSES.]
3.Script r s f i,I have been or was abo t to write(often = I sho ld
have written).
4.Script r s f eram,I had been abo t to write,etc.
5.Script r s ero,I shall be abo t to write,etc.
6.Script r s f ero,I shall have made p my mind to write,etc.(of
co rse very rare).
1.Fiet ill d q od f t r m est,C.,Div.,ii.8,21;what is to be,will be.
2.[Rex] non interf t r s navali certamini erat,L.,xxxvi.43,9;the king di
d not intend to be present at the naval combat.
3.Fascis ipsi ad me delat ri f er nt,C.,Ph.,xiv.6,15;they themselves wer
e ready to tender(提供) the fasces to me.
Deditos ltimis cr ciatib s adfect ri f er nt,L.,xxi.44,4;they wo ld hav
e p t the s rrendered to extreme tort res.
4.Maior Romanor m gratia f it q am q anta f t ra Carthaginiensi m f erat
, L.,xxii.22,19;the Romans' credit for this was greater than the Carthaginians'
wo ld have been.
5.Eor m ap d q os aget a t erit act r s,mentes sens sq e deg stet, C.,Or
.,1.52,223;he m st taste-and-test the state of mind of those before whom he will
plead or will have to plead.
6.(Sapiens) non vivet,si f erit sine homine vict r s,SEN.,E.M.,9,17; The
wise man will not contin e to live,if he finds that he is to live witho t h man
society.(The only example cited,and that do btf l.)
REMARKS.1.The forms with s m,eram,and the corresponding S bjv.forms with sim,ess
em,are m ch more common than those with f i,etc.,probably for e phonic reasons.
2.The S bjv.and Inf.
script r s sim,
essem,
f erim,
f issem,
script r m esse
f isse,
are of great importance in s bordinate cla ses.(656.)
NOTES.1.The se of
forem
for essem appears first in SALLUST,b t is not ncommon in LIVY,and occ rs sporad
ically later.
Fore
for esse is post-classical.
Dicit se venisse q aesit m pacem an bell m agitat r s foret,S.,I g.,109,
2.(自分は彼N戦争と平和のÿÿら‡考h‰aるå尋ねる¤ に来¤)
2.The periphrastic se of the Pr.Part,with forms of esse is rare,and in most cas
es do btf l,as the q estion always arises whether the Part,is not rather a virt
al s bstantive or adjective.So with the not ncommon
t sis sciens (TER.,And 508)
of the Comic Poets.The effect of this periphrasis is to emphasise the contin anc
e.
Nemo mq am tam s i despiciens(despiser of self,self-depreciator) f it q
in speraret meli s se posse dicere,C.,Or.,ii.89,364.(誰も自分NもっとþXく話•るâþにyると
Potential S bj nctive.
257.1.The Potential S bj nctive represents the opinion of the speaker as an opin
ion.The tone varies from vag e s rmise to moral certainty,from " may " and " mig
ht " to " m st." The negative is the negative of the Indicative,non.
2.The Potential of the Present or F t re is the Present or Perfect S bj nctive.T
he verification is in s spense,and so f t re;the action may be present or f t re
: with Perfect sometimes past.
Velim,I sho ld wish;
nolim,I sho ld be nwilling;
malim,I sho ld prefer;
dicas,yo wo ld say;
credas,yo wo ld believe,yo m st believe;
dicat,dixerit aliq is,some one may ndertake to say,go so far as to say.
Caedi discip los minime velim,QUINT.,1.3,13; I sho ld by no means like p
pils to be flogged.(生徒N ¤れるáとには反対ÿ discip los 異文discentes)
T Platonem nec nimis valde nec nimis saepe la daveris,C.,Leg.,iii.i,1;y
o cant praise Plato too m ch nor too often.
NOTES.1.The Pf .S bjv.as a Potential seems to have been very rare in early Latin
.CICERO extended the sage slightly and employed more persons;th s First Person
Pl.and Second Sing,occ r first in CICERO.From CICERO'S time the sage spreads,pe
rhaps nder the infl ence of the Greek Aorist.It was always rare with Deponents
and Passives.Another view regards this dixerit as a Fnt.Pf .Indicative.
2.The Potential S bjv.is sometimes explained by the ellipsis of an Ideai or,of a
n
[OPTATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE.171]
Unreal Conditional Protasis.B t the free Potential S bjv.differs from an ellipti
cal conditional sentence in the absence of definite ellipsis,and hence of defini
te translation.Compare the two sentences above with :
E m q i palam est adversari s facile cavendo(si caveas) vitare possis, C
.,Verr.,1.15,39;an open adversary yo can readily avoid by ca tion(if yo are ca
tio s).
Nil ego cont lerim i c ndo san s(= d m san s ero) amico,H.,S.,1.5,44;the
re is na ght I sho ld compare to an agreeable friend,while I am in my so nd sens
es.
3.The Potential S bjv.,as a modified form of the Indic.,is often fo nd where the
Indic.wo ld be the reg lar constr ction.So after q anq am(607,R.i).
258.The Potential of the Past is the Imperfect S bj nctive,chiefly in the Ideal
Second Person,an imaginary " yo ."
Crederes victos,L.,ii.43,9;yo wo ld,might,have tho ght them beaten.
Ha d facile discerneres tr m Hannibal imperatori an exercit i carior es
set,L.,xxi.4,3;not readily co ld yo have decided whether Hannibal was dearer to
general or to army.
Miraret r q i t m cerneret,L.,xxxiv.9,4;any one who saw it then m st hav
e been astonished.
Vellem,I sho ld have wished;
nollem,I sho ld have been nwilling;
mallem,I sho ld have preferred(it is too late).
NOTES.1.With vellem,nollem,mallem,the inference points to non-f lfilment of the
wish in the Present(261,R.);with other words there is no s ch inference.
2.The Unreal of the Present and the Ideal of the Past coincide.What is nreal of
a real person is simply ideal of an imaginary person.The Impf.is sed as the te
nse of Description.
The Aoristic Pf .S bjv.and the Pl pf.S bjv.are rarely sed as the Ideal of the P
ast:
Hi ambo salt s(林道) ad Lib os Gallos ded xerint(var.ded xissent),¥L.,xxi.38,7.(áの
Ea q a minim m credidisset(cons l) resistebant hostes,L.,xxxii.17,4.(思aもâらyaと
259.The Mood of the Q estion is the Mood of the expected or anticipated answer(4
62).Hence the Potential S bj nctive is sed in q estions which serve to convey a
negative opinion on the part of the speaker.
Q is d bitet( nemo d bitet) q in in virt te divitiae sint ? C.,Parad.,vi
.2,48;who can do bt that tr e wealth consists in virt e ?(No one.)
Q is t lerit Gracchos de seditione q erentes ? J v.,ii.24;who co ld bear
the Gracchi complaining of rebellion ?(No one.)
Ap d exercit m f eris ? C.,M r.,9,21;can yo have been with the army ?
Hoc tant m bell m q is mq am arbitraret r ab no imperatore confici pos
se? C.,Imp.,ii,31;who wo ld,co ld,sho ld have tho ght that this great war co ld
be bro ght to a close by one general ?
Optative S bj nctive.
260.The S bj nctive is sed as an Optative or wishing mood.
[172 OPTATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE.]
The reg lar negative is
ne.
Non
is sed chiefly to negative a single word;b t very rarely in the classical perio
d.A second wish may be added by
neq e or nec
(reg larly if a positive wish precedes),b t this is also rare in the classical p
eriod,and is denied for CAESAR.
The Pr.and Pf.S bjv.are sed when the decision is in s spense,no matter how extr
avagant the wish;the Impf.and Pl pf.are sed when the decision is adverse.The Pf
.is rare and old.
Stet haec rbs,C.,Mil.,34,93;may this city contin e to stand !
Q od di omen avertant,C.,Ph.,iii.14,35;which omen may the gods avert.
Ita di faxint(= fecerint),PL.,Poen.,911;the gods grant it !
Ne ist c I ppiter optim s maxim s sirit(= siverit <sino) ! L.,xxxiv.24,2
; may J piter,s premely great and good,s ffer it not !
261.The Optative S bj nctive freq ently takes
t(archaic and rare),
tinam,
tinam ne,
tinam non;also
o si,oh if(poetical and very rare);
q i(chiefly in early Latin and in c rses).
Valeas beneq e t tibi sit,PL.,Poen.,912;farewell ! God bless yo !
Utinam modo conata efficere possim,C.,Att.,iv.16; may I b t have it in m
y power to accomplish my endeavo rs.
Utinam reviviscat frater ! GELL.,x.6,2;wo ld that my brother wo ld come
to life again !
Utinam inserere iocos moris esset,QUINT.,ii.10,9; wo ld that it were s
al to introd ce jokes !
Ill d tinam ne vere scriberem,C.,Fam.,v.17,3;wo ld that what I am writi
ng were not tr e !
Utinam s scept s non essem,C.,Att,iii.ii,8; wo ld I had not been born !(
CICERO'S only example of non.)
O mihi praeteritos referat si I ppiter annos,V.,A.,viii.560; if Jove wer
e to bring me back the years that are gone by !
REMARK.For the wish with adverse decision,vellem and mallem (theoretically also
nollem) may be sed with the Impf.and sometimes (especially vellem) with the Pl
pf.S bj nctive.
Vellem adesse posset Panaeti s! C.,T sc.,1.33,81; wo ld that Panaeti s c
o ld be present !
Vellem me ad cenam invitasses,C.,Fam.,xii.4,1;wo ld that yo had invited
ME to yo r dinner-party.
So velim,nolim,etc.,for the simple wish(546,R.2).
T am mihi dari velim eloq entiam,C.,N.D.,ii.59,147;I co ld wish yo r elo
q ence given to me.
NOTES.1.Utinam was perhaps originally an Interrogative,How,pray? If so,it belong
s partly to the potential;hence the freq ent occ rrence of non.
O si(occasionally si,V.,A.,vi.187) introd ces an elliptical conditional
sentence,which is not intended to have an Apodosis.When the Apodosis comes,it ma
y come in a different form;as in the example : V.,A.,viii.560,568.
2.The Impf.S bjv.is occasionally sed in early Latin to give an nreal wish in t
he Past.This is almost never fo nd in the later period.
Utinam te di pri s perderent,q am periisti e patria t a,PL.,Capt.,537.
T nc mihi vita foret,TIB.,1.10,ii.
[OPTATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE.173 ]
262.The Optative S bj nctive is sed in asseverations :
Ita vivam t maximos s mpt s facio,C.,Att.,v.15,2;as I live,I am spendin
g very largely(literally,so may I live as I am making very great o tlay).
Moriar,si magis ga derem si id mihi accidisset,C.,Att.,viii.6,8;may I di
e if I co ld be more glad if that had happened to me.
NOTE.The F t.Indic.in this sense is rare :
Sic me di amab nt t me t ar m miserit mst fort nar m,TER.,Hea t.,463.神々の私]の愛に
263.The S bj nctive is sed as an Imperative :
1.In the First Person Pl ral Present,which has no Imperative form :
Amem s patriam,C.,Sest.,68,143; let s love o r co ntry.
Ne difficilia optem s,C.,Verr.,iv.7,15;let s not desire what is hard to
do.
NOTE.In the First Person Sing lar,the command fades into the wish.
2.In the Second Person.
(a) In the Present chiefly in the Sing lar,and chiefly of an imaginary " yo " :
NOTES.1.This sage with velle seems to have approached often the F t.Pf.in force
.A Pf.Inf.after the Pr.of posse occ rs very rarely :
Non potes probasse n gas,PL.,A l.,828;
see V.,A.,vi.78,and several cases in OVID and MARTIAL.
2.The Pf.Inf.act.(s bj.or obj.) is often fo nd in the poete,especially in elegia
c poetry,as the first word in the second half of a pentameter,where it can hardl
y be disting ished from a Present.This sage may be d e partly to analogy with v
erbs of wishing,partly to the exigencies of the metre,partly to the infl ence of
the Greek Aorist.It m st be disting ished from the normal se of the Perfect :
Q am i vat immites ventos a dire c bantem Et dominam tenero detin isse s
in ! TIB.,1.1,45.(横にyっ‰激しa風の音‡聞きyNらやMらåa胸に妻‡抱く何とaþ喜_â)
3.Noteworthy is the occasional se of
debeo with the Pf.Inf.act.in the sense "m st have":
statim vicisse debeo,C.,Rosc.Am.,23,73; (私の勝ÿは確実ÿっ¤)
debes adnotasse,PLIN.,Ep.,vii.20,6.(}y¤は気 a‰a¤にÿNaya)
(c) In the Passive,the Perfect Infinitive is sed after verbs of Will and Desire
,to denote impatience of anything except entire f lfilment.See 537.
[Patriam] exstinctam c pit.C.,Fin.,iv.24,66;he desires his co ntry blott
ed o t.
Here the Infinitive esse is seldom expressed.
Corinth m patres vestri toti s Graeciae l men exstinct m esse vol er nt,
C.,Imp.,5,11(211,R.6).
NOTE.This sage is common in Comedy and in CICERO,rare,if at all,in CAESAR and S
ALLUST;and later also it is rare,s rviving chiefly in phrases.The principal verb
is volo,less often c pio,very rarely expeto and nolo.
281.THE INFINITIVE AS THE REPRESENTATIVE OF THE INDICATIVE.---As the representat
ive of the Indicative,the
[TENSES OF THE MOODS.181 ]
Infinitive has all its Tenses : Present,Past,F t re,and F t re Periphrastics.
1.The Present Infinitive represents contemporaneo s action -- hence the Present
Indicative after a Principal Tense,and the Imperfect after a Historical Tense :
Dico e m venire, I say that he is coming;
dicebam e m venire, I said that he was coming.
2.The Perfect Infinitive represents Prior Action hence the Perfect and Imperfect
Indicative after a Principal Tense,and the Pl perfect,Imperfect,and Historical
Perfect Indicative after a Historical Tense :
Dico e m venisse,I say that he came,has come, sed to come.
Dixi e m venisse,I said that he had come, sed to come,did come.
NOTE.Memini,I remember,when sed of personal experience,commonly takes the Prese
nt :
T m me regem appellari a vobis memini,n nc tyrann m vocari video, L.,xxx
iv.31,13;I remember being styled by yo a king then,I see that I am called a tyr
ant now.
So also rarely
memoria teneo,
recorder,I remember,I recall,and
f git me,I do not remember.
When the experience is not personal,the ordinary constr ction is followed :
Memineram Mari m ad infimor m homin m misericordiam conf gisse, C.,Sest.
,22,50;I remembered that Mari s had thrown himself on the mercy of a set of low
creat res.
The pec liar constr ction with the Pr.arises from the liveliness of the recollec
tion.When the action is to be regarded as a bygone,the Pf.may be sed even of pe
rsonal experience :
Me memini irat m dominae t rbasse capillos,Ov.,A.A.,ii.169;I remember in
my anger having to sled my sweetheart's hair.
282.The Present Participle active denotes contin ance; the Perfect passive,compl
etion or attainment.
NOTE.The Latin is more exact than the English in the se of the tenses.So the Pf
.Part,is freq ently employed when we se the Present;especially in classical pro
se,with verbs that indicate a condition,mental or physical,where the action of t
he participle is conceived as contin ing p to,and sometimes into,that of the le
ading verb,as
rat s,thinking;
verit s,fearing;
gavis s,rejoicing,etc.
This sage spreads later :
complex s,embracing;
hortat s,exhorting.
283.The F t re Participle(active) is a verbal adjective,denoting capability and
tendency,chiefly employed in the older lang age with s m,I am,as a periphrastic
tense.In later Latin it is sed freely,j st as the Present and Perfect Participl
es,to express s bordinate relations.
NOTES.1.The so-called F t.Part,passive is more properly called the Ger ndive,and
has already been disc ssed(251).
2.The S pine,being witho t tense relations,does not belong here.
[182 SIMPLE SENTENCE EXPANDED.]
[198 PRONOUNS.]
INNER OBJECT.
332.Any verb can take an Acc sative of the inner Object,when that object serves
to define more narrowly or to explain more f lly the contents of the verb.
The most common form of this object is a ne ter prono n or adjective.
The most striking form is the so-called Cognate Acc sative.
333.1.Ne ter Prono ns and Adjectives are often sed to define or modify the s bs
tantive notion that lies in the verb.
Xenophon eadem fere peccat,C.,N.D.,I.12,31;Xenophon makes very m ch the same
mistakes.
Vellem eq idem idem possem gloriari q od Cyr s,C.,Cat.M.,10,32;for my part I
co ld wish that it were in my power to make the same boast as Cyr s.
With trans,verbs an Acc.of the person can be employed besides:
Discip los id n m moneo t praeceptores s os non min s q am ipsa st dia ame
nt,QUINT.,ii.9,1;I give p pils this one piece of advice,that they love their tea
chers no less than their st dies themselves.
REMARKS.1.The sage is best felt by comparing the familiar English it after intr
ans.verbs," to walk it,to foot it," etc.,where " it " represents the s bstantive
that lies in "walk,foot," etc.
2.In many cases the feeling of the case is lost to the conscio sness,so especial
ly with the interrogative
q id,which has almost the force of c r.
Q id rides ? what(la ghter) are yo la ghing = what means yo r la ghter
?
Id nos ad te,si q id velles,venim s,PL.,M.G.,1158;that's why we have com
e to yo ,to see if yo wanted anything.
NOTES.1.With verbs of Emotion this Acc.gives the gro nd of the emotion :
Utr mq e laetor(I have a do ble gladness,I am do bly glad),et sine dolore te
f isse et animo val isse,C.,Fam.,vii.i,1.
Laetae exclamant : venit ! id q od (in this that,for this that) me repente a
spexerant, TER.,Hec.,368.
From this arises the ca sal force of q od,in that beca se.
2.Occasionally,b t at all periods,the relative is sed th s,to facilitate connec
tion with a demonstrative cla se :
Q ae homines arant(what men do in the way of plowing,etc.), navigant,aedific
ant,omnia virt ti parent,S.,C.,2,7.
Id ips m q od maneam in vita(in the very fact of my remaining in life) pecca
re me [existima],C.,Fam.,iv.13,2.
2.Cognate Acc sative.When the dependent word is of the same origin or of kindred
meaning with the verb,it is called the Cognate Acc sative,and s ally has an at
trib te.
[ACCUSATIVE.211]
Faciam t mei memineris d m vitam vivas,PL.,Pers.,494;I'll make yo think of
me the longest day yo live.
Mir m atq e inscit m somniavi somni m,PL.,R d.,597;a marvello s and ncanny d
ream I've dreamed.
I ravi verissim m i s i rand m,C.,Fam.,v.2,7; I swore the tr est of oaths.
REMARK.After the analogy of the Cognate Acc.are many phraseological sages,s ch
as
rem certare,to fight a case;
foed s ferire,to make a treaty(compare,to strike a bargain);
i s respondere,to render an opinion;
ca sam vincere,to win a case,etc.
Also the phrases with ire :
exseq ias ire,to attend a f neral;
infitias ire,to deny,etc.
(malam rem ire,malam cr cem ire Ter.Phor.)
NOTES.1.The omission of the attrib te is fo nd most often in legal phraseology,p
roverbs,and the like :
Maior m nemo servit tem servivit,C.,Top.,6,29;of o r ancestors no one ever s
laved(what yo wo ld call) a slavery.
Si servos f rt m faxit noxiamve noxit,xii.Tab.(十二表法のÿ 番)¥もし奴隷N盗’‡し¤り危
2.When the Cognate Acc.is replaced by a word of similar meaning,b t of a differe
nt root,the effect is m ch the same as when an adjective is employed with the no
rmal Acc sative.This sage,however,is rare,and mainly poetical.
Tertiam iam aetatem hominnm(Nestor) vivebat,C.,Cat.M.,10,31(reading do btf l
).0スÿŠÿはすèにÿ世代‡生き¤
Omne militabit r bell m,H.,Epod.,i,23.}ら る戦aN戦Mれる
3.Interesting extensions are fo nd in the poets,and rarely in prose.
Q i C rios sim lant et Bacchanalia viv nt,J v.,ii.3.厳格yキ ス‡装ayNら、実は女々
N nc Satyr m,n nc agrestem Cyclopa movet r,H.,Ep.,ii.2,125.}る時はサÿ ×ス‡}る時はá
4.Instead of the inner Acc.the Abl.is occasionally fo nd :
lapidib s pl ere,to rain stones;
sang ine s dare,to sweat blood.
Herc lis sim lacr m m lto s dore manavit,C.,Div.,1.34,74; the stat e of Herc
les ran freely with sweat.
5.Verbs of Smell and Taste have the inner Object,which is an extension of the Co
gnate variety.
Piscis sapit ips m mare,Cf.SEN.,N.Q.,iii.18,2;the fish tastes of the very se
a.
Non omnes poss nt olere ng enta exotica,PL.,Most.,42;it is not every one ca
n smell of foreign perf mes.
6.A poetical and post-classical constr ction is that which makes a s bstantival
ne ter adjective the object of a verb.This occ rs chiefly with verbs of so nd :
nec mortale sonans,V.,A.,vi.50;
magna sonat r m,H.,S.,1.4,44.
Yet bolder is
nec vox hominem sonat,V.,A.,1.328.
A verb of sight is fo nd in
tam cernis ac t m,H.,A,1.3 ,26.Cf.d lce ridentem,H.,O.,1.22,23.
Acc sative of Extent.
The Acc sative of Extent has to do with Degree,Space,or Time.
334.The Acc sative of Extent in Degree is confined to ne ter adjectives and pron
o ns sed s bstantively,
m lt m,pl s,tant m,q ant m,etc.
Si me amas tant m q ant m profecto amas,C.,Att.,ii.20,5;if yo love me a
s m ch as in fact yo do love me.
[212 ACCUSATIVE.]
REMARKS.1.The n mber of adjectives and prono ns so sed is large,and in many cas
es the form is felt more as an adverb than as a s bstantive.
2.Here belong the adverbial Acc satives t am,etc.,partem,vicem,which occ r occas
ionally at all periods.
335.The Acc sative of Extent in Space is sed properly only with words that invo
lve a notion of space.When space is not involved in the governing word the idea
of extent is given by the se of per,thro gh.
Trabes,distantes inter se binos pedes,in solo collocant r, CAES.,B.G.,vi
i.23,1;beams two feet apart are planted in the gro nd.
A recta conscientia travers m ng em non oportet discedere, C.Att.,xiii.
20,4(328,b).
Eq ites per oram maritimam dispositi s nt,Cf.CAES.,B.C.,iii.24,4;cavalry
were posted along the sea shore.
Phoebidas iter per Thebas [fecit],NEP.,xvi.i,2;Phoebidas marched thro gh
Thebes.
Milites aggerem lat m pedes trecentos triginta alt m pedes octoginta exs
tr xer nt,CAES.,B.G.,vii.24,1; the soldiers raised an embankment three h ndred a
nd thirty feet wide(and) eighty feet high.
REMARKS.1.The adjectives in most common se with this Acc sative are long s,long
,lat s,wide,alt s,deep,high.Thickness,which was indicated in early times by cras
s s,is expressed by phrases with crassit de.Similarly occ r phrases with magnit
de,longit de,latit de,altit de.Prof nd s,deep,never occ rs with the Acc sative.
2.With abesse and distare,an Abl.of Meas re may also be sed : Milib s pass m q
att or et viginti abesse,CAES.,B.G.,1.41,5;to be twenty-fo r miles from
NOTE.When the point of reference is taken for granted,ab(a) with the Abl.is occa
sionally sed;b t only by CAESAR and LIVY.Here it has been s ggested that ab is
sed adverbially,and the Abl.is one of Meas re.
(Hostes) ab milib s pass m min s d ob s castra pos er nt, CAES.,B.G.,ii
.7,3;the enemy pitched their camp less than two miles off.
336.The Acc sative of Extent in Time accompanies the verb,either with or witho t
per,in answer to the q estion,How long?
D odeq adraginta annos tyrann s Syrac sanor m f it Dionysi s, C.,T sc.,v
.20,57;thirty-eight years was Dionysi s tyrant of Syrac se.
(Gorgias) cent m et novem vixit annos,QUINT.,iii.i,9(233,N.2).
L di per decem dies facti s nt,C.,Cat.,iii.8,20;games were performed for
ten days.
Est mec m per diem tot m,PLIN.,Ep.,1.16,7;he is with me the livelong day
.
Sedet aetern mq e sedebit infelix These s,V.,A.,vi.617;there sits and sh
all forever sit nhappy These s.
[ACCUSATIVE.213]
REMARKS.1.In giving definite n mbers with iam,iam di ,iam d d m,etc.,the Latin o
ften employs the ordinal where the English prefers the cardinal.Compare the Abla
tive of Meas re(403).
Mithridates ann m iam terti m et vicesim m regnat,C.,Imp.,3,7(230).
2.Per with the Acc.is freq ently sed like the Abl.of Time Within Which.
Per illa tempora = illis temporib s,in those times.
So especially with the negative :
N lla res per trienni m nisi ad n t m isti s i dicata est,C.,Verr.,1.5,1
3;no matter was decided d ring(in) the three years except at his beck(同意).
3.With an Aoristie tense the dating point is given by
abhinc,
which s ally precedes the temporal designation.
Abhinc annos fact mst sedecim,PL.,Cas.,39;'twas done sixteen years ago.
Demosthenes abhinc annos prope trecentos f it,C.,Div.,ii.57,118; Demosth
enes lived nearly three h ndred years ago.
The se of an Acc.with an Aoristie tense witho t a dating word,like abhinc,is ve
ry rare and do btf l.CAES.,B.G.,ii.35,4,has been emended.
4.Nat s,old(born),seems to be an exception to R.3,b t it is only an apparent one
,as the dating point is involved in the verb with which it is constr ed.For vari
o s constr ctions with nat s,see 296,R.5.
P er decem annos nat s est,the boy is ten years old.
Q adraginta annos nat s regnare [coepit],C.,Div.,1.23,46;(he was) forty
years old(when) he began to reign.
NOTES.1.The se of the indefinite s bstantival adjective is rare.PLAUTUS ses
sempitern m,
VERGIL introd ces
aetern m(see example above),
while
perpet m
does not appear ntil APULEIUS.
2.Here belong the phraseological ses
id temporis,
id aetatis,
which belonged to the pop lar speech,and never became firmly rooted in literat r
e.Th s CICERO rarely ses them,except in his earliest works and his letters.
Id gen s
is sed after the same general analogy,b t is not temporal.This occ rs in CICERO
b t once,Att,xiii.12,3.CAESAR never ses any of these forms.
3.Poetical and rare is the extension which makes the Acc sative of Extent the s
bject of a passive verb.
N nc tertia vivit r aetas,Ov.,M.,xii.188 = n nc tertiam vivit r aetatem.
Tota mihi dormit r hiems,MART.,xiii.59,1 = totam dormio hiemem.
Normally the verb becomes impersonal or is reg larly sed with a proper s bject,
and the Acc sative of Extent is nchanged :
[Bell m] q o d odecim m ann m Italia rebat r,L.,xxvii.39,9.
[218 DATIVE.]
[222 DATIVE.]
meaning as those given.So se miscere,to mingle with;coire,conc rrere,to meet; ve
rbs of contending,as contendere,bellare,p gnare,certare;verbs of disagreement,as
differre,discrepare,distare,dissentire.Here belongs haerere with the Dat.,as V.
,A.,iv.73,which may,however,be a Locative constr ction.
Dative and Verbs Compo nded with Prepositions.
347.Many verbs compo nded with the prepositions
ad,ante,con,in,inter,ob,(post),prae,s b,and s per,
take the Dative,especially in moral relations.
Dative of Possessor.
349.Esse,to be,with the Dative,denotes an inner connection between its s bject a
nd the Dative,and is commonly translated by the verb to have :
[Controversia] mihi f it c m av nc lo t o,C.,Fin.,iii.2,6; I had a debat
e with yo r ncle.
An nescis longas regib s esse man s ? Ov.,Her.,xvi.166;or perhaps yo do
not know that kings have long arms ?
[224 DATIVE.]
Compare
non habet, t p tam s,fort na longas man s,SEN.,E.M.,82,5.
REMARKS.1.The predicate of esse,with the Dat.,is translated in the ordinary mann
er :
Caesar amic s est mihi,Caesar is a friend to me (amic s me s,MY friend,f
riend of MINE).
2.The Dat.is never simply eq ivalent to the Genitive.The Dat.is the Person inter
ested in the Possession,hence the Possession is emphatic;the Gen.characterises t
he Possession by the Possessor,hence the Possessor is emphatic.The Gen.is the pe
rmanent Possessor,or owner; the Dat.is the temporary Possessor.The one may incl
de the other:
Latini conced nt Romam cap t Latio esse,Cf.L.,viii.4,5; the Latins conce
de that Lati m has its capital in ROME.(Latii: that LATIUM'S capital is Rome.)
3.Possession of q alities is expressed by esse with in and the Abl.,by
inesse with Dat.or with in,or by some other t rn :
F it mirific s in Crasso p dor,C.,Or.,1.26,122(346).
Cimon habebat satis eloq entiae,NEP.,v.2,1;Cimon had eloq ence eno gh.SA
LLUST introd ces the Dat.also for these relations.
4.Abesse and deesse,to be it-anting,to fail,take also the Dat.of Possessor.
5.The Dat.of the person is reg lar with the phrases nomen(cognomen) est,indit m
est,etc.Here the name is in the Nom.in apposition to nomen,in the best sage.Rar
ely in CICERO,once in SALLUST,never in CAESAR,more often in early and post-Cicer
onian Latin,the name is fo nd in the Dat.; either by attraction with the Dat.of
the person or on the analogy of the Do ble Dative.The Appositional Genitive (361
) is first cited from VELLEIUS.The ndeclined Nom.after an active verb appears f
irst in OVID;then in SUETONIUS.
Fons aq ae d lcis,c i nomen Areth sa est,C.,Verr.,iv.53,118;a fo ntain o
f sweet water named Areth sa.
Apollodor s,c i Pyragro cognomen est,C.,Verr.,iii.31,74;Apollodor s,s rn
amed Pyragr s(firetongs).
Nomen Arct ro est mihi,PL.,R d.,5;my name is Arct r s.
Tibi nomen insano pos ere,H.,S.,ii.3,47;they called yo " cracked."
[Samnites] Malevent m,c i n nc rbi Benevent m nomen est,perf ger nt, L.
,ix.27,14;the Samnites fled to Malevent m(Ilcome),a city which now bears the nam
e Benevent m(Welcome).
Aetas,c i fecim s 'a rea' nomen,Ov.,M.,xv.96;the age to which we have gi
ven the name 'Golden.'
Dative of Personal Interest.
In its widest sense this category incl des the Dative with Transitive and Intran
sitive Verbs,already treated,and the Ethical Dative,Dative of Reference,and Dati
ve of Agent,to follow.In its narrower sense it applies only to persons or their
eq ivalents who are essential to,b t not necessarily participant in or affected
by,the res lt,and differs from'the Dative with Transitive and Intransitive Verbs
,in that the connection with the verb is m ch more remote.
[DATIVE.225]
350.1.The person from whose point of view the action is observed,or towards whom
it is directed,may be p t in the Dative.A convenient b t not exact translation
is often the English Possessive(Dativ s Energic s).
Ei libenter me ad pedes abieci,Cf.C.,Att.,viii.9,1;I gladly cast myself
at his feet.
In conspect m venerat hostib s,HIRT.,viii.27;he had come into the sight
of the enemy.
T o viro oc li dolent,Cf.TER.,Ph.,1053; yo r h sband's EYES ache; nearer
,yo r h sband has a pain in his eyes(t i viri oc li,yo r HUSBAND'S eyes).
NOTE.This Dative is not common in CICERO and is not cited for early Latin.B t it
becomes common from LIVY on.With Relative and Demonstrative prono ns it is ofte
n sed by Ciceronian and A g stan poets.In the case of many of the examples we h
ave parallel constr ctions with the Gen.of Possessor,which is the normal sage.
2.The Dative is sed of the person in whose hono r,or interest,or advantage,or f
or whose pleas re,an action takes place,or the reverse (Dativ s Commodi et Incom
modi) :
Cons rrexisse omnes [Lysandro] dic nt r,C.,Cat.M.,18,63; all are said to
have risen p together in hono r of Lysander.
[Deo] nostra altaria f mant,V.,EC.,1.43; o r altars smoke in hono r of t
he god.
Si q id peccat mihi peccat,TER.,Ad.,115;if he commits a fa lt,it is at m
y cost.
Ethical Dative.
351.The Ethical Dative indicates special interest in the action.It may be called
the Dative of Feeling,and its se is confined to the personal prono ns(Dativ s
Ethic s.)
T mihi Antonii exemplo isti s a daciam defendis? C.,Verr.,iii.91,213;do
yo defend me(to my face) by Antony's example that fellow's a dacity ?
Ecce tibi Sebos s! C.,Att.,ii.15;here's yo r Sebos s !
" She's a civil modest wife,and one,I tell yo ,that will not miss <yo > morning
nor evening prayer." SHAKESPEARE. ザŠの陽気y女房¤ÿ
NOTES.1.This is essentially a colloq ialism,common in comedy,especially with
ecce and em,(here is)
freq ent in CICERO'S letters,occasionally fo nd elsewhere.In poetry,notably A g
stan,it is almost wholly absent;b t there are several cases in HORACE.CICERO doe
s not se
em.
LIVY does not se ecce.
2.Especially to be noted is
sibi velle,to want,to mean :
Q id tibi vis,insane,C.,Or.,ii.67,269;what do yo want,madman?
Q id volt sibi haec oratio ? TER.,Hea t.,615;what does all this holding
forthl演説m mean ?
Dative of Reference.
352.This indicates the person in whose eyes the statement of the predicate holds
good(Dativ s l dicantis).
Ut mihi deformis,sic tibi magnific s,TAC.,H.,xii.37;to me a monster,to y
o rself a prodigy of splendo r.
Q intia formosa est m ltis,CAT.,86,1;Q intia is a bea ty in the eyes of
many.
[226 DATIVE.]
NOTE.This Dative is characteristic of the A g stan poets,b t it is also common e
no gh in CICERO and the prose a thors.
353.Noteworthy is the se of this Dative in combination with participles,which s
hows two varieties,one giving the local point of view,the other the mental,both
post-Ciceronian and rare.CAESAR gives the first local sage,LIVY the first menta
l.
[Hoc] est oppid m prim m Thessaliae venientib s ab Epiro, CAES.,B.C.,iii
.80;this is the first town of Thessaly to those coming(as yo come) from Epir s.
Vere aestimanti,L.,XXXVTI.58,8;to one whose j dgment was tr e.
NOTES.1.This constr ction is probably drawn from the Greek,altho gh VITRUvros sh
ows several examples.
2.Certainly Greek is the Dat.of the person with volenti,C pienti,invito(est) etc
.,which is fo nd first in SALLUST,once in Livy,and sporadically in TACITUS,and l
ater.
Dative of the Agent.
354.The Dative is sed with Passive Verbs,in prose chiefly with the Perfect Pass
ive,to show the interest which the agent takes in the res lt.That the person int
erested is the agent is only an inference.(See 215.)
Mihi res tota provisa est,C.,Verr.,iv.42,91;I have had the whole matter
provided for.
C i non s nt a ditae Demosthenis vigiliae? C.,T sc.,iv.19,44;to whom are
not Demosthenes'long watchings a familiar hearsay ? スÿ0スの不眠症
NOTES.1.Instances of this Dat.with the Tenses of Contin ance are poetical,or adm
it of a different explanation :
Barbar s hic ego s m q i non intellegor lli,Ov..Tr.,v.io,37;I am a barb
arian here beca se I can't make myself intelligible to any one.
Whenever an adj.or an eq ivalent is sed,the Dat.Pl.may be an Ablative :
Sic dissimillimis bestiolis comm niter cib s q aerit r,C.,N.D.,ii.48,123
; so,tho gh these little creat res are so very nlike,their food is so ght in co
mmon.
Carmina q ae scrib nt r aq ae potorib s,H.,Ep.,1.IQ,3;poems which are wr
itten when people are water-drinkers.
Cena ministrat r p eris trib s,H.,S.,1.6,116; Dinner is served,(the wait
ers being) the waiters are(b t) three.
2.This Dat.is rare in early Latin,rare,if ever,in CAESAR,not ncommon in CICERO.
B t it is m ch liked by the poets and by some prose writers,notably by TACITUS.
355.The agent of the Ger nd and Ger ndive is p t in the Dative,at all periods.
Diligentia praecip e colenda est nobis,C.,Or.,ii.35,148;caref lness is t
o be c ltivated by s first and foremost.
Desperanda tibi salva concordia socr ,J v.,vi.231;yo m st despair of ha
rmony while Motherin-law's alive.
[DATIVE.227]
REMARK.To avoid ambig ity,especially when the verb itself takes the Cat.,the Abl
.with ab(a) is employed for the sake of clearness :
Civib s a vobis cons lend m,C.,Imp.,2,6;the interest of the citiens m s
t be cons lted by yo .
S pplicatio ab eo decernenda non f it,C.,Ph.,xiv.4,11.
Where there is no ambig ity there is no need of ab :
Ling ae moderand m est mihi,PL.,C rc.,486;I m st p t bo nds to my tong e
.
NOTE.Poets are free in their se of this Dative;so with verbals in bilis;as,
m ltis ille bonis flebilis occidit,H.,O.,1.24,9;多くのâき人々に嘆åれ‰}の人は亡くy
n lli exorabilis,SIL.ITAL.,v.131.誰にも心‡動å れya様子è
Dative of the Object For Which.
356.Certain verbs take the Dative of the Object For Which(to what end),and often
at the same time a Dative of the Personal Object For Whom,or To Whom.
Nemini me s advent s labori a t s mpt i f it,C.,Verr.,1.6,16;to no one w
as my arrival a b rden or an expense.
Virt s sola neq e dat r dono neq e accipit r,S.,I g.,85,38;virt e alone
is neither given nor taken as a present.
Habere q aest i rem p blicam t rpe est,C.,Off.,ii.,22,77;it is base to h
ave the state for one's excheq er(資金、利益).
REMARKS.1.Noteworthy is the legal phrase
c i bono? to whom is it for an advantage ? = who is advantaged ?
2.In the classical times the principal verbs in this constr ction are
esse,dare,d cere,habere,vertere,
and a few others which occ r less freq ently.Later Latin extends the sage to ma
ny other verbs,and especially to Ger ndive constr ctions.Dare is sed principall
y in the phrase
dono dare.
3.The Do ble Dative is fo nd principally with esse,b t occasionally with other v
erbs.Here there seems to have been a tendency,mainly post-Ciceronian,to se the
predicative Nom.instead of the Dative.Interesting sometimes is the shift in sag
e;th s,
CICERO says
est t rpit do,baseness
NEPOS,
f it t rpit dini.
NOTES.1.In the same category,b t with the idea of finality more clearly indicate
d,are the agric lt ral sages,
alimento serere,sow for food,
condit i legere;(Col.2,22,4).漬物にする
the medical,
remedio adhibere;apply as a remedy
the military terms,
praesidio,a xilio,mittere,esse,etc.send for a help
2.With LIVY we notice the great extension of this Dat.with verbs of seeking,choo
sing,etc.,where classical Latin wo ld prefer some other constr ction.So
loc m insidiis(insidiar m is classical) circ mspectare Poen s coepit,L.,
xxi.53,11.(ÿÿ 人は待ÿ伏•する¤ の場所‡探し始 ¤)
TACITUS goes f rthest in s ch sages.CAESAR,however,shows a few instances(B.G.,1
.30,8).
3.The Final Dative with intrans.verbs is military and rare.So
recept i canere,to so nd a retreat,
is fo nd first in CAES.,B.G.,vii.47.SALLUST shows a few examples.The Dat.,with s
imilar s bstantives,is an extension,and is very rare.CICERO,Ph.,xiii.7,15,says
recept i sign m.
[228 DATIVE.]
4.The origin of this sage may have been mercantile(Key).In English we treat Pro
fit and Loss as persons :
Q em fors dier m c mq e dabit l cro appone,H.,O.,1.9,14;"Every day that
Fate shall give,set down to Profit." (運Nも¤らす日々は何èも利益とし‰書きと â)
On the Dative of the Ger nd and Ger ndive in a similar sense,see 429.
Genitive as a Predicate.
366.The Genitives of Possession and Q ality may be sed as Predicates.
Hic vers s Pla ti non est,hic est,C.,Fam.,ix.16,4; this verse is not by
Pla t s,this is .(áの詩行は ÿ スのものèはya、áれN þÿ)
[234 GENITIVE.]
Omnia q ae m lieris f er nt,viri fi nt dotis nomine,C.,Top.,iv.23; every
thing that was the woman's becomes the h sband's nder the title of dowry.
Virt s tantar m viri m est t se ipsa t eat r,C.,T sc.,v.1,2; virt e is
of s ch strength as to be her own protector.(美徳は非常に力N}るのè自分自身‡守るáとNèき
REMARKS.1.The Possession appears in a variety of forms,and takes a variety of tr
anslations :
H i s ero viv s,mort s h i s ero,PROP.,ii.15,35; hers I shall be,living
; dead,hers I shall be.(生き‰aる間、私は彼女のものè}り、死 èåらも私は彼女のものè}る)
Nolae senat s Romanor m,plebs Hannibalis erat,L.,xxiii39,7; at Nola the
senate was(on the side) of the Romans,the common folk(on) Hannibal's.
Damnatio est i dic m,poena legis,C.,S ll.,22,63; condemning is the j dge
s'(b siness),p nishment the law's.
Est animi ingen i c i m lt m debeas eidem pl rim m velle debere, C.,Fam.
,ii.6,2;it shows the feeling of a gentleman to be willing to owe very m ch to hi
m to whom yo already owe m ch.(義理}る人間に対し‰もっと大きy義理‡感じ¤aと思þのは立派y
Pa peris est n merare pec s,Ov.,M.,xiii.823;'tis only the poor man that
co nts his flock('tis the mark of a poor man to co nt the flock)(自分の羊‡数hるのは貧乏人の
Observe the special variety,"Genitiv s A ctoris" :
Is [Herc les] dicebat r esse Myronis,C.,Verr.,iv.3,5;that(stat e of) Her
c les was said to be Myron's(work),by Myron.(}のÿ クZスはミ ×の作è}る)
So also with
facere,to make(ca se to be),which is common in LIVY especially :
Romanae dicionis facere,L.,xxi.60,3;to bring nder the Roman sway.(׊/の支配下に置
S mm m imperi m in orbe terrar m Macedon m fecerant,L.,XLV.7,3; the para
mo nt a thority of the world they had bro ght(into the hands) of the Macedonians
.
2.For the personal representative of a q ality,the q ality itself may be sed so
metimes with b t little difference,as :
st ltitiae est,it is the part of folly;
st lti est,it is the part of a fool.
So,too,
st lt m est,it is foolish.
B t when the adj.is of the Third Declension,the ne ter sho ld not be sed,except
in combination with an adj.of the Second.
Tempori cedere semper sapientis est habit m,C.,Fam.,iv.9,2;to yield to t
he press re of the times has always been held wise.
Pigr m et iners videt r s dore adq irere q od possis sang ine parare, TA
C.,G.,14,17;it is tho ght slow and spiritless to acq ire by sweat what yo can g
et by blood.
Some combinations become phraseological,as :
cons et dinis,moris est(the latter post-classical),it is the c stom.
3.The same methods of translation apply to the Possessive Prono n in the Predica
te("Vengeance is mine") :
me m est,it is my property,b siness,way.
Non est mentiri me m,TER.,Hea t.,549;lying is not my way(I do not lie).
His tantis in reb s est t m videre,q id agat r,C.,M r.,38,83;in this im
portant crisis it is yo r b siness to see what is to be done.
[GENITIVE.235]
Partitive Genitive.
367.The Partitive Genitive stands for the Whole to which a Part belongs.It is th
erefore b t an extension of the Possessive Genitive.It may be sed with any word
that involves partition,and has the following varieties(368-372) :
368.The Partitive Genitive is sed with s bstantives of Q antity,N mber,Weight.
Maxim s vini n mer s f it,permagn m pond s argenti,C.,Ph.,ii.27,66;there
was a large amo nt of wine,an enormo s mass of silver.
In i gero Leontini agri medimn m tritici serit r,C.Verr.,iii.47,112;on a
j ger of the Leontine territory a medimn s of wheat is sown.
Campanor m alam,q ingentos fere eq ites excedere acie i bet,L.,x.29,2;he
orders a sq adron of Campanians,abo t 500 horsemen,to leave the line.
REMARK.This is sometimes called the Oenitiv s Generis,Whether the conception be
partitive or not,depends on circ mstances.
Medimn s tritici,a medimn s of wheat,may be a medimn s of WHEAT(Genitiv
s Generis) or a MEDIMNUS of wheat(Partitive).
NOTE.The reversed constr ction is occasionally fo nd.
Sex dies ad eam rem conficiendam spatii post lant,CAES.,B.C.,1.3,6,inste
ad of spati m sex dier m.
369.The Partitive Genitive is sed with the Ne ter Sing lar of the following and
kindred words,b t only in the Nominative or Acc sative.
tant m,so m ch,
m lt m,m ch,
pa l m,little,
satis,eno gh,
hoc,this,
q ant m,as(how m ch),
pl s,more,
min s,less,
par m,too little,
id,ill d,ist d,that,
aliq ant m,somewhat,
pl rim m,most,
minim m,least,
nihil,nothing,
idem,the same,
q od and q id,which and what ?
with their compo nds.
Q od in reb s honestis operae c raeq e ponet r,id i re la dabit r,C., Off.,1
.6,19;what(of) effort and pains shall be bestowed on rep table deeds,will receiv
e a j st recompense of praise.
is loc s ab omni t rba id temporis(336,N.2) vac s [erat],C.,Fin.,v.i,1;that
place was at that (point of) time free from anything like a crowd.
Satis eloq entiae,sapientiae par m,S.,C.,5,4;eno gh(of) eloq ence,of wisdom
too little.
REMARKS.1.Ne ter adjectives of the Second Declension can be treated as s bstanti
ves in the Gen.; not so adjectives of the Third,except in combination with adjec
tives of the Second,b t here s ally the Second Declension adjective is attracte
d :
aliq id bon m,or boni,something good;
aliq id memorabile,something memorable;
aliq id boni et memorabilia,something good and memorable(better aliq id bon
m et memorabile).
[236 GENITIVE.]
Q id habet ista res a t laetabile a t glorios m? C.,T sc.,1.21,49 (204,n.3).
2.A familiar phrase is :
Nihil reliq i facere.1.To leave nothing (not a thing).2.(Occasionally),
to leave nothing ndone.
NOTES.1.The conception is often not so m ch partitive as characteristic.So
Q odc mq e hoc regni,V.,A.,1.78;this realm,what(little) there is of it(what
little realm I have).
Perhaps,too,s ch combinations as
flagiti m hominis
may be classed nder this head.See 361,N.3.
2.The partitive constr ction,with a preposition,is not fo nd in CICERO or CAESAR
,b t begins with SALLUST :
Ad id loci,S.,C.,45,3;
ad id locor m,S.,I g.,63,6.
370.The Partitive Genitive is sed with n merals both general and special.
Special :
Cent m milit m,a h ndred(of the) soldiers,a h ndred(of) soldiers.
(Cent m milites,a,the h ndred soldiers.)
Q int s reg m,the fifth(of the) Tcing(s).
(Q int s rex,the fifth king.) General :
M lti milit m,many of the soldiers,many soldiers.
(M lti milites,many soldiers.)
REMARKS.1.The English lang age commonly omits the partition, nless it is especia
lly emphatic :
M lti civi m ads nt,many CITIZENS are present.
M lti cives ads nt,MANY are the citiens present.
2.When all are embraced,there is no partition in Latin :
(Nos) trecenti coni ravim s,L.,ii.12,15;three h ndred of s have bo nd o
rselves by an oath.
Volnera q ae circ m pl rima m ros accepit patrios,V.,A.,ii.277; wo nds w
hich he received in great n mbers before his co ntry's walls.
Q i omnes,all of whom.
Q ot estis ? how many are(there of) yo ?
So always q ot,tot,totidem.
Here the English lang age familiarly employs the partition.Exceptions are very r
are.
3.On mille and milia,see 293.On prepositions with n merals,see 372,R.2.
371.The Partitive Genitive is sed with Prono ns.
Ii milit m,those(of the) soldiers.
Ii milites,those soldiers.
Illi Graecor m,those(of the) Greeks.
Fidenati m q i s pers nt.ad rbem Fidenas tend nt,L.,iv.33,10;th s rvivi
ng Fidenates take their way to the city of Fidenae.
[GENITIVE.237]
REMARKS.1.Uterq e,either(both),is commonly sed as an adjective with s bstantive
s :
terq e cons l,either cons l = both cons ls;
as a s bstantive with prono ns, nless a s bstantive is also sed :
terq e hor m,both of these;b t
terq e ille d x.
So,too,with relatives in the ne ter,and with Pl ral forms of terq e,concord is
the r le.
Compare
terq e nostr m,C.,S ll.,4,13,
with
triq e nos,C.,Fam.,xi.20,3.See 292.
2.On the se of prepositions instead of the Genitive,see 372,R.2.
NOTE.The se of the relative with the Genitive is characteristic of LIVY.
372.The Partitive Genitive is sed with Comparatives and S perlatives :
Prior hor m in proelio cecidit,NEP.,xxi.i,2;the former of these fell in
an engagement.
Ind s est omni m fl min m maxim s,C.,N.D.,ii.52,130(211,R.2).
REMARKS.1.When there are only two,the comparative exha sts the degrees of compar
ison(300).
2.Instead of the Partitive Genitive with N merals,Prono ns,Comparatives,and S pe
rlatives,the Abl.may be employed with
ex,o t of,
de,from(especially with proper names and sing lars),
in,among(rare),
or the Acc.with inter,among,ap d :
Gall s provocat n m ex Romanis,the Ga l challenges one of the Romans;
n s de m ltis,one of the many (the masses);
Croes s inter reges op lentissim s,Croes s,wealthiest of kings.
With n s,ex or de is the more common constr ction,except that when n s is firs
t in a series,the Gen.is common.
3.On the concord of the S perlative see 211,R.2.
NOTES.1.The Partitive Genitive with positives is occasional in poetry;in prose i
t begins with LIVY and becomes more common later.
Seq im r te,sancte deor m,V.,A.,iv.576;we follow thee,holy deity.
Can m degeneres(ca dam) s b alvom flect nt,PLIN.,N.H.,XI.,50,265; c rris
h dogs c rl the tail p nder the belly.
2.S bstantival ne ters,with no idea of q antity,were rarely followed by the Gen.
in early Latin.CICERO shows a few cases of Pl rals of s perlatives,and one case
of a Pl ral of a comparative in this constr ction :
in interiora aedi m S llae (Att.iv.,3,8).
CAESAR shows one case of a positive :
in occ ltis ac reconditis templi(B.C.,iii.105,5).
SALLUST shows the first case of the Sing lar :
in praer pti montis extremo(I g.,37,4).
Then the sage extends and becomes common,especially in TACITUS.In the poets it
begins with LUCRETIUS.
Ard a d m met nt amitt nt vera viai(29,N.2=via G),LUCR.,1.660;the while
they fear the steeper road,they miss the tr e.
So
amara c rar m,H.,O.,iv.12,19; bitter elements of cares,bitter cares;
strata viar m,V.,A.,1.422 = stratae viae,the paved streets.
3.The Partitive Genitive is also sed with Adverbs of Q antity,Place,Extent :
armor m adfatim,L.,xxvii.17,7;ab ndance of arms;
bi terrar m,genti m? where in the world ?(Very late Latin,
t m temporis,at that time.)
The sage with h c,eo,as
h c,eo arrogantiae processit,he got to this,that pitch of pres mption,
is a colloq ialism,which begins with SALLUST,b t is not fo nd in CICERO or CAESA
R.
[238 GENITIVE.]
Notice especially the phrase : q od(or q oad) gi s(facere) poss m,as far as I ca
n do so: C.,Fam.,iii.2,2;Att.,xi.12,4;I.,ii.,6,20.
4.The Partitive Genitive with proper names is rare,and mostly confined to LIVY :
Cons l m S lpici s in dextro Poeteli s in laevo corn consist nt,L.,ix.27,8.
5.The Partitive Genitive as a Predicate is Greekish : Fies nobili m t q oq e fo
nti m,H,O.,iii.,13,13;tho too shalt co nt among the famo s fo ntains.
Genitive with Prepositional S bstantives.
373.Ca sa,gratia,ergo,and instar are constr ed with the Genitive.
[Sophistae] q aest s ca sa philosophabant r,C.,Ac.,ii.23,72;the professo
rs of wisdom dealt in philosophy for the sake of gain.
T me amoris magis q am honoris servavisti gratia,ENN.,F.,287(M.); tho
didst save me more for love's(sake) than(tho didst) for hono r's sake.
Virt tis ergo,C.,Opt.Gen.,7,19; on acco nt of valor.
Instar montis eq s,V.,A.,ii.15;a horse the bigness of a mo ntain.
Plato mihi n s instar est omni m,C.,Br.,51,191;Plato by himself is in m
y eyes worth them all.
REMARKS.1.Ca sa and gratia,for the sake,commonly follow the Gen.in classical Lat
in and also in the J rists.In LIVY and later they often precede.Ergo,on acco nt,
belongs especially to early Latin,except in form lae and laws,and follows its Ge
nitive.It is rare in the poets.Instar is probably a fossilised Infinitive(Instar
e),meaning " the eq ivalent," whether of sie or val e.
2.Except for special reasons ca sa takes the possessive prono n in agreement,rat
her than the personal prono n in the Genitive;more rarely gratia :
Vestra reiq e p blicae ca sa,C.,Verr.,v.68,173;for yo r sake and that of
the commonwealth.B t in antithesis,
m lta q ae nostri ca sa n mq am facerem s,facim s ca sa amicor m! C.,Lae
l.,16,57(disp ted).
II.GENITIVE WITH ADJECTIVES.
374.Adjectives of F lness,of Participation,and of Power,of Knowledge and Ignoran
ce,of Desire and Disg st,take the Genitive.
Plen s rimar m,TER.,E n.,105;f ll of chinks("a leaky vessel").
Particeps consilil,C.,S ll.,4,12;a sharer in the plan.
Mentis compos,C.,Ph.,ii.38,97; in possession of(one's) mind.
M ltar m rer m perit s,C.,Font.,ii,25;versed in many things.
C pid s pec niae,Cf.C.,Verr.,1.3,8;grasping after money.
Fastidios s Latinar m(litterar m),C.,Br.,70,247;too dainty for Latin.
Omni m rer m insci s,C.,Br.,85,292;a niversal ignoram s.全‰に無知y人
C r non t plen s vitae conviva recedis ? LUCR.,iii.938(273).
Sitq e memor nostri necne,referte mihi,Ov.,Tr.,IV.3,10(204,N.7).
[GENITIVE.239]
Conscia mens recti Famae mendacia risit,Ov.,F.,IV.311 (330,R.).
Agricolam la dat i ris leg mq e perit s,H.,S.,1.i,9; the h sbandman('s l
ot) is praised by the co nsel learned in the law.
Omnes immemorem beneficii oder nt,C.,Off.,ii.18,63;all hate a man who ha
s no memory for kindness.
(Bestiae) s nt rationis et orationis expertes,C.,Off.,1.16,50;beasts are
devoid of reason and speech(lack disco rse of reason).
Omnia plena consilior m,inania verbor m videm s,C.,Or.,1.9,37; we see a
world that is f ll of wise meas res,void of eloq ence.
Gallia fr g m fertilis f it,L.,v.34,2; Ga l was prod ctive of grain.
NOTES.1.Of adjectives of F lness,with the Gen.,only
plen s,
replet s,
inops,
and
inanis
are classical and common;single instances are fo nd of
liberalis,
prof s s,
in SALLUST(C.,7,6;5,4),and
iei n s
occ rs once in CICERO.PLAUTUS also ses
on st s
and
prodig s.
Poets and later prose writers are free.
Plen s
occ rs very rarely with the Abl.in CICERO and CAESAR,more often in LIVY.
Refert s
is sed by CICERO s ally with the Abl.of the Thing and with the Gen.of the Pers
on.
2.Participation : Classical are
particeps,
expers,
censors,
with some adjectives expressing g ilt,as
manifest s(archaic),
affinis,
re s.
Of these particeps takes also the Dat.in post-classical Latin,and
expers
has also the Abl.(not classical) from PLAUTUS on.(See S.,C.,33,1.)
Affinis has the Dat.in LIVY,in local sense also in CICERO;
re s
takes Abl.or de.
3.Power:
Compos
alone is classical,and is occasionally fo nd with Abl.in SALLUST,VERGIL,LIVY.
Potens
is fo nd in PLAUTUS,the poets,and post-classical prose; impos in PLAUTUS,and the
n not ntil SENECA.
4.Knowledge and Ignorance : Classical are some eighteen.Of these
perit s
has also Abl.,and rarely ad ;
ins et s
takes also Dat.as well as de;
pr dens
has also ad;
r dis
has Abl.with in.
more often than the Gen.in CICERO,b t also ad.Anteclassical Latin shows a few mo
re adjectives.
5.Desire and Disg st : Classical are
avid s,
c pid s,
fastidios s,
st dios s.
Of these avid s has also in with Acc.and with Abl.; st dios s has Dat.in PLAUTUS
(M.Q.,801);single examples are cited with ad and in.Fastidios s occ rs b t once
in CICERO(see above);see H.,O.,iii.i,37.
6.In later Latin and in the poets almost all adjectives that denote an affection
of the mind take a Gen.of the Thing to which the affection refers,where model p
rose req ires the Abl.or a preposition:
consilii ambig s,TAC.,H.,iv.21;do btf l of p rpose.
Ingrat s sal tis,V.,A.,x.665.
The analogy of these adjectives is followed by others,so that the Gen.becomes a
complement to the adjective,j st as it is to the corresponding s bstantive.
Integer vitae,H.,O.,1.22,1;spotless of life;
like integritas vitae.(Compare fama et fort nis integer,S.,H.,ii.41,5 D;in fame
and fort nes intact.)
7.The seat of the feeling is also p t in the Gen.,chiefly with animi and ingenii
(which were probably Locatives originally).
Aeger animi,L.,1.58,9;sick at heart,heartsick.
A dax ingenil,STAT.,S.,iii.2,64;daring of disposition.
The Pl.is animis.
8.The Gen.with adjectives involving Separation instead of the Abl.(390,3) begins
with the A g stan poets;tho gh SALLUST shows
n d s and vac s(I g.,79,6;90,1);
liber labor m,H.,A.P.,212.
9.Classical Latin ses cert s with Gen.only in the phrase
certiorem facere,to inform,
which has also de (always in CAESAR).
10.
Dign s,worthy,
and
indign s, nworthy,
with Gen.are poetical and rare.
11.On alin s,strange,see 359,N.2.On
aeq alis,
comm nis,
consci s,
contrari s,
par,
propri s,
similis,
s perstes,
and the like,see 359,R.1.
[240 GENITIVE.]
Genitive with Verbals.
375.Some Present Participles take the Genitive when they lose their verbal nat r
e;and so occasionally do verbals in -ax in poetry and later prose.
(Epaminondas) erat adeo veritatis diligens t ne ioco q idem mentiret r,
NEP.,xv.3,1;Epaminondas was so caref l(s ch a lover) of the tr th as not to tel
l lies even in jest.
Omni m consens capax imperii nisi imperasset,TAC.,H.,1.49;by general co
nsent capable of empire,had he not become emperor.
NOTES.1.The participle is transient;the adjective permanent.The simple test is t
he s bstit tion of the relative and the verb :
amans(participle),loving(who is loving);
amans(adjective),fond,(s bstantive),lover;
patiens(participle),bearing (who is bearing);
patiens(adjective),end ring,(s bstantive),a s fferer.
2.Ante-classical Latin shows only
amans,
c piens,
conc piens,
f gitans,
gerens,
perseq ens,
sciens,
temperans.
CICERO carries the sage very far,and it is characteristic of his style.CAESAR,o
n the other hand,has very few cases(B.C.,1.69,3).
CICERO also shows the first case of a Gen.after a compared participle.
S m s nat ra appetentissimi honestatis,C.,T sc.,ii.24,58.
These participles can also revert to the verbal constr ctions.
3.Of verbals with the Gen.,PLAUTUS shows one example :
mendax(Asin.,855); CICERO perhaps one :
rapax(Lael.,14,50).
The sage in later Latin and the poets is confined at most to abo t one doen ve
rbals.
III.GENITIVE WITH VERBS.
Genitive with Verbs of Memory.
376.Verbs of Reminding,Remembering,and Forgetting,take the Genitive.
Te veteris amicitiae commonefecit,[C.] ad Her.,iv.24,33;he reminded yo
of yo r old friendship.
Est propri m st ltitiae alior m vitia cernere,oblivisci s or m, C.,T sc.
,iii.30,73; the fact is,it shows a fool to have keen eyes for the fa lts of othe
rs,to forget one's own.
Ipse i bet mortis te meminisse de s,MART.,ii.59; a god himself bids yo
remember death.
REMARKS.1.Verbs of Reminding take more often the Abl.with de(so reg larly in CIC
ERO),and the Acc.ne t.of a prono n or N meral adjective.TACITUS alone ses moner
e with the Gen.(Ann.,1.67,1).
Oro t Terentiani moneatis de testaments,C.,Att.,xi.16,5; I beg yo to p
t Terentia in mind of the will.
Discip los id n m moneo,QUINT.,ii.9,1(333,i).
2.Verbs of Remembering and Forgetting also take the Acc.,especially of Things;
[GENITIVE.241]
Haec olim meminisse i vabit,V.,A.,1.203;to remember these things one day
will give s pleas re.
Q i s nt boni cives,nisi q i patriae beneficia meminer nt ? C.,Planc.,33
,80;who are good citiens except those who remember the benefits conferred by th
eir co ntry ?
Oblivisci nihil soles nisi ini rias,C.,Lig.,12,35;yo are wont to forget
nothing except inj ries.
Eecordor(literally = I bring to heart,to mind) is constr ed with the Acc
.of the Thing,except in three passages from CICERO;de is fo nd with Persons.
Et vocem Anchisae magni volt mq e recordor,V.,A.,viii.156;and I recall(c
all to mind) the voice and co ntenance of Anchises the Great.
Memini,I bear in mind,I(am old eno gh to) remember,takes the Acc sative
:
[Antipatr m] t probe meministi,C.,Or.,iii.50,194;yo remember Antipater
very well.
3. Venit mihi in mentem,it comes into( p to) my mind,
may be constr ed impersonally with the Gen.,or personally with a s bject;the lat
ter by CICERO only when the s bject is a ne ter prono n.
Venit mihi Platonis in mentem,C.,Fin.,v.i,2;Plato rises before my mind's
eye.
Genitive with Verbs of Emotion.
377. Misereor,I pity,
takes the Genitive,and
miseret,it moves to pity,
paenitet,it repents,
piget,it irks,
p det,it makes ashamed,
taedet and pertaes m est,it tires,
take the Acc sative of the Person Who Feels,and the Genitive of the Exciting Ca
se.
Miseremini socior m,C.,Verr.,1.28,72;pity yo r allies !
S ae q emq e fort nae paenitet,C.,Fam.,vi.i,1;each man is discontented w
ith his lot.
Me non sol m piget st ltitiae meae,sed etiam p det,C.,Dom.,n,29;I am not
only fretted at my folly,b t act ally ashamed of it.
REMARKS.1.P det is also sed with the Gen.of the Person whose Presence excites t
he shame :
P det deor m homin mq e,L.,iii.19,7;it is a shame in the sight o
f gods and men.
2.These Impersonals can also have a s bject,chiefly a Demonstrative or Relative
prono n :
Non te haec p dent? TER.,Ad.,754;do not these things p t yo to the bl s
h ?
3.Other constr ctions follow from general r les.So the Inf.(422) and q od(542).
Non me vixisse paenitet (生き‰き¤áとに私は悔aはya),¥C.,Cat.M.,23,84(540).
Q int m paenitet q od anim m t m offendit,Cf.C.,Att.,xi.13,2; Q int s i
s sorry that he has wo nded yo r feelings.
[242 GENITIVE.]
NOTES.1.With the same constr ction are fo nd misereo(early Latin),misereco (poet
ical),disp det(early Latin),distaedet(early Latin),vereor(mostly in early Latin)
,and a few others.
2.Miserari and commiserari,to pity,commiserate,take Acc. ntil very late Latin.
Genitive with J dicial Verbs.
The Genitive with J dicial Verbs belongs to the same category as the Genitive wi
th Verbs of Rating,both being extensions of the Genitive of Q ality.
378.Verbs of Acc sing,Convicting,Condemning,and Acq itting take the Genitive of
the Charge.
(Miltiades) acc sat s est proditionis,NEP.,1.7,5;Miltiades was acc sed o
f treason.
[Fanni s] C.Verrem insim lat avaritiae,C.,Verr.,I.49,128;Fanni s charges
Gai s Verres with avarice.
Video non te absol t m esse improbitatis sed illos damnatos esse caedis,
C.,Verr.,1.28,72; I see not that yo are acq itted of dishono r,b t that they a
re convicted of m rder.
REMARKS.1.J dicial Verbs incl de a n mber of expressions and sages.So
capi,
teneri,
deprehendi,
se adstringere,
se adligare,
se obligare
(ante-classical),and others,mean to be fo nd g ilty;
increpare,
increpitare,
rgere,
deferre,
arg ere,etc.,mean charge.
So also kindred expressions :
re m facere,(to make a party) to indict,to bring an action against;
nomen deferre de,to bring an action against;
sacrilegii compert m esse,to be fo nd(g ilty) of sacrilege.
2.For the Gen.of the Charge may be s bstit ted
nomine or crimine with the Gen.,or the Abl.with de:
nomine(crimine) coni rationis damnare,to find g ilty of conspiracy;
acc sare de vi,of violence(Gen.vis rare);
de veneficio,of poisoning;
de reb s repet ndis,of extortion.
Pest lare always has de in CICERO.
We find sometimes in with Abl.;
convict s in crimine,on the charge;or,
inter :
inter sicarios damnat s est,convicted of homicide (C.,Cl ent.,7,21;Cf.Ph
.,ii.4,8).
3.Verbs of Condemning and Acq itting take the Abl.as well as the Gen.of the Char
ge and the P nishment,and always the Abl.of the definite Fine;the indefinite Fin
e,
q anti,d pli,q adr pli,etc.,is in the Genitive.
Acc sare capitis,or capite,to bring a capital charge.
Damnare capitis,or capite,to condemn to death.
Damnari decem milib s,to be fined ten tho sand.
M ltare,to m lct(罰金刑にする),is always constr ed with the Ablative :
M ltare pec nia,to m lct in(of) money.l罰金‡課すm
Manli s virt tem filii morte m ltavit,QUINT.,v.ii,7;Manli s p nished the
valo r of his son with death.
4.Destination and Enforced Labor are expressed by ad or in,b t all examples are
post-classical :
damnari ad bestias,to be condemned(to be thrown) to wild beasts;
[GENITIVE.243]
ad(in) metalla,to the mines;
ad(in) op s p blic m,to hard labo r.
Voti damnari,to be bo nd to f lfil a vow,is Livian(except NEP.,xx.5,3,wh
ere it has a different sense).
5.Verbs of Acc sing may have also the Acc.of the Thing and the Gen.of the Person
:
inertiam acc sas ad lescenti m,C.,Or.,1.58,246.
(}y¤は若者¤ÿ‡怠惰ÿと非難し‰aる)
Genitive with Verbs of Rating and B ying.
379.Verbs of Eating and B ying are constr ed with the Genitive of the general va
l e or cost,and the Ablative of the partic lar val e or cost.(404.)
Verbs of Rating are :
aestimare,
existimare(rare),to val e;
p tare,to reckon;
d cere(rare in CICERO),to take;
habere,to hold;
pendere (mostly in Comedy),to weigh;
facere,to make,p t;
esse,to be(worth);
fieri,to be considered.
Verbs of B ying are :
emere,to b y;
vendere,to sell;
venire,to be for sale;
stare and constare,to cost,to come to;
prostare,licere (~の値段にyる) ,to be exposed,left(for sale)(売りに出‰aる);
cond cere,to hire(借る);
locare,to let.(貸す)
380.1.Verbs of Rating take :
Magni,m ch,
pl ris,more,
pl rimi,maximi,most,
Parvi,little,
minoris,less,
minimi,least,
Tanti,tantidem,so m ch,
q anti(and compo nds),how m ch,
nihili,na ght,
Eq ivalents of nihili,nothing,are
flocci,a lock of wool(一握りの羊毛) ,
na ci,a trifle(取るに足らya),
assis,a copper(G of as 一文の値打ÿもya),
pili(毛Cÿ価値もya)(both in CATULLUS,mainly),
and the like,and so also
h i s,that(a snap of the finger)(価値Nyaáと)
vili s,
all s ally with the negative.(全部常にnonNòく)
D m ne ob malefacta,peream; parvi exist mo,PL.,Capt.,682,; so long as it
be not for misdeeds,let me die;little do I care.(悪事の¤ èyaåぎり、私は死 èも構Mya
[Vol ptatem] virt s minimi facit,C.,Fin.,11.13,42;virt e makes very litt
le acco nt of the pleas re of the senses.
[I dices] rem p blicam flocci non faci nt,Cf.C.,Att.,iv.15,4;the j dges
do not care a fig for the State.(陪審員¤ÿは国のáとy åÿっともÿっとも考hÿゃaya)
Non habeo na ci Mars m a g rem,C.,Div.,1.58,132;I do not val e a Marsian
a g r a bawbee(=halfpenny).(私はMarsi族の占a師‡全然評価しya)
REMARK.
Tanti
is often sed in the sense of
operae preti m est = it is worth while.
Est mihi tanti h i s invidiae tempestatem s bire,C.,Cat.,ii.7,15;it is w
orth while(the cost),in my eyes,to bear this storm of odi m.
NOTES.1.
Aestimo
is fo nd with the Abl.as well as with the Genitive.So
aestimare magno and magni,to val e highly.
CICERO prefers the Ablative.
2.Observe the phrases :
boni(aeq i boniq e) facio(a colloq ialism),
boni cons lo(an old form la),I p t p with,take in good part.
Non pensi habere(d cere),to consider not worth the while,
is post-A g stan and rare.
[244 GENITIVE.]
2.Verbs of B ying take tanti,q anti,pl ris,and minoris,The rest are p t in the A
blative.
Vendo me m(fr ment m) non pl ris q am ceteri,fortasse etiam minoris, C.,
Off.,iii.12,51;I sell my corn not dearer than everybody else,perhaps even cheape
r.
Magis illa i vant q ae pl ris em nt r,J v.,xi.16;(支払aN高くyるCÿ食事は aしa
are bo ght for more.
Emit(Cani s hortes) tanti q anti Pythi s vol it,C.,Off.,iii.14,59;Cani s
bo ght the gardens at the price Pythi s wanted.
Q anti cenas ? What do yo give for yo r dinner ?
Q anti habitas ? What is the rent of yo r lodgings ?
B t:
Parvo fames constat,magno fastidi m,SEN.,E.M.,17,4;h nger costs little,d
aintiness m ch.
An instr ctive shift:
Emit? perii hercle: q anti? Viginti minis,TER.,E n.,984;he bo ght her ?
I'm ndone.For how m ch ? Twenty minae.(•NれN宦官‡買っ¤ÿと?¥}}、Mしは破産ÿ aくら
REMARK.
Bene emere,to b y cheap;aa買a物‡する、安く買þ
bene vendere,to sell dear;aa売り物‡する、高く売る
male emere,to b y dear;
male vendere,to sell cheap.
So,too,other adverbs : meli s,optime,pei s,pessime.
Genitive with Interest and Refert.
381. Interest and Refert take a Genitive of the Person,seldom of the Thing,co
ncerned.
Interest omni m recte facere,C.,Fin.,ii.22, 72;it is to the interestof a
ll to do right. (正しa行動は全‰の人にとっ‰得è}る)
Refert compositionis q ae q ib s anteponas,QUINT.,ix.4,44;it is of impor
tance for the arrangement of words,which yo p t before which.(文の構成にとっ‰はÿの言葉‡ÿ
Instead of the Genitive of the personal prono ns,the Ablative Sing lar feminine
of the possessives is employed.
Mea interest,mea refert,I am concerned.l私にとっ‰重要è}るm
NOTES.1.Refert is commonly sed absol tely,occasionally with mea,etc.,seldom wi
th the Gen.,in the classical lang age.
2.Instead of Apposition se the Relative :
Vehementer intererat vestra,q i patres estis,liberos vestros hic potissi
m m discere,PLIN.,Ep.,iv.13,4;it were vastly to the interest of yo parents,that
yo r children,if possible,were ta ght at home.(}y¤達親御 ¤ÿにとっ‰極 ‰重要yáと
3.The Nom.as a s bject is rare,except in PLINY'S Nat ral History :
Usq e adeo magni refert st di m atq e vol ptas,LUCR.,iv.984.(熱中とå快楽とåはáれC
prono n is fo nd :
Q id(Acc.) t a id(Nom.) refert ? TER.,Ph.,723;what b siness is that of y
o rs?
4. Refert is the more ancient,and is employed by the poets(interest is excl
ded from Dactylic poetry by its form) to the end of the classical period.
Interest is pec liar to prose,employed excl sively by CAESAR,and preferr
ed by CICERO when a complement is added.
[GENITIVE.245]
5.No satisfactory explanation has been given of this constr ction.One view is th
at
mea refert was originally [ex] mea re fert (like ex mea re est),it is to
my advantage,and that the ex was lost.
Interest having m ch the same force,b t being later in development,took
the constr ctions of refert by false analogy.The Gen.wo ld be b t parallel to th
e possessive.
382.1.The Degree of Concern is expressed by an Adverb,Adverbial Acc sative,or a
Genitive of Val e.
Id mea min me refert,TER.,Ad.,88 1;that makes no difference at all to me
.
Theodori nihil interest,C.,T sc.,I.43,102;It is no concern of Theodor s.
Magni interest mea na nos esse,C.,Att.,xiii4;it is of great importance
to me that we be together.
2.The Object of Concern is commonly p t in the Infinitive,Acc sative and Infinit
ive, t or ne with the S bj nctive,or an Interrogative Sentence.
Q id Milonis intererat interfici Clodi m ? C.,Mil.,13,34;what interest h
ad Milo in Clodi s' being killed ?
[Caesar dicere solebat] non tam s a q am rei p blicae interesse ti salv
s esset,SUET.,I l.,86;Caesar sed to say that it was not of so m ch importance
to him(self) as to the State that his life sho ld be spared.
Vestra interest ne imperatorem pessimi faciant,TAC.,H.,1.30;it is to yo
r interest that the dregs of creation do not make the emperor.
Q id refert tales vers s q a voce legant r ? J v.,xi.182;what matters it
what voice s ch verses are recited with ?
3.The Thing Involved is p t in the Acc sative with ad :
Magni ad honorem nostr m interest q am prim m me ad rbem venire, C.,Fam
.,xvi.i,1;it makes a great difference to ching o r hono r that I sho ld come to
the city as soon as possible.
Occasional Uses.
383.1 The Genitive is fo nd occasionally with certain Verbs of F lness : in clas
sical Latin principally implere,complere,egere,indigere.
Piso m ltos codices implevit ear m rer m,C.,Verr.1.46,119;Piso filled ma
ny books f ll of those things.
Virt s pl rimae commentationis et exercitationis indiget, Cf.C.,Fin.,iii
.15,50;virt e stands in need of m ch(very m ch) st dy and practice.
NOTES.1.Classical Latin shows in all cases the Abl.m ch more freq ently than the
Gen.,except in the case of indigere,where CICERO prefers the Genitive.LIVY like
wise prefers the Gen.with implere.
2.Ante-classical and poetic are
explere(VERG.),ab ndare(L c.),scatere (LUCR.),sat rare(PLAUT.), obsat ra
re(TER.),carere(TER.).
Carere and egere have the Acc.occasionally in early Latin.
3.Other Grecisms are labor m decipit r,H.,O.,ii.13,38(reading do btf l).
[246 ABLATIVE.]
Regnavit pop lor m,H.,O.,iii.30,12.Also
mirari with Gen.in VERGIL(A.,xi.126).
Noteworthy is the occasional se of credere with Gen.in PLAUTUS;so once falli.
2.A Genitive of Separation,after the analogy of the Greek,is fo nd in a few case
s in the poets.
Ut me omni m iam labor m levas,PL.,R d.247;how yo relieve me at last of
all my toils and tro bles.
Desine molli m tandem q erellar m,H.,O.,ii.9,17;cease at last from woman
ish complainings.
3.The Genitive in Exclamations occ rs in a very few instances in the poets.CAT.,
ix.5;PROP.,iv.(v.) 7,21;compare PL.,Most.,912; LUCAN,ii.45.
On the Genitive after comparatives,see 296,N.2.
ABLATIVE.
384.The Ablative is the Adverbial,as the Genitive is the Adjective case.It conta
ins three elements :
A.Where? B.Whence? C.Wherewith?
In a literal sense,the Ablative is commonly sed with prepositions; in a fig rat
ive sense,it is commonly sed witho t prepositions.
A.The Ablative of the Place Where appears in a fig rative sense as the Ablative
of the Time When.
B.The Ablative of the Place Whence appears as :
1.The Ablative of Origin.
2.The Ablative of Meas re.
C.The Ablative of the Thing Wherewith appears in a fig rative sense,as :
1.The Ablative of Manner.
2.The Ablative of Q ality.
3.The Ablative of Means.
REMARK.It is impossible to draw the line of demarcation with absol te exactness.
So the Ablative of Ca se may be derived from any of the three f ndamental signif
ications of the case,which is evidently a composite one.
To these we add :
D.The Ablative of Ca se.
E.The Ablative Absol te.
I.The Literal Meanings of the Ablative.
A.ABLATIVE OF THE PLACE WHERE.
Ablativ s Localis.
385.The Ablative answers the q estion Where ? and takes as a r le the prepositio
n in.
In port navigo,TER.,And.,480; I am sailing in harbo r.
Pons in Hibero prope effect s(erat),CAES.,B.C.,1.62,3; the bridge OVER t
he Ebro was nearly finished.
[ABLATIVE.247]
Histrio in scaena [est],PL.,Poen.,20;the actor is ON the stage.
Haeret in eq o senex,Cf.C.,Dei.,10,28;the old man sticks TO his horse.
REMARKS.1.Verbs of Placing and kindred significations take the Abl.with in,to de
signate the res lt of the motion : classical are ponere,to place,and compo nds;
locare,collocare,to p t;
stat ere,constit ere,to set;
considere,to settle;
defigere,to plant;
demergere,to pl nge;
imprimere,to press pon;
insc lpere,to engrave(fig rative);
inscribere,to write pon;
incidere,to carve pon;
incl dere,to sh t into.
Plato rationem in capite pos it,iram in pectore locavit, C.,T sc.,1.10,2
0;Plato has p t reason in the head,has placed anger in the breast.
(L cretia) c ltr m in corde defigit,L.,1.58,11;L cretia plants a knife i
n(thr sts a knife down into) her heart.
Philosophi in iis libris ipsis q os scrib nt de contemnenda gloria s a n
emina inscrib nt,C.,T sc.,1.15,34;philosophers write their own names on(the titl
es of) the very books which they write abo t contempt of glory.
(Foed s) in col mna aenea incis m,C.,Balb.,23,53;a treaty c t pon a bra
en col mn.
The same observation applies to s b :
Pone s b c rr nimi m propinq i solis in terra domib s negata,H .,O.,1.2
2,21;p t(me) nder the chariot of the all-too neighboring s n,in a land denied t
o dwellings.
2.Verbs of Hanging and Fastening take ex,ab,or de.
C i spes omnis pendet ex fort na,h ic nihil potest esse certi, C.,Par.,i
i.17;to him who has all his hopes s spended on fort ne,nothing can be certain.
3.Here and there in is often rendered by per : C.,Fam.,1.7,6,
per provincias,here and there in the provinces;V.,A.,iii.236.
NOTES.1.In classical prose the se of the Abl.witho t in is confined to a few wo
rds,mostly phraseological.So
terra,on land;
mari,by sea;
s ally in the phrase
terra mariq e(rarely in the reversed order),on land and sea.
in terra is more common otherwise than terra.
Loco and locis,especially when sed with adjectives, s ally omit in.The
same is tr e of parte and partib s;so reg larly
dextra (parte),sinistra,laeva,etc.,on the right,on the left.
LIVY ses regio like loc s.The tendency,however,is observable as early as CICERO
'S time to omit the in when an adjective is employed,even in words other than th
ose given above;this tendency becomes more marked in Livy and is very strong in
later Latin.The poets are free.Regard m st always be had to 389.
2.The Acc.with in after verbs of Placing is very rare in classical prose.In earl
y Latin it is more common;so with
ponere,imponere,collocare.
The examples with Acc.in classical Latin are principally with compo nds of poner
e,as
imponere( s ally),reponere,exponere.collocare with in and Acc.in CAES.,B
.G.,1.18,7,is not in a local sense.Sometimes the Dat.is fo nd with imponere.
3.With a verb of Rest the motion antecedent to the rest is often emphasised by c
onstr ing the verb with "in and the Acc".instead of with "in and the Abl".This o
cc rs most often with esse and habere,and seems to have been colloq ial,as it is
very rare in classical prose.
N mero mihi in mentem f it dis(<de s Pl,D) advenientem(=me) gratias ager
e,PL.,Am.,180.到着し¤私は急に神々に感謝する気持ÿにyっ¤
[248 ABLATIVE.]
Adesse in senat m i ssit,C.,Ph.,v.7,19(cf.h c ades,come hither).
Parcere victis in anim m habebat,L.,xxxiii.10,4.
386.Names of Towns in the Sing lar of the Third Declension,and in the Pl ral of
all Declensions,take the Ablative of Place Where witho t in.
Ut Romae cons les sic Carthagine q otannis bini reges creabant r, NEP.,x
xiii.7,4;as at Rome(two) cons ls,so in Carthage two kings,were created yearly.
Talis(Romae Fabrici s),q alis Aristides Athenis,f it,C.,Off.,iii.22,87;
Fabrici s was j st s ch a man at Rome as Aristides was at Athens.
REMARKS.1.Appositions are p t in the Abl.commonly with in; when the appositive h
as an attrib te,the proper name reg larly precedes :
Neapoli,in celeberrimo oppido,C.,Rab.Post.,10,26; at Naples,a pop lo s t
own.
2.In the neighborhood of,at,is ad with Acc.,especially of military operations:
p gna ad Cannas(better Cannensis),the battle at Cannae;
pons ad Genavam,CAES.,B.G.,1.7; the bridge at Geneva.
NOTE.The Abl.in names of Towns of the Second Declension is fo nd once in CAESAR(
B.C.,iii.35,b t the reading is q estioned);more often in VITRUVIUS and later Lat
in,b t in Greek words only.Apparent exceptions in CAESAR and CICERO are to be re
ferred to the Abl.of Separation.The poets,however,are free.
387.In citations from Books and in En merations,the Ablative of the Place Where
is sed witho t in.
Libro tertio,third book;
vers decimo,tenth verse;
alio loco,elsewhere.
B t "in" is necessary when a passage in a book and not the whole book is meant :
PREPOSITIONS.
412.The Prepositions are originally local adverbs,which serve to define more nar
rowly the local ideas involved in the cases.The analogy of the local adverbs is
followed by other adverbs,which are not so m ch prepositions as prepositional ad
verbs.Of the Prepositions proper,that is,Prepositions
[PREPOSITIONS.267]
sed in composition(see Note),as well as in the regimen of cases,c m(con) does n
ot clearly indicate a local relation.
The only cases that involve local ideas are the Acc sative and Ablative.The Acc
sative,as the case of the Direct Object,represents the relation whither ? the Ab
lative represents the relations whence? and where?
REMARKS.1.In verbs of Motion,the Res lt of the Motion is often considered as Res
t in a place(where).See 385,N.2.
2.In verbs of Rest,the Rest is sometimes conceived as the Res lt of Motion(whith
er).See 385,N.3.
NOTE.Prepositions derive their name from the fact that they are prefixed in comp
osition.Many of the Latin Prepositions are not sed in composition,and these may
be called improper Prepositions.The prefixes amb-(am- an-),dis(di),por-(porr-,p
ol-),red-(re-),sed-(se-) and ve- are sometimes called inseparable prepositions.
413.Position of the Preposition.-- The Preposition generally precedes the case.
REMARKS.1.C m always follows a personal prono n,and may or may not follow a rela
tive prono n :
mec m,with me;
q oc m or c m q o,with whom.
De is not ncommonly placed after q o and q a,rarely after q ib s.Positi
on after the relative is fo nd here and there also in the case of other Preposit
ions,b t principally in early Latin or the poets,as follows :
ab,ad(also in CICERO),ex,in,per,post(after h nc,C.,T sc.,ii.6,15),and pr
o.
Dissyllabic Prepositions are postponed more often,b t CICERO restricts this to p
rono ns,with the following Prepositions :
ante,circa,contra,inter,penes,propter,sine, ltra.
CAESAR postpones intra also.
Ten s,as far as,and
vers s,-ward,always follow.
2.When the s bstantive has an attrib te the Preposition may come between;
hanc igit r ob ca sam(C.,Br.,24 ,94),for this reason,therefore.
3.The Preposition may be separated from its case by an attrib tive adjective or
its eq ivalent,or other modifier of the case :
post vero S llae victoriam,b t after S lla's victory;
ad beate vivend m,for living happily.
B t model prose s ally avoids separating the Preposition by more than a word or
two.The poets have no scr ples.
NOTES.1.A pec liarity of poetry,LIVY,and later prose is the post-position of bot
h Preposition and attrib te :
met in magno,L.,ix.37,11;in great fear.
2.Especially to be noted is the position of
per,thro gh(by),in adj rations:
Lydia dic per omnes te deos oro,H.,O.,1.8,1;Lydia,tell,by all the gods,I
pray thee.
Per ego te deos oro,TER.,And.,834;I pray thee,by the gods.
3.Between the Preposition and its case are often inserted the enclitics
q e,
ne,
ve;
and after ante,post,and praeter the conj nctions
a tem,
enim,
q idem,
tamen,
vero,
occ r,b t not freq ently.The first word in the combinations
et - et,
a t - a t,
[268 PREPOSITIONS.]
sim l - sim i,
vel - vel,
sometimes follows the Preposition;
c m et di rno et noct rno met ,C.,T sc.,v.23,66.
414.Repetition and Omission of the Preposition.--With different words which stan
d in the same connection,the Preposition is repeated,when the Preposition is emp
hatic,or the individ al words are to be disting ished;so reg larly after
a t - ant,
et - et,
nec - nec,
vel - vel,
non modo - sed etiam,
sed,
nisi,
q am,
and in comparative cla ses with
t.
Otherwise it is omitted;so always with
q e.
Et ex rbe et ex agris,C.,Cat.,ii.10,21;both from(the) city and from(the
) co ntry.
De honore a t de dignitate contendim s,C.,T sc.,iii.21,50;we are strivin
g abo t office,or abo t position.
REMARKS.1.When a relative follows in the same constr ction as its antecedent,the
Preposition is s ally omitted.
(Cimon) incidit in eandem invidiam(in) q am pater s s,NEP.,v.3,1; Cimon
fell into the same disrep te into which his father had fallen.
2.So in q estions :
Ante temp s mori miser m.Q od tandem temp s ? C.,T sc.,i.39,93;a hard ca
se(困っ¤áと) 'tis,to die before the time.(Before) what time,pray(=I pray yo to tell me) ?
3.After q asi,tamq am,sic t,the Preposition is more often inserted.
R s ex rbe tamq am e vinclis evolaver nt,Cf.C.,Or.,ii.6,22;they sped fr
om the city to the co ntry as if from a jail.
4.Two Prepositions are rarely sed with the same word.Either the word is repeate
d,a form of "is" sed,or one Prep,t rned into an adverb :
Pro Scipione et advers s Scipionem,for and against Scipio.
Ante p gnam et post eam,before and after the battle.
Et in corpore et extra [s nt] q aedam bona,C.,Fin.,ii.21,68.B t
intra extraq e m nitiones,CAES.,B.C.,iii.72,2.
415.As adverbs witho t a case are sed :
Ad,abo t,with n merals in CAESAR,LIVY,and later;
advers s,to meet,especially in PLAUTUS and TERENCE;
ante and post of Time(403,N.4);
contra,opposite,on the other hand;
circa,ro nd abo t,and circ m(rare);
prae,forward,in PLAUTUS and TERENCE;
prope,near,and propter(rare);
i xta,near by(rare);
intra,inside(post-classical);
extra,o tside;
infra,below;
s pra,above;
s bter,beneath,and s per,above,both rare;
citra,on this side;
ltra,beyond;
coram,in the presence of;
clam,secretly.
I.- Prepositions Constr ed with the Acc sative.
416.The Prepositions constr ed with the Acc sative are :
Ad,advers s,ante,ap d,circa,circ m,circiter,cis,citra,
[PREPOSITIONS.269]
clam,contra,erga,extra,Infra,inter,intra,i xta,ob,penes,per,post(pone),praeter,p
rope,propter,sec nd m,s pra,trans, ltra, sq e,vers s.
1.Ad.
Of Motion Whither,to, p to.Of Direction,towards
(ad orientem).
Of Respect,for,with regard to
(ad has res perspicax);
fo nd first in TERENCE.
Of Manner,after,according to
(ad h nc mod m);
colloq ial
(in CICERO'S speeches only q em ad mod m).
Of Place,at (= ap d),colloq ial
(ad montem,C.,Fam.,xv.2,2)
and legal
(ad for m,ad te),
rare in CICERO'S speeches.
Of Time,at,refers only to f t re,and gives either a point
(ad vesper m,at evening),
an interval
(ad pa ces dies,a few days hence)
,or an approaching time,towards.
With N merals,abo t.
Of P rpose,for
(castra hosti ad praedam relinq nt,L.,iii.63,4).
Also in phrases.Post-Ciceronian Latin extended the sphere of ad,and colloq ially
it was often a s bstit te for the Dative.
2.Advers s(- m),[i.e.,t rned to].
Towards,over against,against.Rare in early Latin and in CAESAR and SALLUST.In th
e sense,over against,it is fo nd first in LIVY.In the transferred sense,towards,
it expresses s ally hostile disposition,b t begins to indicate friendly disposi
tion in CICERO.
Exadvers s(- m)
is fo nd occasionally,beginning with CICERO,and is always local.
3.Ante [i.e.,over against,facing].
Of Place Where,before.
Of Place Whither,before;rarely(not in CICERO).
Of Time,before;the most freq ent se.
Of Degree,before;not in CICERO or CAESAR.
4.Ap d
is sed chiefly of Persons.
At the ho se of(characteristic locality).
In the presence of(i dicem).
In the writings of(Platonem).
In the view of.
Of Place,at,in(= "in");common in comedy
(ap d villam)
;rare elsewhere,especially with proper names,where ad was preferred,except by SA
LLUST.In phrases like
ap d se esse,to be in one's senses.
5.Circa(circ m).Aro nd.
Circ m is excl sively local(except once in VITRUVIUS,where it is tempora
l).Circa in the local sense is fo nd first in CICERO.
In the meaning abo t,of Time or N mber,it is fo nd first in HORACE.So,too,in the
transferred sense of the sphere of mental action :
circa virentis est anim s campos,H.,O.,11.5,5.(気持ÿは緑yす草原の}¤りに}る)
6.Circiter.
Of Place,abo t;once in PLAUTUS.
Us ally of Time,abo t,
especially with n merals;b t the prepositional sage is on the whole small.
7.Cis,citra.
This side,short of.
Of Place;cis fo nd first in VARRO,citra in CICERO.
Cis is occasionally temporal in PLAUTUS,SALLUST,OVID.
Citra,of Time,within,this side of; fo nd first in OVID.
Witho t(stopping short of);fo nd first in LIVY,then in OVID,and the post-A g sta
n prose writers.
[270 PREPOSITIONS.]
In C.,Or.,18,50,citra may be rendered f rther back;i.e.,nearer the beginning.
8.Clam.
Secretly.With Acc.in early Latin,in the b.Hisp.,and in the J rists.
With Abl.in CAESAR(B.C.,11.32,8),and in the b.Afr.,ii,4(both pa
ssages disp ted).
Clanc l m with Acc.,only in TERENCE.
9.Contra.
Opposite to,over against,opposed to,against.
It appears as a Preposition first in the classical period,and is sed both in lo
cal and transferred senses.In the latter case the force is predominantly hostile
.
10. Erga.Opposite,towards.
Of Place;very rarely,in early and late Latin.Us ally in the transferred sense of
friendly relations.
The hostile sense is occasional in comedy,NEPOS,and later writers.
Erga is sed always of Persons or personified Things ntil the time of T
ACITUS.
11. Extra.Witho t,o tside of,beside.
It is sed of local and transferred relations;rarely in the sense of
sine(TAC.,H.,1.49);
occasionally in sense of praeter,except.
12.Infra.
Beneath,lower down.
Of Space;more freq ently in classical Latin,
of Rank or Grade;
Temporal b t once(C.,Br.,10,40).
It occ rs b t rarely in later Latin,and is cited only once from early Latin(TER.
,E n.,489).
13.Inter.
Between.
Of Place Where,rarely
of Place Whither.Colloq ial were phrases like
inter viam(vias),on the road,
inter nos,between o rselves.
Inter pa cos,preeminently,
is post-classical.
Of Time,d ring;at all periods,b t in CICERO principally in the Letters.
14.Intra.
Within.
Of Local and Temporal(not in CICERO) relations.
The sage in transferred relations is post-classical,and mainly poetical.
15.I xta [i.e.,adjoining].
Hard by,near,next to.
It appears as a Preposition first in VARRO,then in CAESAR,b t not in CICERO.It i
s sed locally ntil LIVY,who employs it also in transferred senses of Time,Orde
r,etc.
16.Ob [i.e.,over against,opposite to].
Right before.
Of Place occasionally at all periods(not in CAESAR,LIVY,CURTIUS,TACITUS).
Of Ca se,for;fo nd in early Latin(not with personal prono ns in PLAUTUS),in clas
sical and post-classical Latin in increasing proportion.
CAESAR ses it only in form lae with
rem(res) and ca sam.
CICERO and CAESAR do not se
ob id or ob ea,
which,fo nd in early Latin,reappear in SALLUST.
Ob has almost completely s pplanted
propter in TACITUS.
With the s bstantive and participle(ob defens m Capitoli m) ob is fo nd first in
LIVY.
17.Penes.
With = in the hands of;
of Persons.
Applied to things,it is fo nd in poetry first in HORACE;in prose first in TACITU
S.
It is fo nd wholly with esse ntil later Latin.
[PREPOSITIONS.271]
18.Per.
Of Space,thro gh;
of Time,d ring;
of Ca se,owing to;
of Instr ment,by(both persons and things);
of Manner,by,in.
It is sed phraseologically in oaths,by;
also with persons(sometimes things),as
per me licet,as far as I am concerned yo may.
Per = ab of Agent is fo nd only in late Latin.
19. Pone.Behind,
only in Local relations;it is most freq ent in PLAUTUS,occ rs b t once in CICERO
,never in CAESAR or HORACE,and is rare in general.
20. Post.Of Place,behind;
rare,b t in good sage.
Of Time,after.
Of Rank,s bordinate to;in SALLUST,poets,and late prose.
21.Praeter.Of Place,in front of,on before,past.
In a transferred sense,except;contrary to(opinionem and the like).
Of Rank,beyond
(praeter omnes is cited only from PLAUTUS and HORACE; s ally praeter cet
eros).
22.Prope.Of Place,near;
fo nd first in the classical period.It sometimes has the constr ctions of adject
ives of Nearness.
Of Time,near; very rare and post-classical,as LIVY,SUETONIUS.
Propi s is fo nd first in CAESAR as a preposition.
23.Propter.
Of Place,near.
Of Ca se,on acco nt of; very common in early and classical Latin,b t avoided by
many a thors,notably TACITUS.
With s bstantive and participle it appears first in VARRO; then is common in LIV
Y,and later.
24.Sec nd m [i.e.,following].
Of Place,along(lit s),close behind; very rare(C.,Fam.,iv.12,1).
Of Time,immediately after;in early Latin and CICERO,common in LIVY,b t never in
CAESAR,SALLUST,TACITUS.
Of Series,next to;in PLAUTUS and CICERO.
Of Reference,according to;at all periods.
Sec s is ante-classical and rare.
25.S pra.
Of Place,above,beyond;so CICERO almost excl sively.
Of Time,beyond; very rare.
Of Grade,above.
Of A thority,in charge of; VITRUVIUS and later.
26.Trans.
On the other side,beyond,across;only in Local relations.
27.Ultra.
Of Space and Meas re,on that side,beyond.
Of Time; only in late Latin.
The early form
ls
is very rare and in form lae,as,
Cis Tiberim et ls Tiberim.
In late Latin ltra s pplants praeter almost wholly.
28.Usq e, p to,
is fo nd once in TERENCE,several times in CICERO,and occasionally later,with the
Acc.of the name of a town.
With other names of localities it appears first in LIVY.
29.Vers s,-ward.
As a preposition it first appears in the classical period and is fo nd s ally
with names of Towns,and small islands;
with other words it is reg larly combined with the prepositions ad(not in CICERO
) or in.
[272 PREPOSITIONS.]
II.Prepositions Constr ed with the Ablative.
417.Prepositions constr ed with the Ablative are a(ab,abs), absq e, coram, c m,
de, e(ex), prae, pro, sine, ten s; rarely fine,palam,proc l,sim l.
1. A(ab,abs).Of Place Whence,from,especially of the point of depart re;so i
n phrases,
a tergo,
a capite,etc.
Of Ca se,from(ira); beginning with LIVY.
Of Agent,by.
Of Remote Origin,from.
Of Time,from.
Of Reference,according to,after.
Of Specification,in
(doleo ab oc lis);often with compo nd verbs.
Note.- The form before vowels and h is always ab ; before consonants s ally a,
tho gh ab is not ncommon before consonants other than the labials b, f, p, V, a
nd is freq ent before 1,n,r,s,and i( j);abs is fo nd only before te and in the c
ombination absq e.CICERO ses abs t in his early writings,b t prefers a te in hi
s later ones.
2. Absq e [i.e.,off].Witho t.Pec liar to early Latin,where it is sed in co
nditional sentences only.Occasionally in later Latin,as,absq e sententia(Q iNT.,
vii.2,44),for praeter sententiam.
3. Coram.Face to face with,in the presence of; it is sed with Persons only
,and is fo nd first in CICERO,and then in later writers,b t in general it is rar
e ntil the time of TACITUS,who ses it very often in the Annals and always post
pones.
4. C m..With; of Accompaniment in the widest sense.With Abl.of Manner reg l
arly when there is no attrib tive;often when there is one.Sometimes it is sed o
f m t al action : orare c m,plead with(PLAUTUS),etc.
5. De.Of Place,down from,and then from; especially with compo nds of de and
ex.Of So rce,from; with verbs of Receiving(act al and mental).Of Origin; b t ma
inly in poetry and later prose.Of Object,concerning.Of Time; in phrases de nocte
,de die(diem de die,day after day).Of the Whole from which a part is taken.Of Re
ference,according to(de sententia).Of Material;poetical and late.
6. E(ex).Of Place,o t of,from.Often in phraseological sages,as
ex parte,partly;ex asse,and the like.With verbs of Receiving,from.Of Tim
e,from;
ex tempore is phraseological.Of Origin,from.Of Reference,according to.Of
Manner;in many phrases,as
ex aeq o,ex ordine.E is sed before consonants only,ex before both vowel
s and consonants.
7. Fine(or fini).Up to;fo nd in PLAUTUS and CATO,then not ntil very late L
atin.With the Gen.it occ rs in b.Afr.and in SALLUST,Fr.; then not ntil OVID and
very late Latin.
8. Palam,in the sense of coram,in the presence of,is fo nd first in HORACE
and LIVY,and is rare.
[PREPOSITIONS.273]
9. Prae.Of Place,in front of; with verbs of Motion only,in classical Latin.
In early Latin in the phrase prae man ,at hand.Of the Preventive Ca se,for;with
negatives only,in and after the classical period;in early Latin,also in positive
sentences.Of Comparison,in comparison with;occasionally at all periods.
10. Pro.Of Place,before; not in early Latin,b t fo nd first in the classical
period,where it is confined to certain combinations,as
pro rostris,castris,aede,vallo,etc.,
and means before and on.In behalf of; not cited for early Latin.Instead of; very
common at all periods.In proportion to;at all periods.
Q am pro;fo nd first in LIVY.
11. Proc l,far from,is poetical,and begins in prose with LIVY.In classical L
atin prose always with ab.
12. Sim l,in the sense of c m,belongs to poetry and TACITUS(Ann.,in.64).
13. Sine,witho t,is opposed to c m.
14. Ten s,to the extent of.Of Space(act al and transferred),as far as.It is
fo nd occasionally with the Gen.,b t almost wholly with Pl.,and perhaps b t once
in CICERO(Arat.,83);otherwise it belongs to poetry,making its first appearance
in prose in CICERO(Dei.,13,36) and LIVY.It occ rs with the Acc.in late Latin.Ten
s is always postponed.
III.Prepositions Constr ed with the Acc sative and Ablative.
418.Prepositions constr ed with the Acc sative and Ablative are in,s b,s bter,s
per.
1.In(the forms endo,ind ,are early and rare),(a) With Acc sative : Of Place,into
,into the midst of.Of Disposition and Direction,towards.Of Time,into(m ltam noct
em),for(diem,m ltos annos,poster m).Of P rpose or Destination,for;mostly post-cl
assical.Of Manner,in,after.Phraseologically with ne ter adjectives : in dsteri s
,for the worse;b t mainly post-classical.With Distrib tives,to,among.
(b) With Ablative : Of Place,in,on.Of Time,within.Of Reference,in the case of,in
regard to,in the matter of.Of Condition,in (armis).In many phrases,especially w
ith ne ter adjectives,in incerto,d bio,integro,ambig o,etc.
2.S b.(a) With Acc sative : Of Place Whither, nder.Of Time Approaching,abo t(noc
tem,vesper m);j st Past,immediately after.Of Condition, nder(s b potestatem redi
gi).
(b) With Ablative : Of Place Where, nder; also in phrases,s b armis,etc.Of Time
When,abo t;rare,and first in CAESAR.Of Position, nder(rege,i dice,etc.).Of Condi
tion, nder(ea condicione);first in LIVY.
[274 INFINITIVE.]
3.S bter,(a) With Acc sative;rare,and locally eq al to s b.
(6) With the Ablative;more rare and almost wholly poetical(CATULLUS and VERGIL).
Cf.C.,T sc.,v.i,4,which may be Acc.S bt s occ rs only in VITR.,iv.2,5,and then w
ith the Acc sative.
4.S per,(a) With Acc sative b t once before the classical time : Of Place,over,a
bove.Of Time,d ring;fo nd first in PLINY,Epp.Metaphorically of Degree,beyond(s p
er mod m);post-classical.
(b) With the Ablative : Of Space,above.Of Time,d ring(not ntil the A g stan poe
ts).Metaphorically = praeter;very rare : = de,concerning;colloq ial;hence in PLA
UTUS,CATO,CICERO'S Letters(ad Att),SALLUST,HORACE,LIVY; b t ncommon.
INFINITIVE.
The Infinitive as a S bstantive.
419.The Infinitive is the s bstantive form of the verb.
NOTE.--The Infinitive differs from a verbal s bstantive in that it retains the a
dverbial attrib te,the designations of voice and time,and the regimen of the ver
b :
Amare,to love;
valde amare,to love h gely;
amari,to be loved;
amavisse,to have loved;
amare aliq em,to love a man;
nocere alic i,to h rt a man.
B t the great claim of the Infinitive to be considered a verb lies in the invol
tion of predicate and s bject.Like the finite verb,the Infinitive involves predi
cate and s bject;b t the s bj.is indefinite and the predication is dependent.
420.The Infinitive,when it stands alone,involves an indefinite Acc sative S bjec
t,and the Predicate of that S bject is,of co rse,in the Acc sative Case.
Regem esse,to be king.
Bon m esse,to be good.
Compare
q id st lti s q am aliq em eo sibi placere q od ipse non fecit, SEN.,E.M
.,74,17;what is more foolish than for a man to(that a man sho ld) pride himself
on what he has not done himself.
So in the paradigm of the verb :
Amat r m esse,to be abo t to love.
NOTE.On the Nom.with the Inf.by Attraction,see 528.
In conseq ence of this do ble nat re,the Infinitive may be sed as a s bstantive
or as a verb.
421.The Infinitive,as a s bstantive,is sed reg larly in two cases only Nominati
ve and Acc sative.In the other cases its place is s pplied by the Ger nd and the
Ablative S pine.
NOTES.1.Traces of the original Dat.(or Loc.) nat re of the Infinitive are still
apparent iii many constr ctions,which are,however,mostly poetical :
[INFINITIVE.275]
(a) With verbs of Motion in early Latin and the later poets,when t,ad with Ger
ndive or S p.is to be expected.
Abiit aedem visere Minervae,PL.,B.,900;she went away to visit the temple
of Minerva.
Semper in Ocean m mittit me q aerere gemmas,PROP.,ii.(iii.) 16 (8),17;sh
e is always sending me to the Ocean to look for(in q est of) pearis.
(b) With verbs of Giving,Rendering,and the like,in early Latin and the poets,whe
re the Acc.of the Ger ndive is to be expected.Classical is the se of bibere onl
y,in this way.(The old form biber points to the effacement of the final sense of
this Inf.)
Iovi bibere ministrare,Cf.C.,T sc.,1.26.
Q em vir m a t heroa lyra vel acri tibia s mes celebrare,Clio? H.,O.,1.1
2,1.
Different,of co rse,are cases like
di tibi posse t os trib ant detendere semper,Ov.,Tr.,iii.5,21,where poss
e defendere is felt as potestatem defendendi.
(c) With many adjectives where the S p,in ,or some constr ction of P rpose,is t
o be expected.
In early Latin the adjectives are
parat s,cons et s,defess s.
B t this sage is widely extended by the A g stan poets VERGIL and HORACE,and la
ter.
It is confined principally,however,to adjectives of capability,ability,necessity
,etc.,and adjectives like
facilis(with act.as well as pass.Inf.,first in PROP.),
difficilis,and the like :
Roma capi facilis,LUCAN,ii.656.
Note the strange sage
dissentire manifest s,TAC.,Ann.,ii.57,4,
and occasionally elsewhere.
2.The Inf.may take an adj.attrib te,b t in classical prose this is limited to
ips m,hoc ipsnm,and tot m hoc :
Vivere ips m t rpe est nobis,living itself is a disgrace to s.
Q ib sdam tot m hoc displicet philosophari(280,i,a).
The Infinitive as a S bject.
422.The Infinitive,as a S bject,is treated as a ne ter s bstantive.
Incipere m lto est q am inpetrare facili s,PL.,Poen.,974;beginning is m
ch easier(work) than winning.
Miser m est det rbari fort nis omnib s,C.,Q inct.,3 1,95;it is wretched
to find one's self t rned r dely o t of all one's fort nes.
Non tam t rpe f it vinci q am contendisse decor m est,Ov.,M.,ix.6(280,2,
a).
NOTES.1.The se of the Inf.as a s bj.grew o t of its se as an obj.,b t the orig
inal Dat.(Loc.) sense was lost to the conscio sness j st as the prepositional se
nse of o r own "to" is lost when o r Inf.becomes a s bj.; as in,"to err is h man
,to forgive divine".No Roman felt
t rpe f it vinci,as,"there was disgrace in being beaten";
bon m est legere was to him another
bona est lectio(see PRISCIAN,408,27).
2.The s bstantives sed as predicates are not common in early Latin.
L bido est
is confined to PLAUTUS.
St ltitia est,
consili m est,and
temp s est
are niversal.CICERO introd ces the not ncommon
mos est,
and many others with est,as :
cons et do(-inis),viti m,i s,fas,nefas,facin s,fat m,cap t,res(CAESAR),
op s,m n s,offici m,on s,sapientia,and a few others.
Still more are fo nd later.Many of these also take
t;
so offici m always in comedy(except TER.,And.,331).
3.Ne ter adjectives are sed as predicates in great variety.Ciceronian are
certi s (q am), consentane m, fals m,incredibile, integr m,glorios m, ma
i s(q am),mir m,novom,optim m,rect m,sing lare,trit m,verisimile,ver m.
Most of them,however,b t once.Some of these also take
t,b t not often in good prose.
[276 INFINITIVE.]
4.In early Latin many impersonal verbs are sed as predicates.Classical Latin re
tains most of them,b t drops
condecet,disp det,s bolet,
and adds some,s ch as
paenitet,dedecet,displicet,prodest,obest,attinet.
Others come in later.Some,s ch as
oportet,also take t
or the simple S bjv.Noteworthy is
est,it is possible,
fo nd first in VARRO and LUCR.,then not till VERG.and Hor.,and never common.
5.Certain abstract phrases,whose meanings are akin to the words already mentione
d,take the Inf.as a s bject.So especially predicate Genitives,as
cons et dinis and
meris;
or combinations like
q id negotii,
nihil negotii est;
predicate Datives s ch as
cordi est,
c rae est,
both nclassical;or phrases,as
operae preti m,
in animo esse,
in mentem venire,
of which the last two were introd ced by CICERO.
The Infinitive as an Object.
423.1.The Infinitive is sed as the Object of Verbs of Creation,commonly known a
s A xiliary Verbs.
These Verbs help the Infinitive into existence.
2.S ch verbs denote Will,Power,D ty,Habit,Inclination,Resolve,Contin ance,End,an
d the like,with their opposites.
Emori c pio,TER.,Hea t.,971;I want to die.
[Cato] esse q am videri bon s malebat,S.,C.,54,5;Cato preferred being(go
od) to seeming good.
Sed precor t possim t ti s esse miser,Ov.,Tr.,v.2,78;b t I pray that I
may be more safely wretched.
Vincere scis,Hannibal;victoria ti nescis,L.,xxii.51;how to win victory,
yo know,Hannibal; how to make se of victory,yo know not.
Q i mori didicit,servire dedidicit,SEN.,E.M.,26,10;he who has learned to
die has nlearned to be a slave.
Maledictis deterrere ne scribat parat,TER.,Ph.,3;he is preparing(trying)
to frighten(him) from writing,by ab se.(in Prolog e)
Q i mentiri solet,peierare cons evit,C.,Rosc.Com.,16,46;he who is wont t
o lie is acc stomed to swear falsely.
V lnera q ae fecit deb it ipse pati,Ov.,Am.,ii.3,4;the wo nds he gave he
sho ld himself have s ffered.
Vereor la dare praesentem,C.,N.D.,1.21,58;I feel a delicacy abo t praisi
ng a man to his face.
Religion m anim m nodis exsolvere pergo,LUCR.,1.932; I go on to loose th
e spirit from the bonds of s perstitio s creeds.
T a q od nil refert,percontari desinas,TER.,Hec.,810;cease to inq ire wh
at is not to yo r advantage.
So habeo,I have(it in my power).
Tant m habeo polliceri me tibi c m late satisfact r m,C.,Fam.,I.5 A.3;so
m ch I can promise,that I will give yo ab ndant satisfaction.
NOTES.1.The original force of the Inf.is,in most of these constr ctions,hard to
determine,and was certainly not felt by the Romans themselves.In many cases the
Inf.seems to have been sed beca se the governing word or phrase was felt to be
more or less eq ivalent to a Verb of Creation.
2.The principal verbs,constr ed th s with the Inf.,are as follows :
Will :
velle,malle,nolle,c pere,optare(rare,except in passive),petere,pest lare
,:
avere,a dere,desiderare(first in Cic.),praegestire,gestire,ardere,
[INFINITIVE.277]
met ere(anto-class.),vereri,timere,formidare(ante-class.),reformidare,ho
rrere,horrescere,hortari
and compo nds,monere and compo nds,s adere(first in Cic.),pers adere,i bere, imp
erare,praecipere,cogere,permittere(once in Cic.,then later),concedere(first in C
ic.),c rare(not in CAES.,SALL.,LIVY),vetare,rec sare(first in Cic.),mittere, omi
ttere,intermittere,c nctari,cessare,morari,d bitare,gravari,prohibere,impedire,d
eterrere.
Power :
posse,q ire,neq ire,s stinere(first in Cic.),valere(first in Cic.), poll
ere(first in Cic.),habere(rare,except in Cic.),scire,nescire.
D ty :
debere,necesse habeo.
Habit :
ass escere,ass efacere(first in Cic.),cons escere,solere.
Inclination :
conari(only with Inf.),st dere,contendere,intendere(CAES.),laborare(alwa
ys with neg.in Cic.),
moliri(rare),aggredi,ingredi,adoriri,niti (first in CAES.), eniti(ante-c
lass,and post-class.),q aerere(first in Cic.),temptare (first in HIBTIUS).
Resolve .
cogitare,meditari,memini(mostly poet.),parare,stat ere(first in Cic.), c
onstit ere(first in TER.),decernere(not class,in pass.),i dicare(first in Cic.),
destinare(first in CAES.),cert m est,deliberat m est,proposit m est (first in C
ic.).
Contin ance :
stare(first in Cic.),instare,perstare(once in Cic.,then late), persevera
re(first in Cic.),properare(only word sed in early Latin), festinare(first in C
ic.),mat rare(first in Cic.).
Beginning and End :
coepi,incipere(first in Cic.),exordiri,pergere,desinere.
Poets are free in sing the Inf.after other verbs.
3.Notice that
coepi,I have beg n,
and
desino,I cease,
are sed in Pf .pass,with passive Infinitives,in early Latin,CICERO,CAESAR,alway
s;
later the constr ction varies,and TACITUS does not observe the r le.
Bello Athenienses ndiq e premi s nt coepti,NEP.,xiii.3,1;the Athenians
began to feel the press re of war on(from) all sides.
Veteres orationes legi s nt desitae,C.,Br.,32,123;the old speeches have
ceased to be read.
When the passives are really reflexives or ne ter,the active forms may be sed.
4.Verbs of Will and Desire take " t" as well as the Infinitive.So reg larly
opto,I choose,in classical prose.
5.Verbs which denote Hope,Promise,and Threat are treated as verbs of Saying and
Thinking(530),b t also occasionally as in English :
Sperant se maxim m fr ct m esse capt ros,C.,Lael.,21,79;they hope that t
hey will derive great advantage.
S br pt r m pallam promisit tibi,PL.,Asin.,930;he promised to steal the
mantle from yo .
6."Doceo",I teach,
i beo,I bid,
veto,I forbid,
sino,I let,
take the Inf.as a Second Acc sative(339) :
(Dionysi s) ne coll m tonsori committeret tondere filias s as doc it, C.
,T sc.,v.20,58;Dionysi s,to keep from tr sting his neck to a barber,ta ght his d
a ghters to shave(ta ght them shaving).
Ipse i bet mortis te meminisse de s,MART.,ii.59(376).
Vitae s mma brevis spem nos vetat inchoare longam,H.,O.,1.4,15;life's br
ief s m forbids s open(a) long(acco nt with) hope.
Ne sinas Medos eq itare in ltos,H.,O.,1.2,51;nor let the Median ride an
d ride np nished.The Infinitive as a Predicate.
424.The Infinitive,as a verbal s bstantive,may be sed as a Predicate after the
cop la "esse",to be,and the like.
Docto homini et er dito vivere est cogitare,C.,T sc.,v.38,111;to a learn
ed and c ltivated man to live is to think.
[278 GERUND AND GERUNDIVE.]
[SUPINE.283]
SUPINE.
434.The S pine is a verbal s bstantive,which appears only in the Acc sative and
Ablative cases.
The Acc sative S pine.
435.The Acc sative S pine(S pine in - m) is sed chiefly after verbs of Motion,t
o express Design.
Galliae legati ad Caesarem grat lat m convener nt,CAES.,B.G.,I.30,1;the comm
issioners of Ga l came to congrat late Caesar.
[284 SUPINE.]
Spectat m veni nt; veni nt spectent r t ipsae,Ov.,A.A.,1.99; they come to s
ee the show; they come to be themselves a show.
(Galli gallinacei) c m sole e nt c bit m,PLIN.,N.H.,x.24,46; cocks go to roo
st at s nset.雄鶏は夜明ÿとともにねYらにòく
St ltitia est venat m d cere invitas canes,Pl..,St.,139; 'tis foolishness to
take nwilling dogs a-h nting.aやNる犬‡狩りに連れ‰行くのは愚åyáとÿ
NOTES.1.ire and venire are the most common verbs with the S pine,and they form m
any phraseological sages,as :
ire coct m,c bit m,dormit m,past m,s pplicat m,sess m,sal tat m,etc.
Similarly
dare is fo nd in phrases with n pt m,ven m,pess m.
NOTES.1.Q estions of this kind are characteristic of the Comic Poets.In CICERO t
hey are fo nd especially in expressions of do bt,with posse,and with an emphatic
personal prono n.
2.S ch a q estion may have the force of a command.So in the phrase
etiam t taces ? won't yo keep q iet ?
common in comedy(PL.,Trin.,514).
3.Noteworthy is the occasional sage of the q estion in place of a condition.
Amat ? sapit,PL.,Am.,995;is he in,love? He is sensible.
Tristis es ? indignor q od s m tibi ca sa doloris,Ov.,TV.,iv.3,33(542).See 5
93,4.
4.When several q estions follow in immediate s ccession,only the first generally
takes the Interrogative Prono n,or -ne.Repeated q estioning is passionate.
5.On t in the exclamatory q estion,see 558.
454.Interrogative Particles.-Ne(enclitic) is always appended to the emphatic wor
d,and generally serves to denote a q estion,witho t indicating the expectation o
f the speaker.
Omnisne pec nia dissol ta est ? C.,Verr.,iii.77,180; is ALL the money paid o
t ?
(Estne omnis pec nia dissol ta ? is all the money paid o t ?)
REMARKS.1.As the emphatic word s ally begins the sentence,
[292 DIRECT SIMPLE QUESTIONS.]
so -ne is s ally appended to the first word in the sentence.B t exceptions are
not ncomon.
2.-Ne is originally a negative.Q estioning a negative leans to the affirmative;
and -ne is not always strictly impartial.
NOTES.1.-Ne sometimes c ts off a preceding -s(in which case it may shorten a pre
ceding long vowel),and often drops its own e.
Viden? Seest? (=Videsne?) (pergin = pergisne pergitin = pergitisne)
T n? Yo ?(=T ne)
Satin ? For certain? (=Satisne)(censen=censes ne)
Also scin,ain,vin,itan,etc.This occ rs especially in early Latin.
2.This -ne is not to be confo nded with the asseverative -ne,which is fo nd occa
sionally in PLAUTUS and TERENCE,CATULLUS,HORACE
(o seri st dior m,q ine p tetis,etc.,H.,S.,1.10,21,a m ch disc ssed passage),
and later appended to personal,demonstrative,and relative prono ns.
3.In poetry -ne is sometimes appended to interrogative words,to heighten the eff
ect : tr mne(H.,S.,ii.3,251),q one(H.,S.,ii.3,295).
4.-Ne is often added to personal prono ns in indignant q estions :
t ne inane q icq am p tes esse ? C.,Ac.,ii.40,125.
5.In early Latin -ne seems to be sed sometimes with a force similar to that lat
er exercised by nonne;b t in most of the examples the expectation of an affirmat
ive answer seems to be d e rather to the context than to ne;see,however,R.2.
455.Nonne expects the answer Yes.
Nonne meministi C.,Fin.,ii.3,10;do yo not remember ?
Nonne is generosissim s q i optim s ? QUINT.,v.ii,4; is he not the tr es
t gentleman who is the best man ?
So the other negatives with -ne : nemone,nihilne,and the like.
NOTE.Nonne is denied for PLAUTUS,b t wrongly,tho gh it occ rs b t rarely,and reg
larly before a vowel.It is also rare in TERENCE.In classical Latin it is freq e
nt,b t is never fo nd in CATULLUS,TIBULLDS,and SENECA RHETOR.
456. N m.expects the answer No.
N mq is est hic ali s praeter me atq e te ? Nemo est,PL.,Tr.,69; is anyb
ody here besides yo and me ? No.
N m tibi c m fa ces rit sitis,a rea q aeris poc la? H.,S.,1.2,114;when
thirst b rns yo r throat for yo ,do yo ask for golden c ps ? [No.]
NOTE.N mne is fo nd very rarely,perhaps only in C.,N.D.,1.31,88,and Lael.,ii,36.
N mnam belongs to early Latin.In many cases in early Latin,
n m seems to introd ce a simple q estion for information,witho t expecti
ng a negative answer.
457.1. An(or) belongs to the second part of a disj nctive q estion.
Sometimes,however,the first part of the disj nctive q estion is s ppressed,or,ra
ther,involved.The second alternative with "an" serves to rge the acceptance of
the positive or negative proposition involved in the preceding statement.This ab
r pt form of q estion(or,then) is of freq ent se in Remonstrance,Expost lation,
S rprise,and Irony.
Non man m abstines ? An tibi iam mavis cerebr m dispergam hic ? TER.,Ad.
,781;are yo not going to keep yo r hands off ? Or wo ld yo rather have me scat
ter yo r brains over the place now ?(Vir c stodit absens,my h sband keeps g ard,
tho gh absent.is it not so ?)
[DIRECT DISJUNCTIVE QUESTIONS.293]
An nescis longas regib s esse man s ? Ov.,Her.,16,166;or perhaps yo do
not know(yo do not know,then) that kings have long hands(arms).
NOTES.1.This sage is fo nd in early Latin,b t is a characteristic of CICERO esp
ecially.
2.An is strengthened by ne.This is fo nd freq ently in early Latin,more
rarely later.
CICERO ses anne only in disj nctive q estions,and HORACE,TIBULLUS,PROPERTIUS n
ot at all.
3.In early Latin very freq ently,less often in the poets;occasionally in
prose,beginning with LIVY,an is sed as a simple interrogative;so
nescio an = nescio n m.
There seems to be good reason for believing that "an" was originally a simple in
terrogative particle,b t became identified later with disj nctive q estions.
2.Especially to be noted,in connection with "an",are the phrases,
nescio an(first in CICERO,and not common),
ha d scio an(this is the s al phrase : ha d sciam an is rare),I do not
know b t;
d bito an,I do bt,I do bt b t = I am inclined to think;
incert m an(once in CICERO),
and rarely
d bitarim and d bi m an,which give a modest affirmation;
very rarely a negation.Negative particles,added to these expressions,give a mild
negation.
(~èはyaåと思þ)
Ha d scio an ita sit,C.,T sc.,ii.17,41; I do not know b t it is so.
Hand scio an n lla(senect s) beatior esse possit,C.,Cat.M.,16,56; I do n
ot know b t it is impossible for any old age to be happier.
D bito an [Thrasyb l m] prim m omni m ponam,NEP.,viii.i,1; I do bt b t I
sho ld(= I am inclined to think I sho ld) p t Thrasyb l s first of all.
NOTE.In early Latin these phrases are still d bitative.The affirmative f
orce comes in first in CICERO,and seems to have been eq ivalent to forsitan,perh
aps,with the Potential S bj nctive :
Forsitan et Priami f erint q ae fata req iras,V.,A.,ii.506;perhaps yo m
ay ask what was the fate of Priam,too.
DIRECT DISJUNCTIVE QUESTIONS.
458.Direct Disj nctive Q estions have the following forms :
First Cla se. Second and S bseq ent Cla ses.
tr m,whether, an(anne),or
-ne, an,
an(anne)
.
Utr m nescis q am alte ascenderis,an pro nihilo id p tas ? C.,Fam.,x.26,3;ar
e yo not aware how high yo have mo nted,or do yo co nt that as nothing ?
Vosne L ci m Domiti m an vos Domiti s deser it ? CAES.,B.C.,ii.32,8;have yo
deserted L ci s Domiti s,or has Domiti s deserted yo ?
Eloq ar an sileam ? V.,A.,iii.39; shall I speak,or hold my peace ?
Utr m hoc t par m commeministi,an ego non satis intellexi,an m tasti senten
tiam C.,Att.,ix.2; do yo not remember this,or did I mis nderstand yo ,or have y
o changed yo r view ?
[294 INDIRECT QUESTIONS.]
NOTES.1.Utr nme an is fo nd once in CICERO(Inv.,1.31,61),not in CAESAR or LIVY,o
ccasionally elsewhere(H.,Epod.,i,7);
tr m ne an is more common.
Ne-an,which is common in prose,is not fo nd in CAT.,TIB.,PROP.,Hor.,LUCA
N.
2.Ne in the second member,with omitted particle in first member,occ rs only in H
.,Ep.,1.ii,3(disp ted),in the direct q estion,except in the combination necne(45
9).
3.Ne-ne is very rare;V.,A.,H.738;xi.126.
4.A t(or),in q estions,is not to be confo nded with an.A t gives another part of
a simple q estion,or another form of it(or,in other words).An excl des,a t exte
nds.
(Vol ptas) melioremne efficit a t la dabiliorem vir m ? C.,Parad.,1.3,15
; does pleas re make a better or more praiseworthy man ?(Answer : neither)
T vir m me a t hominem dep tas adeo esse? TER.,Hec.,524;do yo hold me
to be yo r h sband or even a man ?
459.In direct q estions,or not is annon(an non),rarely necne;
in indirect,necne,rarely annon.
isne est q em q aero,annon? TER.,Ph.,852; is that the man I am looking f
or,or not ?
Sitq e memor nostri necne,referte mihi,Ov.,Tr.,iv.3,10(204,N.7).
NOTES.1.Necne is fo nd indirect q estions in CICERO,T sc.,iii.18,41
(s nt haec t a verba necne ?),
Flacc.,25,59;and also LUCR.,iii.713.
Annon in indirect q estions occ rs in CICERO,Inv.,1.50,95;ii.20,60;Cael.
,21,52;Balb.,8,22,etc.
2.Utr m is sometimes sed with the s ppression of the second cla se for whether
or no? b t not in early Latin.So C.,Flacc.,19,45,etc.
INDIRECT QUESTIONS.
460.Indirect q estions have the same particles as the direct,with the following
modifications.
1 .Simple Q estions.
(a) N m loses its negative force,and becomes simply whether.It decays in later L
atin.
Spec lari(i sser nt) n m sollicitati animi socior m essent,L.,XLII.19,8;
they ordered them to spy o t whether the allies had been tampered with.(味方の気持ÿN離反し¤
(b) Si,if,is sed for whether,chiefly after verbs and sentences implying trial.C
ompare O si(261).
Temptata res est si primo impet capi Ardea posset,L.,1.57,2; an attempt
was made(in case,in hopes that,to see)if Ardea co ld be taken by a dash(co p-de
-main).
Ibo,visam si domi est(467,N.),TER,.,Hea t.,170; I will go(to) see if he
is at home.
NOTES.1.An is sometimes sed for n m and ne,b t never in model prose.
Cons l it deinde (Alexander) an toti s orbis imperi m fatis sibi destina
ret r,CURT.,iv.7,26;Alexander then asked the oracle whether the empire of the wh
ole world was destined for him by the fates.
2.Nonne is cited only from CICERO and only after q aerere(Ph.,xii.7,15).
[MOODS IN INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.295]
2.Disj nctive Q estions.
In addition to the forms for Direct Q estions(458),a form with -ne in the second
cla se only is fo nd in the Indirect Q estion,b t is never common;see 458,N.2.
arq ini s Prisci Tarq inii regis fili s neposne f erit par m liq et,L.,1
.46,4; whether Tarq in was the son or grandson of king Tarq in the Elder does no
t appear.(タÿク スは老タÿク ス王の息子å孫åは}きらåèはya)
NOTES.1.The form -no is not fo nd in CAESAR or SALLUST.
2.The form ne - ne is poetical,except once in CAESAR(B.G.,vii.141,8).
3.Utr m-ne-an is rare b t classical.Utr mne-an begins with HORACE,is not fo nd i
n LIVY,VELL.,VAL.M.,and both PLINYS.In TACITUS only in the THalog s.
SUMMARY OF DIRECT AND INDIRECT DISJUNCTIVE
QUESTIONS.
461.Direct.
Is the,last syllable short or long ? Cf.C.,Or.,64,217.
Postrema syllaba tr m brevis est an longa ?
brevisne est an longa ? Indirect.
In a verse it makes no difference whether the last syllable be short or long :
{ tr m postrema syllaba brevis sit an
longa.In vers nihil refert{ postrema syllaba brevisne sit an longa.
{ postrema syllaba brevis an longa sit(
CICERO).
{ postrema syllaba brevis sit longane.
MOODS IN INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.
1.In Direct Q estions.
462.The Mood of the q estion is the Mood of the expected or anticipated answer.
463.Indicative q estions expect an Indicative answer,when the q estion is gen in
e.
A.Q is homo est ? B.Ego s m,TER.,And.,965;who is that ? It is I.
A.Vivitne(pater) ? B.Vivom liq im s,PL.,Capt.,282; is his father living
? We left him alive.
464.Indicative q estions anticipate an Indicative answer in the negative when th
e q estion is rhetorical.
Q is non pa pertatem extimescit ? C.,T sc.,v.31,89;who does not dread po
verty ?
[296 MOODS IN INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.]
REMARK.Nonne and n m in the direct q estion are often rhetorical (see PL.,Am.,53
9;C.,Div.,1.14,24).
With nonne a negative answer is anticipated to a negative,hence the affirmative
character.Compare f rther,451,R.2.
465.S bj nctive q estions which expect Imperative answers are p t chiefly in the
First Person,when the q estion is deliberative.
A.Abeam? B.Abi,PL.,Merc.,749;shall I go away ? Go.
A.Q id n nc faciam ? B.Te s spendito,PL.,Ps.,1229; what shall I do now ?
Hang yo rself.
REMARK.So in the representative of the First Person in dependent disco rse(265).
466.S bj nctive q estions anticipate a potential answer in the negative,when the
q estion is rhetorical.
Q is hoc credat ? who wo ld believe this ? [No one wo ld believe this.]
Q id faceret ali d? what else was he to do ? [Nothing.]
Q is t lerit Gracchos de seditione q erentes ? J v.,ii.24(259).
REMARK.On the Exclamatory Q estion see 534,558.
2.In Indirect Q estions.
467.The Dependent Interrogative is always in the S bj nctive.
The S bj nctive may represent the Indicative.
[Considerabim s] q id fecerit(Indic.fecit),q id faciat(Indic.facit),q id
fact r s sit(Indic.faciet or fact r s est),Cf.C.,Inv.,1.25,36; we will consider
what he has done,what he is doing,what he is going to do (will do).
(Epaminondas) q aesivit salv sne esset clipe s,C.,Fin.,ii.30,97;Epaminon
das asked whether his shield was safe.(Salv sne est ?)
The S bj nctive may be original.See 265.
Ipse docet q id agam; fas est et ab hoste doceri,Ov.,M.,iv.428(219); (Q
id agam,what I am to do;not what I am doing).
Q aero a te c r C.Corneli m non defenderem,C.,Vat.,2,5;I inq ire of yo
why I was not to defend C.Corneli s.(C r non defenderem ? why was I not to defen
d ?)
REMARKS.1.
Nescio q is,
nescio q id,
nescio q i,
nescio q od,I know not who,what,which,
may be sed exactly as indefinite prono ns,and then have no effect on the constr
ction.This sage is fo nd at all periods.
Nescio q id mai s nascit r Iliade,PROP.,ii.(iii.) 32(34),66;something,I
know not what,is coming to the birth,greater than the Iliad.
2.The Relative has the same form as the Interrogative q is ? except in the Nom.S
ing.; hence the importance of disting ishing between them in dependent sentences
.The interrogative depends on the leading verb,the relative belongs to the antec
edent.(611,R.2.)
Interrogative : dic q id rogem,tell me what it is I am asking.
Relative : dic q od rogo,TER.,And.,764;tell me that which I am ask
ing
(the ans
wer to my q estion).
The relative is not nfreq ently sed where we sho ld expect the interrogative,e
specially when the facts of the case are to be emphasised :
Dicam q od sentio,C.,Or.,1.44,195;I will tell yo my real opinion.
Incorporated relatives are not to be confo nded with interrogatives :
Patefacio vobis q as isti penit s abstr sas(隠し¤) insidias(= insidias q as) se
pos issse arbitrant r,C.,Agr.,ii.18,49; I am exposing to yo r view the schemes w
hich those people fancy they have laid in profo nd secrecy.
NOTE.In the early Latin of Comedy the leading verb is very freq ently disconnect
ed from the interrogative,which conseq ently appears as an independent sentence
with the Indicative.This is most common after
dic,
responde,
loq ere,and kindred Imperatives;
vide(PLAUTUS also circ mspice,respice);
te rogo,
interrogo,
q aero,and similar phrases;
a dire,
videre,etc.,
scin;
relative words, t,q omodo,etc.,where the modal and not interrogative force is pr
ominent.
Classical prose has given p all these sages.A few cases in CICERO are conteste
d or differently explained.In poetry and later prose the examples are fo nd only
here and there.
Dic,q id est ? PL.,Men.,397; tell me,what is it?(Dic q id sit,tell me wh
at it is.)
Q in t no verbo dic : q id est q od me velis ? TER.,And.,45;won't yo
tell me in one word : What is it yo want of me?
Dic mihi q id feci nisi non sapienter amavi,Ov.,Her.,ii.27; tell me what
have I done,save that I have loved nwisely.
So also,
nescio q omodo,I know not how = strangely;and
mir m q ant m,it (is) marvello s how m ch = wonderf lly,
are sed as adverbs :
Mir m q ant m prof it ad concordiam,L.,ii.i,11;it served wonderf lly to
promote harmony.
Nescio q o pacto vel magis homines i vat gloria lata q am magna, PLIN.,E
p.,iv.12,7;somehow or other,people are even more charmed to have a widespread re
p tation than a grand one.
Early Latin shows also
perq am,:
admod m q am,
minis q am,
incredibile q ant m;
CICERO
mir m(mire)q am,
nimi m q ant m,
sane q am,
valde q am;
CAESAR none of these;
SALLUST
immane q ant m;
LIVY adds
oppido q ant m;
PLINY MAI.
immens m,
Infinit m q ant m;
FLORUS
pl rim m q ant m.
The position excl des a conscio s ellipsis of the S bj nctive.
PECULIARITIES OF INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.
468.The s bject of the dependent cla se is often treated as the object of the le
ading cla se by Anticipation(Prolepsis).
Nosti Marcell m q am tard s sit,CAELIUS(C.,Fam.,viii.10,3); yo know Mar
cell s,what a slow creat re he is.
NOTE.This sage is very common in Comedy,and belongs to conversational style in
general.
[298 PECULIARITIES OF INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.]
469.Contrary to o r idiom,the interrogative is often sed in participial cla ses
.In English,the participle and verb change places,and a Ca sal sentence becomes
Final or Consec tive.
Q am tilitatem petentes scire c pim s illa q ae occ lta nobis s nt ? C.
,Fin.,iii.1 1,37;what advantage do we seek when we desire to know those things w
hich are hidden from s ?
[Solon Pisistrato tyranno] q aerenti q a tandem re fret s sibi tam a dac
iter resisteret,respcndisse dicit r senect te,C.,Cat.M.,20,72;Solon,to Pisistrat
s the s rper,asking him(= when Pisistrat s the s rper asked him) on what thin
g relying (= on what he relied that) he resisted him so boldly,is said to have a
nswered " old age"
NOTE.The Abl.Abe.with the interrogative is rare.C.,Verr.,iii.80,185.
470.Final sentences(sentences of Design) are sed in q estions more freely than
in English.
Sess m it praetor.Q id t i dicet r I C.,N.D.,iii.30,74;the j dge is goi
ng to take his seat.What is to be adj dged ?(To adj dge what ?)
REMARK.The Latin lang age goes f rther than the English in combining interrogati
ve words in the same cla se;th s two interrogatives are not ncommon :
Considera q is q em fra dasse dicat r,C.,Rosc.Com.,7,21.(誰N誰‡騙し¤のåâく考hâ
Yes and No.
471.(a) Yes is represented :
1.By sane,(literally) so ndly,
sane q idem,yes indeed,
etiam,even (so),
vero(rarely ver m),of a tr th,
ita,so,
omnino,by all means,
certe,s rely,
certo,for certain,
admod m,to a degree,etc.
A t etiam a t non respondere [potest],C.,Ac.,ii.32,104;he can answer eit
her yes or no.
2.By censeo,I think so;
scilicet,to be s re.
Q id si etiam occentem hymenae m ? Censeo,PL.,Cas.,806;what if I sho ld
also sing a marriage-song ? I think yo had better.
3.By repeating the emphatic word either with or witho t the confirmatory particl
es,
vero(principally with prono ns),sane,prors s,etc.
Estisne? S m s,are yo ? We are.
Dasne? DO sane,C.,Leg.,1.7,21;do yo grant ? I do indeed.
(b) No is represented :
1.By non,non vero,non ita,minime,by no means,
nihil,nothing,
minime vero,nihil sane,nihil min s.
2.By repeating the emphatic word with the negative :
[SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE.299]
Non irata es ? Non s m irata,PL.,Cas.,1007;yo are not angry ? I am not.
(c) YEA or NAY.Immo conveys a correction,and either removes a do bt or heightens
a previo s statement : yes indeed,nay rather.
Ecq id placeant(aedes) me rogas? Immo perplacent,PL.,Most.,907; do I lik
e the ho se,yo ask me ? Yes indeed,very m ch.
Ca sa igit r non bona est ? Immo optima,C.,Att.,ix.7,4;the ca se,then,is
a bad one ? Nay,it is an excellent one.
REMARK.Yes,for,and no,for,are often expressed simply by nam and enim :
T m Antoni s : Heri enim,inq it,hoc mihi propos eram,C.,Or.,ii.10,40;the
n q oth Antony : Yes,for I had proposed this to myself yesterday.
SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE.
472.1.A compo nd sentence is one in which the necessary parts of the sentence oc
c r more than once;one which consists of two or more cla ses.
2.Coordination(Parataxis) is that arrangement of the sentence according to which
the different cla ses are merely placed side by side.
3.S bordination(Hypotaxis) is that arrangement of the sentence according to whic
h one cla se depends on the other.
He became poor and we became rich; the second cla se is a coordinate sentence.
He became poor that we might be rich; the second cla se is a s bordinate sentenc
e.
4.The sentence which is modified is called the Principal Cla se,that which modif
ies is called the S bordinate Cla se." He became poor " is the Principal Cla se,
" that we might be rich " is the S bordinate Cla se.
REMARK.Logical dependence and grammatical dependence are not to be confo nded.In
the conditional sentence,
vivam si vivet,let me live if she lives,my living depends on her living;
yet " vivam " is the principal," si vivet " the s bordinate cla se.It is the dep
endence of the introd ctory particle that determines the grammatical relation.
COORDINATION.
473.Coordinate sentences are divided into vario s classes,according to the parti
cles by which the separate cla ses are bo nd together.
[300 COORDINATION.]
REMARK.Coordinate sentences often dispense with conj nctions (Asyndeton).Then th
e connection m st determine the character.
Cop lative Sentences.
474.The following particles are called Cop lative Conj nctions : et,-q e,atq e(a
c),etiam,q oq e.
NOTE.The Cop lative Conj nctions are often omitted,in climax,in en merations,in
contrasts,in standing form lte,partic larly in dating by the cons ls of a year,i
f the praenomina are added;and finally,in g mming p previo s en merations by s
ch words as alii,ceteri,c ncti,m lti,omnes,reliq i.
475.Et is simply and,the most common and general particle of connection,and comb
ines likes and likes.
Panem et aq am nat ra desiderat,SEN.,E.M.,25,4;bread and water (is what)
nat re calls for.
Probitas la dat r et alget,J v.,1.74;honesty is bepraised and freees.
NOTES.1.We find sometimes two cla ses connected by et where we sho ld expect et
tamen.This sage is characteristic of TACITUS,b t is fo nd all thro gh the lang
age.
Fieri potest, t recte q is sentiat et id,q od sentit,polite eloq i non p
ossit,C.,T sc.,1.3,6.
2.Et sometimes introd ces a concl sion to a condition expressed in the Imperativ
e,b t only once in early Latin,never in classical prose.
Dic q ib s in terris;et eris mihi magn s Apollo,V.,EC.,iii.104.
3.Et,instead of a temporal conj nction,begins with CAESAR(Cf.B.G.,I.37,1) and SA
LLUST(I g.,97,4);it is never common.
4.On neq e ll s for et n ll s
and the like,see 480.On et after words indicating Likeness,see 643.On et for eti
am,see 478,N.2.
476.-d e(enclitic) nites things that belong closely to one another.The second m
ember serves to complete or extend the first.
Senat s pop l sq e Roman s,C.,Planc.,37,90; the Senate and people of Rom
e.
Ibi mort s sep lt sq e Alexander,L.,xxxvi.20,5;there Alexander died and
was b ried.
[Sol] oriens et occidens diem noctemq e conncit,C.,N.D.,ii.40,102;the s
n by its rising and setting makes day and night.
NOTES.1.Q e was very common in early Latin,especially in legal phraseology,where
it was always retained.
2.Q e - q e - q e is ante-classical and poetic.
3.Q e is always added to the first word in the cla se it introd ces,in PLAUTUS,a
s well as in classical prose;b t the A g stan poets are free in their position,f
or metrical reasons.As regards prepositions,q e is never appended to ob and s b,
rarely to a and ad,b t freq ently to other monosyllabic prepositions;it is alway
s appended to dissyllabic prepositions in -a,and often to other dissyllabic prep
ositions.
4.On q e for q oq e see 479,N.2.
5.Combinations : () et et;
(b) q e et; rare in early Latin,never in CICERO,CAESAR; begins with SALLUST.
[COORDINATION.301]
SALLUST and TACITUS always add the q e to the prono n,LIVY and later prose write
rs to the s bstantive.
(c) et q e;rare,and beginning with ENNIUS.
(d) q e q e begins with PLAUTUS,ENNIUS.CICERO has it b t once(noctesq e diesq e,
Fin.,1.16,51);it enters prose with SALLUST,and poets are fond of it.
Et domino satis et nimi m f riq e l poq e,TIB.,iv.i,187;eno gh for owner
,and too m ch for thief and wolf.
477. Atq e(compo nded of ad and -q e) adds a more important to a less importa
nt member.B t the second member often owes its importance to the necessity of ha
ving the complement(-q e).
Ac(a shorter form,which does not stand before a vowel or h) is fainter t
han atq e,and almost eq ivalent to et.
Intra moenia atq e in sin rbis s nt hostes,S.,C.,52,35;within the wall
s,ay,and in the heart of the city,are the enemies.
A.Servos ? Ego ? B.Atq e me s,PL.,Cas.,735;a slave ? I? And mine to boot
.
NOTES.1.The confirmative force of atq e,as in the second example,is fo nd especi
ally in PLAUTUS,occasionally later.
2. Atq e adds a climax,and then is often strengthened by
ecastor,
profecto,
vero,etc.,PL.,B.,86;C.,T sc.,1.20,46.
3.In comedy,atq e has sometimes demonstrative force : atq e ecc m,PL.,St.,577.
4.Occasionally in CICERO,then in the A g stan poets,LIVY and later prose writers
,notably TACITUS,atq e or ac is often sed to connect the parts of a cla se in w
hich fit or q e(sometimes both) has been already employed :
Et potentes seq it r invidia et h miles abiectosq e contempt s et t rpes
ac nocentes odi m,QUINT.,iv.i,14;the powerf l are followed by envy;the low and
grovelling,by contempt;the base and h rtf l,by hatred.
5.Atq e-atq e is fo nd occasionally in CATO,CATULLUS,CICERO,and VERGIL.Q e atq e
begins in poetry with VERGIL,in prose with LIVY,and is very rare.
C. Atq e,introd cing a principal cla se after a temporal conj nction,belong
s excl sively to PLAUTUS : D m circ mspecto m,atq e ego lemb m conspicor,B.,279.
Also Ej).,217.
1. Atq e is sed before consonants,as well as ac,to connect single notions
: when sentences or cla ses are to be connected,ac only is allowable;either atq
e or ac with expressions of Likeness.STAMM.
8.On atq e,after words indicating Likeness,see 643.Atq e follows a comparative o
nly after a negative in early and classical Latin.HORACE is first to se it afte
r a positive.
9.Phraseological is
ali s atq e ali s,one or another,fo nd first in LIVY,and rare.
478. Etiam,even(now),yet,still,exaggerates(heightens),and generally precedes
the word to which it belongs.
Nobis res familiaris etiam ad necessaria deest,Cf.S.,C.,20,11;we lack me
ans even for the necessaries of life.
Ad Appi Cla di senect tem accedebat etiam t caec s esset, C.,Cat.M.,6,1
6(553,4).
NOTES.1.Etiam as a temporal adverb refers to the Past or Present,and means still
; it is sometimes strengthened by t m(t nc) or n m(n nc).B t beginning with LIVY
,
[302 COORDINATION.]
adh c,which properly refers only to the Present,is extended to the Past
and sed like etiam(t m).
Non satis me pernosti etiam q alis sim,TER.,And.,503;yo still do not kn
ow well eno gh(= little know) what manner of person I am.
C m iste(i.e.,Polemarch s) etiam c baret,in c bic l m introd ct s est, c
.,Verr.,iii.23,56;while the defendant(Polemarch s) was still in bed,he was intro
d ced into the bedroom.
2.Instead of etiam,et is occasional in PLAUTUS,in a change of person.CICERO ses
it also after an adversative conj nction,as ver m et;also after nam and sim l;
more often when a prono n follows,as et ille,et ipse.CAESAR never ses it so,SAL
LUST rarely,b t it becomes common from Livy on.
3.Phraseological is
etiam atq e etiam,time and again.
On etiam for yes,see 471,1.
479.Q oq e,so also,complements(compare q e) and always follows the words to whic
h it belongs.
C m patri(Timothei) pop l s stat am pos isset,filio q oq e dedit, Cf.NEP
.,x i.2,3;the people,having erected a stat e in hono r of the father of Timothe
s,gave one to the son also(likewise).
REMARK.The difference between etiam and q oq e is not to be insisted on too rigi
dly :
Grande et conspic m nostro q oq e tempore monstr m,J v.,iv.115; a h ge
and conspic o s prodigy,even in o r day.
NOTES.1.In ante-classical and post-classical Latin the do ble forms etiam q oq e
,etiam q oq e,are sometimes fo nd,and in classical Latin also q oq e etiam occas
ionally : n nc vero meo q oq e etiam ca sa rogo,C.,Or.,1.35,164.
2.Q e in the sense of q oq e is rare(compare meq e,CAT.,cii.3;me too),and is fo
nd chiefly in the post-A g stan hodieq e,to-day also.
480.Cop lation by means of the Negative.Instead of "et" and the negative,
neq e(nec)
and the positive is the r le in Latin.
Opinionib s v lgi rapim r in errorem nec vera cernim s,C.,Leg.,ii.17,43;
by the prej dices of the rabble(群衆) we are h rried into error,and do not disting ish
the tr th.
(Caesar) properans noctem diei coni nxerat neq e iter intermiserat, CAES
.,B.C.,iii.13,2; Caesar in his haste had joined night with day and had not broke
n his march.
REMARKS.1.Et-non,(and-not),is sed when the negation is confined to a single wor
d,or is otherwise emphatic;b t neq e is fo nd occasionally here,even in CICERO(O
ff.,iii.10,41).
Et militavi non sine gloria,H.,O.,iii.26,2;and I have been a soldier not
witho t glory.
On nec non,the opposite of et non,see 449,R.3.
2.In combination with the negative we have the following
Paradigms : And no one, neq e q isq am, nor any one.
And no, neq e ll s, nor any.
And nothing, neq e q idq am, nor anything.
And never, neq e mq am, nor ever
.
[COORDINATION.303]
Neq e amet q emq am nec amet r ab llo,J v.,xii.130;may he love no one,a
nd be loved by none.
3.Nec is often nearly eq ivalent to nec tamen,and yet not :
Extra invidiam nec extra gloriam erat,TAC.,Agr.,8,3;he was beyond the re
ach of envy,and yet not beyond the reach of glory.Cf.TER.,E n.,249; C.T sc.ii.25
,60.
NOTES.1.Neq e = ne q idem,is ante-classical and post-classical : nec n n
c,c m me vocat ltro,accedam ? H.,S,ii.3,262(the only case in HORACE).
2.CAESAR,LUCRETIUS,VERGIL,and PROPERTIUS se neq e reg larly before vowels.
3.Combinations :
(a) neq e-neq e;nec-nec;neq e-nec;nec-neq e.Sometimes the first neq e has the fo
rce of and neither;b t this is limited in prose to CAESAR,SALLUST,and LIVY;in po
etry to CATULLUS and PROPERTIUS.
(6) neq e-et;neq e-q e;neq e-ac.Of these neq e et is rare in early Latin,b t mor
e common in CICERO and later;neq e-q e is rare,and fo nd first in CICERO;neq e-a
tq e(ac) is very rare,and begins in TACITUS.
(c) et-neq e is fo nd first in CICERO,who is fond of it,b t it fades o t after h
im.
4.Neq e is s ally sed for non,when followed by the strengthening words enim,ta
men,vero,etc.
481.1.Insertion and Omission of Cop latives.When
m lt s,m ch,many,
is followed by another attrib te,the two are often combined by cop lative partic
les : many renowned deeds,
m lta et praeclara facinora;
many good q alities,
m ltae bonaeq e artes.
2.Several s bjects or objects,standing in the same relations,either take et thro
gho t or omit it thro gho t.The omission of it is common in emphatic en meratio
n.
Phryges et Pisidae et Cilices, C.,Div.,1.41,92;
or,
Phryges,Plsidae,Cilices, Phrygians,Pisidians,and Cilicians.
NOTE.Et before the third member of a series is rare,b t occ rs here and there at
all periods;in CICERO it s ally draws especial attention to the Last member.
Atq e (ac)
is sed th s a little more freq ently
(mores instit ta atq e vita, C.,Fam.,xv.4,14),
and
q e is not ncommon :
aegrit dines,irae libidinesq e,C.,T sc.,1.33,80.
3.Et is f rther omitted in climaxes,in antitheses,in phrases,and in form la.
Viri non [est] debilitari dolore,frangi,s cc mbere,C.,Fin.,ii.29,95; it
is nmanly to allow one's self to be disabled( nnerved) by grief,to be broken-sp
irited,to s cc mb.
Difficilis facilis,i c nd s acerb s,es idem,MART.,xii.47,1(310).
Patres Conscripti,Fathers(and) Conscript(Senators).
I ppiter Optim s Maxim s,Father Jove,s premely good(and) great.
[304 COORDINATION.]
Other Particles Employed.
482.Other particles are sometimes employed instead of the cop lative in the same
general sense.
1.Temporal :
t m-t m,then-then;
alias-alias,at one time-at another;
iam-iam,
n nc-n nc,
modo-modo,now-now;
sim l-sim l,at the same time.
T m Graeco t m Latine,partly in Greek,partly in Latin.
Horati s Cocles n nc sing los provocabat,n nc increpabat omnes, Cf.L.,ii
.10,8; Horati s Cocles now challenged them singly,now ta nted them all.
Modo h c,modo ill c,C.,Att.,xiii.25,3;now hither,now thither (hither and
thither).
Sim l spernebant,sim l met ebant,they despised and feared at the same ti
me(they at once despised and feared).
NOTES.1.Of these t m-t m is not ante-classical,n nc-n nc is fo nd first
in LUCR.,and is introd ced into prose by LIVY : sim l-sim l is fo nd first in CA
ESAR,b t not in CICERO;iam-iam begins with VERGIL and LIVY.
Aliq ando-aliq ando,
q andoq e-q andoq e,
are post-A g stan;
interd m-interd m
is rare,b t occ rs in CICERO.
2.The combinations vary in many ways.Ciceronian are
t m-alias;
alias -pler mq e;
interd m-alias;
modo-t m;
modo-vicissim;
most of them fo nd b t once.Some fifteen other combinations are post-Ciceronian.
3.On c m t m,see 588.
2.Local : In CICERO only
alio-alio;
hinc-illinc.
Others are :
hic-illic(first in VERGIL);
hinc-hinc(VERGIL,LIVY);
hinc-inde(TACITUS);
illinc-hinc(LIVY);
inde-hinc(TACITUS);
alibi-alibi(LIVY);
ali nde-ali nde(PLINY).
3.Modal :
aliter-aliter;
q a-q a,
rare,and lacking in many a thors (e.g.,CAESAR,SALLUST).In CICERO only fo r times
,and confined to the Letters;
pariter-pariter
is poetical and post-classical;
aeq e-aeq e
is fo nd once in HORACE and once in TACITUS.
4.Comparative : t-ita,as-so :
Dolabellam t Tarsenses ita Laodiceni ltro arcessier nt,C.,Fam.,xii.13,
4;as the people of Tars s so the people of Laodicea(= both the people of Tars s
and those of Laodicea) sent for Dolabella of their own accord.
Often,however,the actions compared are adversative;and t may be loosely transla
ted altho gh,while.
Haec omnia t invitis ita non adversantib s patriciis transacta, L.,iii.
55,15;all this was done,the patricians,tho gh nwilling,yet not opposing(= again
st the wishes,b t witho t any opposition on the part of the patricians).
NOTE.There are also many other similar combinations,as :
q emadmod m - sic;
t - sic;
tamq am - sic,etc.
The adversative se of t-ita is rare in the classical period,b t extends later.
[COORDINATION.305]
5.Adversative :
non modo,
non sol m,
non tant m,not only;
sed,
sed etiam,
sed q oq e,
ver m etiam,b t even,b t also :
Urbes maritimae non sol m m ltis peric lis oppositae [s nt] sed etiam ca
ecis,C.,Rep.,ii.3,5 : cities on the seaboard are liable not only to many dangers
,b t even(also) to hidden(ones).
[Non] doceri tant m sed etiam delectari vol nt,QUINT.,iv.i,57;they wish
not merely to be ta ght,b t to be tickled(楽し ) to boot( Xÿに).
In the negative form,
non modo non, not only not;
sed ne q idem, b t not even;
sed vix, b t hardly.
Ego non modo tibi non irascor,sed ne reprehendo q idem fact m t m,C.,S
ll.,1 8,50;I not only am not angry with yo ,b t I do not even find fa lt with yo
r action.
REMARKS.1.Instead of non modo(sol m) non-sed ne-q idem,the latter non is general
ly omitted,when the two negative cla ses have a verb in common,the negative of t
he first cla se being s pplied by the second;otherwise both negatives are expres
sed.
Pisone cons le senat i non sol m i vare rem p blicam sed ne l gere q ide
m licebat, Cf.C.,Pis.10,23; when Piso was cons l,it was not only not left free f
or the senate(= the senate was not only not free) to help the commonwealth,b t n
ot even to mo rn(for her).
2.Ned m,not(to speak of) yet,m ch less,
is also sed,either with or witho t a verb in the S bj nctive;it is fo nd first
and only once in TERENCE,never in CAESAR and SALLUST,in CICERO only after negati
ve sentences;from LIVY on it is sed after affirmative cla ses as well.
Satrapa n mq am s fferre ei s s mpt s q eat,ned m t possis,TER.,Hea t.,
454; a nabob(金持ÿ) co ld never stand that girl's expendit res,m ch less co ld yo .
NOTES.1.Non tant m is never fo nd in early Latin,CAESAR and SALLUST,rarely in CI
CERO.Sed q oq e is fo nd first in CICERO;so,too,sed simply,b t rarely.LIVY is es
pecially free in his se of sed.Ver m,in the second member,is not ante-classical
nor Tacitean.Non alone in the first member is rare,b t Ciceronian,it is s ally
followed by sed only;occasionally by sed etiam.Sed is sometimes omitted from LI
VY on.Cf.L.,xxviii.39,II;TAC.,Ann.,iii.19,2,etc,
2.Sed et,for sed etiam,belongs to post-A g stan Latin.
Adversative Sentences.
483.The Adversative particles are :
a tem,
sed,
ver m,
vero,
at,
atq i,
tamen,
ceter m.
Of these only sed and tamen are really adversative.
NOTE.The Adversative particles are often omitted : as when an affirmative is fol
lowed by a negative,or the reverse,or in other contrasts.
484.A tem(post-positive) is the weakest form of b t,and
[306 COORDINATION.]
indicates a difference from the foregoing,a contrast rather than a contradiction
.It serves as a particle of transition and explanation(= moreover,f rthermore,no
w),and of res mption(to come back),and is often sed in syllogisms.
Modo accedens,t m a tem recedens,C.,N.D.,ii.40,102;now approaching,then
again receding.
R morib s mec m p gnas,ego a tem a te rationes req iro,C.,N.D.,iii.5,13;
yo fight me with r mo rs,whereas I ask of yo reasons.
Q od est bon m,omne la dabile est;q od a tem la dabile est,omne est hone
st m;bon m igit r q od est,honest m est, C.,Fin.,iii.8,27; everything that is go
od is praiseworthy;b t everything that is praiseivorthy is virt o s; therefore,w
hat is good is virt o s.
REMARK.A tem commonly follows the first word in the sentence or cla se;b t when
an nemphatic est or s nt occ pies the second place,it is p t in the third.So ig
it r and enim.
NOTES.1.Noteworthy is the se of a tem in lively q estions.CICERO employs it in
this way,also to correct his own previo s q estions(Epanorthosis).
Egon debacchat s s m a tem an t in me ? TER.,Ad.,185.(騒aÿのは俺yのå 前yのå)
N m q is testis Post mi m appellavit ? Testis a tem ? non acc sator ? C.
,Rab.Post.,5,10.(ÿの証人Nÿスÿ スの名前‡挙 ¤å 告訴人N yáと‡し¤のå)(textè
2.A tem is a favorite word with CICERO,especially in his philosophical and moral
works,b t not with the Historians,least of all with TACITUS,who ses it only ni
ne times in all.
485.Sed(set) is sed partly in a stronger sense,to denote contradiction,partly i
n a weaker sense,to introd ce a new tho ght,or to revive an old one.
Non est vivere sed valere vita,MART.,vi.70,15(442,R.2).
Domiti s n lla q idem arte sed Latine tamen dicebat,C.,Br.,77,267; Domit
i s spoke with no art it is tr e,b t for all that,in good Latin.
NOTES.1.The se of sed to carry on a narrative is characteristic of the historia
ns,tho gh fo nd also in CICERO.
Sed in ea coni ratione f it Q.C ri s,S.,C.,23,1.(キ スは の陰謀に加Mっ‰a¤)
2.Sed is repeated by anaphora(682),occasionally in CICERO(Verr.,iii.72,169),more
often later.
3.Sed may be strengthened by tamen;by vero,enimvero,enim;by a tem,
b t only in connection with q id,and then only in comedy and in VERGIL.Sometimes
it is eq al to sed tamen,as in V.,A.,iv.660.
486. Ver m,it is tr e,tr e,
always takes the first place in a sentence,and is practically eq ivalent to sed
in its stronger sense.
Si cert m est facere,faciam;ver m ne post conferas c lpam in me, TER.,E
n.,388;if yo are determined to do it,I will arrange it;b t yo m st not afterwa
rd lay the blame on me.
[COORDINATION.307]
NOTE.Ver m grad ally gives place to sed in CICERO.It is sed occasionally to ret
rn to the s bject
(ver m haec q idem hacten s,C.,T sc.,iii.34,84)(しåし、áれはááXè)
,and in yielding a point
(ver m esto,C.,Fin.,ii.23,75),( れは þとしâþ)
where sed is the s al word.
487.Vero,of a tr th,is generally p t in the second place,asserts with conviction
,and is sed to heighten the statement.
[Platonem] Dion adeo admirat s est t se tot m ei traderet.Neq e vero mi
n s Plato delectat s est Dione,NEP.,x.2,3; Dion admired Plato to s ch a degree t
hat he gave himself wholly p to him;and indeed Plato was no less delighted with
Dion.
NOTES.1.Vero is properly an affirmative adverb,and s ch is its only se in PLAUT
US.In TERENCE it has also acq ired adversative force,which it preserves thro gho
t the lang age in greater or less degree;so in the historians it is hardly more
than a tem.
2.The combination
ver m vero
is ante-classical;on combinations with enim,see 498,N.6.
3.Vero is also,b t not so commonly, sed in transitions;especially in the form la
e
age vero,
iam vero.
488.At(another form of ad = in addition to) introd ces startling transitions,liv
ely objections,remonstrances,q estions,wishes,often by way of q otation.
"Philocteta,St! brevis dolor." At iam decim m ann m in spel nca iacet,C.
,Fin.,ii.29,94 ;" Philoctetes,still ! the pain is short." B t he has been lying
in his cave going on ten years.
"At m ltis malis affect s?" Q is negat? C.,Fin.,v.30,92; "b t he has s f
fered m ch ? " Who denies it ?
At videte hominis intolerabilem a daciam ! C.,Dom.,44,115; well,b t see
the fellow's ins fferable a dacity!
At vobis male sit! CAT.,iii.13; and ill l ck to yo !
NOTES.1.Ast is the archaic form of at,and is fo nd occasionally in CICERO,de Leg
.and ad AM.,b t more often in the poets and the later archaists.
2.At is sed in anaphora,and also,especially in the poets,in contin ing the narr
ative.Noteworthy is its se after conditional sentences(in CICERO only after neg
atives,never in SALLUST),where it is freq ently strengthened by
certe,
tamen,
saltem:
si min s s pplicio adfici,at c stodiri oportebat,C.,Verr.,v.27,69.(仮に処刑 れyく‰
489.Atq i(b t at any rate,b t for all that) is still stronger than at,and is se
d chiefly in arg ment.
Vix credibile.Atq i sic habet,H.,S.,1.9,52; scarce credible.B t for all
that,'tis so.
NOTES.1.Atq in is occasional in early Latin,and even in CICERO.2.At seems someti
mes to be sed for atq i.C.,T sc.,iii.9,19.
490.Tamen(literally,even th s),nevertheless,is often combined with at,ver m,sed.
[308 COORDINATION.]
It is commonly prepositive, nless a partic lar word is to be made emphatic.
Nat ram expelles f rca,tamen sq e rec rret,H.,Ep.,1.10,24;yo may drive
o t Dame Nat re with a pitchfork(熊手),for all that she will ever be ret rning.
Domiti s n lla q idem arte sed Latine tamen dicebat,C.,Br.,ii.77,267(485
).
REMARK.Nihilomin s(nothing the less),nevertheless,is sed like tamen,by which it
is occasionally strengthened.
491.Ceter m,for the rest,is sed by the Historians as an adversative particle.
D o imperatores,ipsi pares ceter m opib s disparib s,S.,I g.,52,1; two c
ommanders,eq al in personal q alities,b t of neq al reso rces.
NOTE.Ceter m is fo nd once in TERENCE(E n.,452),once in CICERO(Q.F.,ii.12,1),oth
erwise not before SALLUST.
510.
All forms that relate } { the Present S
bj nctive
to the Present and } {(for contin ed act
ion);
F t re(so especially } are followed by {the Perfect S bj nctive
Principal Tenses) } {(for completed
action).
{the Imp
erfect S bj nctive
All forms that relate to} {(for contin ed action);
the Past(so especially } are followed by {the Pl perfect S bj nc-
Historical Tenses) } {tive(for completed ac-
{tion).
REMARK.The action which is completed with regard to the leading verb may be in i
tself a contin ed action.So in English : I do not know what He has been doing,I
did not know what he had been doing.The Latin is nable to make this distinction
,and accordingly the Imperfect Indicative(I was doing) is represented in this de
pendent form by the Perfect and Pl perfect,when the action is completed as to th
e leading verb.
511.
PR.(PURE cognosco,I am finding o t, { q id facias,
OR HIST.), { what yo are doing;
FUT., cognoscam,I shall(try to) { q id feceris,
find o t, { what yo have
done,
PURE PP., cognovi, I have fo nd o t { what yo have been
(I know), { doing(what yo did),
FUT.PF., cognovero, I shall have fo nd { what yo were doing
o t(shall know), { (before).
HIST.PR., cognosco, I am(was) finding { q id faceres,
o t, { what yo were doing;
IMPF., cognoscebam,I was finding o t,{ q id fecisses,
{ what yo had done,what
HIST.Pr., cognovi, I fo nd o t, { ¥yo had been doing,
{ ¥what yo were doing
PLUPF., cognoveram,I had fo nd o t { ¥(before).
(I knew),
When the S bj nctive is original,we have :
Principal Tenses
.
Nihil refert postrema syllaba brevis an longa sit,Cf.C.,Or.,64,217 (461)
.
Ubii(Caesarem) orant(historical) t sibi parcat,CAES.,B.G.,vi.9,7(546,i)
.
[316 SEQUENCE OF TENSES.]
Nemo adeo fer s est t non mitescere possit,H.,Ep.,1.i,39 (552).
Nec mea q i digitis l mina condat erit,Ov.,Her.,10,120(681,2).
R stic s exspectat d m defl at amnis,H.,Ep.,1.2,42(572).
Post mortem in morte nihil est q od met am mali,PL.,Capt.,741(631,2).
Ardeat ipsa licet,tormentis ga det amantis,J v.,vi.209(607).
Utr m nescis q am alts ascenderis an pro nihilo id p tas ? C.,Fam.,x.26,
3(458).
La dat African m Panaeti s q od f erit abstinens,C.,Off.,ii.22,76(542).
Non is es t te p dor mq am a t rpit dine revocarit,C.,Cat.,1.9,22(552)
.
Q em mea Calliope laeserit n s ego(s m),Ov.,Tr.,ii.568(631,i).
Sim licet extrem m,sic t s m,miss s in orbem,Ov.,Tr.,iv.9,9(607).
M lti f er nt q i tranq illitatem expetentes a negotiis p blicis se remo
verint, C.,Off.,1.20,69(631,2).
Historical Tenses.
Epaminondas q aesivit salv sne esset clipe s,C.,Fin.,ii.30,97(467).
Noct amb labat in p blico Themistocles q od somn m capere non posset, C
.,T sc.,iv.19,44(541).
[Athenienses] creant decem praetores q i exercit i praeessent, NEP.,1.4,
4(545).
Accidit t na nocte omnes Hermae deicerent r,NEP.,vii.3,2(513,R.2).
Ad Appi Cla di senect tem accedebat etiam t caec s esset, C.,Cat.M.,6,1
6(553,4).
Hannibal omnia pri sq am excederet p gna(erat) expert s,L.,xxx.35,4(577)
.
(Agesila s) c m ex Aegypto reverteret r decessit,NEP.,xvii.8,6(585).
Tanta opib s Etr ria erat t iam non terras sol m sed mare etiam fama no
minis s i implesset,L.,1.2,5(521,R.i).
C m primi ordines hosti m concidissent,tamen acerrime reliq i resisteban
t, CAES.,B.G.,vii.62,4 (587).
Deleta (est) A son m gens perinde ac si internecivo bello certasset, L.,
ix.25,9(602).
Original S bj nctive Retained.
Ipse docet q id agam(original,agam);
fas est et ab hoste doceri,Ov.,M.,iv.428(219).
Q aero a te c r ego C.Corneli m non defenderem (original,defenderem), C.
,Vat.,2,5(467).
Miser nt Delphos cons lt m q id facerent(original,faciam s),NEP.,ii.2,6(
518).
REMARKS.1.The treatment of the Hist.Pr.according to its sense (past) is the r le
in classical Latin,especially when the dependent cla se precedes.B t there are
many exceptions.
Ag nt gratias q od sibi pepercissent;q od arma c m hominib s consang ine
is cont lerint q er nt r,CAES.,B.C.,1.74,2; they ret rn thanks to them for havin
g spared them,and complain that they had crossed swords with kinsmen.
2.Noteworthy is the shift from the primary to the secondary seq ence; this is mo
stly confined to cla ses of do ble dependence,i.e.,where one s bordinate cla se
is itself principal to a second s bordinate cla se.
[SEQUENCE OF TENSES.317 ]
Here the first has s ally the primary,the second the secondary seq ence.
Rogat t c ret q od dixisset,C.,Q inct.,5,18;he asks him to attend to wh
at he had said(he wo ld).
So of a thors :
[Chrysipp s] disp tat aethera esse e m q em homines Jovem appellarent, C
.,N.D.,1.15,40;Chrysipp s maintains that to be ether which men call Jove.
3.The P re Pf.is s ally treated as a Hist.Pf.in the matter of seq ence :
Q ae s bsidia haberes et habere posses,expos i,Q.CICERO,4,13;what s ppor
ts yo have or can have I have set forth.
4.The reverse sage,when an Hist.Pf.is followed by a primary S bjv.,is not commo
n.Many of those cited from CICERO are from the Letters,where the shift of tense
might be infl enced by the letter-tense principle(252).
Sed q o consilio redierim,initio a distis,post estis experti, C.,Ph.,x.4
,8.
Q is miles f it,q i Br ndisii illam non viderit,C.,Ph.,11.25,61.(The con
text shows that f it cannot be P re Pf.)
512.Seq ence of Tenses in Sentences of Design.Sentences of Design have,as a r le
,only the Present and Imperfect S bj nctive.The Roman keeps the p rpose and the
process,rather than the attainment,in view.
PR., ed nt,they are eating, }
PUBE PP., eder nt,they have eaten, } t vivant,
FUT., edent,they will eat, } that they may live(to
FUT.PP., ederint,they will have eaten, } live
IMPF., edebant,they were eating, } t viverent,
PLUPF., ederant,they had eaten, } that they might live(t
o
HIST.PP., eder nt,they ate, } live).
Spectat m veni nt,veni nt spectent r t ipsae,Ov.,A.A.,1.99(435).
Sed precor t possim t ti s esse miser,Ov.,Tr.,v.2,78(424).
Gallinae pennis fovent p llos ne frigore laedant r,Cf.C.,N.D.ii.52,129(5
45).
Legem brevem esse oportet,q o facili s ab imperitis teneat r,SEN.,E.M.,9
4,38 (545).
Me praemisit dom m haec t n ntiem xori s ae,PL.,Am.,195;he has sent me
home ahead of him,to take the news to his wife.
Oc los ecfodiam tibi ne me observare possis,PL.,A l.,53; I will go ge o
t yo r eyes for yo ,to make it impossible for yo to watch me.
[Laeli s] veniebat ad cenam t satiaret desideria nat rae,C.,Fin.,ii.8,2
5;Laeli s sed to go to table,to satisfy the cravings of nat re.
(Phaethon) optavit t in c rr m patris tolleret r,C.,Off.,iii.25,94(546,
i).
[318 SEQUENCE OF TENSES.]
REMARK.Parenthetical final sentences like
t ita dicam,ne erretis,
are really dependent on the tho ght or tterance of the speaker,and have the pre
sent seq ence everywhere.
Ne longior sim,vale,C.,Fam.,xv.19; not to be tedio s,farewell!
Ne tamen ignores,virt te Neronis Armeni s cecidit,H.,Ep.,I.12,25;b t tha
t yo may not fail to know it,it was by the valo r of Nero that the Armenian fel
l.
NOTES.1.The Pf.and Pl pf.S bjv.are sometimes fo nd in sentences of Design,chiefl
y in earlier and later Latin(no example is cited from CAESAU or SALLUST),when st
ress is laid on completion,or when an element of Hope or Fear comes in :
Ut Sic dixerim(first fo nd in QUINT.),if I may be allowed to se the exp
ression.
Affirmare a deo me omni ope adnis r m esse ne fr stra vos hanc spem de m
e conceperitis,L.,XLIV.22;I dare ass re yo that I will strain every nerve to ke
ep yo from having conceived this hope of me in vain.(After a past tense,n conce
pissetis.)
N nc agend m est ne fr stra oppress m esse Antoni m gavisi sim s,C.,ad B
r.,1.4,3.é ÿ Šの没落に対する我々の喜_N糠喜_にyらyaâþに行動すóきè}る
Hic obsistam,ne impr denti h c ea se s brepsit(131,4,b.2) mihi,PL.,M.G.,
333.M¤しはááèとþ• ぼし‰、彼女N私に気 åれずにáá] っと行ÿyaâþにし¤a
Effecit ne c i s alteri s sacrilegi m res p blica q am Neronis sensisset
, TAC.,Agr.,6.共和国は0×以外の誰åの盗難‡知らyaâþにyっ¤→行方不明の奉納物のþÿè0×
When the tense is compo nd,the participle is s ally to be considered as a mere
adjective.
Patron s extiti(=exstiti) ti ne [Sex.Bosci s] omnino desert s esset,¥C.,R
osc.Am.,2,5;where desert s = sol s. スキ スN孤立しyaâþに私N弁護するáとにyっ¤
2.Occasional apparent exceptions are to be explained in vario s ways.Th s,in C.,
Sest.,14,32 :
etiamne edicere a deas ne maererent?,悲し yと}h‰命じóきÿろþå
we have a repetition as an indignant q estion of the preceding statement :
edic nt(Hist.Pr.) d o cons les t ad s m vestit m senatores redirent.二人の執政官は元
513.Exceptional Seq ence of Tenses : Sentences of Res lt(Consec tive Sentences).
In Sentences of Res lt,the Present S bj nctive is sed after Past Tenses to deno
te the contin ance into the Present,the Perfect S bj nctive to imply final res l
t.This Perfect S bj nctive may represent either the P re Perfect or Aorist,the l
atter especially with the negative : the action happened once for all or not at
all.
Present Tense :
[Siciliam Verres] per trienni m ita vexavit t ea restit i in antiq m s
tat m n llo modo possit,C.,Verr.,I.4,12;Verres so harried(略奪する) Sicily for three years a
s to make it tterly impossible for it to be restored to its original condition.
In [L c llo] tanta pr dentia f it t hodie stet Asia,C.,Ac.,ii.i,3;L c l
l s's foretho ght was so great that Asia stands firm to-day.
Perfect Tense(P re) :
(M rena) Asiam sic obiit t in ea neq e avaritiae neq e l x riae vestigi
m reliq erit,C.,M r.,9,20;M rena so administered Asia as not to have(that he ha
s not) left in it a trace either of greed or deba chery (there is no trace there
).
[SEQUENCE OF TENSES.319 ]
Perfect Tense(Aorist) :
Eq ites hosti m acriter c m eq itat nostro conflixer nt,tamen t nostri
eos in silvas collesq e comp lerint,CAES.,B.G.,v.15,1;the cavalry of the enemy
engaged the cavalry on o r side briskly,and yet(the pshot was that) o r men for
ced them into the woods and hills.
Neq e vero tam remisso ac lang ido animo q isq am omni m f it q i ea noc
te conq ieverit,CAES.,B.C.,1.21,5; and indeed there was no one at all of so slac
k and indifferent a temper as to take(a wink of) sleep that night.
REMARKS.1.After a P re Pf.,if the dependent cla se is affirmative,CICEILO prefer
s the Impf.(he has b t five cases of Pf.); if negative the Pf.(in the proportion
2 to 1).
2.After
accidit,contigit,and other verbs of Happening,
the Impf.is always sed,the res lt being already emphasised in the Indic.form.
Accidit t na nocte omnes Hermae deicerent r,NEP.,vii.,3,2;it happened
that in one night all the Hermae were thrown down.
NOTES.1.The se of the Aoristic Pf.S bjv.after an Aoristic Pf.Indic.seems to hav
e been an attempt of the Romans to replace the consec tive Aor.Inf.in Greek with
wore.Examples are not fo nd in early Latin,are rare in CICERO,very rare in CAES
AR,perhaps not at all iij SALLUST;more freq ent in LIVY,common in TACITUS,very c
ommon in NEPOS and SUETONIUS,etc.
2.In two coordinated cla ses depending on the same verb we find the tenses occas
ionally varying.The Pf.in the first s bordinate,with Impf.in the second,is do bt
f l in any case,rare in CICERO,and is cited b t once each from CAESAR(B.G.,vii.1
7) and VELLEIUS(1.9,1).The reverse constr ction,Impf.followed by Pf.,is more com
mon,b t fo nd first(tho gh rarely) in LIVY,and belongs mainly to late Latin.
Zeno n llo modo is erat q i nervos virt tis inciderit,sed contra q i omn
ia in virt te poneret,C.,Ac.,1.10,35.ÿ は決し‰美徳の力‡切り刻 âþyáとはしyåっ¤
Here the shift is d e to the negative.
Tant s pavor omnes occ pavit t non modo ali s q isq am arma caperet sed
etiam ipse rex perf gerit,L.,xxiv.40,12.
Here the tenses depend on the ideas of contin ance and completion,of the many an
d the single(non capiebant-rex perf git).
3.In relative sentences of coincident action with ca sal coloring,either the coi
ncidence is retained,or a principal cla se in the Past is followed by the Impf.S
bj nctive.
T h manissime fecisti q i me certiorem feceris,C.,Att.,xiii43,1.
C m hoc Pompei s vehementer egit c m diceret,etc.,C.,Att.,ii.22,2.
Videor mihi grat m fecisse Sic lis,q od eor m ini rias sim persec t s, c
.,Verr.,ii.6,15 (518,R.).
Representation of the S bj nctive in the F t re and F t re Perfect Tenses.
514.The S bj nctive has no F t re or F t re Perfect,which are represented either
by the other S bj nctives,or in the Active by the S bj nctive of the Periphrast
ic Conj gation.
RULE I.(a) After a F t re or F t re Perfect Tense,the F t re relation(contempora
ry with the leading F t re) is
[320 SEQUENCE OF TENSES.]
represented by the Present S bj nctive;the F t re Perfect (prior to the leading
F t re) by the Perfect S bj nctive,according to the r le.
Cognoscam, } q id facias,what yo a
re doing
I shall(try to) find o t, } (will be doing).
Cognovero, } q id feceris,what yo
have done
I shall have fo nd o t(shall know), } (will have done).
(b) B t whenever the dependent F t re is s bseq ent to the leading F t re,the Pe
riphrastic Tense m st be employed.
Cognoscam,
I shall(try to) find o t, } q id fact r s si
s
Cognovero, }what yo are going to d
o(what I shall have fo nd o t(shall know), } yo will do) '
[SEQUENCE OF TENSES.323 ]
So also in the Conditional proposition,when the action is past.For varying conce
ption,see C.,Off.,iii.24,92.
2.The Impf.S bjv.,being sed in opposition to the Present,might be treated as a
Principal Tense,b t the constr ction is less s al :
Vererer ne immodicam orationem p tares nisi esset generis ei s t saepe
incipere saepe desinere videat r,PLIN.,Ep.,ix.4,1; I sho ld be afraid of yo r th
inking the speech of immoderate length,if it were not of s ch kind as to prod ce
the effect of often beginning,often ending.
O ego ne possim tales sentire dolores q am mallem in gelidis montib s es
se lapis ! TIB.,ii.4,7.
518.Seq ence of Tenses after an Infinitive or Participle.When a s bordinate cla
se depends on an Infinitive or Participle,Ger nd or S pine,the tense of that cla
se follows the tense of the Finite verb,if the Finite verb is Past;if the Finit
e verb is Present,it follows the tense that the dependent verb wo ld have had,if
it had been independent.
Dicit se interrogate(original {q id agas, what yo are doi
ng,
interrogo), {q id egeris, what yo have done,
He says that he is asking, {q id act r s sis, what yo are going
{ to do(will
do).
Dicit se interrogasse(original }
interrogavi), }q id ageres, what yo were doing.
He says that he asked, }q id egisses, what yo had done.
Dixit se interrogare(original }q id act r s esses,what yo were going
interroge), } to do(wo ld do).
He said that he was asking, }
{q id agat, what he
is doing, {non re-
Mini interroganti, {q id egerit, what he has
{spondet,
when I ask him, { done {he g
ives
(literally : to me asking), {q id act r s, what he is going { no an-
{ sit, to do(will do), { swer.
Mini interroganti, {q id ageret, what he was do-
{
when I asked him, { ing,
{non re-
(literally : to me asking), {q id egisset, what he had { spondit,
{ done, {
he gave
{q id act r s { no an-
{ esset, what he was go- { swer
.
{ ing to d
o, {
Ap d Hypanim fl vi m Aristoteles ait bestiolas q asdam nasci q ae nam d
iem vivant, C.,T sc.,1.39,94(650).
Satis mihi m lta verba fecisse videor q are esset hoc bell m necessari m
, C.,Imp.,10,27; I think I have said eno gh(to show) why this war is necessary.
[324 REFLEXIVE IN SUBORDINATE SENTENCES.]
Apelles pictores eos peccare dicebat q i non sentirent q id esset satis,
C.,Or.,22,73; Apellea sed to say that those painters bl ndered who did not per
ceive what was(is) eno gh.
Athenienses Cyrsil m q endam s adentem t in rbe manerent lapidib s obr
er nt,C.,Off.,iii.ii,48(546).
C pido incessit animos i ven m sciscitandi ad q em eor m regn m Roman m
esset vent r m,L.,1.56,10; the minds of the yo ng men were seied by the desire
of inq iring to which of them the kingdom of Rome wo ld come.
Miser nt Delphos cons lt m q id facerent,NEP.,ii.2,6;they sent to Delphi
to ask the oracle what they sho ld do.See 265.
REMARK.--Nevertheless examples are not nfreq ent where the seq ence of the gove
rning verb is retained :
Videor mihi grat m fecisse Sic lis q od eor m ini rias meo peric lo sim
persec t s,C.,Verr:,ii.6,15; I seem to have pleased the Sicilians,in that I have
followed p their inj ries at my own risk(on acco nt of the coincidence,513,N.3
).
519.Original S bj nctives in Dependence--1.The Potential of Present or F t re af
ter a Past tense goes into the Past;the same is tr e of Deliberative Q estions(4
65).On the other hand,the Potential of the Past m st be retained even after a Pr
esent tense(467).
Video ca sas esse perm ltas q ae [Tit m Rosci m] impellerent, C.,Rosc.Am
.,33,92;I see that there are very many ca ses which might have impelled(駆り立‰る) Tit s Ros
s.
Q aero a te c r Gai m Corneli m non defenderem,C.,Vat.,2,5(467).
2.On the behavio r of Conditional S bj nctives in dependence see 597,R.4.
REMARK.The Seq ence of Tenses is not nfreq ently deranged by the attraction of
parenthetic cla ses or,especially in long sentences,by the shifting of the conce
ption.Examples are C.,Balb,,1.2;Ph.,iii.15,39;Ac.,ii.1 8,56,and many others.
USE OF THE REFLEXIVE IN SUBORDINATE
SENTENCES.
520.In s bordinate cla ses,the Reflexive is sed with reference either to the s
bject of the principal,or to the s bject of the s bordinate,cla se;and sometimes
first to the one and then to the other.
521.The Reflexive is sed of the principal s bject when reference is made to the
tho ght or will of that s bject; hence,in Infinitive Sentences,in Indirect Q es
tions,in Sentences of Design,and in Sentences which partake of the Obliq e Relat
ion.
Periphrastic F t re.
The following form(the Periphrastic F t re) is necessary when the verb has no S
p.or F t.participle.It is often formed from other verbs to intimate an interval,
which cannot be expressed by other forms,and is more common in the passive than
the F t.Inf.pass,of the paradigms.
P.T.Dicit :
fore(f t r m esse) t erres(met as) fore t decipiaris(met aris),
,
fore(f t r m esse) t erraveris(rare) fore t decept s sis(rare), s al
ly
,
decept m,fore(not f t r m
esse
H.T.Dicebat :
fore(f t r m esse) t errares(met eres) fore t decipereris(met ereris),
errasses(rare), decept m fore(ra
rely : fore t de-
cept s e
sses).
NOTES.1.For examples of the Periphrastic,see 248.
Carthaginienses debellat m mox fore rebant r,L.,xxiii.13,6;the Carthagin
ians tho ght that the war wo ld soon be(have been) bro ght to an end.
From
debellat m erit,it will be(have been) bro ght to an end.
So in the deponent
adept m fore.(< adipiscor)
2.Pondero s periphrastics are of rare occ rrence.So
fetiales decrever nt tr m eor m fecisset recte fact r m(L.,xxxi.8);ÿÿら‡し‰も正し
not
fore t fecisset,altho gh the O.R.req ires
tr m feceris,recte feceris.(244,R.4.)
See Weissenborn's note.
3.Posse,velle,etc.,do not req ire the Periphrastic,and seldom take it.(248,R.)
4.Sperare,to hope,promittere(polliceri),to promise,which reg larly take the F t.
Inf.,have occasionally the Pr.when an immediate realisation of the hope is antic
ipated.With spes est the Pr.Inf.is more common.
Legati veni nt q i polliceant r obsides dare,CAES.,B.G.,iv.21,5; ambassa
dors come to promise the giving of(to give) hostages.
So,too,when the F t.Inf.is not available,sometimes also when it is.posse and the
Pr.is a fair s bstit te.
Toti s Galliae sese potiri posse(= potit ros esse) sperant, CAES..B.G.,1
.3,8;they hope they can(will) get possession of the whole of Ga l.See 423,N.5.
Of co rse sperare may be sed simply as a verb of Thinking.
[ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE.335]
Acc sative and Infinitive with Verbs of Will and Desire.
532.Verbs of Will and Desire take a Dependent Acc sative and Infinitive.
The relation is that of an Object to be Effected.
Si vis me flere,dolend m est prim m ipsi tibi,H.,A.P.,102; if yo wish m
e to weep,yo m st first feel the pang yo rself.
Utr m [Milonis] corporis an Pythagorae tibi malis vires ingenii dari ? C
.,Cat.M.,10,33; which(whether) wo ld yo rather have given to yo ,Milo's strengt
h of body or Pythagoras'strength of mind ?
Ipse i bet mortis t meminisse de s,MART.,ii.59(376).
Vitae s mma brevis spem nos vetat inchoare longam,H.,O.,1.4,15(423,N.6).
Nemo ire q emq am p blica probibet via,PL..C re.,35(389).
Germaini vin m ad se omnino importari non sin nt,CAES.,B.G.,iv.2,6; the
Germans do not permit wine to be imported into their co ntry at all.
REMARKS.1.A list of these verbs is given in 423,N.2.
2.When the s bj.of the Inf.is the same as the s bj.of the leading verb,the s bj.
of the Inf.is s ally not expressed :
Ni parere velis,pere nd m erit ante l cernas,J v.,x.339; nless yo resol
ve to obey,yo will have to perish before candle-light.
Et iam mallet eq os n mq am tetigisse paternos,Ov.,M.,ii.182; and now he
co ld have wished rather never to have to ched his father's horses.
B t the s bj.may be expressed,and commonly is expressed,when the action of the I
nf.is not within the power of the s bject;so especially with an Inf..passive :
(Timoleon) mal it se diligi q am met i,NEP.,xx.3,4; Timoleon preferred t
hat he sho ld be loved rather than that he sho ld be feared.
Ego r s abit ram me certo decrevi,TER.,Hec.,586.
Principem se esse mav lt q am videri,C.,Off.,1.19,65.
NOTES.1.On the constr ction of this class of verbs with t(ne,q omin s),see 546.
Impero,I command,in model prose takes only the Inf.passive or deponent; in SALLU
ST,HIRTIUS,CURTIUS,TACITUS,and the Poets sometimes the active.
(Hannibal) imperavit q am pl rimas venenatas serpentes vivas colligi, NE
P.,23,10;Hannibal ordered as many poisono s serpents as possible to be ca ght al
ive.
Permitto seldom takes the Inf.(e.g.,C.,Verr.,v.9,22); the Acc.with Inf.b
egins in TACITUS;
concedo takes Inf.pass,only,in classical prose.
I beo,I bid;sino,I let; veto,I forbid;prohibeo,I prohibit,always have th
e Inf.of passive verbs.
With sino and veto the model constr ction is Inf.only.
Sino takes t occasionally in early and late Latin,
veto does not have ne till in the post-Ciceronian period.
I bere takes t when it is applied to decrees of the Senate,and from LIV
Y on when sed of the orders of generals;
prohibre takes ne and q omin s.
These verbs may themselves be t rned into the passive :
i beor,sinor,vetor,prohibeor.
2.After i beo,Ibid,and veto,I forbid,the Inf.act.can be sed witho t a s bj.(eve
n an imaginary or indefinite one) :
I bet reddere,he bids ret rn(orders the ret rning).
[336 ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE.]
Vetat adhibere medicinam,C.,Att,xvi.15,5;he forbids the administration o
f medicine.
Infand m,regina,i bes renovare dolorem,V.,A.,ii.3; nspeakable,q een,the
ang ish which yo bid(me, s) revive.
3.After volo,nolo,malo in early Latin, t and the S bjv.is proportionally more co
mmon than in the classical time.B t with the Potential forms,velim,malim,vellem,
mallem,CICERO ses only the S bjv.(witho t t).When volo means maintain,it takes
the Inf.only;see 546,R..1.
4.It is noteworthy that in classical Prose c pere never takes t,while optare ne
ver takes the Infinitive.
5.On the se of the Pf .Inf.instead of the Pr.after these verbs,see 537,N.1.
6.The Poets go m ch f rther in sing verbs and phrases as expressions of Will an
d Desire.See 423,N.4.
Acc sative and Infinitive with Verbs of Emotion.
533.Verbs of Emotion take a dependent Acc sative and Infinitive,inasm ch as thes
e verbs may be considered as verbs of Saying and Thinking.(542.)
Salvom te advenisse ga deo,TER,.,Ph.,286;I rejoice that yo sho ld have
arrived safe(to think that yo have arrived safe,at yo r arriving safe).Q od sal
vos advenisti,that yo have arrived safe.
Q od salvos adveneris,that(as yo say) yo have arrived safe.
Inferiores non dolere [debent] se a s is dignitate s perari, C.,Lael.,20
,71;inferiors o ght not to consider it a grievance that they are s rpassed in ra
nk by their own(friends).
REMARKS.1.This constr ction,o tside of a few verbs,is not common,tho gh fo nd in
a wide range of a thors.
Ga dere,
laetari,
dolere,
q eri(beginning in Cic.),
mirari,
are common;in addition CICERO ses,rarely,however,more than once each,
maerere,
l gere,
confici,
discr ciari,
angi,
sollicitari,
indignari,
fremere,
demirari,
admirari,s besse timorem.Early Latin shows ridere(NAEV.),gestire,mihi do
let(TER.),maest s s m (PLAUT.),cr ciari(PLAUT.),lamentari(PLAUT.,HOR.),s spirare
(LUCR.),incendor ira(TER.),ferex est(PLAUT.),invidere(PLAUT.,HOR.),formidare,ver
eri,in addition to the common ga dere,etc.,already cited.
2.On the Participle after a verb of Emotion,536,N.2.
Acc sative and Infinitive in Exclamations.
534.The Acc sative with the Infinitive is sed in Exclamations and Exclamatory Q
estions as the object of an nexpressed tho ght or feeling.
Hem,mea l x,te n nc,mea Terentia,sic vexari,C.,Fam.,xiv.2,2; h'm,light o
f my life,for yo to be so harassed now,Terentia dear.
Hominemne Roman m tam Graeco loq i ? PLIN.,Ep.,TV.3,5;a Roman speak s ch
good Greek ?(To think that a Roman sho ld speak s ch good Greek.)
[ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE.337]
Mene incepto desistere ? V.,A.,1.37; I desist from my ndertaking?
Hinc abire matrem? TER.,Hec.,612;mother go away from here ?
REMARKS.1.Different is q od,which gives the gro nd.
Ei mihi q od n llis amor est sanabilis herbis,Ov.,M.,1.523; woe's me tha
t(in that,beca se) love is not to be c red by any herbs.
2.On t,with the S bjv.in a similar sense,see 558.Both forms offer an objection.
Acc sative and Infinitive as a S bject.
535.The Acc sative with the Infinitive may be treated as the S bject of a senten
ce.The Predicate is a s bstantive or ne ter adjective,an impersonal verb or abst
ract phrase.
In the English " for to," the "for " belongs not to the case b t to the Infiniti
ve,b t the object relation has been effaced here as it has been in Latin.See 422
,N.1.
Est in sitat m regem re m capitis esse,C.,Dei.,1.i;it is an extraordinar
y thing that a king sho ld(for a king to) be tried for his life.
Facin s est vincire civem Roman m,C.,Verr.,v.66,170; it is an o trage to
p t a Roman citien in chains.
Necesse est facere s mpt m q i q aerit (= e m q i q aerit) l cr m PL.,A
s.,218; need is that he make o tlay(出費) who an income seeks.利益‡得る¤ には元手N入る
Legem brevem esse oportet,q o facili s ab imperitis teneat r,SEN.,E.M.,9
4,38; it is proper that a law sho ld be brief (a law o ght to be brief),that it
may the more easily be grasped by the ned cated.
Q id Milonis intererat interfici Clodi m,C.,Mil.,13,34 (382,2).
Op s est te animo valere,C.,Fam.,xvi.14,2(406,N.5).
REMARKS.1.A list of expressions taking the Inf.as a s bj.is given in 422,NN.
2.Oportet,it is proper,and
necesse est,m st needs,
are often sed with the S bj nctive.So also many other phrases with t.(See 557.
)
Necesse also takes the Dat.of the Person :
Ut c lpent alii,tibi me la dare necesse est,Ov.,Her.,12,131;let others b
lame,b t yo m st give me praise.
3.When the indirect obj.of the leading verb is the same as the s bj.of the Inf.t
he predicate of the s bj.is p t in the same case as the indirect object : in sta
ndard prose chiefly with
licet,it is left(free);
in poetry and later prose with necesse,with sati s est,it is better,
contingit,it happens,
vacat,there is room.
Lic it esse otioso Themistocli,C.,T sc.,1.15,33;Themistocles was free to
live a life of leis re.
The Acc.is occasionally fo nd;always if the Dat.is not expressed.
Medios esse iam non licebit(nos),C.,Att.,x.8,4; it will no longer be all
owable to be ne tral.
[338 CAUSAL SENTENCES.]
Object Sentences Represented by the Participle.
536.The Participle is sed after verbs of Perception and Representation,to expre
ss the act al condition of the object of perception or representation.
Catonem vidi in bibliotheca sedentem m ltis circ mf s m Stoicor m libris
, C.,Fin.,iii.2,7;I saw Cato sitting in the library with an ocean of Stoic books
abo t him.
Prodiga non sentit pere ntem femina cens m,J v.,vi.362;the lavish woman
does not perceive(how) the income(is) dwindiing.
Saepe illam a divi f rtiva voce loq entem,CAT.,LXVII.41; I have often he
ard her talking in a stealthy(in an nder-) tone.
Ga de q od spectant oc li te mille loq entem,H.,Ep.,1.6,19(542).
Polyphem m Homer s c m ariete conloq entem facit,C.,T sc.,v.39,115;Homer
represents Polyphem s(as) talking with the ram.
NOTES.1.This cons traction is fo nd b t once in early Latin(Piso),then in CICERO
,SALLUST,NEPOS,VITBUVIUS,LIVY,HORACE.The nat ralisation of it is d e to CICERO,a
nd other st dents of Greek models.The poverty of Latin in participles was a seri
o s drawback to the convenient distinction from the Infinitive;and it may be sai
d that the participle was never perfectly at home.
2.On the Inf.,see 527,N.1.The Greek constr ction of Part,agreeing with the leadi
ng Nom.after verbs of Perception and Emotion,is rare and poetical :
Ga dent scribentes,H.,.Ep.,ii.2,107; they have joy while writing.
Sensit medios delaps s in hostes,V.,A.,ii.377;he perceived(it) having fa
llen(that he had fallen} 'midst the enemy.
Ga dent perf si sang ine fratr m,V.,G.,ii.510;they rejoice,bedrenched wi
th brothers' blood.
537.The Perfect Participle Passive is sed after verbs of Ca sation and Desire,t
o denote impatience of anything except entire f lfilment :
Si q i vol ptatib s d c nt r missos faciant honores,C.,Sest.,66,138; if
any are led captive by sens al pleas res ,let them dismiss hono rs(at once and f
orever).
H ic mandes si q id recte c rat m velis,TER.,Ad.,372;yo m st intr st to
him whatever yo want properly attended to.
NOTES.1.After verbs of Will and Desire,the Inf.esse is occasionally fo nd with t
his Part.,and hence it may be considered a Pf.Infinitive(280,2,c).
Compare,however,Pf.Part.pass,with op s est, s s est(406).
he rter 2.The verbs of Ca sation th s employed are
c rare,dare,facere,reddere.
The sage is most common in early Latin.In the classical period
only miss m facere.
CAUSAL SENTENCES.
538.Ca sal sentences are introd ced :
1.By q ia,beca se,q od,(in that) beca se. }
2.By q oniam(q om iam),now that,q ando,q andoq idem,since. }(Ca se Proper)
[CAUSAL SENTENCES.339]
3.By c m(q om),as.(Inference.)
4.By the Relative Prono n,partly alone,partly with t, tpote,q ippe,etc.(See 626
,634.)
NOTES.1. Q od is the Acc.Sing,ne ter,and q ia is probably the Acc.Pl.ne t
er from the relative stem.They have accordingly often a correlative demonstrativ
e;
so with q od : eo,ea re,ideo,idcirco,ea gratia(in SALLUST only),hoc,hac
mente (H.,S.,ii.2,90),propterea,and a few combinations with ob and propter;
with q ia are fo nd eo,ea re,ideo,idcirco,propterea,and ergo(in PLAUTUS
only).
2. Q od and q ia differ in classical prose,chiefly in that q od is sed,and
not q ia,when the ca sal sentence is at the same time an object sentence.
3. Q oniam is originally temporal,and as s ch is still fo nd in PLAUTUS.The
ca sal se of it becomes m ch more extensive in classical prose,and,like q ando
(q andoq idem),it is sed of evident reasons.
4. Q ando is sed principally as a temporal particle.In a ca sal sense it i
s very rare in CICERO(in the Orations never, nless compo nded with q idem),and i
s not fo nd in CAESAR.The compo nd with q idem is more common.
5. Q aten s,in so far as,is poetical and in late prose.HORACE shows first e
xample,O.,iii.24,30.VALERIUS M.,Q.UINTILIAN,TACITUS,PLINY MINOR,and SUETONIUS sh
ow occasional examples.
Ca sal Sentences with QUOD,QUIA,QUONIAM,and QUANDO.
539.Ca sal sentences with q od,q ia,q oniam,and q ando are p t in the Indicative
,except in obliq e relation (Partial or Total).
REMARK.The other person of the obliq e cla se may be imaginary,and the writer or
speaker may q ote from himself indirectly :
Laetat s s m,q od mihi liceret recta defendere,C.,Fam.,1.9,18;I was glad
(to say to myself) that I was free to champion the right.
540.Ca sal sentences with q od,q ia,q oniam,and q ando take the Indicative in Di
rect Disco rse.
Torq at s fili m s m q od is contra imperi m in hostem p gnaverat necar
i i ssit,S.,C.,52,30;Torq at s bade his son be p t to death beca se he had fo gh
t against the enemy contrary to order(s) [q od p gnasset = beca se,as Torq at s
said or tho ght].
Amantes de forma i dicare non poss nt,q ia sens m oc lor m praecipit ani
m s, QUINT.,vi.2,6;lovers cannot j dge of bea ty,beca se the heart forestalls th
e eye.
Q ia nat ra m tari non potest,idcirco verae amicitiae sempiternae s nt,
C.,Lael.,9,32; beca se nat re cannot change,therefore tr e friendships are everl
asting.
Neq e me vixisse paenitet q oniam ita vixi t non fr stra me nat m exist
mem, C.,Cat.M.,23,84;and I am not sorry for having lived,since I have so lived
that I think I was born not in vain.
Sol s ero q oniam non licet esse t m,PROP.,ii.9,46;I shall be alone sin
ce I may not be thine.
Vol ptas semovenda est q ando ad maiora q aedam nati s m s,Cf,C.,Fin.,v,
8,21; pleas re is to be p t aside beca se we are born for greater things.
sed q od or sed q ia
indiscriminately,reg larly with the Indicative.
S bj nctive :
P giles in iactandis caestib s ingemisc nt,non q od doleant,sed q ia pro
f ndenda voce omne corp s intendit r venitq e plaga vehementior, C.,T sc.,ii.23,
56; boxers in plying the caest s heave groans,not that(as yo might s ppose) the
y are in pain,b t beca se in giving f ll vent to the voice all the body is p t t
o the stretch and the blow comes with a greater r sh.
Maiores nostri in dominion de servo q aeri nol er nt;non q ia posset ver
m inveniri,sed q ia videbat r indign m esse,C.,Mil.,22,59;o r ancestors wo ld n
ot allow a slave to be q estioned by tort re against his master,not beca se(not
as tho gh they tho ght) the tr th co ld not be got at,b t beca se s ch a co rse
seemed degrading.
A [Lacedaemonior m ex lib s] praetor vim arc erat(遠 ÿる),non q ia salvos vellet s
ed q ia perire ca sa indicta nolebat,L.,xxxv i.33,11;the praetor had warded off
violence from the Lacedaemonian exiles,not(as yo might have s pposed) beca se h
e wished them to escape,b t beca se he did not wish them to perish with their ca
se not pleaded( nheard).
[CAUSAL SENTENCES.341]
The same principle applies to
magis q od(q o),
q ia q am q o(first in CICERO),
q od(first in SALLUST),
q ia(first in LIVY),with the moods in inverse order.
Libertatis originem inde,magis q ia ann m imperi m cons lare fact m est
q am q od demin t m q idq am sit ex regia potestate,n meres,L.,ii.i,7;yo may b
egin to co nt the origin of liberty from that point,rather beca se the cons lar
government was limited to a year,than beca se a ght was taken away from the roya
l power.
Indicative :
S m non dicam miser,sed certe exercit s,non q ia m ltis debeo sed q ia s
aepe conc rr nt aliq or m bene de me meritor m inter ipsos contentiones, C.,Plan
c.,32,78;I am,I will not say,wretched,b t certainly worried,not beca se I am in
debt to many,b t beca se the rival claims of some who have deserved well of me o
ften conflict.
Compare also H.,S.,ii.2,89.
3.Verbs of Saying and Thinking are occasionally p t in the S bjv.with q od by a
kind of attraction.Compare 585,N.3.
Impetrare non pot i,q od religione se impediri dicerent,C.,Fam.,iv.12,3;
I co ld not obtain permission,beca se they said they were embarrassed(prevented
) by a religio s scr ple(= q od impedirent r,beca se(as they said) they were pre
vented).
This attraction is said to occ r not nf req ently in CICERO,several times in CA
ESAR and SALLUST,b t is not cited from any other a thor.Compare,however,crederen
t,L.,xxi.i,3.
4.On the se of tamq am,etc.,to indicate an ass med reason,see 602,N.4.
5.Q andoq e is archaic and rare.It is fo nd first in the Twelve Tables,a few tim
es in CICERO and LIVY,three times in HORACE,and occasionally later.
6.Ca sal sentences may be represented by a participle(669),or by the relative(63
6).
QUOD with Verbs of Emotion.
542.Q od is sed to give the gro nd of Emotions and Expressions of Emotion,s ch
as verbs of Joy,Sorrow,S rprise,Satisfaction and Anger,Praise and Blame,Thanks a
nd Complaint.
The r le for the Mood has been given already:539.
Indicative :
Ga de q od spectant oc li te mille loq entem,H.,Ep.,1.6,19;rejoice that
a tho sand eyes are gaing at yo (while yo are) speaking.
Dolet mihi q od t n nc stomacharis,C.,ad Br.,1.17,6;it pains me that yo
are angry now.
Q int m paenitet q od anim m t m offendit,Cf.C.,Att.,xi.13,2(377,R.3).
I vat me q od vigent st dia,PLIN.,Ep.,1.13,1;I am charmed that st dies a
re flo rishing.
Tristis es ? indignor q od s m tibi ca sa doloris,Ov.,Tr.,iv.3,33; are y
o sad ? I am provoked(with myself) that I am a ca se of pain to yo .
Tibi gratias ago,q od me omni molestia liberasti,C.,Fam.,xiii.62; I than
k yo ,that yo freed me from all annoyance.
S bj nctive :
Ga det miles q od vicerit hostem,Ov.,Tr.,ii.49;the soldier rejoices at h
aving conq ered the enemy.
[342 SENTENCES OF DESIGN AND TENDENCY.]
Neq e mihi mq am veniet in mentem poenitere q od a me ipse non desciver
im,C.,Att.,ii.4,2;it will never occ r to me to be sorry for not having been ntr
e to myself.
La dat African m Panaeti s q od f erit abstinens,C.,Off.,ii.22,76;Panaet
i s praises African s for having been abstinent.
Nemo est oratorem q od Latine loq eret r admirat s,C.,Or.,iii.14,52; no
one(ever) admired an orator for speaking(good) Latin.
Socrates acc sat s est q od corr mperet i vent tem,QUINT.,iv.4,5;Socrate
s was acc sed of corr pting yo th.
Memini gloriari solit m esse Q int m Hortensi m q od n mq am bello civil
i interf isset,C.,Fam.,ii.16,3; I remember that Q int s Hortensi s sed to boast
of never having engaged in civil war.
Ag nt gratias q od sibi pepercissent,CAES.,B.C.,1.74,2(511,R.i).
REMARK.This class of verbs may be constr ed with the Acc.and Inf.:
salvom te advenisse ga deo(533);
also with q ia,principally in early Latin,and in CICERO'S Letters,then occasiona
lly in LIVY,TACITUS,SUETONIUS,and later.B t in Expressions of Praise and Blame,T
hanks and Complaint,q od is more common.On c m,see 564,N.2.
Amo te et non neglexisse habeo gratiam,TER.,Ph.,54;I love yo (= m ch ob
liged),and I am thankf l to yo for not having neglected,(it).
Grat lor ingeni m non lat isse t m,Ov.,Tr.,1.9,54; I congrat late(yo )
that yo r geni s has not lain hidden.
[Isocrates] q erit r pl s honoris corpor m q am animor m virt tib s dari
,QUINT.,iii.8,9;Isocrates complains that more hono r is paid to the virt es of t
he body than to those of the mind.
NOTES.1.Perplexing Emotion(Wonder) may be followed by a Conditional,or by a Depe
ndent Interrogative,as in English,b t this constr ction is not fo nd in VERGIL,C
AESAR,SALLUST,and is never common.
Miror si [Tarq ini s] q emq am amic m habere pot it,C.,Lael.,15,54;I won
der if Tarq in co ld ever have had a friend.
Besides miror(and mir m),there is one case of
ga deo si in CICERO( Yen:,TV.17,37),and a few cases after expressions of
Fear in TACITUS.There are also sporadic cases of
indignari(indignitas) si.
2.Noteworthy is the phrase
mir m(-a) ni(nisi),'tis a wonder that not,which belongs to the colloq ia
lisms of early Latin(Pl.,Capt.,820),b t reappears once in Livyr.
SENTENCES OF DESIGN AND TENDENCY.
543.1.Sentences of Design are commonly called Final Sentences.Sentences of Tende
ncy are commonly called Consec tive Sentences.Both contemplate the end-the one,a
s an aim;the other,as a conseq ence.
2.They are alike in having the S bj nctive and the particle
t(how,that),a relative conj nction.
[FINAL SENTENCES.343]
3.They differ in the Tenses employed.The Final Sentence,as a r le,takes only the
Present and Imperfect S bj nctive.Consec tive Sentences may take also Perfect a
nd Pl perfect.
4.They differ in the kind of S bj nctive employed.The Final Sentence takes the O
ptative.The Consec tive Sentence takes the Potential.Hence the difference in the
Negative.
Final : ne( t ne), Consec tive : t non,that not.
ne q is, t nemo,that no one.
ne ll s, t n ll s,that no.
ne mq am,(ne q ando,) t n mq am,that never,
ne sq am,(nec bi,) t n sq am,that nowhere.
ne a t--a t,( t neve--neve,) t neq e--neq e,that neither--nor.
REMARKS.1.Verbs of Effecting have the Final Seq ence.
2.Verbs of Hindering have the seq ence of the Final Sentence,b t often the signi
fication of the Consec tive.
3.Verbs of Fearing belong to the Final Sentence only so far as they have the Opt
ative S bj nctive;the s bordinate cla se is only semidependent pon the principa
l,and we have a partial s rvival of original parataxis.
NOTES.1.Inasm ch as the S bjv.cannot express a fact,the Latin Consec tive cla se
does not properly express act al res lt,b t only a tendency,which may,we infer,
lead to a res lt.To obviate this diffic lty,the Latin has reco rse to the circ m
loc tions with
accidit,evenit,etc.
2.It is to be remarked that the difference between Final and Consec tive often c
onsists only in the point of view.What is final from the point of view of the do
er is consec tive from the point of view of the spectator;hence the variation in
seq ence after verbs of Effecting.A fr strated p rpose gives a negative res lt;
hence the variation in negative after verbs of Hindering.
3.Here and there in CICERO,more often in LIVY and later writers,instead of neve
(ne ),a second cla se is added by neq e,the force of the final particle being fe
lt thro gho t the sentence.
Monitor t s s adebit tibi t hinc discedas neq e mihi verb m ll m resp
ondeas, C.,Div.in Caec.,16,52;yo r adviser will co nsel yo to depart hence and
answer me never a word.
FINAL SENTENCES.
544.Final Sentences are divided into two classes :
I.Final Sentences in which the Design is expressed by the particle;P re Final Se
ntences(Sentences of Design).
Oportet esse, t vivas,non vivere t edas,[C.],ad Her.,iv.28,39; yo m st
eat in order to live,not live in order to eat.
[344 FINAL SENTENCES.]
This form may be translated by.(in order) to;sometimes by that may,that might,th
at,with the S bj nctive and the like.
II.Final Sentences in which the Design lies in the leading verb(verba st dii et
vol ntatis,verbs of Will and Desire); Complementary Final Sentences.
Volo ti mihi respondeas,C.,Vat.,7,17; I wish yo to answer me.
This form is often rendered by "to",never by "in order to",sometimes "by that" a
nd the S bj nctive,or some eq ivalent.
Of the same nat re,b t partly Final and partly Consec tive in their seq
ence,are :
Verbs of Hindering.
Pec liar in their seq ence are :
III.Verbs of Fearing.
REMARKS.1.The se of the S bjv.with Temporal Particles often adds a fina
l sense,inasm ch as the S bjv.reg larly looks forward to the f t re.So d m,donec
,q oad(572),anteq am,pri sq am(577).
2.The general sense of a Final Sentence may also be expressed:
(1) By the Relative q i with the S bj nctive.(630.)
(2) By the Genitive of Ger nd or Ger ndive,with(seldom witho t) ca sa or
gratia.(428,R.2.)
(3) By ad with Ger nd and Ger ndive.(432.)
(4) By the Dative of the Ger nd and Ger ndive.(429,2.)
(5) By the Acc sative of the Ger nd and Ger ndive after verbs of Giving,
etc.(430.)
(6) By the Acc sative S pine after verbs of Motion.(435.)
(7) By the F t re Participle Active(post-Ciceronian).(438,N.)
(8) By the Infinitive(poetic and rare).(421,N.1,a.)
I.P re Final Sentences.
545.P re Final Sentences are introd ced by :
1.Ut( ti)(how) that,and other relative prono ns and adverbs.(630.)
Ut and ne are often preceded by a demonstrative expression,s ch as:
idcirco,therefore;
eo,to that end;
propterea,on that acco nt;
eo consilio,with that design;
ea ca sa,re,for that reason.
2.Q o = t eo,that thereby; with comparatives,that the ...--;
[FINAL SENTENCES.345]
3.Ne,that not,lest,contin ed by neve,ne .(444.)
Oportet esse, t vivas,non vivere t edas,[C.],ad Her.,iv.28,39(544,I.).
Inventa s nt spec la, t homo ipse se nosset,SEN.,N.Q.,1.17,4; mirrors we
re invented,to make man acq ainted with himself.
Ut ameris,amabilis esto,Ov.,A.A.,ii.107; that yo may be loved(to make y
o rself loved,in order to be loved),be lovable.
Legem brevem esse oportet,q o facili s ab imperitis teneat r, SEN.,E.M.,
94,38(535).
[Senex] serit arbores,q ae alteri saeclo prosint,CAECILIUS (C.,T sc.,1.1
4,31); the old man sets o t trees,to do good to the next generation.
Semper habe Pyladen aliq em q i c ret Orestem,Ov.,Rem.Am.,589;always hav
e some Pylades,to tend Orestes.
[Athenienses] creant decem praetores q i exercit i praeessent,NEP.,1.4,4
;the Athenians make ten generals to command their army.
[Magnesiam Themistocli Artaxerxes] rbem donarat,q ae ei panem praeberet
, NEP.,ii.10,3; Artaxerxes had given Themistocles the city of Magnesia,to f rnis
h him with bread.
Gallinae pennis fovent p llos,ne frigore laedant r,Cf.C.,N.D.,ii.52,129;
hens keep (their) chickens warm with(their) wings,that they may not be(to keep
them from being) h rt by the cold.
Dionysi s,ne coll m tonsori committeret,tondere filias s as doc it,d.,T
sc.,v.20,58(423,N.6).
REMARKS.1.Ut ne is fo nd for ne with apparently no difference in signification,o
ccasionally at all periods,b t not in CAESAR,SALLUST,LIVY.
Q o witho t comparative is rare and cited only from PLAUTUS,TERENCE,SALL
UST,OVID,and late Latin;
q one(= t ne) is not fo nd till the time of DICTYS;apparent examples in
classical Latin are to be otherwise explained.
Q omin s and q in occ r in special ses.
2.Ut non is sed when a partic lar word is negatived :
Confer te ad Malli m, t non eiect s ad alienos sed invitat s ad t os iss
e(ivisse) videaris,C.,Cat.,1.9,23;betake yo rself to Malli s,that yo may seem t
o have gone not as an o tcast to strangers b t as an invited g est to yo r own(f
riends).
3.Ut and ne are sed parenthetically at all periods,depending on a s ppressed wo
rd of Saying or the like.
Utq e magis st peas l dos Paridemq e reliq it,J v.,vi.87;and to st n yo
more(I tell yo that) she left Paris and the games.
The verb of Saying may be inserted :
atq e t omnes intellegant dico,C.,Imp.,8,20;and that all may nderstand
,I say.
1.Positive : t.
Volo ti mihi respondeas,C.,Vat..7.17(544,II.).
(Phaethon) optavit t in c rr m patris tolleret r,C.,Off.,iii.25,94; Pha
ethon desired to be lifted p into his father's chariot.
Admoneo t cottidie meditere resistend m esse irac ndiae,C.,Q.F.,1.1.13,
38;I admonish yo to reflect daily that resistance m st be made to hot-headednes
s.
Ubii(Caesarem) orant, t sibi parcat,CAES.,B.G.,vi.9,7;the Ubii beg Caesa
r to spare them.
Sed precor t possim t ti s esse miser,Ov.,Tr.,v.2,78(423,2).
Exigis t Priam s nator m f nere l dat,Ov.,Tr.,v.12,7; yo exact that Pr
iam sport at(his) sons'f neral.
Athenienses c m stat erent t naves conscenderent,Cyrsil m q endam s ade
ntem t in rbe manerent lapidib s obr er nt,C.,Off.,iii.ii,48; the Athenians,re
solving to go on board their ships,overwhelmed with stones( stoned) one Cyrsil s
,who tried to pers ade them to remain in the city.
So also any verb or phrase sed as a verb of Willing or Demanding.
Pythia respondit t moenib s ligneis se m nirent,NEP.,II.2,6 : the Pythi
a answered that they m st defend themselves with walls of wood.
2.Negative : ne,nt ne;contin ed by neve(ne ),and not.
Caesar s is imperavit ne q od omnino tel m in hostes reicerent, CAES.,B.
G.,1.46,2;Caesar gave orders to his(men) not to throw back any missile at all at
the enemy.
Themistocles [collegis s is] praedixit t ne pri s Lacedaemonior m legat
os dimitterent q am ipse esset remiss s,NEP.,ii.7,3;Themistocles told his collea
g es beforehand not to dismiss the Lacedaemonian envoys before he were sent back
.
Pompei s s is praedixerat t Caesaris impet m exciperent neve se loco mo
verent, CAES.,B.C.,iii.92,1;Pompey had told his men beforehand to receive Caesar
's charge and not to move from their position.
REMARKS.1.When verbs of Willing and Wishing are sed as verbs of Saying and Thin
king,Knowing and Showing,the Inf.m st be sed.The English translation is that,an
d the Indic.:
volo,I will have it(maintain),
moneo,I remark,
pers adeo,I convince,
decerno,I decide,
cogo,I concl de:
[Moneo] artem sine adsid itate dicendi non m lt m i vare,Cf.[C.],ad Her.
,1.i,1;I remark that art witho t constant practice in speaking is of little avai
l.
Vix c iq am pers adebat r Graecia omni cess ros(Romanos), L.,xxx i.32,3;
scarce any one co ld be pers aded that the Romans wo ld retire from all Greece.
Non s nt isti a diendi q i virt tem d ram et q asi ferream esse q andam
volant,C.,Lael.,13,48(313,R.2).
[FINAL SENTENCES.347]
Est mos homin m t nolint e ndem pl rib s reb s excellere,C.,Br t.,21,84
; it is the way of the world not to allow that the same man excels in more thing
s(than one).
2.When the idea of Wishing is emphatic,the simple S bjv.,witho t t,is employed,
and the restriction of seq ence to Pr.and Impf.is removed :
Velim existimes neminem c iq am cariorem mq am f isse q am te mihi, C.,
Fam.,1.9,24;I wish yo to think that no one was ever dearer to any one than yo
to me.
Malo te sapiens hostis met at q am st lti cives la dent,L.,xxii.39,20;I
had rather a wise enemy sho ld fear yo than foolish citiens sho ld praise yo .
Exc sat m habeas me rogo,ceno domi,MART.,ii.79,2(238).
H c ades,insani feriant sine litora fl ct s,V.,EC.,9,43;come hither(and)
let the mad waves lash the shores.
Tam felix esses q am formosissima vellem, Ov.,Am.,1.8,27(302).
Vellem me ad cenam invitasses,C.,Fam.,xii.4,1(261,R.).
Occidit occideritq e sinas c m nomine Troia,V.,A.,xii.828;'tis fallen,an
d let Troy be fallen,name and all.
So i beo in poetry and later prose.Compare also poti s q am,577,N.6.
3.Ut ne is not sed after verbs of negative signification,as
impedio,I hinder,
rec so,I ref se(548).
Otherwise there seems to be no difference in meaning between it and ne,except th
at sometimes the ne seems to apply more to a single word in the sentence.
4.On ned m,see 482,5,R.2.
NOTES.1.S ch verbs and phrases are :
Willing and Wishing:
volo,nolo,malo,opto,st deo.
Warning and Beseeching:
hortor,adhortor,moneo,admoneo,a ctor s m,consili m do,oro,rogo,peto,prec
or,posco,post lo,flagito,obsecro.
Urging and Demanding:
s adeo,pers adeo,conseo,impero,mando,praecipio,edico,dico,scribo.
Resolving and Endeavo ring:
stat o,constit o,decerno,nitor,contendo,laboro,p gno,id ago,
operam do,c ro,video,provideo,prospicio,legem fero,lex est,etc.
2.S bstantives of kindred meaning,in combination with the cop la or other verbs,
take similar constr ctions.S ch are
vol ntas,c piditas,spes,ardor,a ctoritas,consili m
(especially in the combination eo,hoc consilio),
sign m,praecept m,exempl m,proposit m,offici m,negoti m,m n s,verba,
and
litterae(with dare,mittere,etc.),sententia,anim s(especially eo animo),c
ondicio(especially ea condicione),foed s,i s,lex (ea lege),c ra,opera,ca sa,rati
o.
3.Instead of t with the S bjv.,the Inf.is freq ently sed with this class of ve
rbs.So,generally,with
i beo,I order,532.
With verbs of Asking,however,the Inf.is not common ntil VERGIL.
Orare has Inf.once in PLAUTUS,then in VERGIL and later poets;in prose fi
rst in TACITUS.
Rogare has t reg larly,Inf.only once(CAT.,xxxv.10).
Q aeso,
imploro,
obsecro,
obtestor,
never have Inf.,
flagitare only once (H.,S.,ii.4,61) ntil SUETONIUS;
post lare very often,especially in early Latin in the sense expect;
poscere not till the A g stan poets.A thors vary.The se of the Inf.its
wider in poetry and silver prose.
B.Verbs of Hindering.
547.The dependencies of verbs of Hindering may be regarded as partly Final,partl
y Consec tive.Ne and q omin s are originally final,
[348 FINAL SENTENCES.]
b t the final sense is often effaced,especially in q omin s.Q in is a consec tiv
e particle.The seq ence of verbs of Hindering is that of the Final Sentence.
The negative often disappears in the English translation.
548.Verbs and phrases signifying to Prevent,to Forbid,to Ref se,and to Beware,ma
y take
ne with the S bj nctive,if they are not negatived.
Impedior ne pl ra dicam,C.,S ll.,33,92;I am hindered from saying more(I
am hindered that I sho ld say no more).
"Who did hinder yo that ye sho ld not obey the tr th ? " GAL.,v.7.
Servit s mea mihi interdixit ne q id mirer me m mal m,PL.,Pers.,621;my s
lavery has forbidden me to marvel a ght at ill of mine.奴隷にyっ¤私Nÿ y屈辱に出会っ‰も
Histiae s ne res conficeret r obstitit,NEP.,1.3,5;Histiae s opposed the
thing's being done.
(Reg l s) sententiam ne diceret rec savit,C.,Off.,iii.27,100; Reg l s re
f sed to prono nce an opinion.
Maledictis deterrere ne scribat parat,TER.,Ph.,3(423,2).
Tant m c m finges ne sis manifesta caveto,Ov.,A.A.,iii.801(271,2).
Tant m ne noceas d m vis prodesse videto,Ov.,Tr.,1.i,101; only see(to if
) that yo do not do harm while yo wish to do good.
NOTES.1.The most important of these words are:
Preventing:
impedire,
impediments esse,
prohibere,
tenere,
retinere,
deterrere,
intercl dere,
interpellare,
deprecari,
obsistere,
obstare,
intercedere,
interponere.
Forbidding:
interdicere.
Ref sing:
rec sare,
rep gnare,
resistere,
se tenere,
se reprimere,
sibi temperare,
morari.
Beware;
cavere,
videre,and a few others,
especially the phrase
per aliq em stare(more often with q omin s).
2.Many verbs of Preventing and Ref sing also take
q omin s(549),and some also the Infinitive(423,2,N.2).
3."Cavere",to beware,and "praecavere" belong to verbs of Hindering only so far a
s action is contemplated.
Cavere,followed by t,means to be s re to;
by ne or t ne,to see to it that not;
by ne,to take preca tions against.
When ne is omitted,
cave,caveto,with the S bjv.,form circ mioc tions for the negative Impera
tive (271,2).
So with
vide t,ne.
Cavere also has the Inf.occasionally as a verb of negative Will(423,2,N.
2),beginning with PLAUTUS.
In prose it is cited only from CATO(once), CICERO(Att.,iii.17,3), SALLUST(T g.,
64,2),and PLINY MAI.
4."Vide ne(ne non)",see to it lest,
is often sed as a polite form la for
d bito an (457,2),I am inclined to think.
Credere omnia vide ne non sit necesse,C.,Div.,ii.13,31.
(áれら‡すó‰信じる必要N}るåÿþå考hy a)
549.Verbs of Preventing and Ref sing may take
q omin s (= t eo min s),that thereby the less,with the S bj nctive.
Aetas non impedit q omin s agri colendi st dia teneam s.C.,Cat.M.,17,60;
age does not hinder o r retaining interest in agric lt re.
Non deterret sapientem mors q omin s rei p blicae cons lat, C.,T sc.,I.3
8,91;death does not deter the sage from cons lting the interest of the State.
Q id obstat q omin s(De s) sit beat s ? C.,N.D.,1.34,95; what is in the
way of God's being happy ?
[FINAL SENTENCES.349]
Caesar cognovit per Afrani m stare q omin s proelio dimicaret r, CAES.,B
.C.,1.41,3;Caesar fo nd that it was Afrani s's fa lt that there was no decisive
fight(stat,there is a stand-still).
NOTES.1.With "impedire" and "prohibere" CAESAR never ses "q omin s";CICERO rare
ly.B t with other words implying Hindrance CICERO ses q omin s not nfreq ently
.
With "probibere" the reg lar constr ction is the Inf.,b t this is rare with "imp
edire,q omin s" being the r le.
With rec sare,the Inf.is rare(CAES.,B.G.,iii.22,3) b t classical,becoming more f
req ent from LIVY on.
The passive of deterrere is also constr ed with the Inf.occasionally.
2.PLAUTUS does not se "q omin s",TERENCE first,b t seldom.It is especially comm
on from the time of CICERO.In TERENCE the elements are sometimes separated (q o
min s),th s emphasising the relative character.B t it is not so sed in the clas
sical Latin,and in the Silver Age the force of its origin ceases to be felt,so t
hat it is constr ed like "q in".The fact that it is not fo nd in PLAUTUS nor in
VITRUVIUS has led to the s ggestion that it is a book-word.
3.The difference in sage between q omin s and q in seems to be that while q in
is always sed with negatives,q omin s occ rs sometimes with positives,so that a
ccording to the connection it is either Final or Consec tive.
4."Q o seti s" for "q omin s" is archaic,b t occ rs twice in CORNIFICIUS and twi
ce in CICERO(Inv.,ii.45,132;57,170).
III.Verbs of Fearing.
550.1.Verbs of Fearing,and expressions that involve Fear,take the Present and Pe
rfect,Imperfect and Pl perfect S bj nctive.
The Present S bj nctive represents the Present and F t re Indicative.The Perfect
S bj nctive reg larly represents the Perfect Indicative.
Present and Perfect S bj nctive become Imperfect and Pl perfect after a Past Ten
se.
These constr ctions are s rvivals of the original parataxis,when "ne" and " t" w
ere particles of wish.Th s,
timeo : ne veniat,I am afraid; may he not come(i.e.,I am afraid that he
will),becomes,when the two cla ses are combined,
timeo ne veniat,I am afraid lest(that) he may(will) come.
Similarly with " t",which in this sage was originally how.Hence,
2.With verbs of Fearing,"ne",lest,shows that the negative is wished and the posi
tive feared;" t(ne non)" shows that the positive is wished and the negative fear
ed : "ne non" is sed reg larly after the negative,or an interrogative with nega
tive force.
Vereor ne hostis veniat,I fear lest the enemy come,that he is coming,tha
t he will come.(I wish he may not come.)
Vereor ne hostis venerit,I fear lest the enemy have come,that(it will t
rn o t that) he has come.
[350 FINAL SENTENCES.]
Vereor t amic s veniat,I fear(how my friend can come) lest my friend co
me not,that he is not coming,will not come.(I wish he may come.)
Vereor t amic s venerit,I fear lest my friend have not come,that he has
not come.
Non vereor ne amic s non veniat,I do not fear that my friend is not comi
ng,will not come.
Non vereor ne amic s non venerit,I do not fear that my friend has not co
me.
Id paves,ne d cas t illam,t a tem t d cas.TER.,And.,349;that's what y
o dread,YOU lest yo marry her(ne d cam !);YOU,on the other hand,lest yo don't
( tinam d cam!).
Vereor ne d m min ere velim laborem a geam,C.,Leg.,1.4,12;I fear lest,wh
ile I wish to lessen the toil,I increase it(that I am increasing it).
Verem r ne par m hic liber mellis et absinthii m lt m habere videat r, Q
UIXT.,iii.i,5; I am afraid that this book will seem to have too little honey and
(too) m ch wormwood( ガ ギ).
Timeo ne tibi nihil praeter lacrimas q eam reddere,C.,Planc.,42,101; I a
m afraid that I can give yo nothing in ret rn save tears.
A r m inspicere volt ne s br pt m siet,PL.,A l.,39;he wishes to inspect
the gold(for fear) lest it be filched(盗Xれ¤).
Timeo t s stineas(labores),C.,Fam.,xiv.2,3; I fear that yo mil not hol
d o t nder yo r toils.
Vereor ne d m defendam meos,non parcam t is,C.,Att.,1.17,3; I fear lest
in defending my own I may not spare(助ÿる) thine.
Non vereor ne t a virt s opinioni homin m non respondeat,Cf.C.,Fam.,ii.5
,2; I do not fear that yo r virt e will not answer to(come p to) p blic expecta
tion.
Met o ne id consilii ceperim s q od non facile explicare possim s, C.,Fa
m.,siv.12;I fear that we have formed a plan that we cannot readily explain.
Un m ill d extimescebam ne q id t rpi s facerem,vel dicam,iam effecissem
, C.,Att.,ix.7,1;the only thing I feared was,lest I sho ld act disgracef lly,or,
I sho ld(rather) say,(lest) I had already acted disgracef lly.
NOTES.1."Ut" seems to be sed only after
met o,paveo,timeo,and vereor.
Most common is
vereor;
met o is common in early Latin,b t is cited b t rarely later (HORACE,CIC
ERO);
paveo has to be s pplied once with " t" in TER.,And.,349.
Timeo t is fo nd first in CICERO,and is very rare.
2 "Ne non" is very rare in early Latin,b t becomes more freq ent from CICERO on.
"Ut ne" is never fo nd for "ne".
3.Two strange cases are cited where,instead of ne, t seems to be sed,vi.,HOR.,
S.,1.3,120,
nam t fer la caedes merit m maiora s bire verbera,non vereor,
and L.,xxviii.22,12,
nihil min s,q am t egredi obsessi moenib s a derent,timeri poterat.
In the first case the t cla se precedes,and the non vereor is sed by anacol th
on;in the second the t cla se is a circ mloc tion for an omitted ill d,parallel
to nihil.This is also helped by the antecedence of the t cla se.
4.When a verb of Fear is a verb of Uncertainty an indirect q estion may follow :
[TEMPORAL SENTENCES.361]
[TEMPORAL SENTENCES.367]
NOTES.1.With the Past Sphere the idea of limit precl des the employment of a ten
se of contin ance,which wo ld nat rally involve the notion of Overlapping Action
.The Impf.is,therefore,not fo nd ntil the time of TACITUS(once with donec,H.,1.
9).With the Present Sphere the tense m st be iterative or historical.Otherwise t
he Pr.is sed by anticipation for the F t re.
2.The F t.Indic.is fo nd occasionally in early Latin, s ally,however,the Present
.In the classical times,and afterwards,the S bjv.takes its place.Th s CICERO se
s the S bjv.reg larly,after verba exspectandi,except in possibly fo r passages o
f the earlier Orations and Letters.
3.Donec is not ncommon in early Latin,b t is very rare in CICERO,and never occ
rs in CAESAR.On the other hand,TACITUS shows one h ndred and thirty-eight cases
of it.
4.Donic m belongs to early Latin,b t is not fo nd in TERENCE;one case with the S
bjv.is fo nd in NEPOS.Doniq e is fo nd in LUCRETIUS fo r times with the Indic.,
always before vowels;in VITRUVIUS once with Indic.,three times with S bjv.; othe
rwise it is not cited.
5.Q oad, ntil,occ rs once in PLAUTUS,and with the S bj nctive.Otherwise it is fo
nd with both moods occasionally thro gho t the lang age.
6.LIVY introd ces donec invers m,like c m invers m(581).Seexxi.46,6; xxxv.50,4,e
tc.
572.D m,donec,and q oad, ntil,take the S bj nctive when S spense and Design are
involved.
Vergini s d m collegam cons leret morat s(est),L.,iv.21,10; Vergini s de
layed ntil he co ld(long eno gh to) cons lt his colleag e.
At tanti tibi sit non ind lgere theatris,d m bene de vac o pectore cedat
amor,Ov.,Rem.Am,,751;b t let it be worth the cost to yo (= deem it worth the co
st) not to ind lge in play-going, ntil love be fairly gone from (yo r) ntenante
d bosom.
Often with verba exspectandi,especially exspecto,I wait.
R stic s exspectat d m defl at amnis,H.,Ep.,1.2,42; the clownl田舎者m waits for the
iver to r n off(dry).
REMARKS.1.The S bjv.is sometimes sed in narrative with d m,while,and donec,whil
e, ntil,to express s bordination.The principle is that of Partial Obliq ity.Ther
e is often a Ca sal or Iterative sense(like c m,584,R.).
D m intent s in e m se rex tot s averteret,alter elatam sec rim in cap t
deiecit,L.,1.40,7; while the king,intent pon him,was t rning q ite away,the ot
her raised his axe and planted it in his sk ll.(Averteret from the point of view
of alter = d m videt avertentem.)
2.Verba exspectandi have also other constr ctions,as t,si,q in,b t not the Infi
nitive.
573.D m,modo,and d mmodo,if only,provided only,
[368 TEMPORAL SENTENCES.]
only,are sed with the Present and Imperfect S bj nctive in Conditional Wishes.
The negative is ne(d m ne = ne interim).
Oderint d m met ant,Acci s(C.,Off.,1.28,97); let them hate so long as th
ey fear(provided that,if they will only fear).
Q o l beat n bant,d m dos ne fiat comes,PL.,A L,491;let them marry where
(= whom) they please,if b t the dowry do not go with them.(持参金 hもっ‰áyきゃ、誰èも気
D mmodo morata recte veniat,dotata est satis,PL.,A L,239; provided only
she come with a good character,she is endowed(= her dowry is) eno gh.
In eo m lta admiranda s nt : eligere modo c rae sit,QUINT.,x.i,131; many
things in him are to be admired;only yo m st be caref l to choose.
Copia placandi sit modo parva t i,Ov.,Her.,20,74(428,R.1).
NOTES.1.It has been noticed that TACITUS ses d mmodo only in the Germania and D
ialoffits,otherwise d m.
2.D mmodo ne and modo ne are fo nd first in CICERO.In post-A g stan Latin non is
sometimes sed for ne;J v.,vii.222,d mmodo non pereat.
III.SUBSEQUENT ACTION.Anteq am and Pri sq am with the Indicative'
574.Anteq am and prinsq am,before,take the Present,Perfect,and F t re Perfect In
dicative,when the limit is stated as a fact.The Present is sed in anticipation
of the F t re.
REMARKS.1.The elements ante,antes,prins,and q am are often separated.
2.As pri s(ante)-q am is negative in its signification(= necd m),the Indic.is so
metimes fo nd where we sho ld expect the S bj nctive.
NOTE.Anteq am is m ch rarer than pri sq am,especially in early Latin,where it is
cited only from CATO,CAELIUS,TERENCE(Hec.,146,with S bjv.in O.O.),and VARRO.CIC
ERO prefers it before a Pr.Indic.,pri sq am elsewhere.
575.The Present Indicative is sed after positive sentences.
Anteq am ad sententiam redeo,de me pa ca dicam,C.,Cat.,iv.10,20;(228)
Omnia experiri cert m est pri s q am pereo,TER.,And.,311 ;I am determine
d to try everything before I perish.(Pri s q am peream = sooner than perish,to k
eep from perishing.)
NOTES.1.The P re Pf.Indic.is sed of Iterative Action,and is rare.(567.)
Dociliora s nt ingenia pri sq am obd r er nt,QUINT.,1.12,9(567).Instead
of this,the Pr.S bjv.is more common in general statements.(567,N.) 2.TACITUS sho
ws no example of the Pr.Indicative.
[TEMPORAL SENTENCES.369]
576.The Perfect(Aorist) and F t re Perfect Indicative are sed both after positi
ve and after negative cla ses,chiefly the latter.
Heraclio,aliq anto ante q am est mort s,omnia tradiderat,C.,Verr.,ii.1
8,46; some time before he died he had handed over everything to Heracli s.
Legati non ante profecti q am impositos in naves milites vider nt, L.,xx
xiv.12,8;the envoys did not set o t ntil they saw the soldiers on board.
Neq e defatigabor ante q am illor m vias rationesq e et pro omnib s et c
ontra omnia disp tandi percepero,C.,Or.,iii.36,145; I will not let myself grow w
eary before( ntil) I learn(shall have learned) their methods of disp ting for an
d against everything.
S bj nctive in Oratio Obliq a.
Themistocles [collegia s is] praedixit, t ne pri s Lacedaemonior m legat
es dimitterent q am ipse esset remiss s,NEP.,ii.7,3(546,2).(Non pri s dimittetis
q am ego ero remiss s.)
REMARK.After negative cla ses containing a historical tense the Pf .is the r le
and the connection is always close : non pri sq am = d m.Violations of this r le
are very rare;see 577,2.
NOTES.1.The F t.is fo nd occasionally in PLAUTUS,b t has disappeared by the time
of TERENCE.The F t.Pf.is never common,b t is fo nd atall periods.TACITUS avoids
it,and so do other a thors.
2.The Impf .is confined to LIVY,who shows fo r examples,and to one case in late
Latin.The Pl pf.is fo nd once in CICERO(Dam.,30,78),where it may be Iterative,an
d once in early Latin.
Anteq am and Pri sq am with the S bj nctive.
577.Anteq am and pri sq am are sed with the S bj nctive when an ideal limit is
given;when the action is expected,contingent,designed,or s bordinate.
1.An ideal limit involves necessary antecedence,b t not necessary conseq ence.Af
ter positive sentences,the S bj nctive is the r le,especially in generic sentenc
es and in narrative.(Compare c m,585.) After Historical Tenses the S bj nctive i
s almost invariable when the action does not,or is not to,take place.The transla
tion is often before,and the verbal in -ing(Greek prin with the Infinitive).
Ante videm s f lgorem q am son m a diam s,SEN.,N.Q.,ii.12,6; we see the
flash of lightning before hearing the so nd(we may never hear it).
B t compare LUCR.,vi.170.
In omnib s negotiis pri s q am aggrediare adhibenda est praeparatio dili
gens, C.,Off.,1.21,73; in all affairs,before addressing yo rself(to them),yo m
st make se of caref l preparation(Ideal Second Person).
[370 TEMPORAL SENTENCES.]
[Collem] celeriter pri sq am ab adversariis sentiat r comm nit, CAES.,B.
C.,1.54,4; He speedily fortified the hill before he was(too soon to be) perceive
d by the enemy(pri s q am =: pri s q am t).
Hannibal omnia pri sq am excederet p gna (erat) expert s,L.,xxx.35,4; Ha
nnibal had tried everything before withdrawing from the fight(= to avoid withdra
wing from the fight).
Saepe magna indoles virt tis pri sq am rei p blicae prodesse pot isset e
xstincta est,C.,Ph.,v.17,47; often hath great native worth been exting ished bef
ore it co ld be of service to the State.
D centis annis ante q am rbem Romam caperent in Italiam Galli transcend
er nt,L.,v.33,5; (it was) two h ndred years before their taking Rome(that) the G
a ls crossed into Italy(here the S bjv.gives the nat ral point of reference).
2.After an historical tense in the negative,the S bj nctive is exceptional.(576,
R.)
Inde non pri s egress s est q am(= ibi manebat d m) rex e m in fidem rec
iperet,NEP.,ii.8,4; he did not come o t ntil the king sho ld take him nder his
protection(he stayed to make the king take him nder his protection).See CAES.,
B.G.,vi.37,2; L.,XLV.ii,3.
NOTES.1.The Pr.S bjv.is common,b t is s ally generic; the few cases of Final S
bjv.are confined to early Latin.Very rarely the Hist.Pr.is fo nd after a Hist.Pr
esent See CAES.,B.C.,1.22.
2.The Pf .occ rs occasionally;it is s ally in a final sense.
Non pri s dimitt nt q am ab his sit concess m,CAES.,B.G.,iii.18.
3.In LIVY we find the Impf .S bjv. sed not nfreq ently,where the idea of s spen
se or design is very slight,m ch after the manner of c m - nond m(as C.,Ph.,v.i,
4).
4.The Pl pf.S bjv.is cited five times from CICERO and fo r times from LIVY.In th
ese passages the completion rather than the contin ance is in s spense.
5.Postridieq am is fo nd in PLAUTUS,CICERO(Letters),and SUETONIUS with the Indic
ative.In CICERO,Ac.,ii.3,9,with the S bj nctive.Pridieq am is fo nd in PLAUTUS a
nd CICERO with the Indicative;in LIVY,VAL.MAX.,and SUETONIUS with the S bj nctiv
e.Both are very rare.
6.When the will is involved,
poti s q am is sed in the same way as pri s q am.
Dep gna poti s q am servias,C.,Att.vii.7,7;fight it o t rather than be a
slave.
IV.CONSTRUCTIONS OF CUM(QUOM).
578.C m is a(locative) relative conj nction.
NOTE.Originally locative(where),q om became temporal(when) like nbi.When time is
not defined by a fixed date,it readily becomes circ mstance,and this circ mstan
ce is interpreted as ca se,condition,and the like.Compare the circ mstantial rel
ative itself.The first constr ction was with the Indicative as with any other me
rely relative cla se,and this is the sole constniction in earliest Latin.B t,beg
inning with TERENCE,we can observe the drift ever increasing in Latin towards th
e expression of .character by tendency(S bjv.) rather than by fact(Indic.),so th
at the relative of character takes more and more the S bj nctive,and c m follows
the lead of t and of the inflected relative prono n.
579.There are two great ses of c m :
I.Temporal c m(when,then),.with the Indicative.
[TEMPORAL SENTENCES.371]
II.Circ mstantial c m(as,whereas),with the S bj nctive.
In the second sage the relation is still p rely a matter of inference;b t accor
ding to this inferential connection we disting ish :
(a) Historical c m,as,giving the attendant circ mstances,mainly temporal, nder w
hich an action took place.
(b) Ca sal c m,as,whereas,since,indicating that the main action proceeded from t
he s bordinate one.
(c) Concessive c m,whereas,altho gh,indicating that the main action was accompli
shed in spite of that of the s bordinate cla se.
I. C m ver appetit,milites ex hibernis movent,when spring approaches,soldie
rs move o t of winter-q arters.
II.(a) C m ver appeteret,Hannibal ex hibernis movit,as spring was approaching(sp
ring approaching),Hannibal moved o t of winterq arters.
(b) C m ver appetat,ex hibernis movend m est,as(since) spring is approaching
,we m st move o t of winter-q arters.
(c) C m ver appeteret,tamen hosted ex hibernis non mover nt,whereas (altho g
h) spring was approaching,nevertheless the enemy did not move o t of winter-q ar
ters.
1 .Temporal C m.
580. C m,when,is sed with all the tenses of the Indicative to designate mere
ly temporal relations.
In the Principal cla se,a temporal adverb or temporal expression is freq ently e
mployed,s ch as
t m,t nc,then;
n nc,now;
dies,day;
temp s,time;
iam,already;
vix,scarcely,
and the like.
Anim s,nec c m adest nec c m discedit,apparet,C.,Cat.M.,22,80; the so l
is not visible,either when it is present,or when it departs.
Stomachor c m alior m non me digna in me confer nt r,C.,Planc.,14,35; I
get fretted when other people's jokes that are not worthy of me are foistedl押し付ÿるm on
[Sex libres de re p blica] t m scripsim s c m g bernac la rei p blicae t
enebam s, C.,Div.,ii.i,3; I wrote the six books abo t the State at the time when
I held the helm of the State.
Recordare temp s ill d c m pater C rio maerens iacebat in lecto, C.,Ph.,
ii.18,45; remember the time when C rio the father lay abed from grief.
Long m ill d temp s c m non ero magis me movet q am hoc exig m, C.,Att.
,xii.18,1; that long time(to come),when I shall not exist,has more effect on me
than this scant(present time).
[RELATIVE SENTENCES.393]
Ne sit s mm m mal m dolor,mal m certe est,C.,T sc.,ii.5,14;granted that
pain be not the chief evil,an evil it certainly is.
REMARKS.1.Ut non can be sed on the principle of the Specific Negative:
Hic dies ltim s est; t non sit,prope ab ltimo est,SEN.,E.M.,15,12;thi
s is yo r last day;granted that it be not,it is near the last.
2.Examples with past tenses are rare: C.,Mil.,17,46; L.,xxxviii.46,3,etc.
3.On ita- t,see 262;on t-ita,see 482,4.
609.Concessive Sentence represented by a Participle or Predicative Attrib te.--T
he Concessive sentence may be represented by a Participle or Predicative Attrib
te.
[Ris s] interd m ita repente er mpit, t e m c pientes tenere neq eam s,
Cf.C.,Or.,ii.58,235; la ghter between whiles(=occasionally) breaks o t so s dden
ly that we cannot keep it down,altho gh we desire to do so.
M ltor m te oc ll et a res nQn sentientem c stodient,C.,Cat.,1.2,6; (of)
many(the) eyes and ears will keep g ard over yo ,tho gh yo perceive it not(WIT
HOUT yo r perceiving it).
Q is Aristidem non mort nm diligit ? C.,Fin.,v.22,62; who does not love
Aristides,(tho gh) dead ?
NOTES.1.Q amq am,q amvis,and etsi are often combined with the participle.
This,however,is rare in classical Latin,b t becomes more common later.
(Caesar),q amq am obsidione Massiliae retardante,brevi tamen omnia s beg
it, SUET.,I l.,34.
2.With adjectives and adverbs this is m ch more common,so especially with
q amvis,which is sed with a positive as a circ mioc tion for the s perl
ative.With the s perlative q amvis is rare.
Etsi non iniq m,certe triste senat s cons lt m,L.,xxv.6,2.
C m omnia per pop l m ger nt r,q amvis i st m atq e moderat m tamen ipsa
aeq abilitas est iniq a,C.,Hep.,1.27,43.
RELATIVE SENTENCES.
610.The Latin lang age ses the relative constr ction far more than the English
: so in the beginning of sentences,and in combination with Conj nctions and othe
r Relatives.
REMARKS.1.The awkwardness,or impossibility,of a literal translation may generall
y be relieved by the s bstit tion of a demonstrative with an appropriate conj nc
tion,or the employment of an abstract no n :
Q ae c m ita sint,now since these things are so(Ciceronian form la).
F t ra modo exspectant;q ae q ia certa esse non poss nt,co fici nt r et
angore et met ,C.,Fin.,1.18,60; they only look forward to the f t re;and beca se
that cannot be certain,they wear themselves o t with distress and fear.
[394 RELATIVE SENTENCES.]
[Epic r s] non satis polit s iis artib s q as q i tenent,er diti appella
nt r,C:,Fin.,1.7,26; Epic r s is not s fficiently polished by those accomplishme
nts,from the possession of which people are called c ltivated.
2.Notice especially q od in combination with si and its compo nds bi,q ia,q oni
am, t(poetic and post-class.), tinam,ne, tinam ne,q i (rare),in which q od means
"and as for that",and is sometimes translated by and,b t,therefore,whereas,some
times not at all.
Q od ni f issem incogitans ita e m exspectarem t par f it, TER.,Ph.,155
;whereas,had I not been heedless,I sho ld be awaiting him,in proper mood.(自分N無思慮yáと‡
NOTES.1.The se of the Relative to connect two independent cla ses instead of a
demonstrative,is very rare in PLAUTUS,more common in TERENCE,b t f lly devel ope
d only in the classical period.
2.The Relative is the fertile so rce of many of the introd ctory particles of th
e compo nd sentence(q om,q ia,q oniam,compo nds of q am, t, bi,etc.),and is ther
efore treated last on acco nt of the m ltiplicity of its ses.
611.Relative sentences are introd ced by the Relative prono ns in all their form
s : adjective,s bstantive,and adverbial.(See Tables 109 foil.)
REMARKS.1.The Relative adverbs of Place,and their correlatives,may be sed inste
ad of a preposition with a Relative.
Unde,whence,is freq ently sed of persons,b t the others rarely;occasion
al examples are cited for bi and q o,the others less freq ently :
ibi = in eo,etc.;
bi = in q o,etc.;
inde = ex eo,etc.;
nde =ex q o,etc.;
eo = in e m,etc.;
q o = in q em,etc.
Potest fieri t is, nde te a disse dicis,irat s dixerit,C.,Or.,ii.70,285
; it may be that he,from whom yo say yo heard(it),said it in anger.
Q o(= q ib s) l beat n bant,d m dos ne fiat comes,PL.,A l.,491(573).
2.The Relative is not to be confo nded with the Dependent Interrogative sentence
(469,R.2).
Q ae probat pop l s ego nescio,SEN.,E.M.,29,10; the things that the peop
le approves,I do not know(q id probet,what it is the people approves}.
Et q id ego te velim,et t q od q aeris,scies,TER.,And.,536; yo shall k
now both what(it is) I want of yo ,and what(the thing which) yo are asking(= th
e answer to yo r qestion).
612.Position of Relatives.The Relative and Relative forms are p t at the beginni
ng of sentences and cla ses.The preposition,however,generally,tho gh not invaria
bly,precedes its Relative(413).
613.Antecedent.The word to which the Relative refers is called the Antecedent,be
ca se it precedes in tho ght even when it does not in expression.
[RELATIVE SENTENCES.395]
REMARK.The close connection between Relative and Antecedent is shown by the freq
ent se of one preposition in common(414,it.i).
CONCORD.
614.The Relative agrees with its Antecedent in Gender,N mber,and Person.
Is minimo eget mortalis,q i minim m c pit,SYRUS,286(Fr.)(308).
Uxor contenta est q ae bona est no viro,PL.,Merc.,812;a wife who is goo
d is contented with one h sband.
Mal m est consili m q od m tari non potest,SYRUS,362(Fr.); bad is the pl
an that cannot(let itself) be changed.
Hoc illis narro q i me non intelleg nt,PHAEDR.,3,128; I tell this tale f
or those who nderstand me not.
Ego q i te confinno,ipse me non poss m,C.,Fam.,xiv.4,5;I who reass re yo
,cannot reass re myself.
REMARKS.1.The Relative agrees with the Person of the tr e Antecedent,even when a
predicate intervenes;exceptions are very rare :
T es is,q i(me) s mmis la dib s ad cael m ext listi,C.,Fam.,xv.4,11;yo
are he that has(t) praised me to the skies.
The Latin r le is the English exception : Acts,xxi.38; L ke,xvi.15.
2.When the Relative refers to a sentence,
id q od,that which,is commonly sed(parenthetically).So also
q ae res,or simple'q od,and,if reference is made to a single s bstantive
,is
q i or some similar form.
Si a vobis id q od non spero deserar,tamen animo non deficiam,¥C.,Rose.Am.
,4,10; if I sho ld be deserted by yo (which I do not expect),nevertheless I sho
ld not become faint-hearted.
Nec a diend s [Theophrasti] a ditor,Strato,is q i physic s appellat r, C
.,N.D.,I.13,35.
3.The gender and n mber of the Relative may be determined :
(a) By the sense,and not by the form;that is,a collective no n may be followed b
y a Pl ral Relative,a ne ter n meral by a masc line Relative,a possessive prono
n by a Relative in the person indicated by the possessive,etc.
Caesa s nt ad sex milia q i Pydnam perf gerant,L.,XLIV.42,7;there were s
lain p to six tho sand who had fled to Pydna.
Eq itat m omnem praemittit,q i videant,CAES.,B.G.,1.15;he sent all the c
avalry ahead,who sho ld see(that they might see,to see).
(b) By the predicate or the apposition,and not by the antecedent; so especially
when the Relative is combined with the cop la or with a cop lative verb.
Thebae,q od Boeotiae cap t est,L.,XLII.44,3; Thebes,which is the capital
of Boeotia.
Fl men Scaldis,q od infl it in Mosam,CAES.,B.G.,vi.33,3;the river Scheld
t,which empties into the Maas.
[396 RELATIVE SENTENCES.]
I sta gloria,q i est fr ct s virt tis,C.,Pis.,24,57;real glory,which is
the fr it: of virt e.
Exceptions are not nfreq ent,especially when the predicative s bstantive in the
Relative cla se is a foreign word or a proper name.
Stellae q as Graeci cometas vocant,C.,N.D.,ii.5,14; the stars which the
Greeks call comets.
Est gen s q oddam homin m q od Helotae vocat r,NEP.,iv.3,6;there is a ce
rtain class of men called Helots.
4.The pronominal apposition may be taken p into the Relative and disappear :
Testar m s ffragiis q od illi ostracism m vocant,NEP.,v.3,1; by potsherd
(陶器のåÿら)votes(a,thing) which they call " ostracism."
5.When the Relative refers to the combined antecedents of different gender,the s
trongest gender is preferred,according to 282 :
Grandes nat matres et parvi liberi,q or m tr mq e aetas misericordiam
vestram req irit,C.,Verr.,v.49,129; aged matrons and infant children,whose age o
n either hand demands yo r compassion.
Oti m ateq e divitiae,q ae prima mortales p tant,S.,C.,36,4;leis re and
money,which mortals reckon as the prime things.
Or,the nearest gender may be preferred :
Eae fr ges atq e fr ct s q os terra gignit,C.,N.D.,ii.14,37;those fr its
of field and tree which earth bears.
6.Combined Persons follow the r le,287.
NOTE.A noteworthy pec liarity is fo nd in early Latin,where a generic Relative s
entence with q i is made the s bject of an abstract s bstantive with est,and rep
resented by a demonstrative in agreement with that s bstantive.
istaec virt s est,q ando s st,q i mal m fert fortiter,PL.,Asin.,323; th
at's manhood who(if one) bears evil bravely,when there's need.
The parallel Greek constr ction s ggests Greek infl ence.
615.Repetition of the Antecedent.The Antecedent of the Relative is not seldom re
peated in the Relative cla se,with the Relative as its attrib tive.
(Caesar) intellexit diem instare,q o die fr ment m militib s metiri opor
teret,CAES.,B.G.,1.16,5;Caesar saw that the day was at hand,on which day it beho
oved to meas re corn(corn was to be meas red o t) to the soldiers.
NOTE.This sage belongs to the formal style of government and law.CAESAR is very
fond of it,especially with the word dies.It is occasional in PLAUTUS and TERENC
E,and not ncommon in CICERO;b t after CICERO it fades o t,being fo nd b t rarel
y in LIVY,and only here and there later.
616.Incorporation of the Antecedent.1.The Antecedent s bstantive is often incorp
orated into the Relative
[RELATIVE SENTENCES.397]
cla se;sometimes there is a demonstrative antecedent,sometimes not.
In q em prim m egressi s nt loc m Troia vocat r,L.,I.I,3; the first plac
e they landed at was called Troy.
Q am q isq e norit artem,in hac se exerceat,[C.],T sc.,1.18,41; what tra
de each man is master of,(in) that let him practise(himself),that let him ply.
NOTES.1.Incorporation,while m ch less freq ent than Repetition,is still not nfr
eq ently met with in LIVY;after EIVY it decays.No examples are cited from SALLUS
T with a demonstrative antecedent,and b t one from CAESAR.No example is cited fr
om CAESAR witho t a demonstrative antecedent.
2.Instead of a principal cla se,followed by a consec tive cla se,the str ct re i
s sometimes reversed.What wo ld have been the dependent cla se becomes the princ
ipal cla se,and an incorporated explanatory Relative takes the place of the demo
nstrative.This is confined to certain s bstantives,and is fo nd a n mber of time
s in CICERO,b t rarely elsewhere(SALL.,HOR.,LIVY,OVID,SEN.,TAC.,PLINY MIN.).
Q a enim pr dentia es,nihil te f giet(-ea pr dentia es, t nihil te f gia
t), C.,Fam.,xi.13,1.
Velis tant mmodo;q ae t a virt s(est),exp gnabis,H.,S,1.9,54.
2.An appositional s bstantive,from which a Relative cla se depends,is reg larly
incorporated into the Relative cla se.
[Aman s] Syriam a Cilicia dividit,q i mons erat hosti m plen s, C.,Att.,
v.20,3;Syria is divided from Cilicia by Aman s,a mo ntain which was f ll of enem
ies.
NOTE.This sage is fo nd first in CICERO.The normal English position is fo nd fi
rst in LIVY,b t it becomes more common in later Latin.
Prisc s,vir c i s providentiam in re p blica ante experta civitas erat,
L.,iv.46,10.
3.Adjectives,especially s perlatives,are sometimes transferred from the s bstant
ive in the principal cla se and made to agree with the Relative in the Relative
cla se.
[Themistocles] de servis s is q em hab it fidelissim m ad regem misit, N
EP.,ii.4,3; Themistocles sent the most faithf l slave he had to the king.
Nemini credo,q i large bland st dives pa peri,PL.,A l.,196; I tr st no r
ich man who is lavishly kind to a poor man.
617.Attraction of the Relative.The Acc sative of the Relative is occasionally at
tracted into the Ablative of the antecedent,rarely into any other case.
Hoc confirmam s illo a g rio q o dixim s,C.,Att.,x.8,7; we confirm this
by the a g ry which we mentioned.
NOTES.1.This attraction takes place chiefly when the verb of the Relative cla se
m st be s pplied from the principal sentence;that is,with a xiliary verbs like
velle,solere,i bere;and after verbs of Saying a d the like.
[398 RELATIVE SENTENCES.]
It is rare in early Latin,b t common from CICERO on.
Q ib s poterat sa ciis d ctis sec m ad rbem pergit,L.,iv.39,9;havng tak
en with him all the wo nded he co ld,he proceeded to the city.
2.Inverted Attraction.So-called Inverted Attraction is fo nd only in poetry,and
then s ally in the Acc.,which may be considered as an object of tho ght or feel
ing.
This Acc.stands s ally for a Nom.,sometimes,b t only in Comedy,for the Gen.Dat.
or Abl.A strange sage is the Nom.where the Acc.wo ld be expected.This may be no
minativ s pendens,a form of anacol thon(697),and is fo nd only in early Latin.
Urbem q am stat o,vestra est,V.,A .,1.573;(as for) the city which I am r
earing,(it) is yo rs.
Ist m q em q aeris,ego s m,PL.,C rc.,419;(as for) that man whom yo are
looking for,I am he.
Ille q i mandavit,e m ext rbasti ex aedib s ? PL.,Trin.,137.(預ÿ¤人‡君は家åら追a
(" He that hath ears to hear,let him hear." Matthew 11:15)
618.Correlative Use of the Relative.The s al Correlative of q i is is,more rare
ly hic,ille.
Is minimo eget mortalis,q i minim m c pit,SYRUS,286(Fr.)(308).
Hic sapiens,de q o loq or,C.,Ac.,ii.33,105(305,3).
Illa dies veniet,mea q a l g bria ponam,Ov.,Tr.,iv.2,73(307,4).
619.Absorption of the Correlative.The Correlative
is,
is often absorbed,especially when it wo ld stand in the same case as the Relativ
e.This is a kind of Incorporation.
Post me,non bene olet,q i bene semper olet,MART.,ii.12,4; Post m s,(he)
smells not sweet,who always smells sweet.
Q em arma non fregerant vitia vicer nt,CURT.,vi.2,1;(him) whom arms had
not cr shed did vices overcome.
Q em di dilig nt ad lescens morit r,PL.,B.,816; (he) whom the gods love
dies yo ng.
Xerxes praemi m propos it q i [= ei q i] invenisset novam vol ptatem, C.
,T sc.,v.7,20; Xerxes offered a reward to him who sho ld invent a new pleas re.
Miseranda vita q i [= eor m q i] se met i q am amari mal nt,NEP.,x.9,5;
pitiable is the life of those who wo ld prefer being feared to being loved.
Discite sanari per q em [= per e m,per q em] didicistis amare, Ov.,Mem.A
m.,43(401).
Diffic lt and rare are cases like :
N nc redeo ad q ae(for ad ea q ae) mihi mandas,C.,Att.,v.ii,6.
620.Position of the Correlative cla se.The Relative cla se nat rally follows its
Correlative,b t it often precedes; incorporation also is common.
Male se res habet c m q od virt te effici debet id temptat r pec nia, C.
,Off.,ii.6,22;it is a bad state of affairs when what o ght to be accomplished by
worth,is attempted by money.
Q od vides accidere p eris hoc nobis q oq e mai sc lis p eris evenit, SE
N.,E.M.,24,13; what yo see befall children (this) happens to s also,children o
f a larger growth.
Q am q isq e norit artem,in hac se exerceat,[C.],T sc.,1.18,41(616,i).
[RELATIVE SENTENCES.399]
The Correlative absorbed :
Q od non dedit fort na,non eripit,SEN.,E.M.,59,18; what fort ne has not
given(does not give),she does not take away.
Per q as nos petitis saepe f gatis opes,Qv.,A.A.,iii.132; the means yo
take to win s often scare s off.
621.Indefinite Antecedent.The Indefinite Antecedent is generally omitted.
Elige c i dicas : t mihi sola places,Ov.,A.A.,1.42; choose someone to w
hom yo may say : Yo alone please me.
REMARK.S ch sentences are sometimes hardly to be disting ished from the Interrog
ative:
[Conon] non q aesivit bi ipse t to viveret,NEP.,ix.2,1;Conon did not se
ek a place to live in safety himself,
might be either Relative or Deliberative(265).
TENSES IN RELATIVE SENTENCES.
622.F t re and F t re Perfect.--The F t re and F t re Perfect are sed with grea
ter exactness than in c rrent English(242,244).
Sit liber,domin s q i volet esse me s,MART.,ii.32,8; he m st be free who
wishes(shall wish) to be my master.
Q i prior strinxerit ferr m,ei s victoria erit,Liv.(244,R.2).
623.Iterative Action.Relative sentences follow the laws laid down for Iterative
action(566,567).
I.Contemporaneo s action :
Ore trahit q odc mq e potest,atq e addit acervo,H.,S.,I.I,34; drags with
its mo th whatever it can,and adds to the treas re(heap).
Q ac mq e incedebat agmen,legati occ rrebant,L.,xxxiv.16,6; in whatever
direction the col mn advanced,ambassadors came to meet them.
II.Prior action :
[Terra] n mq am sine s ra reddit,q od accepit,C.,Cat.N.,15,51;the earth
never ret rns witho t interest what it has received(receives).
Q od non dedit fort na,non eripit,SEN.,E.M.,59,18(620).
Non cenat q otiens nemo vocavit e m,MART.,v.47,2; he does not dine as of
ten as(when) no one has invited(invites) him.
Haerebant in memoria q aec mq e a dierat et viderat [Themistocles], C.,A
c.,ii.i,2(567).
Seq ent r te q oc mq e perveneris vitia,SEN.,JS.M.,28,1; vices will foll
ow yo whithersoever yo go.
Q i timere desierint,odisse incipient,TAC.,Agr.,32(567).
REMARK.On the S bjv.m Iterative Sentences,see 567,N.
[400 RELATIVE SENTENCES.]
MOODS IN RELATIVE SENTENCES.
624.The Relative cla se,as s ch that is,as the representative of an adjective ta
kes the Indicative mood.
Uxor q ae bona est,PL.,Merc.,812;a wife who is good(a good wife).
REMARK.The Relative in this se often serves as a circ mioc tion for a s bstanti
ve,with this difference : that the s bstantive expresses a permanent relation;th
e Relative cla se,a transient relation : ii q i docent = those who teach = the t
eachers(inasm ch as they are exercising the f nctions).On the Relative with S bj
v.after an adj.cla se,see 438,R.
625.Indefinite and Generic Relatives.
1. Q ic mq e,q isq is,and the like,being essentially Iterative Relatives,ta
ke the Indicative according to the principles of Iterative action(254,R.4).
So also simple Relatives when similarly sed.
Q ac mq e incedebat agmen,legati occ rrebant,Liv.,xxxiv.16,6(62.3).
REMARK.According to 567,N.,the S bjv.is sed :
(1) In Oratio Obliq a(Total or Partial) :
Marti Galli q ae bello ceperint(Pf.S bjv.) devovent(= se dat ras vovent)
,Cf.CAES.,B.G.,vi.17,3; the Ga ls devote(promise to give) to Mars whatever they(
shall) take in war(6.B.,Q ae ceperim s,dabim s).
(2) By Attraction of Mood(Complementary Cla ses) :
Q is e m diligat q em met at ? C.,Lael.,15,53(629).
(3) In the Ideal Second Person :
Bon s segnior fit bi neglegas,S.,I g.,31,28(566).
(4) By the spread of the S bjv.in post-classical Latin :
Q i n m ei s ordinis offendisset omnes adversos habebat,L.,xxxm 46,1(567).
2.Q i = si q is,if any,has the Indicative when the Condition is Logical.
[Terra] n mq am sine s ra reddit,q od accepit,C.,Cat.M.,15,51 (623).(Si
q id accepit.)
Q i mori didicit,servire dedidicit,SEN.,E.M.,26,10(423).
REMARK.When the Condition is Ideal,the S bjv.is necessary(596).In post-classical
Latin the S bjv.is the r le with all conditionals.
626.Explanatory Relative.Q i,with the Indicative (= is enim,for he),often approa
ches q od,in that.
Habeo senect ti magnam gratiam,q ae mihi sermonis aviditatem a xit, C.,C
at.M.,14,46; I am very thankf l to old age,which(for it,in that it) has increase
d me(= in me) the appetite for talk.
[RELATIVE SENTENCES.401]
REMARK.Q i with the S bjv.gives a gro nd,= c m is(586);q i with the Indic.,a fac
t;and in many passages the ca sal sense seems to be inevitable:
Insanit hic q idem,q i ipse male dicit sibi,PL.,Men.,309; cracked is thi
s man,who calls( for calling) down c rses on himself.
Erraverim fortasse q i me aliq id p tavi,PLIN.,Ep.,1.23,2; I may have er
red in thinking myself to be something.
NOTES.1.This ca sal sense is heightened by
t, tpote,as;
q ippe,namely.
t q i is rare in early Latin,CAESAR,and CICERO,and is not fo nd at all
in TERENCE and SALLUST.LIVY,however,is fond of it.The mood is everywhere the S b
j nctive.
Utpote is fo nd only here and there in Latin,and not at all in TERENCE,C
AESAR,LIVY;b t once in PLAUTUS.The mood is the S bjv. ntil late Latin.
Q ippe q i is the most common of the three,b t does not occ r in CAESAR.
In early Latin the mood is the Indic.(except PL.,Pers.,699);also in SALLUST.CICE
RO ses the S bjv.; LIVY ses both moods;later the S bjv.is the r le ntil the t
ime of APULEIUS.
2.Simple Explanatory q i has the Indic.most commonly in early Latin,and in gener
al developes on the same line that c m.follows.
627.The S bj nctive is employed in Relative cla ses when it wo ld be sed in a s
imple sentence.
POTENTIAL: Habeo q ae velim,C.,Fin.,1.8,28; I have what I sho ld like.
OPTATIVE: Q od fa st m sit,regem create,L.,1.17,10; blessing be on yo r
choice,make ye a king.
REMARKS.1.Especially to be noted is the S bjv.in restrictive phrases.Here the Re
lative often takes q idem,sometimes modo.
The early Latin shows only
q od sciam(as if d m aliq id sciam),so far as I may be permitted to know
anything abo t it(= q ant m scio,as far as I know,for all I know),which is sed
thro gho t the lang age,and
q od q idem veniat in mentem(PL.,Ep.,638).CICERO,however,shows a great v
ariety.
Q ant m sciam is fo nd first in QUINTILIAN.
Omni m orator m q os q idem cognoverim ac tissim m i dico Sertori m, C.,
Br.,48,180;of all orators,so far as I know them,I consider Sertori s the most ac
te.
N ll m ornat m q i modo non obsc ret s btrahend m p to,QUINT.,v.14,33;I
think no ornament is to be withdrawn,provided that it do not ca se obsc rity.
2.Restrictions involving
esse,posse,attinet,
are reg larly in the Indicative.CICERO and CAESAR,however,show a very few cases
of the S bjv.,especially with possis.
Prodidisti et te et illam,q od q idem in te f it,TER.,Ad.,692; yo have
betrayed both her and yo rself,so far as in yo lay.
Ego q od ad me attinet,i dices,vici,C.,Verr.,II.1.8,21;I,j dges,so far a
s pertains to me,have conq ered,
[402 RELATIVE SENTENCES.]
628.The S bj nctive is sed in Relative cla ses which form a part of the tteran
ce or the view of another than the narrator,or of the narrator himself when indi
rectly q oted (539,R.).So especially in Oratio Obliq a and Final Sentences.
Recte Graeci praecipi nt,non temptanda q ae effici non possint, QUINT.,i
v.5,17; right are the Greeks in teaching that those things are not to be attempt
ed which cannot be accomplished.
Ap d Hypanim fl vi m Aristoteles ait,bestiolas q asdam nasci q ae n m d
iem vivant,C.,T sc.,1.39,94(650).
Virt s facit t eos diligam s in q ib s ipsa inesse videat r,C.,Off.,1.1
7,56; virt e makes s love those in whom she seems to reside.
Post lat r ab hominib s t ab iis se abstineant maxime vitiis,in q ib s
alter m reprehenderint,C.,Verr.,iii.2,4;it is demanded of men that they refrain
from those fa lts most of all as to which they have blamed another.
Senat s cens it ti q ic mq e Galliam provinciam obtineret,Haed os defen
deret,CAES.,B.G.,1.35; the senate decreed that whoever obtained Ga l as his prov
ince sho ld defend the Haed i.
Paet s omnes libros q os frater s s reliq isset mihi donavit, C.,Att.,i
i.i,12;(this is Paet s'statement; otherwise: q os frater ei s(521) reliq it;comp
are C.,Att.,I.20,7).
Xerxes praemi m propos it q i [= ei q i] invenisset novam vol ptatem, C.
,T sc.,v.7,20(619).
REMARK.Even in Oratio Obliq a the Indic.is retained :
(a) In explanations of the narrator :
N ntiat r Afranio magnos commeat s q i iter habebant ad Caesarem ad fl m
en constitisse,CAES.,B.C.,1.51,1; it is(was) anno nced to Afrani s that large s
pplies of provisions(which were on their way to Caesar) had halted at the river.
In the historians this sometimes occ rs where the Relative cla se is an integral
part of the sentence,especially in the Impf.and Pl perfect; partly for clearnes
s,partly for liveliness.For shifting Indic.and S bjv.,see L.,xxvi.1.
(b) In mere circ mloc tions :
Q is neget haec omnia q ae videm s deor m potestate administrari? Cf.C.,
Cat.,iii.q,21; who wo ld deny that this whole visible world is managed by the po
wer of the gods ?
Providend m est ne q ae dic nt r ab eo q i dicit dissentiant,QUINT.,iii.
8,48; we m st see to it that the speech be not o t of keeping with the speaker.
629.Relative sentences which depend on Infinitives and S bj nctives,and form an
integral part of the tho ght,are p t in the S bj nctive(Attraction of Mood).
Pigri est ingenii content m esse iis q ae sint ab aliis inventa, QUINT.
,x.2,4; it is the mark of a slow geni s to be content with what has been fo nd o
t by others.
[RELATIVE SENTENCES.403]
Q is a t e m diligat q em met at a t e m a q o se met i p tet? G.,Lael.,
15,53; who co ld love a man whom he fears,or by whom he deems himself feared ?
Nam q od emas possis i re vocare t m,MART.,ii.20,2; for what yo b y yo
may rightly call yo r own.
Ab alio exspectes alteri q od feceris,SYRUS,2(Pr.)(319).
In virt te s nt m lti ascens s, t is gloria maxime excellat,q i virt te
pl rim m praestet,C.,Plane.,25,60(552).
Si solos eos diceres miseros q ib s moriend m esset,neminem eor m q i vi
verent exciperes;moriend m est enim omnib s,C.,T sc.,1.5,9; if yo called only t
hose wretched who had(have) to die,yo wo ld except none who lived(live);for all
have to die.REMARK.The Indic.is sed :
(a) In mere circ mioc tions;so,often in Consec tive Sentences :
Necesse est facere s mpt m q i q aerit l cr m,PL.,As.,218(535).
Efficit r ab oratore, t ii q i a di nt ita adficiant r t orator velit,
Cf.C.,Br.,49,185; it is bro ght abo t by the orator that those who hear him ( hi
s a ditors) are affected as he wishes(them to be}.
(b) Of individ al facts :
Et q od vides perisse perdit m d cas,CAT.,viii.2;and what yo see (defin
ite thing,definite person) is lost for aye(永久に),for aye deem lost.(Q od videas,anybody
,anything.)
630.Relative Sentences of Design.Optative Relative sentences are p t in the S bj
nctive of Design,when q i = t is.
S nt m lti q i eripi nt aliis q od aliis largiant r,C.,Off.,1.14,43; man
y are they who snatch from some to lavish on others.
[Senex] serit arbores,q ae alteri saeclo prosint, CAECILIUS (C.,T sc.,1.
14,31)(545).
Semper habe Pyladen aliq em q i c ret Orestem,Ov.,Rem.Am.,589(545).
[Magnesiam Themistocli Artaxerxes] rbem donarat,q ae ei panem praeberet
, NEP.,ii.10,3(545).
NOTES.1.The basis of this constr ction is the characteristic S bjv.,and the conc
eption seems Potential rather than Optative;b t in many cases the characteristic
force is no longer felt.
2.After mittere there are a few cases where the Impf .Indic.is sed with m ch th
e same force as the Impf.S bjv.,b t the p rpose is merely inferential from the c
ontin ance in the tense.
Inmittebant r illi canes,q i investigabant omnia,C.,Verr.,iv.21,47.
3.By attraction similar to that with
q od(541,N.3) and q om(585,N.3),the Relative is sometimes fo nd with an
Inf.and
diceret,where the S bjv.of the verb in the Inf.,or the Indic.with a pare
nthetical
t dixit,is to be expected.
Litteras q as me sibi misisse diceret (=misisset,or miserat, t dixit) re
citavit,C.,Ph.,ii.4,7.
631.Relative Sentences of Tendency.Potential Relative sentences are p t in the S
bj nctive of Tendency,when q i= t is.
[404 RELATIVE SENTENCES.]
The notion is generally that of Character and Adaptation,and we disting ish thre
e varieties :
1.With a definite antecedent,when the character is emphasised;reg larly after
idone s,s itable;
apt s,fit;
dign s,worthy ;
indign s, nworthy;
after
is,talis,ei smodi,tam,tant s,
and the like;
after
n s and sol s.
Est innocentia adfectio talis animi,q ae noceat nemini, C.,T sc.,iii.8,1
6;harmlessness(innocence) is that state of mind that does harm to no one(is inno
c o s to any one).
Ille ego sim c i s laniet f riosa capillos,Ov.,A.A.,ii.451;may I be the
man whose hair she tears in her seasons of freny.
Sol s es,C.Caesar,c i s in victoria ceciderit nemo,C.,Dei.,12,34; tho a
rt the only one,Caesar,in whose victory no one has fallen.
Q em mea Calliope laeserit n s ego,Ov.,Tr.,ii.568; I am the only one th
at my Calliope(= my M se) has h rt.
(Academici) mentem solam censebant idoneam c i crederet r,C.,Ac.,1.8,30;
the Academics held that the mind alone was fit to be believed(tr stworthy).
REMARKS.1.Ut is not nfreq ently fo nd instead of q i after the correlatives.
2.Idone s,dign s,etc.,take also t,and the Infinitive(552,R.2).
2.With an indefinite antecedent;so especially after negatives of all kinds,and t
heir eq ivalents,and in combinations of
m lti,q idam,alii,nonn lli,etc.,with est,s nt,exsistit,etc.
Est q i,s nt q i,there is,there are some who;
nemo est q i,there is none to;
nihil est q od,there is nothing;
habeo q od,I have to;
reperi nt r q i,persons are fo nd who(to) ...;
q is est q i ? who is there who(to) ....?
est c r,there is reason for,
etc.So,also,
f it c m,there was a time when(580,R.i).
S nt q i discess m animi a corpore p tent esse mortem,C.,T sc.t 1.9,18;t
here are some who(to) think that death is the depart re of the so l from the bod
y.
F it q i s aderet appellationem mensis A g sti in Septembrem transferend
am, SUET.,A g.,100;there was a man who rged ( to rge) that the name of the mon
th(of) A g st sho ld be transferred to September.
M lti f er nt q i tranq illitatem expetentes a negotiis p blicis se remo
verint, C.,Off.,1.20,69; there have been many who,in the search for q iet,have w
ithdrawn themselves from p blic engagements.
Omnino nemo lli s rei f it emptor c i def erit hic venditor, C.,Ph.,ii.
38,97(317,i).
Post mortem in morte nihil est q od met am mali,PL.,Capt.,741; after dea
th there is no ill in death for me to dread.
Nec mea q i digitis l mina condat erit,Ov.,Her.,10,120;and there will be
no one to close mine eyes with his fingers.
[RELATIVE SENTENCES.405]
Miserrim s est q i q om esse c pit q od edit(172,N.) non habet,PL.,Capt.
,463; he is a poor wretch who,when he wants to eat,has not anything to eat("non
habet q id edat" wo ld mean "does not know what to eat").
Q ot s est q isq e q i somniis pareat,C.,Div.,ii.60,125;(how many men in
the world),the fewest men in the world obey dreams.
REMARKS.1.The Indic.may be sed in the statements of definite facts,and not of g
eneral characteristics :
M lti s nt q i eripiant, M lti s nt q i eripi nt,
There are many to snatch away. Many are they who snatch away.
Of co rse this happens only after affirmative sentences.The poets se the Indic.
more freely than prose writers :
S nt-q i(= q idam)q od senti nt non a dent(so MSS.) dicere, C.,Off.,1.24
,84;some dare not say what they think.
S nt-q ib s ingrate timida ind lgentia servit,Ov.,A.A.,ii.435;to some tr
embling ind lgence plays the slave all thanklessly.
S nt q i(indefinite) non habeant,est-q i(definite) non c rat habere,H.,E
p.,ii.2,182.
2.When a definite predicate is negatived,the Indic.may stand on acco nt of the d
efinite statement,the S bj v.on acco nt of the negative :
A.Nihil bon m est q od non e m q i id possidet meliorem facit;or,
B.Nihil bon m est q od non e m q i id possideat meliorem faciat.
A.Nothing that does not make its owner better is good.
B.There is nothing good that does not make its owner better.
3.After comparatives with q am as an object cla se.
Maiora in defectione deliq erant,q am q ib s ignosci posset,L.,xxvi.12,6
;(in that revolt) they had been g ilty of greater crimes than co ld be forgiven(
had sinned past forgiveness).
Non longi s hostes aberant,q am q o tel m adici posset,CAES.,B.G.,ii.21,
3; the enemy were not more than ajaveliris throw distant.
REMARKS.1.Classical Latin prefers t after comparatives.
2.Instead of q am t,
q am is
not nfreq ently fo nd alone,especially after
poti s,
b t also after
ampli s,celeri s,etc.;
in which case the constr ction resembles that of anteq am.
4.Parallel with a descriptive adjective with which it is connected by et or sed.
Exierant(d o) ad lescentes et Dr si maxime familiares,et in q ib s magna
m spem maiores collocarent,C.,Or.,1.7,25;two yo ng men had come o t(who were) in
timates of Dr s s and in whom their elders were p tting great hopes.
632.Q in in Sentences of Character.
After negative cla ses, s ally with a demonstrative
tam,ita,etc.,
q in is often sed(556) where we might expect
q i non,and sometimes where we sho ld expect
q ae non,or q od non.
[406 RELATIVE SENTENCES.]
S nt certa vitia q ae nemo est q in eff gere c piat,C.,Or.,iii.ii,41; th
ere are certain fa lts which there is no one b t(= everybody) desires to escape.
Nil tam difficile est q in q aerendo investigari possiet(= possit),TER.,
Hea t.,675(552).
REMARK.That q in was felt not as q i non,b t rather as t non,is shown by the fa
ct that the demonstrative may be expressed :
Non c m q oq am arma cont li q in is mihi s cc b erit,NEP.,xviii.ii,5; I
have never meas red swords with(戦þ) any one that he has not(b t he has) s cc mbed t
o me.私は自分N戦っ¤相手‡全員破っ¤
633.Relative in a Ca sal Sense.When q i = c m is,as he,the S bj nctive is employ
ed.(See 586,R.1.)
The particles
t, tpote,q ippe,as,are often sed in conj nction with the Relative;for
their range,see 626,N.1.
(Canini s) f it mirifica vigilantia q i s o toto cons lat somn m non vi
derit,C.,Fam.,vii.30,1;Canini s has shown marvello s watchf lness,not to have se
en(= taken a wink of) sleep in his whole cons lship.
O fort nate ad lescens,q i t ae virt tis Homer m praeconem inveneris ! C
.,Arch.,10,24; l cky yo th ! to have fo nd a crier(= tr mpeter) of yo r valor(in
) Homer !
Maior gloria in Scipione,Q inctii recentior t q i eo anno tri mphasset,
L.,xxsv.10,5; Scipio's glory was greater,Q incti s' was fresher,as(was to be ex
pected in) a man who(inasm ch as he) had tri mphed in that year.
REMARK.On the se of the Indic.after q ippe,etc.,see 626,N.1.On the seq ence of
tenses,see 513,N.3.
634.Relative in a Concessive or Adversative Sense.Q i is sometimes sed as eq iv
alent to c m is in a Concessive or Adversative Sense.
Ego q i leviter Graecas litteras attigissem,tamen c m venissem Athenas c
ompl res ibi dies s m commorat s,C.,Or.,1.18,82; altho gh I had dabbled(ÿょっとやる) b t sli
in Greek,nevertheless,having come to Athens,I stayed there several days.
NOTE.The Indic.is the r le for this constr ction in early Latin(580,N.1).
635.Relative and Infinitive.The Acc sative and Infinitive may be sed in Oratio
Obliq a after a Relative,when the Relative is to be resolved into a Coordinating
Conj nction and the Demonstrative.
(Philosophi censent) n m q emq e nostr m m ndi esse partem,ex q o ill d
nat ra co seq i t comm nem tilitatem nostrae anteponam s,C.,Fin.,iii.19,64; p
hilosophers hold that every one of s is a part of the niverse,and that the nat
ral conseq ence of this is for s to prefer the common welfare to o r own.
[RELATIVE SENTENCES.407]
NOTES.1.This sage is not cited earlier than CICERO,and seems to be fo nd princi
pally there,with sporadic examples from other a thors.
2.Occasional examples are also fo nd of the Inf.after
etsi(LIVY),
q amq am (TAC.),in the sense and yet;
c m interim(LIVY),
q ia(SEN.),
nisi(TAC.),
si non (LIVY);
and after q em admod m,
t(Cic.,LIVY,TAC.),in comparative sentences.
636.Combination of Relative Sentences.Relative Sentences are combined by means o
f Cop lative Conj nctions only when they are act ally coordinate.
When the second Relative wo ld stand in the same case as the first,it is commonl
y omitted(a).
When it wo ld stand in a different case(b),the Demonstrative is often s bstit te
d(c);or,if the case be the Nominative(d) or Acc sative(e),the Relative may be om
itted altogether.
(a) D mnorix q i principat m obtinebat ac plebi accept s erat(CAES.,B.G.,1-3,5),
D mnorix,who field the chieftaincy,and(who) was acceptable to the commons;
(b) D mnorix q i principat m obtinebat c iq e plebs favebat,
D mnorix,who held the chieftaincy,and whom(he commons favo red;
(c) D mnorix q i principat m obtinebat eiq e plebs favebat,
D mnorix,who held the chieftaincy,and whom the commons favo red;
(d) D mnorix q em plebs diligebat et principat m obtinebat,
D mnorix,whom the commons loved,and(who) held the chieftaincy;
(e) D mnorix q i principat m obtinebat et plebs diligebat,
D mnorix,who held the chieftaincy,and(whom) the commons loved.
Examples :(a) CAES.,B.G.,iv.34,4;(b) C.,Lael.,23,87;T sc.,1.30,72;(c) C.,Br.,74,
258;T sc.,v.13,38;(e) C.,Off.,ii.6,21;L.,x.29,3;(d) S.,I g.,101,5;TKR.,Ad.,85.
NOTES.1.The insertion of a demonstrative is almost confined to early Latin,LUCRE
TIUS,and CICERO.CAESAR and SALLUST have no examples,and LIVY very few.On the oth
er hand,the se of a relative by e gma(690) in connection with two or more verb
s governing different cases is fo nd at all periods.
2.(a) The Relative is not combined with adversative or illative conj nctions(b t
who,who therefore) except at the beginning of a sentence,when it represents a f
ollowing demonstrative or anticipates it(620).
Q i fortis est,idem fidens est;q i a tem fidens est,is non extimescit C.
,T sc.,iii.7,14;he who is brave is confident,b t he who is confident is not afra
id.
(b) Sed q i,q i tamen,can be sed in antithesis to adjectives.
Sophron mimor m q idem scriptor sed q em Plato probavit, QUINT.,1.10,17;
Sophron,a writer of mimes,''tis tr e,b t(one) that Plato approved.
(c) Q i tamen may be added to explain a foregoing statement.
Ca sam tibi expos im s Ephesi,q am t tamen coram facili s cognosces, C.
,Fam.,xiii.55,1.
3.Two or more Relative cla ses may be connected with the same antecedent when th
e one serves to complete the idea of the principal cla se,the other to modify it
:
[408 COMPARATIVE SENTENCES.]
Illa vis q ae investigat occ lta,q ae inventio dicit r,C.,T sc.,1.25,61;
the fac lty that tracks o t hidden things,which is called(the fac lty of) resea
rch.
4.The Relative is often repeated by anaphora(682) for stylistic reasons.Compare
C.,T sc.,1.25,62;Plane.,33,81;L.,xxni.14,3.
637.Relative Sentence represented by a Participle.The Relative sentence is somet
imes represented by a Participle,b t generally the Participle expresses a closer
connection than the mere explanatory Relative.
Onmes ali d agentes,ali d sim lantes perfidi(s nt),C.,Off.,iii.14,60; al
l who are driving at one thing and pretending another are treachero s.
[Pisistrat s] Homeri libros conf sos antea sic dispos isse dicit r at n
nc habem s,C.,Or.,iii.34,137; Pisistrat s is said to have arranged the books of
Homer,which were(whereas they were) in conf sion before,as we have them now.
COMPARATIVE SENTENCES.
638.A pec liar phase of the Relative sentence is the Comparative,which is introd
ced in English by as or than,in Latin by a great variety of relative forms :
(a) By correlatives;(b) by atq e or ac;(c) by q am.
639.Moods in Comparative Sentences.The mood of the Dependent cla se is the Indic
ative, nless the S bj nctive is req ired by the laws of obliq e relation,or by t
he conditional idea(602).
REMARK.On poti s q am with the S bjv.,see below,644,R.3.
640.The dependent cla se often borrows its verb from the leading cla se.Compare
602.
Ignoratio f t ror m malor m tilior est q am scientia,C.,Div.,ii.9,23(29
6).
Servi morib s isdem erant q ib s domin s,Cf.C.,Verr.,iii.25,62;the serva
nts had the same character as the master.
641.When the dependent cla se(or standard of comparison) borrows its verb from t
he leading cla se,the dependent cla se is treated as a part of the leading cla s
e;and if the first or leading cla se stands in the Acc sative with the Infinitiv
e,the second or dependent cla se m st have the Acc sative likewise.
Ita sentio Latinam ling am loc pletiorem esse q am Graecam,C.,Fin.,1.3,1
0; it is my opinion that the Latin lang age is richer than the Greek.
[COMPARATIVE SENTENCES.409]
Ego Gai m Caesarem non eadem de re p blica sentire q ae me scio, C.,Pis.
,32,79; I know that Gai s Caesar has not the same political views that I(have).
I.Correlative Comparative Sentences.
642.Correlative Sentences of Comparison are introd ced by Adjective and Adverbia
l Correlatives :
1.Adjective correlatives :
tot,totidem q ot, (so) as many |
tant s q ant s,(so) as great|
talis q alis, s ch |
idem q i, the same |
2.Adverbial correlatives :
tam q am, (so) as m ch |
tantopere q antopere,(so) as m ch |
totiens(es) ¥q otiens(es), as often | as
tamdi q amdi , as long |
ita,sic | t, ti,sic t,tamq am(rare),|
|q asi(rare),
item,itidem |q emadmod m,
|q omodo,
Q ot homines,tot sententiae,(as) many men,(so) many minds,TER.,Ph.,454.
Fr ment m tanti f it q anti iste aestimavit,C.,Verr.,iii.84,194;corn was
worth as m ch as he val ed it.
Pleriq e habere amic m talem vol nt,q ales ipsi esse non poss t,¥C.,Lael.
,22,82 ;most people wish to have a friend of a character s ch as they themselves
cannot possess.
Cimon incidit in eandem invidiam q am pater s s,NEP.,v.3,1 (310).
Nihil est tam pop lare q am bonitas,C.,Lig.,12,37; nothing is so winning
as kindness.
Sic de ambitione q omodo de amica q er nt r,SEN.,E.M.,22,10; they compla
in of ambition as they do of a sweetheart.
Tamdi req iesco q amdi ad te scribo,C.,Att.,ix.4,1;I rest as long as I
am writing to yo .
Opto t ita c iq e eveniat, t de re p blica q isq e mereat r, C.,Ph.,ii.
46,119; I wish each one's fort ne to be s ch as he deserves of the state.
3.The Correlative is sometimes omitted.
Homo,non q am isti s nt,glorios s,L.,xxxv.49,7;a man,not(so) vainglorio
s as they are.
Disces q amdi voles,C.,Off.,1.i,2;yo shall learn(as long) as yo wish.
REMARKS.1.Instead of idem q i,idem t is sometimes fo nd.
[410 COMPARATIVE SENTENCES.]
[COMPARATIVE SENTENCES.411]
Dissim latio est c m alia dic nt r ac sentias,C.Or.,ii.67,269; dissim la
tion is when other things are said than what yo mean(something is said other th
an what yo mean).
Similiter (602,R.2) facis ac si me roges c r te d ob s cont ear oc lis,e
t non altero coniveam,C.,N.D.,iii.3,8; yo are acting(like) as if yo were to as
k me why I am looking at yo with two eyes,and not blinking with one.
Non dixi sec s ac sentiebam,C.,Or.,ii.6,24;I did not speak otherwise tha
n I tho ght.
NOTES.1.The expression is commonly explained by an ellipsis :
Aliter dixi atq e [aliter] sentiebam,I spoke one way and yet I was think
ing another way.
So we find:
Timeo ne ali d credam atq e ali d n nties,TER.,Hec.,844; I fear that I b
elieve one thing,and yo are telling another.
2.Instead of atq e, et
is sometimes sed;this is not common,b t the greater proportion of cases occ rs
in the classical period :
Solet enim ali d sentire et loq i,C.,Fam.,viii.i,3;for he has a way of t
hinking one thing and saying another.
3.These words are principally :
aeq os,par,pariter,idem,i xta(from the classical period on) ,perinde,pro
inde,pro eo;
ali s,aliter,sec s( s ally with a negative) ,contra,contrari s,similis,d
issimilis,sim l;
and rarely
item,talis,totidem,proxime,
and a few others.
PLAUTUS ses th s some words which involve a similar meaning,as
(de)m tare(M.G.,1130).
Compare also M.G.,763;B.,725.
4. Ali s and sec s have q am occasionally at all periods.On the other hand,
non ali s and other negative combinations seldom have
atq e,commonly q am or nisi.
After negative forms of ali s CICERO has reg larly nisi,occasionally pra
eter.
Philosophia q id est ali d(= nihil est ali d) nisi don m deor m ?.C.,T s
c.,1.26,64;philosophy - what else is it b t the gift of the gods?
CAES.,B.G.,1.14; Co ld he ?
Q id est t rpi s ? What is baser ? [Nothing.] Q id esse t rpi s ?
CAES.,B.G.,v.28,6; What was base
r ?
Q o se rep lses ab Romanis it res ? L.,xxxiv.11,6; whither sho ld they g
o,if repelled by the Romans ?
(Q o ibim s ?) C i non apparere ab eo q i prior arma int lisset ini riam
ortam(esse) ? L.,xxxii.10,6; to whom is it not evident that the wrong began wit
h him,who had been the first to wage war ?(C i non apparet ?)
Examples are not fo nd in early Latin,are rare in classical period,b t are espec
ially common in LIVY.
Si bon m d cerent,q id pro noxio damnassent? L.,xxvii.34,13;'if they tho
ght him a good man,why had they condemned him as g ilty ? (Si bon m d citis,q i
d pro noxio damnastis ?)
The Q estion in the Second Person often veils an Imperative.Here from LIVY on th
e S bjv.is the r le.
Nec cessabant Sabini instare rogitantes q id tererent temp s, L.,iii.61,
13.(O.R.,Q id teritis ?)
[416.THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE.]
Exceptions are rare;S bjv.with Third Person,CAES.,B.C.,1.32,8; Inf.with Second P
erson,L.,vi.39,10.
2.In S bjv.Rhetorical Q estions the S bjv.is either retained or transferred to t
he Infinitive.The Deliberative? S bjv.is always retained.
Q is sibi pers aderet sine certa re Ambiorigem ad ei smodi consili m dis
cendisse ? CAES.,B.G.,v.29,5;who co ld pers ade himself that Ambiorix had procee
ded to an extreme meas re like that,witho t(having made) a s re thing(of it) ?(Q
is sibi pers adeat ?)
The Inf.form wo ld be the F t re : q em sibi pers as r m ?(G59),and is not to be
disting ished from the F t.Indicative.
652.Imperative sentences are p t in the S bj nctive,sometimes with, s ally witho
t, t; the Negative is,of co rse,ne(never t ne).
Reddit r respons m : nond m temp s p gnae esse;castris se tenerent, L.,i
i.45,8; there was ret rned for answer,that it was not yet time to fight,that the
y m st keep within the camp.
(O.R.,castris vos tenete.) (Vercingetorix) cohortat s est : ne pert rbar
ent r incommodo,CAES.,B.G.,vii.29,1;Vercingetorix comforted them(by saying) that
they m st not allow themselves to be disconcerted by the disaster.(O.R.,nolite
pert rbari.)
REMARKS.1.Ut can be sed according to 546,after verbs of Will and Desire and the
ir eq ivalents.
Pythia respondit t moenib s ligneis se m nirent,NEP.,ii.2,6;the Pythia
answered that they m st defend themselves with walls of wood.
2.Verbs of Will and Desire,being also verba dicendi,freq ently have an
t cla se followed by an Acc.with the Inf.,the second cla se adding a st
atement to the req est.
Ubii orabant t sibi a xili m ferret;ad a xili m spemq e reliq i tempori
s satis f t r m,CAES.,B.G.,iv.16,5.
Tenses in Oratio Obliq a.
653.The Tenses of the Infinitive follow the laws already laid down(530) :
The Present Infinitive expresses contemporaneo s action; The Perfect Infinitive
expresses prior action; The F t re Infinitive expresses f t re action.
REMARK.The Impf.Indic.,as expressing prior contin ance,becomes the Pf .Inf.in O.
O.,and hence loses its note of contin ance.
654.The Tenses of the S bj nctive follow the laws of seq ence(510).The choice is
reg lated by the point of new of the Reporter,or the point of view of the Speak
er.
.,.69,3,
[FIGURE.435]
dete
tu ub ...ccept pebem proturbt.
H tor
,hv
g much occ o
for de crpto
,re o pro
e to u e the de ce
d
g perod,.e.,the form
whch the pr
cp cu e precede .o e pecy N
EPO.LIVY ke o to u e two
depe
de
t ubord
te cu e y
detcy.
The Ortorc perod re much more dver e
d compcted,ow
g to the grete
r vrety of effect t whch they m.We f
d,however,the ce
d
g tructure,w
here the emph co
t
uy ce
d
g u
t t cum
te t the e
d,more c
ommo
.
ee
excee
t exmpe
C.,Imp.,5,11 :
Vo eum regem
utum e e ptem
qu egtum popu Rom
co
ure
m VINCULI AC VERBERIBU ATQUE OMNI UPPLICIO EXCRUCIATUM NECAVIT ?
FIGURE OF YNTAX AND RHETORIC.
688.Ep the om o
of ome
tegr prt of the thought, uch the u
b t
tve of the djectve(204,N.1),the copu of the predcte(209),the verb of
the dverb.
U
de domo? V.,A.,v.114(391,R.2).
REMARK.Whe
the ep
def
te,do
ot ttempt to uppy t.The fgure
t much bu ed by comme
ttor
the exp
to
of grmmtc phe
ome
.
689.Brchyogy(brevoque
t) fure to repet
eeme
t whch ofte
to be upped
more or e modfed form.
Tm fex e e qum formo m(=e ) veem,Ov.,Am.,I.8,27(302).
690.Zeugm or yep ju
cto
of two word u
der the me regme
,or wt
h the me modfer,though the commo
fctor trcty ppe but to o
e.
M
u c uppce voce d Tberum te
de
,TAC.,A
.,.29,2; tretch
g out h
d
d(utter
g) upp
t cre to Tberu .
691.Apo dpe rhetorc brek
g off before the co e of the e
te
ce,
the fmou Verg
Quo ego
692.Peo
m the u e of uperfuou word .
693.E
ge hft from o
e form to
other :
vo O Cope precor,V.,A.,x.525.
[436 FIGURE.]
Hypge
terch
ge
the reto
of word :
dre c bu u tro ,V.,A.,.61.
694.Oxymoro
the u e of word ppre
ty co
trdctory of ech other :
cum tce
t cm
t,C.,Ct.,1.8,21 (582).
695.y
ecdoche the u e of the prt for the whoe,or the rever e :
tectum for domum,pupp for
v ,mucro for gdu ,etc.
696.Hyperbto
,Trjecto
, voe
t d pceme
t of word .
Lyd dc per om
e te deo oro,H.,O.,1.8,1(413,N.2).
697.A
coutho
,or w
t of eque
ce,occur whe
the cheme of e
te
ce ch
ged
t cour e.
698.He
ddy ( εν δια δυοιν ) c
ssts
gv
g
lyss .
ste
f cmplex,
p tt
g
bst
tves c
ecte
by cp ltve c
j
ct
,
ste
f
e s bst
tve
jectve r ttrb tve ge
tve.
V lg s et m ltt
,the cmm
her
.
V et rt(C.,Verr.,1.16,47),sce
tfc meth
.
VI et rms,by frce f rms.
S tw verbs my be tr
slte
by
verb
verb :
f
f gerq e,t be tterly r te
.
699.C
str ct Preg
s. S-clle
c
str ct preg
s s
th
g b t
ext
e
e
pplct
f the cc stve f the I
prefere
ce t the thr
(287).
4.The cmm
Attrb te f tw r mre s bst
tves grees wth the
erest,rrel
y wth the mst mprt
t(290).
5.The Pre
cte s bst
tve grees wth ts s bject
cse(211).
6.The Appstve grees wth ts s bject
cse;f pssble,ls
mber
pers
(321).
7.The Reltve grees wth ts
tece
e
t
ge
er,
mber,
pers
(614).
8.Dsprprt
s
cte
by the cmprtve wth
q m pr,q m t,q m q (298).
9.I
cmpr
g tw q ltes, se ether
mgs q m
wth the pstve,r
ble cmprtve(299).
10.S perltve's
e
t
g r
er
seq e
ce re fte
se
prttvely
the
tves;
str m
vestr m s prttve(304,2).
12.The Reflexve s se
reg lrly whe
refere
ce s m
e t the grmmtcl s b
ject;freq e
tly whe
refere
ce s m
e t the ct l s bject(309).
13.The Reflexve s se
f the pr
cpl s bject,whe
refere
ce s m
e t the
th ght r wll f tht s bject; he
ce,
I
f
tve cl ses,r I
rect Q est
s,
Se
te
ces f Desg
,
Ort Oblq (521).
14.The Pssessve Pr
s se
ste
f the Pssessve r S bjectve Ge
t
ve
the Frst
Sec
Pers
s(362,364).
15.The Appstve t pssessve pr
s
the Ge
tve(321,R.2).
16.Wth wr
s f I
cl
t
Ds
cl
t
,K
wle
ge
Ig
r
ce,Or
er
Pst
,Tme
Ses
,the
jectve s s lly emplye
fr the
verb(325,
R.6).
17.The I
ctve,
t the S bj
ctve,s se
express
s f Pssblty,Pwe
r,Oblgt
,
Necessty(254,R.).
[438 PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX.]
18.The Pte
tl f the Prese
t r F t re s the Prese
t r Perfect S bj
ctve(
257);the Pte
tl f the Pst s the Imperfect S bj
ctve(258).
g.The Opttve S bj
ctve my be se
t express Wsh(260),
Assevert
(2
62), Cmm
(263),r C
cess
(264).
20.The Frst Impertve lks frwr
t mme
te,the Sec
t c
t
ge
t,f lf
lme
t(268).
21.The Negtve f the Impertve s reg lrly
l wth the I
f
tve;smetmes
e wth the Perfect S bj
ctve(270,R.2),r
cve wth the S bj
ctve(271) s ls se
.
22.The I
f
tve,wth r wth t s bject,my be trete
s
e ter s bject(4
22),bject(423),r pre
cte(424).
23.The I
f
tve s se
s the bject f verbs f Wll,Pwer,D ty,Hbt,I
cl
t
,Reslve,C
t
ce,E
,etc.(423).
fter wr
s f Ft
ess
F
ct
;ls fter wr
s f Cpcty
A
ptt
,
t express Desg
(429).
30.The Acc stve f the Ger
Ger
ve s se
fter verbs f Gv
g
Tk
g,Se
g
Lev
g,etc.,t
cte Desg
(430).
31.The Abltve f the Ger
Ger
ve s se
t
e
te Me
s
C se,r
rely M
er(431).
32.The S p
e
- m s se
chefly fter verbs f Mt
t express Desg
(435
).
33.The S p
e
- s se
chefly wth
jectves t
cte Respect(436).
34.The Prese
t Prtcple
e
tes c
t
ce,the Perfect,cmplet
,t the tme
f the le
g verb(282).
35.The F t re Prtcple s se
pst-Ccer
Lt
t express Desg
(438,
N.).
[PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX.439]
36.The Prtcple s se
fter verbs f Percept
Represe
tt
t expres
s the ct l c
t
f the bject(536).
37.The Perfect Prtcple pssve s se
fter verbs f C st
Desre,t
e
te mpte
ce f
yth
g except e
tre f lflme
t (587).
38.The s bject f f
te verb s
the Nm
tve(203).
39.Verbs f Seem
g,Becm
g,wth the pssve f verbs f Mk
g,Chs
g,Shw
g,Th
k
g,
Cll
g,tke tw Nm
tves,
e f the s bject,
e f the pre
c
te(206).
40.Wth pssve verbs f Sy
g,Shw
g,Belev
g,
Percev
g,the Acc stve
s bject f the I
f
tve becmes the Nm
tve s bject f the le
g verb(528
).
41.The Appst
l Ge
tve s se
fter vx,
me
,verb m,res,etc.(361,).
42.The Epexegetcl Ge
tve(r Ge
tve f Expl
t
) s se
fter ge
s,vt
m,c lp,etc.(361,2).
43.The Pssessve Ge
tve s se
f the Thr
Pers
t
e
te pssess
(362)
.
44.The S bjectve Ge
tve s se
f the s bject f the ct
cte
by the
s bst
tve(363,);the Objectve Ge
tve f the bject f tht ct
(363,2).
45.Esse
tl r perm
e
t q ltes re p t
the Ge
tve,lwys wth
jec
tve(365); exter
l
tr
se
t q ltes
the Abltve,lwys wth
jec
tve(400).See N.82.
46.The Ge
tves f Q lty
Pssess
my be se
s pre
ctes(366).
47.The Prttve Ge
tve st
s fr the whle t whch prt bel
gs(367).
48.A
jectves f F l
ess
W
t,f K
wle
ge
Ig
r
ce,f Desre
Dsg
st,f Prtcpt
Pwer,my tke the Ge
tve(374).Als sme prese
t prt
cples se
s
jectves,
lter Lt
sme verbls
-x(375).
49.Verbs f Rem
g,Remember
g,
Frgett
g tke s lly the Ge
tve(376);
b t smetmes the Acc stve,especlly f th
gs(376,R.).
50.Impers
l verbs f Emt
tke the Acc stve f the Pers
Wh Feels,
t
he Ge
tve f the Exct
g C se(371).
51.Verbs f Acc s
g,C
vct
g,C
em
g,
Acq tt
g,tke the Ge
tve f t
he Chrge(378).
52.Verbs f Rt
g
B y
g tke the Ge
tve f the Ge
erl,the Abltve f t
he Prtc lr Vl e(379,404).See N.87.
[440 PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX.]
53.I
terest
Refert tke the Ge
tve f the Pers
,rrely f the Th
g c
ce
r
e
(381).
54.The I
rect Object s p t
the Dtve(345).
55.Verbs f A
v
tge
Ds
v
tge,B
g
Frb
g,Ples re
Dspl
es re,Yel
g
Resst
g,tke the Dtve(346).
56.M
y
tr
stve verbs cmp
e
wth
,
te,c
,
,
ter,b,pst,pre,s b,
s per
my tke Dtve; tr
stve verbs ls
Acc stve bes
es(347).
57.Verbs f Gv
g
P tt
g tke Dtve
Acc stve,r
Acc stve
Abltve(348).
58.The Dtve s se
wth esse t
e
te pssess
(349).
59.The Dtve s se
f the Pers
I
tereste
the ct
(350).
60.The Ethcl Dtve s se
f the pers
l pr
s
ly(351).
61.The Dtve f Refere
ce s se
f the Pers
t whm stteme
t s referre
(352).
62.The Dtve f Age
t s se
wth the Perfect pssve,the Ger
,
the Ger
ve(354).
63.The Dtve my
e
te the Object Fr Whch
cmb
t
wth the Pers
T
Whm(355).
64.A
jectves f Fre
ess,F l
ess,Lke
ess,Ner
ess,wth ther ppstes,tk
e the Dtve(359).
65.Actve tr
stve verbs tke the Acc stve cse(330).
66.M
y
tr
stve verbs,mstly thse f Mt
,cmp
e
wth
,
te,crc m,c
,
,
ter,b,per,preter,s b,s bter,s per,
tr
s,
tke the Acc stve;tr
stve verbs th s cmp
e
my hve tw Acc stves (3
31).
67.I
tr
stve verbs my tke
Acc stve f smlr frm r me
g(333,2).
68.The Acc stve my express Exte
t
Degree,Spce,r Tme (334-6).
69.Nmes f Tw
s
Smll sl
s re p t
the Acc stve f Plce Whther;
s ls
m s
r s(337).See N.74
92.
70.Verbs me
g t I
q re,Req re,Tech,
C
cel,tke tw Acc stves,
e
f the Pers
,
e f the Th
g(339).
71.Verbs f Nm
g,Mk
g,Tk
g,Chs
g,
Shw
g,tke tw Acc stves f th
e sme Pers
r Th
g(34(5).
72.The s bject f the I
f
tve s reg lrly
the Acc stve(420).
73.The Acc stve my be se
Exclmt
s(343).
74.Plce Where s
e
te
by the Abltve, s lly wth
(385);Plce Whe
ce by t
he Abltve, s lly wth
ex,
e,r b(390).
Nmes f Tw
s
Smll sl
s mt the prepst
s(386,391).See N.9
92.
75.Atte
ce s
e
te
by the Abltve wth c m(392).
76.Tme Whe
r Wth
Whch s
e
te
by the Abltve(393).
77.Org
r Desce
t s
e
te
by the Abltve wth r wth t ex
e(395).
78.Mterl s
e
te
by the Abltve wth ex(396).
79.The P
t f Vew r Respect s
e
te
by the Abltve(397).
80.Cmprtves wth t q m re fllwe
by the Abltve(398).
81.M
er s
e
te
by the Abltve reg lrly wth
jectve r c m(399).
82.Exter
l
tr
se
t q ltes re
e
te
by the Abltve,lwys wth
jectve(400);esse
tl
perm
e
t q ltes by the Ge
tve,lwys wth
jectve(365).See N.45.
83.C se,Me
s,
I
str me
t,re
e
te
by the Abltve (401,408).
84.The Age
t s
e
te
by the Abltve wth (b)(401).
85.The St
r
f Mes reme
t s
e
te
by the Abltve(402),
86.Mes re f Dffere
ce s p t
the Abltve(403).
87.Def
te Prce s p t
the Abltve(404);Ge
erl Prce
the Ge
tve(379)
.See N.52.
88.Verbs f Deprv
g
Pll
g,f Ple
ty
W
t,tke the Abltve(405).
89.The Abltve s se
wth p s
s s(406).
90.Utr,fr r,f
gr,ptr,
vescr tke the Abltve(407).
91.The Abltve,cmb
e
wth prtcple,serves t m
fy the verbl pre
cte
f se
te
ce: Abltve Absl te(409).
92.Nmes f Tw
s
Smll sl
s f the Frst
Sec
Decle
s
s re p t
the Lctve f the Plce Where(411).See N.69
74.
93.A
verbs q lfy verbs,
jectves,
ther
verbs(439).
94.A q est
fr
frmt
merely s
tr
ce
by -
e(454).
95.A q est
tht expects the
swer yes s
tr
ce
by
e (455).
96.A q est
tht expects the
swer
s
tr
ce
by
m (456).
97.The Delbertve Q est
s
the S bj
ctve(265).
98.The I
rect Q est
s
the S bj
ctve(467).
[442 PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX.]
99.Seq e
ce f Te
ses.Pr
cpl te
ses re r
rly fllwe
by Pr
cpl te
s
es,Hstrcl by Hstrcl(509).
100.After F t re r F t re Perfect,the F t re relt
s expresse
by the Pre
se
t,the F t re Perfect by the Perfect S bj
ctve(514).After ther te
ses the F
t re relt
s expresse
by the Actve Perphrstc Prese
t
Imperfect S b
j
ctve(515).
101.I
Ort Oblq ll s br
te te
ses fllw the ge
erl lw f seq e
ce(
516).
102.Q
,the fct tht,
tht,s se
wth the I
ctve t
tr
ce expl
t
ry cl ses fter Verbs f A
g
Drpp
g,D
g
Hppe
g,
em
str
tves(525).
103.Q
,q ,q
m,
q
tke the I
ctve
Drect Dsc rse,the S b
j
ctve
I
rect Dsc rse,t express C se (540,541).
104.Q
s se
fter verbs f Emt
wth the I
ctve
Drect,the S bj
ctve
I
rect Dsc rse,t gve the Gr
(542).
105.F
l Se
te
ces hve the Prese
t
Imperfect S bj
ctve wth t r
e(545
).
106.Cmpleme
try F
l Cl ses re se
fter verbs f Wll
Desre(546).
107.Pstve verbs f Preve
t
g,Ref s
g,Frb
g,
Bewr
g,my tke
e w
th the S bj
ctve(548).
108.Verbs f Preve
t
g
Ref s
g my tke q m
s wth the S bj
ctve(549)
.See N.112.
109.Verbs f Fer re fllwe
by
e r t(
e
)
ll te
ses f the S bj
c
tve(550).
.C
sec tve Se
te
ces hve the S bj
ctve wth t
t
(552).
.Verbs f Effect
g hve the S bj
ctve wth t
e,r t
(553).
112.Negtve
r Q est
e
verbs f Preve
t
g,H
er
g,etc.,f D bt
U
ce
rt
ty,my be fllwe
by the S bj
ctve wth q
(555).See N.108.
113.A C
sec tve Cl se wth t s fte
se
t gve the c
te
ts r chrcter
f prece
g s bst
tve,
jectve,r pr
(557).
114.Ut, t prm m,
c m,c m prm m,
b, b prm m,
sm lc,sm l tq e,
pstq m
tke the Perfect I
ctve,
the se
se f "s s
s"; b t the Imperfect f O
verlpp
g Act
,
the Pl perfect whe
ef
te
tervl s gve
(561,562,5
63).
115.Whe
tw ct
s re repete
c
tempr
e sly,bth re p t
the I
ct
ve
te
ses f c
t
ce(566).
[PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX.443]
116.Whe
e ct
s repete
befre
ther,the
tece
e
t ct
s p t
t
he Perfect,Pl perfect,r F t re Perfect,the s bseq e
t
the Prese
t,Imperfect,
r F t re,ccr
g t the relt
(567).
117.D m,
ec,q
,q m
,s l
g s,whle,tke the I
ctve f ll te
ses(5
69).
118.D m,whle,whle yet,tkes the Prese
t I
ctve fter ll te
ses(570).
119.D m,
ec,q
,
tl,tke the Prese
t,Hstrcl Prese
t,Hstrcl Perfect
,
F t re Perfect I
ctve(571).
120.D m,
ec,q
,
tl,tke the S bj
ctve whe
S spe
se r Desg
s
vlv
e
(572).
121.D m,m
,
mm
,f
ly,prv
e
ly,tke the Prese
t
Imperfect S
bj
ctve
C
t
l Wshes(573).
122.A
teq m
pr sq m tke the I
ctve Prese
t,Perfect,
F t re Perfec
t whe
the lmt s stte
s fct; the S bj
ctve whe
the ct
s expecte
,c
t
ge
t,
esg
e
,r s br
te (574,577).
123.Temprl c m,whe
,s se
wth ll te
ses f the I
ctve t
esg
te mer
ely temprl relt
s(580).
124.Hstrcl c m,whe
,s se
wth the Imperfect
Pl perfect S bj
ctve t
gve the temprl crc mst
ces
er whch
ct
tk plce(585).
125.C sl
C
cessve c m,whe
,wheres,lth gh,re se
wth ll te
ses f
the S bj
ctve(586,587).
126.The Lgcl C
t
hs s lly sme frm f the I
ctve
bth Prts
s
Ap
ss(595).
127.The I
el C
t
hs s lly the Prese
t r Perfect S bj
ctve,less fte
try q ,whe
eq vle
t t q
(626).
132.The S bj
ctve s se
Reltve Cl ses tht frm prt f the tter
c
e f
ther;s
Ort Oblq
F
l Cl ses (628).
133.Reltve se
te
ces tht
epe
I
f
tves r S bj
ctves,
frm
137.Cmprtve se
te
ces fter cmprtves re
tr
ce
by q m(644).
138.I
Ort Oblq ,Pr
cpl Cl ses re p t
the I
f
tve,except I
terr
gtves
Impertves,whch re p t
the S bj
ctve;S br
te cl ses re
p t
the S bj
ctve(650,651,652).
[445]
PROSODY.
701.PROSODY trets f Q
tty
Versfct
.
REMARKS.1.Prs
y rg
lly me
t Acce
t.Lt
Acce
t s reg lte
by Q
tty,
s clsscl Lt
versfct
s ls q
tttve,Prs
y s lsely se
f bth q
tty
versfct
.
2.I
the erlest Lt
the Acce
t ws
t reg lte
by Q
tty,b t ws
the
tl syllble(15,N.).Ths fte
res lte
cmpst
,etc.
QUANTITY.
702.RULE I.A syllble s s
t be l
g by
t re whe
t c
t
s l
g vwel
r
phth
g : 6,ve,leges,seve.
REMARKS.1.() A vwel befre -gm,-g
,-
f,-
s s l
g by
t re;(b) vwel befr
e - t,-
s shrt by
t re.
EXCEPTIONS :
() Eg
t s,Theg
s,
sme Greek wr
s
-egm,s phlegm,phlegm;b t pegm.
(b) C
t(fr cve
t),ssembly;
e
tc l m,e
tt,brekfst;
t s,messe
ger;
q
t s,ffth;
Greek s bst
tves
- s,-
ts,-
,-
ts;
Chr
s,Epm
s;ls
e(
ve
-
-),mrket
y;
m,
t yet;
pre
,I seze;
q
ecm,fftee
;
re
,I sell;
ecm,eleve
;
v
em,v
tge.
2.I
chtve verbs hve vwel befre -s l
g by
t re;
sc,I ler
.
3.Ntewrthy re the fllw
g :
q rt s,f rth;
q
q e,fve,
ts
ervtves;
vg
t,twe
ty;
mlle,th s
,
ts
ervtves.
[446 QUANTITY.]
4.I
verbs the q
tty f the Prese
t Stem s ge
erlly ret
e
thr gh t bef
re tw c
s
ts(except -
s).
Except
c,I sy;S p
e,
ct m;
c,I le
;S p
e,
ct m;
ther
ervtves,lke
ct,etc.
5.Ntewrthy re the fllw
g :
g,I
rve,eg,ct m;
em,I b y,em,empt m;
fr
g,I brek,freg,frct m;
f
gr,I perfrm,f
ct s;
be,I r
er, ss, ss m;
g,I j
,
x,
ct m;
leg,I re
,leg,lect m;
p
g,I fx,pct m;
reg,I gver
,rex,rect m;
s
c,I s
ct
,s
x,s
ct m,s
ct m;
str ,I ple p,str x,str ct m;
t
g,I t ch,tct m;
teg,I cver,tex,tect m;
trh,I
rw,trx,trct m;
g,I
t,
x,
ct m;
v
c,I c
q er,vx,vct m.
6.I
verbs, vwel res lt
g frm sy
cpe s l
g befre ss,st(131).Als,perhps
,I befre s
t
sy
cpte
Pf .frms f re
petere.
NOTE.O
the meth
f
st
g sh
g l
g vwels
scrpt
s,see 12,,N.
703.RULE II A syllble s s
t be l
g ly pst
(12,2) whe
shrt vwel
s fllwe
by tw r mre c
s
ts,r
ble c
s
t : s,cll m,cstr.
REMARKS.1.The c
s
ts my be
v
e
betwee
tw wr
s : per mre,
terrs;b
t whe
ll the c
s
ts re
the sec
wr
,the prece
g shrt syllble c
mm
ly rem
s shrt,except
the Thess(729) f verse,whe
t s le
gthe
e
: prem scrbe.
2.Every vwel s
fllwe
by c
s
t(j) s l
g(except
the cmp
s
f g m,yke).Ths s
e smetmes t
t rl le
gth f the vwel,smetmes t
cmpe
st
: G s frm Gv
s,peer fr per r;b t b g s,tw-hrse.
NOTE.I
cmp
s f cere,t thrw,the s fte
mtte
,
the prece
g v
wel le
gthe
e
by cmpe
st
;s c
cere; shrt vwel wth the mtte
s
t f
tl OVID'S tme.
3.F
l s,prece
e
by shrt vwel,s
rppe
befre c
s
t
the l
er p
etry;fte
t
LUCRETIUS.
I
sm
s v
t pr (s) q m sm(= em)
scere cept.ENNIUS.
NOTE.I
cmc petry, shrt f
l syllble
s ble
s wth est,
smetmes w
th es : p st(= p s est);sml's(-smls es).
704.RULE III.A syllble e
g
shrt vwel befre m te,fllwe
by l r r
,s cmm
(13) : te
e-bre,
rk
ess.I
erly Lt
t s reg lrly shrt,s,t,
whe
the m te
lq
beg
wr
.
REMARKS.1.The syllble m st e
shrt vwel :
v-frg s,shp-wreck
g;mel
l-fl s,flw
g wth h
ey;b t
b-r mpe the s l
g by pst
.
[QUANTITY.447]
2.I
Greek wr
s m
re
cl
e
er ths r le : TS-cmss,Cy-c
s.
EXCEPTION.Dervtve s bst
tves
br m,cr m,tr m frm verbs;s flbr,bls
ts.Zmrg
s,MART.,V.,1,c
t be prllele
.
705.RULE IV.Every
phth
g,
every vwel
erve
frm
phth
g,r c
trct
e
frm ther vwels,s l
g(14) : sevs,cr el;c
cl
e,I sh t p(frm cl
);
mq s,
fr(frm eq s);cg,I
rve tgether(frm cg = c
+ g).
EXCEPTION.Pre
cmpst
s shrte
e
befre vwel
tl the tme f STAT
IUS;pre- st s,b r
t t the p
t(V.,A.,v.524).
706.RULE V.O
e smple vwel befre
ther vwels
,r h,mkes shrt syllbl
e :
e s,G
; p er,by;
hl,
th
g.
EXCEPTIONS :
1.
the l
Ge
.f the Frst Decle
s
: rl.
2.e
-e f the Ffth Decle
s
,whe
vwel prece
es '.
e,b t f
e(63,N.1
).
3.
e befre
prper
mes
- s : G,Pmpe.
4.
the Ge
.frm - s(76,R.2).Alterms s fte
shrte
e
,perhps eve
prs
e :
l s, ll s,
ll s,tt s,re f
petry.I
l s the s
ever shr
te
e
(l s fr ll s).
5.
f s l
g,except befre er: f,b t feret
fer.
6.ehe ,D
,he,
s(=
v s).
7.M
y Greek wr
s : er,Me
el s,m se m,Me
e.
8.I
erly Lt
m
y wr
s ret
the rg
l le
gth f the vwel : s,re;l
l frms f f;cl ;f
ts frms;pl t,l t,
,etc.Mst f the shrte
e
frms ls cc r,
re mre cmm
.
Q
tty f F
l Syllbles.
A.POLYSYLLABLES.
707.RULE VI.I
wr
s f mre th
e syllble,f
l ,e,
y re shrt;,,
re l
g.
1. s shrt :
terr,erth;
,gfts;
cpt,he
s.
EXCEPTIONS :
1.Abl.f the Frst Decle
s
: terr.
2.Vc.f wr
s
s(Ae
e),
Greek N
,
(Electr).
3.Impv.f Frst C
j gt
: m.
[448 QUANTITY.]
4.Mst
flecte
wr
s : trg
tā,i xtā,b t ita,q ia,eia.With
p ta,for instance,
compare cave below.
2.e is short.
EXCEPTIONS :
1.Abl.of the Fifth Declension : diē.
2.Impv.of Second Conj gation : monē(b t see Note).
3.Most adverbs of Second Declension : rectē;b t bene,male,inferne (LUCR.),max me(P
LAUT.),probe(PLAUT.),s perne(LUCR.,HOR.),temere(PLAUT.,TER.).
4.Greek words in e(he) : Tempē,melē.
5.Q e is tho ght to be not nfreq ently long in the Thesis of early Sat rnians;s
o in the hexameter of the classical period if a second q e follows in the Arsis.
NOTE.Observe that in PLAUTUS and TERENCE any dissyllabic Iambic impv.may have th
e last e shortened;principally cave,habe,i be,mane,mone,move,tace,tene,vale,vide
.See 716.Later poets also shorten sometimes when the pen lt is long;salve(MART.)
.
3.y is always short,except in contracted forms : misy (Dative misy = misyi).
4.i is long : dominī,vigintī,a dī.
EXCEPTIONS :
1.Greek Dat.si : Troasi.
2.Greek Nona.,as sinapi; Voc.,as Pari; Dat.Sing,(rarely),as Minoidi.
3.q asi,nisi,c i(when a dissyllable).
4.i is common in mihi,tibi,sibi,ibi, bi.
Observe the compo nds : ibidem,ibiq e, biq e, binam, bivis, bic nq e,nec bi, tin
am, tiq e,sic ti;(b t ti).
5.o is long : bono,t to.
EXCEPTIONS :
1.Common in homo; in the A g stan times in leo and many proper names;as Scipio;i
n the post-A g stan times in many common s bstantives : virgo.Nemo is fo nd firs
t in OVID,mentio in HORACE.
2.Freq ently short in Iambic words in early Latin,especially in verbs,many of wh
ich remained common in the A g stan times,as
volo,veto,scio,peto,p to,etc.;
so less often
nescio,desino,obsecro dixero,odero.
From SENECA on,the Ger nd may be shortened : amando.
3.o is s ally short in modo,cito,octo,ego,ilico,immo,d o,ambo (post-classical);
and in many other words in later poetry.
6. is always long : corn ,fr ct ,a dit .
[QUANTITY.449]
708.RULE VII.All final syllables that end in a simple consonant other than s are
short.
EXCEPTIONS :
1. allec,lien,and many Greek s bstantives.
2.The adverbs and obliq e cases of
illic,ill c,istic,ist c,can hardly be considered exceptions,as
-c is for -ce,and is merely enclitic.
3.Compo nds of
par : dispar,impar.
4.iit,petiit,and their compo nds.
5.Final -at,-et,-it,were originally long,and as s ch often occ r in early Latin,
and occasionally before a pa se in the classical poets.
709.RULE VIII.Of final syllables in a: as,es,os,are long;is, s,ys,short.
1.as is long : Aeneas,servas,amas.
EXCEPTIONS :
1.Greek s bstantives in as,adis : Arcas,Arcadis.
2.Greek Acc.Pl.,Third Declension : heroas,Arcadas.
3.anas,anatis.
2.es is long : reges,dies,mones.
EXCEPTIONS :
1.Nom.and Voc.Sing.,Third Declension,when the Gen.has etis,itis,idis : seges,mil
es,obses;b t abies,aries,paries.
2.Compo nds of es,be(long syllable in PLAUTUS) : ades,potes.
3.penes(Preposition).
4.Greek words in es(es) : Nom.PL,as Arcades; Voc.,as Demosthenes;Ne ter,as cacoe
thes,
5.Iambic verbal forms in Second Person Sing,in early Latin.
3.os is long : deos,nepos.
EXCEPTIONS :
1.Compos,impos,exos;and as the Nom.ending in the Second Declension.
2.Greek words in os(os) : melos.
4.is is short : canis,legis.
EXCEPTIONS :
1.Dat.and Abl.Pl ral : terris,bonis.
2.Acc.Pl.of the Third Declension : omnis = omnes.
3.In the Nom.of s ndry Proper Names,increasing long in the Genitive : Q iris,Q i
ritis.
4.Second Person Sing.Pr.Indic.active,Fo rth Conj gation : a dis.
[450 QUANTITY.]
5.In the verbal forms from vis,sis,fis,and velis:no-lis,ma-lis,ad-sis,cale-fis.
6.In the Second Person Sing.F t.Pf.Indic.and Pf.S bjv.,is is common : videris.
7.P lvis,cinis,sang is,occasionally in early Latin.
5. s is short : serv s,c rr s.
EXCEPTIONS :
1.Gen.Sing.,Nom.and Acc.Pl.,Fo rth Declension : c rr s.
2.Nom.Third Declension,when the Gen.has a long : virt s,virt tis; inc s,inc di
s; tell s,tell ris.
3.In Greek words with (o s) : trip s,Sapph s;b t Oedip s and
polyp s.
4.Occasionally the Dat.and Abl.Pl.of the Third Declension,the First Person Pl.ac
tive of verbs,seem to be long in early Latin.
6.ys is short : chlamys.
B.MONOSYLLABLES.
710.RULE IX.All monosyllables that end in a vowel are long : a,da,me,de,hi,si,o,
do,t .
Except the enclitics : -q e,-ve,-ne,-ce,-te,-pse,pte.
711.RULE X.Declined or conj gated monosyllables that end in a consonant follow t
he r les given : das,fles,scis,dat,net,is,id,q is,his,q is,q os.
hic,this one,is sometimes short;dic and d c have the q antity of their verbs;es,
be,is short in classical Latin,long in early Latin.
712.RULE XI.Monosyllabic Nominatives of s bstantives and adjectives are long whe
n they end in a consonant,even if the stem-syllable be short : os,mos,ver,sol,f
r,pl s; lar(laris),pes(pedis),bos(b6vis),par(paris).
EXCEPTIONS :
vir and lac,os(ossis),mel;
Also cor,vas(vadis),fel.Also q ot,tot.
713.RULE XII.Monosyllabic particles that end in a consonant are short : an,cis,i
n,nec,per,ter.
Excepting en and non and q in;
And also eras and c r and sin;
Also the Adverbs in c : hic,h c,hac,sic;and ac(atq e),
[QUANTITY.451]
Q antity of Stem-Syllables.
714.RULE XIII.The q antity of stem-syllables,when not determined by the general
r les,is fixed by the sage of the poets(long or short by a thority).
REMARKS.1.The changes of q antity in the formation of tensestems have been set f
orth in the conj gation of the verb(153,2).
2.The occasional differences in the q antity of the stem-syllables which spring
from the same radical can only be explained by reference to the 'history of each
word,and cannot be given here.Some examples are :
paciscor, pax,pacis. sedeo, sedes.
macer, macero. fides, fido(fei
do).
lego, lex,legis. d x,d cis, d co(do
cS).
rego, rex,regis. voco, vox.
tego, teg la. l cerna, l ceo(lo
ceo).
acer, acerb s. s spicor, s spicio
.
moles, molest s. moveo, mobilis(
= movbilis).
NOTE.This verse is predominantly a comic verse,occ rring most freq ently in TERE
NCE,who shows five h ndred lines,while PLAUTUS shows b t three h ndred.The s bst
it tions are the same as in the Senarins(761,N.1).There are two varieties :
(a) That which is divided into two eq al halves by Diaeresis at the end of the f
o rth foot.In this case the fo rth foot as well as the eighth has all the privil
eges of the final foot of the Senarins(Hiat s,Syllaba Anceps),and conforms also
to its r les,so that the line is practically a distich of two Q aternarii;b t Hi
at s after the fo rth foot is denied for TERENCE.
(b) That which is divided into two neq al halves by a Caes ra after the fifth A
rsis.Here the r les of the final foot apply only to the eighth,and the fo rth ma
y be a Spondee.The principle which governs the choice of words after the semiq i
naria in the Senarins applies here after the dividing Caes ra.The Hiat s comes
nder the general r les.Prom the earliest period there is a tendency to keep the
even feet p re.This variety is preferred by TERENCE to the former.Examples of th
e two forms are :
O Troia,O patria,O Pergam m,|| O Priame,periisti senex,PLAUT.
is porro m(e) a tem verberat || inc rsat p gnis calcib s,PLAUT.
Facil(e) omnes q om valem s recta || consilia aegrotis dam s,TER.
759.Iambic Septenari s(Tetrameter Catalectic).
Bemitte palli m mihi || me m q od
involasti,CAT. w^w <->-.w || w^^ w^.A
[VERSIFICATION.465]
Anacr stic Scheme :
NOTES.1.This verse is confined principally to PLATITUS and TERENCE;it is to be r
egarded as a compo nd of Dimeter + Dimeter Catalectic : hence reg lar Diaeresis
after the fo rth foot,which is treated as a final foot.The same r les,in regard
to the vario s word-feet allowable,apply here as in the case of the Senari s(761
,N.6).S bstit tions are allowable in every foot except in the fo rth,when follow
ed by a Diaeresis.
With Syllaba Anceps :
Si abd xeris celabit r " itidem t celata adh c est,PLAUT.
With Hiat s :
Sed si tibi viginti minae || argenti profer nt r,PLAUT.
2.Exceptionally in PLAUTUS,more of ten in TERENCE,the line is c t by Caes ra aft
er the fifth Arsis.In this case the fo rth foot has no exceptional laws except t
hat if the seventh foot is not p re the fo rth sho ld be,tho gh this is not abso
l tely necessary.
760.The Iambic Senari s(a Stichic meas re).This is an imitation of the Iambic Tr
imeter of the Greeks,b t differs from it in that it is a line of six separate fe
et and not of three dipodies.In the early Latin there is no distinction between
the odd and even feet,s ch as prevails in the Greek Trimeter,b t the same s bsti
t tions were allowable in the one as in the other.This distinction is regained i
n HORACE and SENECA,who follow the Greek treatment closely,and with whom the lin
e may be with some degree of j stice called the Iambic Trimeter,b t it is very d
o btf l whether the Roman felt the Iambic Trimeter as did the Greek.In both Sena
ri s and Trimeter the last foot is always p re.
[472 VERSIFICATION.]
[491]
APPENDIX.
ROMAN CALENDAR.
The names of the Roman months were originally adjectives.The s bstantive mensis,
month,may or may not be expressed :(mensis) lan ari s,Febr ari s,and so on.Befor
e A g st s,the months J ly and A g st were called,not l li s and A g st s,b t Q
intllis and Sextilis.
The Romans co nted backward from three points in the month,Calends(Kalendae),Non
es(Nonae),and Ides(Id s),to which the names of the months are added as adjective
s : Kalendae lan ariae,Nonae Febr ariae,Id s Martiae.The Calends are the first d
ay,the Nones the fifth,the Ides the thirteenth.In March,May,J ly,and October the
Nones and Ides are two days later.Or th s :
In March,J ly,October,May,The Ides are on the fifteenth day,The Nones the sevent
h;b t all besides Have two days less for Nones and Ides.
In co nting backward(" come next Calends,next Nones,next Ides ") the Romans sed
for "the day before" pridig with the Acc.: pridie Kalendas lan arias,Dec.31;pri
die Nonas Ian.-Jan.4;pridie Id s Ian.= Jan.12.
The longer intervals are expressed by ante diem terti m,q art m,etc.,before the
Acc sative,so that ante diem terti m Kal.Ian.means "two days before the Calends
of Jan ary; " ante diem q art m,or a.d.iv.,or iv.Kal.Ian.,"three days before," a
nd so on.This remarkable combination is treated as one word,so that it can be s
ed with the prepositions ex and in : ex ante diem iii.Nonas l nias sq e ad prid
ie Kal.Septembres,from J ne 3 to A g st 31;differre aliq id in ante diem xv.Kal.
Nov.,to postpone a matter to the 18th of October.
LEAP YEAR.In leap year the intercalary day was co nted between a.d.vi.Kal.Mart,a
nd a.d.vii.Kal.Mart.It was called a.d.bis sext rn Kal.Mart.,so that a.d.vii.Kal.
Mart,corresponded to o r Febr ary 23,j st as in the ordinary year.
To t rn Roman Dates into English.
For Nones and Ides.I.Add one to the date of the Nones and Ides,and s btract the
given n mber.
[492 ROMAN SYSTEMS OF MEASURE AND WEIGHT.]
For Calends.II.Add two to the days of the preceding month,and s btract the given
n mber.
EXAMPLES : a.d.viii.Id.Ian.(13 + 1-8) = Jan.6;a.d.iv.Non.Apr.(5 + 1 -4) = Apr.2;
a.d.xiv.Kal.Oct.(30 + 2 -14) = Sept.18.
Year.--To obtain the year B.C.,s btract the given date from 754 (753 B.C.being t
he ass med date of the fo nding of Rome,anno rbis conditae).To obtain the year
A.D.,s btract 753.
Th s : Cicero was born 648,a. .c.= 106 B.C.
A g st s died 767,a. .c.= 14 A.D.
NOTE.Before the reform of the Calendar by J li s Caesar in B.C.46,the year consi
sted of 355 days,divided into twelve months,of which March,May,Q intllis (J ly),
and October had 31 days,Febr ary 28,the remainder 29.To rectify the Calendar,eve
ry second year,at the discretion of the Pontifices,a month of varying length,cal
led mensis intercalaris,was inserted after the 23d of Febr ary.
ROMAN SYSTEMS OF MEASUREMENT.
LONG MEASURE. SQUARE MEASURE.
4 digiti = 1 palm s.
4 palmi = 1 pes(11.65 in.). 100 pedes, } = 1 scrip l m
q adrati
}
6 palmi, } = 1 c bit s. 36 scrip la = 1 clima.
1 1/2 pedes} 4 climata = 1 act
s.
2 1/2 pedes = 1 grad s. 2 act s = 1 i g
er m(acre).
2 grad s, }
5 pedes } = 1 pass s. The i ger m contains 28,
800
125 pass s = 1 stadi m. sq.ft.Rom.;
8 stadia = 1 mille pass m Eng.acre = 43,560 sq.ft.
(mile).
DRY MEASURE. LIQUID MEASURE.
1 1/2,cyathi = 1 acetab l m. 1 1/2 cyathi = 1 acetab l m.
2 acetab la = 1 q artari s. 2 acetab la = 1 q artari s.
2 q artarii = 1 hemina. 2 q artarii = 1 hemina.
2 heminae = 1 sextari s. 2 heminae = 1 sextari s(pint).
8 sextarii = 1 semodi s. 6 sextarii = 1 congi s.
2 semodil = 1 modi s(peck). 4 congil = 1 rna.
2 rnae = 1 amphora
.
20 amphorae = 1 c lle s
.
ROMAN WEIGHTS.
3 siliq ae = 1 obol s. 2 sicilici = 1 sem ncia.
2 oboli = 1 scrip l m. 2 sem nciae = 1 ncia.
2 scrip la = 1 drachma. 12 nciae = 1 libra(po nd).
2 drachmae = 1 sicilic s.
[503]
GENERAL INDEX.
ABBREVIATIONS.Abl.,ablative; Abs.,absol te; Acc.,acc sative: act.,active; adj.,
adjective; adv.,adverb; attrib.,attrib tive,attrib tion;app.,appositive,appositi
on;
Comp.,comparison,comparative; co str.,constr ction; cop.,cop la,cop lative;
cpd.,compo nd,compo nded; Dat.,dative; decl.,declension; def.,definite; dem.,
demonstrative; fem.,feminine; F t.,f t re; F t.Pf.,f t re perfect; Gen.,geni-
tive; Ger.,ger nd,ger ndive; Impf.,imperfect; Imp v.,imperative; indef.,indefi-
nite; Indic.,indicative; Inf.,infinitive; interrog.,interrogative; Loc.,locative
;
masc.,masc line; neg.,negative; ne t.,ne ter; Nona.,nominative; obj.,object;
Part.,partitive; part.,participle; pass.,passive; PL,pl ral; poss.,possessive,po
s-
session; pred.,predicate; prep.,preposition; pron.,prono n;rel.,relative; SG.,
sing lar; s bj,,s bject;S bjv.,s bj nctive;s bst.,s bstantive;S p.,s pine;vb.,
verb;Voc.,vocative.
A So nd of,3; weakening of,8,1; length
of final,707,1.See ab.
ab(a) In composition,9,4; varies witb a
as prep.,9,4; syntax of as prep.,417,1;
position of,413,R.1 : Dat.after vbs.cpd.
with,347.R.5; gives Point of Reference,
335,N.; with Abl.takes place of second
Acc.,339.N.2: with Abl.of Separation,
390: with Abl.of Point of View,i6.2,N.6;
with Towns,391.R.1; with Abl.of Origin,
395; with Abl.of Respect,397,N.1; with
Abl.of Agent,401; to express Ca se,
408.N.3; with Abl.Ger.,433.
abdicate with se and Abl.,390,N.3.
abesse with Acc.of Extent,or a and
Abl.,335,11.2: with Dat.,349.R.4; with
Abl.of Meas re,403.N.1; of Place,390,
N.3; tant m abest t- t,552.R.1.
abhinc with Acc.,336.R.3.
abhorrere with Abl.of Place,390,N.3.
ability adjs.of,with Inf.,423,N.1,c.
abire with Abl.of Place,390.N.3.
ABLATIVE defined,23,6; 1st decl.SG.in
ad.Pl.in eis,29,N.4;Pl.in ab s,29,R.4;
2d decl.SG.in od,33.N.3; Pl.in eis,33,
N.5; 3d decl.SG.in ei,i,e,37,4; m te
stems with i,54; sporadic cases in i,54,
N.2;vowel stems in i,57.R.2;adjs.
sed as s bsts.in i,57,R.2,N.; 4th
decl.in b s,61,R.1; adjs.in d,75.N.3;
Pl.in is(for iis) and ab s,75.N.6; adjs.
of three endings in e,79.R.1: adjs.and
parts,in i and e,82; adjs.in e and i,
83; Comp.of part.,89,R.1; forms advs.,
91,2.
With act.vb.cannot be s bj.of pass.,
217,R.1; with vbs.involving comparison,
296,N.1; prepositional ses instead,ib.
N.3; with pro of Disproportion,298; for
inner obj.,333,2,N.4; with abesse and
distare,335.R.2; of Point of Reference,
ib.N.; with Acc.after vbs.of Giving and
P tting,348; with preps,instead of
Part.Gen.,372.R.2.Scheme of Syntax,
384; of Place where,385: of Towns,386;
of Place whence,390; with vbs.of Ab-
staining,390,2; with Adjs.,390,3; of
Towns,391; preps,with Towns,ib.R.1;
of Attendance,392; of Time,393; preps.,
394; of Origin,395; preps.,ib.N.2; of
Material,396; of Respect,397; with
words of Eminence,ib.N.2; with Comp.,
398,296,and RR.1,2; of Manner,399;
of Q ality,400,and R.1; with c m of
nnat ral prod ctions,ib.N.2;of In-
str ment,401; of Agent,314,and R.2,
401 and RR.1,2; with special vbs.,401,
NN.1-7; of Standard,402; of Difference,
403; of Price,404; with vbs.of Plenty
and Want,405; with op s and s s,
406; with tor,fr or,etc.,407; of Ca se,
408 and NN.2-6; of Ger.,431; of Ger.
with preps.,433; of S p.,436-
ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE concord with two
s bjs.,285,N.3; syntax of,409,10; with
Interrog.,469.N.; of part.,665.N.2.
[504 GENERAL INDEX]
abr mpere with Abl.of Place,390,N.3.
absiste with Iiif.for Impv.,271,2,N.2.
absolvere with Abl.of Place,390.N.3.
abson s with Abl.,359,N.2.
Absorption of Correlative 619.
absq e 417,2; withe bjv.,597,N.
abstaining vbs.of,with Abl.,390,2.
abstinere with Abl.of Place,390.N.3.
abstract relations expressed by Indic.,
254,R.1: s bsts.become concrete in Pl.,
204.N.5; formation of,181,2,6.
ab ndantia 84.
ab ndare with Gen.,383.1.N.2.
ab n.de ''fry,439.N.3.
ab ti with Abl.,407 and N.2,a.
gC see atq e;ac Si with S bjv.of
Comparison,608; SCS1= q asi,16.N.5.
accedere with Dat.,etc.,347,R.2; with
q od,625; with t,553,4.
accent in early Latin,701,R.2;in m -
sic,729; conflict with Ict s,749.
accent ation 15; effect of enclitics,te.
R.1; in cpds.,ib.-R.2; in Voc.,ib.R.3;
early,ib.N.
accidit with Dat.,346.R.2;seq ence
after,513,R.2; with t,553,3.
accipere with Inf.,627,R.1.
accommodat s with Dat.Ger.,429,N.1.
acc mbere with Dat.,etc.,347R.2.
ACCUSATIVE-definition,23,4.3d decl.36;
in im,37,3; 54,N.1; in eis,38,3; of vowel
stems,57.R.1 and 5; Pl.in is and es,57,
R.5; in Greek s bsts.,66,NN.3 and 4; of
adjs.of three endings in is,eis,79.N.2;
in is,83,N.1; of Comp.in is,eis,89,R.2;
forms advs.,91,1.
Becomes s bj .of pass.,216;syntax of,
328-343: general view,328,329; direct
obj.,330; with vbs.of Emotion,ib.R.and
R.2; 333,1,N.1; with verbal s bsts.,330,
N.3; with adjs.in nd s,ib.N.4;with
cpd.vbs.,331.Inner obj.,332,333; ne t.
pron and adj.,333,1; Cognate,te.2; Abl.
instead,te.2,N.4; with vbs.of Taste and
Smell,ib.2,N.5; extension of Cognate
idea,te.2,NN.2 and 6..Do ble Acc.,333,
1; of Extent,334-336; in Degree,334,in
Space,335,in Time.336; with abesse
and distare,335.R.2; with abhinc,336,
R.3; with not S,ib.R.4; with adjs.,ib.
N.1; of Extent as s bj.of pass.,te.N.3;
of Local Object,337; prep,with Large
Towns,ib.RR.1 and 2; dom m and in
dom m,ib.R.3; force of ad,16.R.4;
with sq e,ib.N.4; with verbal s bsts.,
ib.N.5; of Respect,338: with vbs.of
Clothing,etc.,and passives,ib.N.2;
Greek Acc.or Abl.instead,ib.N.1.
Do ble Acc.,339-342: with vbs.of In-
q iring,etc.,339; special vbs.,ib.RR.,
xx.; pass,form,ib.N.4; with vbs.of
Naming,Making,etc.,340: pass,form,
ib.R.1; End by ad or Dat.,ib.R.2; one
Acc.is cognate,341 and N.2; one Acc.
forms a phrase,342; as a general objec-
tive case,343; with Interjections,ib.1;
Acc.and Inf.,ib.2; and Dat.with vbs.
of Giving and P tting,348; with prepa.
for Part.Gen.,372,R.2: for Abl.of
Standard,403.N.2; s bj.of Inf.,203.R.1;
420: after impersonal Ger.,427,N.2; of
Ger.,430; of Ger.with preps.,432; of
S p.,435; with Inf.as object cla se,
526-o35; with Inf.as s bj.,535; with
Inf.after vbs.of Emotion,542,R.; with
Inf.in rel.cla se,635; with Inf.in
dependent comparative cla se,641.
acc sing -vbs.of,with Gen.,378; with
other constr.,ib.RR.2 and 5.
acq iescere with Abl.,401.N.6.
acq itting vbs.of,with Gen.,378; with
other constr.,ib.RR.2 and 3.
action,activity s ffixes for,181,2; 182,1.
active voice 112,2;213;Inf.as pass.,
532,x.2; of something ca sed to be
done,219; periphrastic,247.
ad in composition,9,4; vbs.cpd.with,
take Acc.,331; with Towns and Co n-
tries,337,RR.1 and 4; with Acc.of End
after vbs.of Taking,etc.,340,R.2: with
Acc.for Dat.,345,R.2; vbs.cpd.with,
take Dat.,347; in the neighbo rhood of,386,
R.2; ftence,403,N.4,e; position of,413.R.1;
as adv.,415; as prep.,416,1; with Acc.
Ger.,429,2; 428,R.2; 432 and R.; after
vbs.of Hindering,432,R.; with Ger.for
Abl.S p.,436.N.3: ad id q od,525,2,
N.2.
adaeq e with Abl.,296.N.1; 398.N.2.
adaptation words of,with Dat.Ger.,
429,2.
addere with operam and Dat.Ger.,429,
1; with q od,525,1,N.1; with t,553,4.
adding vbs.of,with q od,525,1;list
of,ib.N.1: with t,ib N.5; 553,4.
add ct s with Abl.of Ca se,408.N.2.
adeo with t,552.
adesse with Dat.,etc.,347.R.2.
[GENERAL INDEX.505]
adfatim very,439,N.3.
adferre with t,553,1.
adhaerescere with Dat.,etc.,347.R.2.
adhortari with t,546.N.1.
adh c strengthens Comp.,301; as yet,
still,478,N.1.
adicere with q od,525,i,N.1.
adigere with t,553,1.
adipisci with t,553,1.
adire with Acc.or ad,331.R.3.
adi vare with t,553,1.
ADJECTIVE 16,2; and s bst.,ib.R.1,N.1;
decl.of,17; defined,72; 1st and 2d decl.,
73; Gen.and Voc.,73; stems in ro,74;
with Nom,wanting,74.R.2; Pronominal,
76; 3d decl.,77; two endings,78; stems
in ri,78,2; in gli and gri,78,R.; one
ending,80: case pec liarities,83; ab n-
da tia,84; varying decl.,84,2; defective
and indeclinable,85; comparison of,86;
correlative,109: formation of,182.
As s bst.,204.NN.1-4;agreement of
pred.,211; exceptions,ib.RR.; attrib.
agrees in Gender,286; ne t.with fem.,
ib.3; concord of,289; with two s bjs.,
290; position,290.N.2,291; meaning
varies with position,ib.R.1;676;
s perlatives of Order and Seq ence,
291,1,R.2; n merals,292-295: compara-
tives,296-301; s perlatives,302,303; of
Inclination,Knowledge,etc.,in pred.,
325.R.6; verbal with Acc.,330,N.3; ne t.
in Cognate Acc.,333,1;of Extent in
Degree,334 and R.1; or Time,336.N.1;
with Gen.of Q ality,365.R.2; of 3d
decl.as pred.,366,R.2;with Abl.of
Separation,390,3; with Abl.of Atten-
dance,392.R.1; with Abl.of Q ality,400;
in Abl.Abs.,410.NN.4.5; with Inf.,421,
N.1.c; with Inf.for Gen.of Ger.,428,N.3;
with Abl.Ger.,431,N.1; with Abl.S p.,
436.N.2; ne t.with t,553,4,and R.2.
adligare with se and Gen.,378,R.1.
admirari with Inf.,533.R.1.
admod m very,439.N.3-,with q am
and Indic.,467,N.; yef,471,1.
admonere with two Accs.,341.N.2;with
t,546,N.1.
Adonic meas re,789,792.
adoriri with Inf.,423.2.N.2.
adorning vbs.of,with Abl.,401,N.1.
adstringere with se and Gen.,378.R.1.
ad lescens 437,N.1.
advantage vbs.of,with Dat.,346.
ADVERB defined,16,5,and n.3; disc ssion
of,91,92: from Acc.,91,1; from Abl.,ib.
2; from Loc.,ib.3; ncertain,ib.4; by
terminations,92,1-o; syntactical and
miscellaneo s,92,6;comparison of,93;
n meral,98; pron.,110; with Dat.,359,
N.7; with Part.Gen.,372.N.3;genera]
se of,439; position of,440; for rel.
with prep.,611,R.1: position of,677.
adversari with Dat.,346.R.2.
adversative sentences,483-491;parti-
cles,483;c m,580.NN.1 and 2,587;
q i,634.
ad vers s gives obj.toward which,359,
R.2; as adv.,415; as prep.,416,2.
advertere anim m,with Acc.,342.
ae pron nciation of,1 and N.; weaken-
ing of,8,1.
aedes omitted,with Gen.,362.R.3.
aeq alis with Gen.or Dat.,359,R.1.
aeq are with Dat.,346,N.3.
aeq m with est instead of sit,254.R.1;
aeq e with Abl.,296,N.1; aeq o after
Comp.,398.N.1; with atq e,643.N.3;
aeq e-aeq e,482,3.
aes decl.of,47,6.
aestimare with Gen.,379; with Abl.,
380.N.1; with Abl.and ex,402.R.2.
aetas in Abl.of Time,393,R.5;idaeta-
tis,336.N.2.
aetern m as adv.,336.N.1.
afficere with Abl.of Means,401.N.3.
affinis with Dat.or Acc.,359.R.1; with
Gen.,374.N.2.
affitrmare with inf.,527,8.2.
age with PL,211.N.2; with Impv.,269;
age vero,487.N.3;id ago,with t,
546.N.1.
agency s ffixes for,181,1.
agent in Abl.with ab,214,401; in Abl.,
214,R.2; in Dat.,215,354,355; and In-
str ment,401,R.1.
aggredi with Inf.,423.2.N.2.
aio 175,1; s pplied from nego,447,R.;
introd ces O.R.,648.R.2;with Inf.,527,
R.2.
alaris and alarms,84,2.
Alcaic meas re,791,799.
Alcmanian meas re,786.
all forms indef.prons.,111,1.
alien s poss.of ali s,108; with Gen.
or Dat.,359,it.1 and N.2.
aliq ando aliq ando,482.N.1.
aliq ant m with ante,403.N.4.
[506 GENERAL INDEX.]
aliq is and aliq i 107; with Pl.vrb.,
211.N.2; syntax of,314; with n merals,
314,R.2,i; for q is and q i,107.N.1,and
315,N.1;with two negs.,315.N.1;per
aliq em stare,with ne,q omin s,
648,N.1.
ali s decl.of,76,108; reciprocal ali s
ali m,221.R.1; with Abl.,319; for
alter,ceteri,ib.N.1;besides,ib.N.2;
alia as Acc.of Respect,338,2; aliter
with Abl.of Meas re,403.N.3; ali s
atq e ali s,477,N.O; alias-alias,482,
l;t m-alias,alias-pler mq e,
interd m-alias,ib.N.2;alio alio,
alibi-alibi,ib.2;aliter-aliter,ib.
3; aliter strengthens sin,592; followed
by q am,nisi,praetor,643.N.4;with
atq e,643.N.3.
allec decl.of,68,12.
alphabet 1.So nds of letters,ib.RR.
1-3; names of letters,ib.N.
alter decl.of,76,108; for sec nd s,
96,5;alter alter m,reciprocal,221.R.
1; and ali s,319.
alter ter decl.of,76,108.
altit de with Acc.of Extent,335,R.1.
alt s with Acc.of Extent,335.R.1.
amare 122;amabO,with Impv.,269;
amans,437.N.1;with Gen.,375,N.2.
amb in composition,9,4.
ambire conj.of,169.2.R.1.
ambo decl.of.,73.R.,95,108; and ter-
q e,292.
amic s with Gen.or Dat.,359,R.1.
ampli s with q am omitted,296,R.1.
an in disj nctive q estions,457,1;in
phrases,ib.2;strengthened by ne,ib.
1,N.2; as a simple interrog.particle,ib.
1,N.3; in second part of a disj nctive
q estion,458;anne,ib.: and a t,ib.
s.4; annon and necne,459; forn m
or ne in indirect q estion,460.1.N.1;
or 497.
anacol thon 697.
Anacreontic meas re,819-'
anacr sis and anacr stic scheme,739
anapaestic foot,734; rhythm,736; va-
rieties of,777-782; s bstit tes for,777.
anaphora 485,N.2; 636,N.4: 682.
angl with Acc.and Inf.,533,R.1.
angiport s decl.of,68,5.
animadvertere with inf.,527.R.1.
animals as instr ments or agents,214,
R.2.
anim s with t,646.N.2;anim m ad-
vertere,with ACC..342: animi as Loc.,
374,N.7; in animo esse,with inf.,422,
N.5.
Anio decl.of,41,4.
ann ere with Dat.,etc.,347.R.2.
ante in composition,9,4;vba.cpd.will
take Acc.or Dat.,331,347; with Abl.of
Standard or Acc.of Extent,403.N.4;
position of,413.R.1 and N.3; as adv.,
415;as prep.,416,3;with Acc.Ger.,
432 and N.1; with part.,437.N.2.
anteoq am see anteq am.
antecedent action,561-o67;definite,
613;repetition of,615;incorporation
of,616;indefinite,621;def.or indef.
with Indic.or S bjv.,631,1,and 2.
antecedere with Dat.,etc.,347,R.2.
antecellere with Dat.,etc.,347.R.2; with
Abl.of Respect,397.N.2.
anteire with Dat.,etc.,347.R.2.
antepen lt 11.
anteq am with Indic.,574-o76;with
Pr.,575;with Pf.and F t.Pf.,676;
with S bjv.,577.
anterior 87,8.
aorist forms on so,sim,131,4,6.; defi-
nition,224;P re Pf.as Aor.,236,N.;
Hist.Pf.,239;Pl pf.,241.N.1;Pf.as
Potential of Past,258.N.2.
apodosis 589; omission of,601; in com-
parative sentences,602;in Indic.in
Unreal Conditions,597,R.3;after vrb.
req iring S bjv.,ift.R.5.
aposiopesis 691.
apparere as cop.vb.,206,N.1;with
Nom,and Inf.,528.N.2;with t,553,4,
appellare with two Accs.,340; with two
Noms.,206.
appointing vbs.of,with Dat.of Ger.,
429,2.
apposition 320; concord in,321; excep
tions,ib.RR.,NN.; Partitive,322,323;
Restrictive,322;Distrib tive,323;
whole and part,ib.N.2;to sentence,
324;predicate,325;Gen.of,361;to
names of Towns,386.R.1;to Loc.,411,
R.3; pron.incorporated,614,R.4; s bst.
incorporated,616,2.
appropinq are with Dat.,346.R.2.
app rtenance s ffix of,182,6.
apt s constr.,552,R.2;with q i and
S bjv.,631,1.
ap d 416,4.
[GENERAL INDEX.507]
arbitrari with Inf.,527.R.2.
arbitrat as Abl.of Ca se,408.N.1.
arbor -decl.of,45,N.
arcere with Abl.of Separation,390,2,N.2.
Archilochian meas re,788,800.
arc s decl.of,68,5.
ardere with inf.,423.2.N.2;ardens,to
express ca se,408.N.2.
ardor with t,646.N.2.
arg ere with Gen.,378.R.1; with Inf.,
528.N.1.
Aristophanic meas re,793.
arrangement of words,671-683;of
cla ses,684-687;grammatical or rhe-
torical,672;ascending and descending,
673;of simple sentences,674;of inter-
rog.sentences,675;of adj.and Gen.,
676; of ad vs.,677; of preps.,678; of par-
ticles,679;of attrib tes,680;of oppo-
sites,681; of pairs,682;anaphoric and
chiastic,682;poetical,683;periods,
685; historical and oratorical,687.
arridere with Cat.,etc.,347.R.2.
artisan s ffixes for,181,3.
as decl.of,48,R.
Asclepiadean meas re,802,803.
asking vbs.of,with two Accs.,339 and
R.1.N.1; with Inf.or t,546 and R.3.
aspergere with Dat.and Acc.,or Acc.
and Abl.,348,R.1.
aspicere with inf.,527.R.1; aspect ,
436.N.1.
aspirates 6,2,R.
assentiri-with Dat.,346.R.2; 347.R.2.
asseq i with t,553,1.
-assere as Inf.ending,131,4,6.4.
asseverations in S bjv.,262; in F t.
Indic.,ib.N.; with nisi,591,6,2.
assidere with Dat.,etc.,347.R.2.
assimilations of vowels,8,4;of conso-
nants,9,1,2,3;of preps.,9,4;of Voc.,
211.R.3.
ass giacere with Abl.or Dat.,401.N.2;
with Inf.,423.2.N.2.
ass escere with Abl.or Dat.,401.N.2;
with Inf.,423.2.N.2.
ast in Abl.of Manner,399.N.1.
asyndeton after demonstrative,307,
R.4; in coordination,473,N.,474,N.,483,
N.,492.N.
at se of,488 and NN.: ast,488.N.1.
atq e for q am,296.N.4;syntax of,
477 and notes : adds a third member,
481,N.: with adjs.of Likeness,etc.,643;
for q am after neg.Comp.,644,N.
2.
atq i 489; atq in,ib.N.1.
attendance Abl.of,392;with c m,ib.
R.1; instr mental,ib.R.2.
attinet with Inf.,422.N.4; restrictions
with,627.R.2.
attraction in Gender,211.R.5;in mood,
508,4,629; of vb.of Saying into S bjv.,
541.N.3,585.N.3,630.N.3;of Rel.,617;
inverse,617.N.2;of mood in general,
662,663.
attrib tive 288;concord of adj.,289;
with two or more s bsts.,290; position
of,291;s perlatives of Order and Se-
q ence,291,1,8.2;pred.,325;vario s
pec liarities of,ib.RR.; omitted with
cognate Acc.,333,2,N.1;with Abl.of
Time,393,R.5;omitted with Abl.of
Manner,399.N.1; with Inf.,421.N.2; with
part.,437.R.
ail pron nciation of,4;weakening of,
8,1.
a ctorem esse,with Dat.,346.N.5;with
Inf.,527.R.2;with t,546.N.1.
a ctoritas with t,546.N.1;a ctori-
tate as Abl.of Ca se,408.N.1.
a dere with Inf.,423,2,N.2.
a dire like Gr.ako ein,206.N.2; a di-
ens,with Dat.,346,N.5;with c m and
S bjv.,580.R.2; with Inf.and part.,
527.R.1,and N.1;with rel.and Indic.,
467,N.; a dits,436.N.1.
a sc ltare with Dat.,346.R.2.
a t disting ished from an,438.N.4; se
of,493 and notes; a t a t with PL,
285.N.1: s bdivides a eg.,445.
a tem position of,413.N.3,484.R.; syn-
tax of,484; in lively q estions,ib.N.1;
strengthens sed,485.N.3,592.
a xiliari with Dat.,346.R.2.
a xiliaris and a xiliari s,84,2.
a xiliary vbs.with Inf.,280,1,6.
avere with Inf.,423.2.N.2.
avers s with Dat.,359.R.5.
Baccar 68,12.
Bacchic loot,734; meas res,811-814.
balne m 68,3.
becoming vbs.of,with two Noms.,206.
beginning vbs.of,with Inf.,423,and N.2.
believing vbs.of,with Acc.and Inf.,526
and 527; with Nom.,528.
bellare with Dat.,346.N.6.
[508.GENERAL INDEX.]
bell m in Abl.of Time,394.R;belli
as Loc.,411,R.2.
belonging s ffixes for,182,5.
benevol s compared,87,4.
beseeching vba.of,with t,546.
bewaring vbs.of,with ne,648.
bibere with dare,421.N.1.6.
bidding vbs.of,with Cat.,346.
bii g s and bii gis,844-
bimatris 85,1-
bini for d o,346.R.2.
blandiri with Dat.,346.R.2.
boards with Dat.Ger..429,1.
bon s comparison,90;c i bono,356,
E.I;bene,as adv.of Degree,439,N.2,
and 3.
books omit in with Abl.,387.
bos-decl.of,62,7.
brachylogy 689.
breathings 6,2,A .
b ying .vbs.of,with Gen.or Abl.,379,
C so nd of,L.R.1; name of,I,N.
cadere with Abl.of Separation,390,2,N.
2.
caes ra -defined,760;varieties,751;
masc.and fem.,752;b colic,753,R.2;
in Iamb.Sen.,759,N.2; in Iam.Trim.
Cat.,761.N.; in Iam.Trim.Cla d.,762,
N.4;in Iam.Oct.,763.N.b.; in Iam.
Sept.,764.N.2;in Troch.Sept.,770,N.2:
in Dac.Hex.,784.N.2 : in alcaic,791,
798,799,N.1;in Glyconic,795; in Phalae-
cean,796.N.3;in Sapphic,797.N.2,804 :
in Archilochian,800,N.; in Asclepia-
dean,802.N.1.
calling vbs.of,with two Accs.,340; with
two Noms.,206.
Calx decl.of,70.D.
campi as Loc.,411.R.2.
can tica defined,747; in early Latin,
824; in later Latin,826.
capability djs.of,with Inf.,421.N.1.C.
capacity adjs.of,with Dat.Ger.,429,2;
s ffixes for,182,2.
capi with Gen.of Charge,878.R.1.
capital decl.of,78,R.
cap t decl.of,63,8; est with Inf.,422,
N.2.
cardinal n mbers 94;Gen.Pl.of,96,
R.2;collective SG.of,16.; d o and
ambo,292 : with sing li,296: for Dis-
trib tive,295.N.; poeition of,676.R.2.
carere with Abl.,405; with Gen.,383,1,
N.2.
caro decl.of,41,4; gender of,43,1.
Carthagini as Loc.,411.R.1.
earns with Abl.of Price,404,N.2.
cases defined,23;strong and weak,
recti and obliq i,24;case-forms,26;
endings,26,2.
cassis decl.of,68,12.
cas -as Abl.of Mariner,399,N.1.
catalexis 742.
ca sa with Gen.,373; with poss.pron.,
ib.R.2; with Gen.Ger.,428.R.2; ca sa,
in phrases with t,646.N.2;ca sam
vincere,333,2,8.
CAUSAL SENTENCES coordinate,498;par-
ticles,498;syntax of s bordinate,538-
642;general division,638,539;with
q od,etc.,and Indic.,640;with a od,
etc,,and S bjv.,841; with q ia,ib.
N.1;rejected reason,ib.N.2;with
q anddq e,ib.N.5;with vbs.of Emo-
tion,642;si for q od,ib.N.1;with
C m,680.RR.1 and 2,686;with tam-
q am,etc.,641.N.4,602,N.4;relative,
634;cla ses in O.O.,665.
ca sation vbs.of,with part.,637;with
t,553,1; pass,with t,ib.3.
ca sative verbs formation of,191,4.
ca se Abl.of,408;vario s expressions
for,ib.NN.; preventing,ib.N.4;exter-
nal,te.N.6; represented by part.,666,
670,2.
cavere with S bjv.for Impv.,271,2;
with Dat.,346,N.2; constr ctions with,
548,NN.1 and 3.
Ce appended to iste,104.3.N.2;to ille,
ib.N.3.
cedere with Dat.,346,R.2;with Abl.of
Separation,390,2,N.2.
cedo defective,175,6.
celare with two Accs.,or de,339 and R.
1 and 3,N.1.
celer comparison of,87,1,and N.
censere with Inf.,627.R.2;with t,646,
N.1;censeo,yes,471,2.
centiman s defective,86,2.
cernere with inf.,527,R.1.
certare with Dat.,346.N.6; rem cer-
tare,333,2,s.
cert s strengthens q idam,313.R.3;
with Gen.,374.N.O;certe,certo,yes,
471,1; certe,strengthens at,488.N.2-,
certi s(q am),with inf.,422.N.3-,
[GENERAL INDEX.509]
cert m eat,with inf.,423.2.N.2; cer-
tiorem facere,with inf.,527.R.2.
cessare with Inf.,423,2,N.2.
(ceter s) Nom.masc.wanting,74,R.2,
86,1; se of ceter m,491; cetera sed
partitively,291.R.2; ali s instead,319,
N.1: as Acc.of Respect,338,2.
charge in Gen.with J dicial verbs,
378;with nomine,ib.R.2;in Abl.,ib.
R.3.
chiasm s 682 and R.
choosing -vbs.of,with two Noms.,206;
with two Accs.,340;End with Dat.or
ad,ib.R.2;vbs.of,with Final Dat.,
356.N.2.
choriambic feet,734;rhythms,801.
cingl with Acc.,338.N.2.
circa position of,413.R.1 : as adv.,415;
as prep.,416,5;with Acc.Ger.,432 and
N.1.
circiter as prep.,416,6.
circ m in composition,9,4;vbs.cpd.
with,take Acc.,331; never repeated,ib.
R.2; as adv.,415: as prep.,416,5.
circt ndare with Dat.and Acc.,or Acc.
and Abl.,348.R.1.
circ mf ndere with Acc.and Dat.,or
Acc.and Abl.,348,R.1.
with direct q estion,467,
circ mstantial c m 585-588.
cis as prep.,416,7.
citerior 87,2 and 7.
citi s q am constr.after,644,R.3.
citra as adv.,415; as prep.,416,7.
civitas concord of,in pred.,211,R.6.
clam as adv.,415; as prep.,416,8.
clanc l m as prep.,416,8.
cliv s decl.of,67,2.
clothing vbs.of,with Acc.of Respect,
338.N.8; with Abl.of Means,401.N.1.
cl ere with Nom.and Inf.,528.N.1.
coepi 175,5,a,and N.; with Inf.,423,
N.3.
cogere with Inf.,423,2,N.2; with t,553,
2; concl de,with Inf.,546.R.1,553,2,N.
cogitare with Inf.,423.2.N.2.
cogitatio in phrases with t,557.R.
cognate Acc sative 333,2;similar
phrases,ib.R.; with second Acc.,341;
with prohibere,inhere,ib.N.2.
cognat s with Gen.or Dat.,359,it.1.
cognitio in phrases with t,557,R.
cognomen esse with Dat..349.R.5.
cognoscere with inf.,527,R.1;cognit
as S p.,436,N.1.
coincidence constr.with,513.N.3.
cOire with Dat.,346.N.6.
cOlligere with Inf.,627.R.2.
collocare with in and Abl.,385,R.1;
with in and Acc.,ib.N.2.
coins decl.of,61.N.5.
comitari with Dat.,346.N.2.
COmitilS as Abl.of Time,393.R.5.
commiserari with ACC.,377,^.2.
committere with Acc.Ger.,430.N.1;
with t,548.N.1.
commovere with t,563,2; commot s,
to express ca se,408.N.2.
Comm ne as s bst.,211.R.4; in phrases
with t,557.R.; comm nis,with Gen.
or Dat.,359.R.1.
comparative in ior,86; in entior,87,4,5;
lacking,87,9; with q am or Abl.,296
and RR.; omission of q am,ib.R.4; age
with nat s,ib.R.5; with opinione,ib.
R.6; of Disproportion,298; omission of
t after q am,ib.R.2; restriction of,
300; strengthened,301; do bled,ib.;
with Part.Gen.,372 and R.2; with Abl.
of Respect,398 and R.; with Abl.of
Meas re,403.N.1; with Abl.Ger.,431.N.
2; with q am q i,631,3.
COMPARATIVE SENTENCES 638-644; divis-
ion of,638: moods in,639; vb.omitted
in,640;in dependent cla ses,641; cor-
relatives in,642; the more the more,ib.
R.2; with atq e,643; with q am,644.
comparison of adjectives,86;pec liar-
ities,87; by magis and maxima,ib.6;
by pl s and pl rim m,ib 6.N.2; de-
fective,87,2,7,9; of participles,88,89; of
advs.,93; irreg lar,90; standard of,
omitted,297; of q alities,299; condi-
tional sentences of,602.
compelling vbs.of,with t,553,2.
compensatory lengthening 9,6,a.
comperce with Inf.for Impv.,271,2,N.2.
comperire with Gen.,378.R.1; with Inf.,
527.R.1.
C0mpesce with Inf.for Impv.,271,2,
N.2.
complere with Gen.,383,1.
COmplex s as a Present,282,N.
compos with Gen.,374,N.3.
composition of words,193-200;divis-
ions,193; of s bsts.,194-198; of vbs.,
199,200.
[510.GENERAL INDEX.]
compo nds attrib.,197,1;dependent,
ib.2;poss.,198;q antity in,716.
con see c m.
conari with Inf.,423.2.N.2.
conat s defective,68,5.
concedere sed personally in pass.,217,
N.2; with Cat.,346,R.2; with Inf.,423,2,
N.2; 532.N.1; with Acc.Get.,430.N.1;
with lit,548.N.1.
conceinng vbs.of,with obj.cla se,523.
concessive S bjv.,264 : com,580.NN.1
and 2,587; q i,634; part.,609,667,670,4.
CONCESSIVE SENTENCES 603-609;with
etsi,etc.,604; with q amq am,605;
with q amvis,etc.,606; with licet,
607; with t,608; representatives of.
609.
concl dere with inf.,527.R.2.
concord 210; pred.with s bj.,211; vio-
lations of,ib.RR.1-o,NN.1-3; of anbj.and
pred.m ltiplied,285-287; of app.,321;
ne t.for persons,323,N.3; of rel.,614.
conc piens with Gen.,375.N.2.
conc rrere with Dat.,346,N.6.
condecet with Inf.,422.N.4.
condemning vbs.of,with Gen.,378; with
other constrs.,ib.R.2; with Abl.,ib.R.
3; enforced destination,ib.R.4.
condicio in phrases with t,546,N.2.
condition s ffixes for,181,8; indicated
by a q estion,453,M.3; represented by
part.,667,670,4.
conditional c m 683-
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 589-602;divis-
ion of,589; sign,590;negatives,591:
two excl ding,592: eq ivalents of Pro-
tasis,593: classification of,594.LOGICAL,
595; in O.O.,ib.R.1; with S bjv.,ib.RR.
2,3; sive-sive,ib.R.4; siq idem,ib.R.
5; simoao,ib.R.6; phrases,ib.N.1; range
of tenses,ib.N.2.IDEAL,596; for n-
real,ib.R.1;shift to nreal,ib.R.2; after
non poss m,ib R.3; in O.O.,ib.R.5.
UNREAL,597; Impf.of Past,ib.R.1; In-
dic.in Apodosis,ib.RR.2,3; in O.O.,ib.
R.4; after a vb.req iring S bjv.,ib.R.
5; absq e,ib.N.1.INCOMPLETE,598-601:
omission of sign,598; of vb.of Prot.,
599: of Prot.,600 ;of Apod.,601: of COM-
PARISON,602; in O.O.general consider-
ation,656: Logical,657; Ideal,658; Un-
real.659; Pf.Inf.and pot isse,ib.N-
Cond cit with Dat.,346,R.2; with Gen.,
379; with Acc.Ger.,430.N.1.
confid with Inf.,533.R.1; with t ,
553,3.
Confidere with Dat.,346.R.2 and N.2;
with Abl.,40L.N.6; with Inf.,527.R.2.
confirmare with inf.,527.R.2.
congr ere with Dat.,etc.,347,s.2.
conj gation defined,17; systems of,120:
first,122; second,123; irreg lar second,
124; third,125; third in io,126: fo rth.
127; deponents,128: periphrastic,129;
notes on; 130,131: change in,136.
conj nction defined,16.7.and R.3.
coni ngere with Dat.or c m,359.N.3.
CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES exceptional se-
q ence in,513; syntax of,551-o58; gen-
eral division,551 : P re,552: tant m
abest t,ib.R.1; with dign s,etc.,ib.
R.2;with idea of Design,16.R.3: t
non,witho t,ib.R.4;Complementary,
553: vbs.of Effecting,553; vbs.of Ca -
sation,ib.1; of Compelling,etc.,ib.2:
Happening,etc.,ib.3; impersonals,ib.t;
vbs.of Hindering,554-o56; q in with
vbs.of Preventing,555,1; with vbs.of
Do bt,ib.2; q in = t non,556; non
d bito q in,ib.RR.1,2;Explanatory
t,557; Exclamatory q estion,558; rel.
sentences,631; with def.antecedent,ib.
1; with indef.antecedent,ib.2: with
Comp.,ib.3: with adj.,ib.4: with q in,
632; Indic.for S bjv.,16.2.RR.1.2.
consentane m with inf.,422.N.3.
Consentire with Dat.,etc.,347.R.2.
conseq i and conseq ens,with t,553,
1 and 4.
considere with in and Abl.,385,R.1.
consili m in Abl.of Ca se,408.N.1;in
phrases,with Inf.,422.N.2,and 428.N.2;
with dare and t,546.NN.1 and 2.
consistere with Abl.of Material,396,
N.1.
consonants 6; do ble,ib.3; so nds of,7;
phonetic variations in,9; combinations
of,10.R.1.
censors with Gen.,374.N.2.
conspicari with Inf.,527,R.1.
conspicere with inf.,527.R.1.
constare with Dat.,etc.,347,s.2; with
Gen.,379; with Abl.of Material,396,N.
1; with Nom.and Inf.,528.N.2.
constit ere with in and Abl.,385,R.1;
with Inf.,423,2,N.2; with t,546.N.1.
constr etiO ad stns m,211.R.1,N.3; prae-
gnans,699.
[GENERAL INDEX.511.]
cons escere with l f.,423.2.N.2; con-
S et s,with Inf.,421,N.1,c.
Cons et do in Abl.of Manner,399.N.1;
in phrases,with Inf.,422.N.2,or t,557,
R.
cons lere with two Accs.,339 and N.1;
with Dat.,346.R.2 and N.2; boni con-
s lere,380,N.2.
contemporaneo s action 538-o73; in Ex-
tent,569,570: in Limit,571-o73.
contendere with Dat.,346.N.6; with
Inf.,423.2.N.2; with t,546.N.1.
contineri with Abl.of Material,396.N.1;
content s,with Abl.,401.N.6.
contingit with t,553,3; contigit,
with Dat.,346,R.2; seq ence after,513,
N.2; attraction of pred.after,535.R.3.
contin ance vbs.of,with Inf.,423,and
N.2.
contra position of,413.R.1; as adv.,415;
as prep.,416,9; with atq e,643,N.3.
contracting vbs.of,with Acc.Ger.,430.
contraction of shorts,732.
Contrari s with Gen.or Dat.,359,R.1:
with atq e,643.N.3.
contrasts with hiC - ille,307,RR.1,2;
with ipse,311.R.1; with aliq is,314;
alter-alter,etc.,323.
convenire indic.for S bjv.,254,R.1;
with Dat.,346,N.2,347,R.2.
convicting vbs.of,with Gen.,378; other
constr.,ib.R.2.
coordination defined,472; witho t con-
j nction,472.R.; syntax of,473-o03;
cop lative,474-482; adversative,483-
491;disj nctive,492-497;ca sal and
illative,498-o03.
Copia with Inf.,428.N.2.
cop la with pred.,205; itself a pred.,ib.
N.; omitted,209; agrees with pred.,
211,R.1,EX.C.
cop lative vbs.,206; with Nom.and Inf.,
ib.R.3.Particles,474;omitted,ib.N.,
481.Sentences,474-482; se of neg.to
connect,480.
cor decl.of,63,8;cordi est,with Inf.,
422.N.5.
coram as adv.,415; as prep.,417,3.
corn s decl.of,68,5.
corp s decl.of,48-
correlatives 109-111;pronominal adjs.,
109; advs.,110; cpds.,Ill; coordinating
particles,as t m-t m,alias-alias,
etc.,482; of Rel.,618; absorption of,619,
621; position of,820; in comparative
sentences,642; omitted,642,3.
correptio 744.
cos defective,70,D.
co ntries in Acc.,with prep.,337.R.1;
witho t,ib.N.1; in Abl.,391,N.
crassit de with Acc.of Extent,335.R.1.
crass s with Acc.of Extent,335,R..1.
crastim as Loc.,411.N.1.
creare with two Accs.,340;with two
Noms.,206.
creation vbs.of,with Inf.,280,1,b.
Credere personal in pass.,217.N.1; with
Dat.,346.R.2;with Inf.,527.R.2;credi-
t r,with Inf.,528.R.2.
cretic foot,734;s bstit tions for,806;
rhythms,808-810.
cr ciari-with Inf.,533.R.1.
c i s -as poss.pron.,106.N.4.
C lpa with Epexegetical Gen.,361,2.
c m -and q om,7;in composition,9,4;
with s bst.to form cpd.s bj.,285.N.2;
vbs.cpd.with take Acc.,or Dat.,331,
347;with Abl.of Attendance,392,and
R.1; to indicate Time,394.N.2; with Abl.
of Manner,399; with nnat ral prod c-
tions,400,ii.2; position of,413,R.1; with
Abl.Ger.,433;as prep.,417,4;with eo
and q od,525,2,N.2;(prim m),as
soon as,561-563;Ca sal,,564,N.2;with
Iterative action,566,567;with S bjv.,
ib.N.; derivation of,578;general view
of,579;Temporal,580; f it c m,ib.
R.1; memini c m,ib.R.2; with Lapses
of Time,ib.R.3; in early Latin,ib.N.1;
Inverse,581;Explicative,582;Condi-
tional,583,590,N.3; Iterative,584; with
S bjv.,ib.R.; Circ mstantial,585-o88;
Historical,585; Ca sal,586; Concessive
and Adversative,687: c m non = with-
o t,ib.R.2; c m t m,688; mood,ib.
2; c m interim,with Inf.,635.N.2; with
Indic.retained in O.O.,655,R,3.
-c mq e makes general relatives,111,2.
c ncta Acc.of Respect,338,2; may omit
in with Abl.of Place,388.
c nctari with Inf.,423,2,N.2.
c pere with Pf.Inf.,280,2,e,N.; with
Dat.,346,R.2; c pienti est,353.N.2;
with Inf.,423.2,N.2; 538.N i;
with Gen.,376.N.2.
c piditas with t,546.N.2.
c pid s with Gen.,374.N.5.
c press s decl.of,68,5.
[512 GENERAL INDEX.]
c ra with t,546.N.2;c rae est,with
inf.,422,N.5.
C rare with Inf.,423,2,N.2;with Acc.
Ger.,430.N.1;with part.,537.N.2; with
t,546.N.1; c ra t for Impv.,271,1,
and 2.N.2.
c rric lo as Abl.of Manner,399.N.1.
Dactylic foot,734;s bstit tions.783;
rhythm,736;rhythms,783-789.
damnas indeclinable,85,C.
daps defective,70,D.
dare Pf.dedrot,131,6;Pr.dan nt,
133,iv.,N.2;with ad or Dat.,345.R.2;
with Final Dat.,356.it.2; operam,with
Dat.Ger.,429.N.1,or t,546.N.1;with
Acc.Ger.,430.N.1;n pt m,etc.,435,
N.1;with Pf.part.,537.N.2; permit,with
t,553,2.
DATIVE--defined,23,3;1st decl.in ai,a,
ab s,as,eis,29,NN.3,4; 3d decl.in ei
e,37,2; 4th decl.in b s, el, ,61.R.,
and N.2;5th decl., ncommon,63,R.1;
in 8,1,ib.N.2; in Greek s bsts.,66.N.2;
in adjs.in ai,a,ab s,is(for iis),75,
NN.2,6;in i of pron.adjs.,76,2;with
act.vb. nchanged in pass.,217,346,
R.1; gives End with vbs.of Taking,etc.,
340.R.2; with ei and vae,343,1,N.2; of
Indirect Obj.,344;with trans,vbs.,
345;with vbs.of Taking Away,ib.R.1;
and pro,ib.R.2;with intrans,vbs.,
346; with cpd.vbs.,347; with vbs.cpd.
with de,ex,ab,ib.R.5;and Acc.with
vbs.of Giving and P tting,348: of Pos-
sessor,349; of Personal Interest,350;
Ethical,351;of Reference,352,353;
with participles,353;of Agent,215,
354; Do ble,356; with s bsts.,357: Lo-
cal,358;with adjs.,359;with cpds.of
di,dis,390,2,N.5; of Ger.,429.
de_with Abl.for second Acc.,339,NN.2,3;
vbs.cpd.with take Dat.,347,R.5;with
Abl.of Separation,390,1,and 2;to indi-
cate Time,394.N.2; with Abl.of Origin,
395,and N.2;with Abl.of Respect,397,
N.1; with Abl.of Ca se,408.N.3: position
of,413.R.1;as prep.,416,5;with Abl.
Ger.,433;with part.,437.N.2;de eo
q od,525,2,N.2.
death deponent vb.of as act.in Abl.Abs.,
410.N.1.
debere Indic.for S bjv.,254,R.1: Impf.
as tense of Disappointment,ib.R.2;
with Pf.Inf..280,2,6,and N.3: with Inf.,
423.2.N.2.
decere with Pf.Inf.,280,2,b.R.1;with
Dat.,346.N.3;with Abl.of Respect,
397 N.2.
decernere with Inf.,423.2.N.2,and 546,
R.1;with t,546.N.1.
declension defined,17;varieties of,27 :
r les for,28: 1st,29.30: 2d,31-33; stems
in -ro and -ero,32: 3d,35-60: stems of,
35;formation of Nom.SG.,36;liq id
stems,39-46; sibilant,47-49; m te,50-
55; vowel,56-o9; 4th,61,62; 5th,63,64;
vary between 5th and 3d,63,R.2;of
Greek s bsts.,65;adjs.of 1st and 3d,
73;of pron.adjs.,76; parts.,80.
decor s with Abl.,397.N.2.
decreeing vbs.of,with Dat.Ger.,429,2.
dedecet with inf.,422,x.1.
deesse with Dat.,349.R.4.
deferre with Gen.of Charge,378.R.1.
defess s-with Inf.,421,N.1,c.
deficere with Acc.,346,N.3.
defigere with in and Abl.,385,R.1.
degree advs.of,modify other advs.,459,
N.2.
deicere with Abl.,390.2.N.3.
delectari with Acc.,346.N.3.
deliberative q estions 265;S bjv.in
O.O.,651.R.2.
deliberat m est with inf.,423.2.N.2.
delici m decl.of,68,3.
deligere with two Accs.,340;with two
Noms.,206.
demanding vbs.of,with t,546.
demergere with in and Abl.,385,R.1.
demirari with inf.,533.R.1.
demonstrare with Inf.,627.R.2.
demonstratives 104;attracted in Gen-
der,211,R.5,and N.3;syntax of,305-
307 : hic,305 : iste,306; ille,307;hic
ille,ib.RR.1,2;advs.similarly sed,
ib.R.3;strengthened by q idem,ib.
R.4;reflexive of,521,R.5;followed by
q od,525,2;contin e a rel.cla se,
636.N.1; position of,676,R.1.
demovere with Abl.,390.2.N.3.
denominative 179,2,and N.; Pf.of vbs.,
134,v.; formation of vbs.,192.
dense growths s ffixes for,181,11.
dentals 6,1: s ffixes with,186.
depellere with Abl.,390.2.N.3.
deponent 113;conj gation,128; list of,
163-166; semi-,167; how sed,220.
[GENERAL INDEX.513]
deprecari with n g,548.N.1.
deprehendi with Gen.of Charge,378,
R.1.
depriving vbs.of,with Abl.,405.N-
derivative words 179,2.
descent s ffixes for,182,11.
desiderare-with inf.,423.2.N.2.
desiderative verbs formation of,191,3.
desinere with Inf.,423,2,XN.2,3.
desire adjs.of,with Gen.,374;vbs.of,
with Inf.,281,c.; 423,2,NN.2,4; seq ence
after,515.it.3;with Acc.and Inf.,532;
with t.ib N.1-4;with part.,537.N.1;
with complementary Final cla se,646.
desistere with Abl.,390,2,N.3.
desperare with Dat.,346.R.2;with Inf.,
527,R.2.
determinative prono ns 103;syntax of,
308.
deterrere-with Inf.,423.2.N.2;with ne,
548.N.1;with q omin s,549.N.1.
det rbare with Abl.,390,2,N,3.
de s decl.of,33.R.6.
dexter decl.of,74.R.1;Comp.of,87,1,
R.1;ib.2 and 7,
diaeresis 6,753.
dialysis 724.
diastole 721.
dica defective,70.D.
dicere with two Noms.in pass.,206;
omission of,209.N.5;dixerat as Aor.,
241.N.1;dicat,dixerit aliq is,257,?;
with Acc.and Inf.,527.R.1;with Nom.
and Inf.,628,and N.1;dicit r and
dict m est,ib.-2;not confined to 3d
person,ib.N.4;with t,546.N.1;dic,
with Indic.q estion,467.N.; dict ,in
S p.,436.N.
[dicio] defective,70.D.
die -as Loc.,91,3;as Abl.of Time,393,
R.5;di ,by day,91,2f.
difference meas re of,403;vbs.of,with
Abl.,ib.N.1.
differre with Dat.,346.N.6.
difficile comparison of,87,3;with est
for S bjv.,254.R.1; with Inf.,421,N.1,c.
diffic lty adjs.of,with Abl.S p.,436.N.2.
diffidere with Dat.,346.R.2,and N.2;
not Abl.,401.N.6.
dignari with Abl.of Respect,397.N.2.
dign s with Gen.,374.N.10;with Abl.
of Respect,397.N.2;constr.after,652,
R.2;q i or t,with S bjv.,631,1,and
R.2.
33
dil vi m heteroclite,68,6.
dimin tive s ffixes for,181,12,182,12;
vbs.,192,2.
diphthongs 4 and N.; length of,14;
q antity of,706.
dis in composition,9,4.
disagreement vbs.of,with Dat.,346.N.6.
discere pass,of docere,339.N.4;with
Inf.,527.R.1.
discrepare with Dat.,346.N.G.
discr ciari with Inf.,533,R.1.
disg st adjs.of,with Gen.,374.
disinclination adj.of,for advs.,325,R.O.
disj nctive -particles,492;sentences,
492-497; particles omitted,492,N.; q es-
tions,462; forms of,468; indirect,460,2.
displeas re vbs.of,with Dat.,346;adjs.
of,with Abl.S p.,436.N.2.
displicere with Dat.,346.R.2;displi-
cet,with Inf.,422.N.4.
disproportion by q am pro,q i, t,
etc.,298;by positive,with preps.,ib.
R.; omission of t after q am,ib.N.2.
disp det with Gen.,377.N.1;with Inf.,
422.N.4.
dissentire with Dat.,346.N.6.
dissimilation of Consonants,9,5.
dissimilis Comp.of,87,3.
dissim lare with inf.,627.R.2.
distaedet with Gen.,377.N.1.
distare with Acc.,or a and Abl.,335,R.
2;with Dat.,346,N.6;with Abl.of
Meas re,403,N.1.
distrib tives 97;with pl ralia tan-
t m,ib.R.3;for cardinals,ib.N.1,295,
N.; syntax of,296; in apposition,323.
diverbi m 747.
dives Comp.of,87,10.
divinam rem facere with Abl.of
Means,401,N.4.
docere with two Accs.,or de,339,and R.
1; with ab,ib.R.2; doct s,ib.R.2,and
N.4; discere as pass.,ib.N.4;constr.
after,423.N.6.
doing vbs.of,take obj.cla se,623,and
526,1,and N.4.
dolere with Inf.,633.R.1;dolet,with
Dat.,346.N.1;with Dat.and Inf.,633,
R.1.
dolo as Abl.of Manner,399.N.1.
dom s decl.,61.R.2,68,5; Acc.as Limit
of Motion,337; Abl.of Separation,390,
2; domi,411.R.2; with Gen.of poss.
pron.,
[514.GENERAL INDEX.]
donare with Dat.and Acc.,or Acc.and
Abl.,348.R.1.
donec derivation,568 and R.: of com-
plete coextension,with Indic.,569;
ntil,with Indic.,571; inverse,id.N.6;
with S bjv.,572; to express s bordina-
tion,ib.R.
denic m 568; range of,571.N.4.
doniq e range of,571.N.4.
do bt vbs.of,with q in,555,2.
dropping vbs.of,with q od cla se,525,
1; with t,ib.N -4-
d bitare-an,457,2; with Inf.,423,2,N.
2;non d bito,with q in,555,2,R.1;
with Interrog.,ib.R.2;with Inf.,ib.
R.3,and N.
d bi m with an and S bjv.,457,2.
d cere with pred.Nom.or phrase,206,
R.1; with Final Dat.,356.R.2; with Gen.
of Price,379: pensl d cere,380,1,N.2;
deem,with Acc.and Inf.,527.R.2; lead,
with t,553,2.
d m enclitic,with Impv.,269; with Pr.
Indic.,229,R.; force of,568,R.; of com-
plete coextension,569; of partial coex-
tension,570: ntil,with Indic.,571; with
S bjv.,572; to express s bordination,
ib.R..; provided that,573; with modo,
ib.; with Pr.for participle,570,NN.1
and 2 -,ca sal,ib.; retained,with Indic.
in O.O.,655.R.3,663.1.N.1.
d mmodo provided that,573.
d o decl.of,73.R.,95,and ambo, ter-
q e,292.
d ritia heteroclite,68,2.
d ty vbs.of,with Inf.,423 and N.2.
E -so nd of,3; weakening of,8,1; length
of final,707,2; ga d exin cornp.,9,4.
ease adjs.of,with Abl.S p.,436.N.2.
eb r decl.of,44,5.
ecastor strengthens atq e,477.N.2.
ecce with Acc.and Nom.,343,1,N.2.
ecq is 106 and N.5.
ecthlipsis 719,2.
edereconj gation of,172,N.
edicere with Inf.,527.R.2; with t,646,
N.1.
ed cere with Abl.,390.2.N.3.
effecting vbs.of,have Final Seq ence,
543.R.1,and N.2: constr.of,553.
efferre with Abl.,390.2.N.3.
efficere with S bjv.and t,563,1 and 3;
with Inf.,527,R.2,553,2,N.
egen s Comp.of,87,5;with Gen.or
Abl.,405.N.3.
egere with Gen.or Acc.,383,1,405.N.2.
ego decl.of,100; Gen.Pl.,nostr m,
nostri,100.R.2,304,2 and 3; poss.pron.
instead,ib.2,N.2; nos in O.O.,660,4.
geredi with Abl.,390.2.N.3.
egregie adv.of Degree,439.N.2.
ei with Dat.in exclamations,343,1,^.2.
eicere with Abl.,390,2,N.3.
elabi with Abl.,390.2.N.3.
Elegiamb s 821.
elision 719,1;in Iam.Sen.,759,N.3; in
Dac.Hex.,784.N.5; in Pent.,786.N.2; in
Sapphic,797,N.3; in Asclepiadean,802,
N.2.
ellipsis 688; see Omission,
em with Acc.of Exclamation,343,1,
N.2.
emere with Gen.,379; bene emere,380,
2.R.
eminence words of,with Abl.,397.N.2.
emittere with Abl.,390,2,N.3.
emotion vbs.of,with Acc.,330,R.and N.
2,333,1,N.1; vbs.of,with Abl.of Ca se,
408; with Acc.and Inf.,533; in Nom.of
Part.,536,x.2; Ca sal sentences after,
542 and a.; perplexing,with indirect
q estion or si,542.N.1.
emphasis in arrangement,672,2,a.
6n in exclamations,343,1,N.2.
enallage 693.
enclitics effect of,on pron nciation,15,
R.1.
endeavo r vbs.of,with t,546,1.
ending vbs.of,with Inf.,423,2 and
N.2.
endings of cases,26,2,27.
endowing vbs.of,with Abl.of Means,
401.N.1.
enim position of.413.N.3,484,R.,498.N.1;
yes for,471.R.; strengthens sed,485.N.
3,498;asseverative,498,N.2;combina-
tions of,ib.N.6;after q ia,ib.N.7.
enimvero strengthens sed,485.N.3.
eniti with Inf.,423,2,N.2.
en merations in Abl.witho t in,387.
epanorthosis 484,R.1.
epenthesis of vowels,8,3; of consonants,
9,7.
epicene s bstantives 21,3.
ep lnm heteroclite,68,3.
erga se of,416,10; with Acc.Ger.,432
N.1.
[GENERAL INDEX.515]
ergo with Gen.,373; as adv.,399.N.1;
with Gen.Ger.,428.R.2; sage of,502
and N.1;position of.ib.N.2;combina-
tions of,ib.R.3.
eripere with Abl.,390,2,N.3.
er dire with Abl.or de,339,R.2 and N.
3; with in or Abl.,401.N.1.
esse-conj gation of,116; early forms,ib.
NN.; cpds.,117; ascop la,205; esse pro,
in n mero,efc.,206, -l; omitted,209
and NN.,280,2,6,R.2 and c;with F t.
part,to form periphrastic,247;cpd.
tenses with f i,etc.,ib.R.1;forem
for essem,ib.N.1,250.N.2,251.N.2;
with Pr.part.,247.N.2;f t r m
esse lit,248; other forms,ib.KN.; in
eo est t,249; with Pf.part.,250;
variations,ib.RR..NN.; with Ger.,251,1;
with Final Dat.,356,R.2; with Do ble
Dat.,ib.R.3;with Gen.,379;with in
and Acc.,385,N.3;with Abl.,401.N.7;
with Gen.Ger.,428.R.2; with Dat.Ger.,
429,1;f t r s as adj.,437,N.; esse
q od,525.1.N.2; est,it is the case,with
t,553,3;f it c m,with S bjv.,580,
R.1;restrictions with,627,a.2;s nt'
q i,with S bjv.,631,2.
esseda heteroclite,68,1.
et-in n merals,96,4,97,4; et et,with
PL,285.N.; sage of,475; =et tamen,
ib.N.1; for etiam,ib.N.2,482.5.N.2;
omitted,481,2,N.and 3;with adjs.of
Likeness and Unlikeness,643,N.2.
etenim se of,498 and NN.
Ethical Dative 351.
etiam strengthens comparative,301;
syntax of,478 and NN.; yes,471,1; and
q oq e,479 R.and N.1; with t m,478,
N.1; after sed,Ver m,482,5,and N.1.
etiamsi 603 and N.; syntax of,604 and
RR.
etsi 603; with Indic.or S bjv.,604; and
yet,ib.R.2; with part.,609.N.1,667,N.;
with adj.or adv.,ib.N.2; with Inf.,635,
N.2.
evadere with two Noms.,206.
evenit with Dat.,346,R.2;with t,
553,3.
event s ffixes for,181,2.
evertere with Abl.,390,2,N.3.
ex in comp.,9,4; vbs.cpd.with,take
Dat.,347.R.5; with Abl.of Separation,
390,1 and 2; with Towns,391,R.1; with
Abl.of Origin,395 and N.2; with Abl.of
Material,396; with Abl.of Respect,397,
N.1; with Abl.of Meas re,402,R.2; with
Abl.of Ca se,408.N.3,413.R.1; se as
prep.,417,6; with Abl.Ger.,433; ex 65
q od,525,2,N.2.
exadvers s se of,416,2.
excedere with Abl.,390,2,N.3.
CXCellere with Dat.,347.R.4; with Abl.
of Respect,397.N.2: with Abl.of Meas-
re,403.N.1.
excepto with q od,625,2,N.2.
exclamations in Acc.,343,1; in Gen.,
383,3; in Acc.and Inf.,634; exclamatory
q estions,558.
excl dere with Abl.,390,2,N.3.
excl ding vbs.of,with Abl.,390,2.
exempl m in phrases with t,548,N.2.
exigere with ordinal,294;with two
Accs.,339 and N.1.
exire with Abl.,390,2,N.3.
existimare with Gen.,379; with ex and
Abl.,402,R.2; with Nom.and Inf.,528,
N.1; with Acc.and Inf.,527,R.2.
exlex defective,85,2.
exorare with t,553,2.
exordiri with inf.,23,2,N.2.
expedit with Dat.,346,R.2.
expellere with Abl.,390.2.N.3.
expers with Gen.,374.N.2;with Abl.,
390.3.N.1.
expetere with Pf.Inf.pass.,280,2,C,N.
explere with Gen.,383.1.N.2;explg-
n nt,133.IV.N.2.
explicative c m 580,NN.1,2,582.
exponere with in and Acc.,385.N.2.
exposcere with two Accs.,339 and N.1.
exprimere with t,553,1.
exp gnare with t,553,1.
exseq ias with ire,333,2,R.
exsistere with Abl.,390,2,N.3.
exsolvere with Abl.,390,2,N.3.
exspectare constr.of,572.
exspectatione as Abl.of Respect,398,
N.1.
exspes defective,85,2.
extent in Degree,334; in Space,335; in
Time,336; Acc.of,as s bj.of pass.,
336,N.3.
exterior Comp.of,87,2 and 7.
extorq ere with t,553,1.
extra as adv.,415; as prep.,416,11.
extrem m Comp.of,87,2;with masc.
s bj.,211.R.-1;with t,553,4.
ext rbare with Abl.,390,2,N.3.
[516 GENERAL INDEX.]
ex i with Acc.of Respect,338.N.2; with
Dat.and Acc.,or Acc.and Abl.,348,R.1.
facere early Pf.,feced,131,6;omission
of,209.N.5; mir m fact m,209.N.2;
fac( t) for Impv.,271,1;l dos and
second Acc.,342;with pred.Gen.,366,
E!;nihil reliq i,369.R.2;q od fa-
cere poss m,372,N.3;with re m and
Gen.,378.R.1;with Gen.of Price,379;
boni,ib.1.N.2;(sacr m) facere,with
Abl.,401,NN.4,7;finem facere,with
Dat.Ger.,429.N.1;represent,with Acc.
and Inf.,527,R.2; with Pf.part.,537.N.2;
with consec tive cla se,553,1;with
Inf.,553.2.N.; facere(fax5) t as pe-
riphrasis,ib.1;no"n poss m(facere)
q in,556;S p.of,436.N.
facilis comparison of,87,3; with Inf.,
421,N,1,c.
facin s with est and Inf.,422.N.2.
faex decl.of,52,7,70,C.
fag s heteroclite,68,5.
fal s witho t Comp.,87,9;with t,
553,4.
fama with est and Inf.,627.R.2.
fames heteroclite,68,8.
fari conj.of,175,3,and N.
fas 70.R.; with Inf.,422.N.2,428.N.2; with
Abl.S p.,436,N.2.
fattening vbs.of,with ex,ab,de,385,
R.2.
fastidies s with Gen.,374.N.5.
fatBrl with Acc.and Inf.,627.R.2.
fat m with est a ( l I i '-,422.N.2,and
428.N.2.[fa x] decl.of,62,7.
favere with Dat.,346,R.2.
fear seq ence after vbs.of,515,R.3;
cla ses of,and Final Cla ses,543,R.3;
syntax of cla se of,650; Inf.or Indirect
q estion after,ib.NN.4,5.
fem r decl.of,44,5,68,12.
fere position of,677.R..1.
ferire -with foed s,333,2,R.
ferox with est and Inf.,533.R.1.
ferre conj.of,171; legem with t,
646.N.1;in phrases with t,553.1
and 2.
festinare with Inf.,423.2.N.2.
fic s heteroclite,68,5.
fidem habere with Dat.,346,R.5.
fidere with Dat.,348.R.2 and N.2;with
Abl.,401.N.6.
fieri conj gation of,173 and NN.; with
two Noms.,206,304,R.1;with Gen.of
Price,379;with ex or de,396,N.2;= to
be sacrificed,with Abl.,401,NN.5,7; with
t,553,3; fieri potis est t,ib..
fig re Whole and Part,323.N.2; Fig res
of Syntax and Rhetoric,688-700;of
Prosody,718-728.
filia decl.of,29.R.4.
filling vbs.of,with Abl.,405.
fil m heterogeneo s,67,2,6.
FINAL SENTENCES with Interrogative
particle,470;general view,643,544;
P re,645; t ne,or t non,ib.RR.1,2;
Complementary,546-o49;with vbs.of
Will and Desire,646;Inf.instead,ib.
R.1;with vbs.of Hindering,547-o49;
S bjv.witho t t,t'k R.2; t n,ib.
R,3;with S bstantives,ib.N.2;Inf.
instead,ib.N.3;ne with vbs.of Pre-
venting,648; q omin s,649; with vbs.
of Fear,550; eight circ mioc tions for,
644.R.2;seq ence in,512.
final syllablesq antity of,711-713-
fine in Gen.or Abl.,378.R.3.
fined) as prep.,417,7.
fitness adjs.of,with Dat.,359; with Dat.
Ger.,429.
flagitare with Abl.or g,339,i:l,and
N.1;with t,546,NN.1,3.
flagiti m hominis 369.N.1,361.N.3.
flamen defective,70,D.
flocci as Gen.of Price,380,1.
fl ere with Abl.of Means,401,N,5.
fl men with Gen.of App.,361,N.1.
foed s with ferire,333,2,R.; in phrases
with t,646.N.2.
following vbs.of,with t,553,3.
foot in Metre,733;names of,734;eq al-
ity of,740;conflict of Word and Verse,
750.
foras-91,1,d.
forbidding vbs.of,with Dat.,346;with
116,548.
forgetting vbs.of,with Gen.or Acc.,376
and R.2.
FORMATION OF WORDS 176-200;simple
words,179-192; primitives and deriva-
tives,179;s ffixes,180;formation of
s bsts.,181;of adjs.,182;with s f-
fixes,183.s ffixes in detail vowels,
184;g tt rals,185;dentals,186;la-
bials,187;s,188;liq ids,189;forma
tion of vbs.,190;verbalia,191;
[GENERAL INDEX.517]
freq entativea or intensives,ib.1;in-
choatives,ib.2;desideratives,ib.3;
ca sativcs,ib.4;meditatives,ib.6;
denominativa,192;cpd.words,193-
200; s bsts.,191-198;vbs.,199,200; seo
compo nds.
formidare with Iiif.,423,2,N.2,and 533,
R..1.
forsitan 457.2.N.
forte nisi 591.R.4,and N.3.
fortiter very,439.N.3.
for m detective,70,D.
fra de as Abl.of Manner,399,N.1.
fremere with Acc.and Inf.,533,R.1.
freq ens in pred.attrib tion,325.R.6;
with Abl.,405.N.3.
freq entative verbs formation of,191,1.
fret m heteroclite,68,5.
fret s with Abl.,401.N.6.
friendiiness adjs.of,with Dat.,369.
fr gl 85,C.; Comp.of,90-
fr i with Abl.,407,and N.2,6;personal
Ger.,427.N.5.
fr nisci with Abl.,407.N.2.b.
[fr x] defective,70,D.
f gere with Inf.for Impv.,271.2.N.2;
f git me,with Pr.Inf.,281.2.N.
f gitans with Gen.,375,N.2.
f lment m heteroclite,68,3.
f lness s ffixes for,182,10.
f lness adjs.of,with Gen.,374;vbs.of,
with Gen.,383,1.
f nction s ffixes for,181,9; in Dat.Ger.,
429.
f ngi with Abl.,406 and N.2,c; personal
Ger.,427.N.5.
f stis heteroclite,68,5.
FUTURE 112,3; formation of,114,115;
early forms,130,3;part,in r m for
fem.,211,N.1; definition of,223; sage
of,243; of volo and poss m,ib R.2; as
gnomic,ib.N.1;in Impv.sense,243;
periphrasticact.,247; Indic.for Deliber-
ative S bjv.,254.N.2; part,act.,283;
part,as s bst.,437.N.1;part,as an
adj.,438.N.; representation of in O.O.,
514,515; periphrastic in Unreal Cond.,
ib.R.1; Inf.,530; in rel.sentences,622;
syntax of part.,669,670.
FUTURE PERFECT 112,3;formation of,
114,115; in so,131,4,6,1; defined,223;
syntax of,244; as F t.,ib.R.1; with
nolo,Volo,poss m,etc.,ib.R.3; in
both cla ses,ib.R.4;independent se
of,ib.N.1;periphrastic,with habeo,
ib.N.2;as Impv.,245;Representation
of,in O.O.,514,515; Pf.and Pl pf.peri-
phrastic in Unreal Condition,515.R.1;
in rel.sentences,622.
Galliambic Verse 818.
ga dere with si,542.N.1;gavis s as
Pr.,282,N.
gender 19; common,21,1; epicene,ib.3;
s bstantiva mobilia,ib.2;of 1st
Decl.,30; of 2d Decl.,34; of 3d Decl.,39,
43,46,49,55,58;of 4th Decl.,62; of 5th
Decl.,64; concord in,286; ne t.Pl.with
feminines,ib.3.
GENITIVE defined,23,2;of 1st Decl.in
as,ai, m,29.RR..NN.; of 2d Decl.in i
(from stems in io),in m,in ei,33,RR.,
NN.; of 3d Decl.in s,es,37,1;in m,
i m,38,2,54,67.R.3; of 4th Decl.in os,
is,i, m,61.N.1; of 5th Decl.in es,
ei,e,63.N.1;of Greek s bsts.in on,
eon,65,R.1; oes,66.N.1; of adjs.,73;in
i,ai,aes,es, m,75.NN.; of pron.adjs.
in i s,76,1: of adjs.of three endings in
m,i m,79.R.2,82,83.N.2; of Comp.of
part.,89.R.3;of Cardinals,95.R.2; of
Distrib tives,97,R.1.
not s bj.of pass.,217.R.1;with mille,
293 and N.; with Comp.for Abl.,296.N.2;
mei,etc.,as objective,304,2; nostr m as
Part.,ib.3; poss.pron.for Gen.,304,2,N.
2: in app.to poss.pron.,321,R.2; Part.
Gen.for Part.App.,323,R.; with nemen
est,349.R.6; general view,360; translated
by abstract s bst.,ib.R.2; Adnominal,
Appositive,361; Epexegetical,361; Pos-
sessive,362; flagiti m hominis,361,
N.1; Family,362,N.1; Chorographic,ib.
N.2; S bjective and Objective,363; two
with one s bst.,ib.R.2;1st and 3d per-
sons as possessive,364; of Q ality,365;
as Pred.,366;with facere,ib.R.1;
a ctoris,ib.; generis,368,R.; with
prepositional s bst.,373; with adjs.,
374 and NN.; with participles and ver-
bals,375; with vbs.of Memory,376;
with vbs.of Emotion,377; with J dicial
vbs.,378; with vbs.of Eating and B y-
ing,379,380;with interest and rfert,
381; with vbs.of F lness,383,1; with
vbs.of Separation,ib.2; in Exclama-
tions,ib.3; pred.with Inf.,422.N.5;
Ger.,428;with esse,ca sa,etc.,ib.R.
[518 GENERAL INDEX.]
2; Ger.with Pl.s bst.,ib.R.1;Ger.
with vb.,ib.N.4; position of,676 and
NN.1,2.
gen s-decl.of,48; id gen s,336,N.2;
with Epexegetical Gen..361,2.
gerens with Gen.,375.N.2.
GERUND and GERUNDIVE 112,5;forma-
tion of,115,3;early forms,130,8;Agent
of,in Dat.,215,2; with ease to form
periphrasis,251; force of Ger ndive,
ib.N.1; syntax of,425-433; and Inf.,
425; and vb.,426; Ger ndive for
Ger nd,427; impersonal Ger ndive,
ib.N.2; from intrans.vbs.,ib.N.4; Gen.
of,428; Inf.instead,ib.N.2; depend-
ing on vb.,ib.N.4; Dat.instead,ib.N.5;
Dat.of,429; Acc.of,430;Abl.of,431;
paralleled by part.,ib.N.3; Acc.of,
with preps.,432;with ad after vbs.of
Hindering,ib.R.1;Abl.of,with preps.,
433.
gestire with Inf.,423.2.N.2,533,R.1 .
gignere(genit s),with Abl.of origin,
395.N.1.
giving vbs.of,with Dat.and Acc.,or
Acc.and Abl.,348;with Inf.,423.N.1.6.;
with Acc.Ger.,430.
gloriari with Acc.and Inf.,527.R.2.
glorios m with est and inf.,422,N.3.
Glyconic verse 795.
gracilis Comp.of,87,3.
gratia with Gen.,373; with poss.pron.,
ib.R.2; with Gen.Ger.,428.R.2; gra-
tiis,as Abl.of Manner,399,N.1.
gratificari-with Dat.,346.R.2.
grat lari with Dat.,346.R.2.
gravari with Inf.,423,2,N.2.
Greek s bstantives decl.of,65; Greek
Acc.,338.
growth vbs.of,in Abl.Abe.,410.N.1.
g tt ral vowels,2,1;consonants,6,1;
s ffixes with,185.
habere with,two Noms.in pass.,206;
withPf.part,to denote Maintenance of
the Res lt,238,241,N.2,244.N.2;first
Impv.wanting,267.R.; with two Accs.,
340.R.1; with pro,loco,n mero,and
a second Acc.,ib.; with Final-Dat.,356,
E.2; with Gen.of Price,379; pensi
habere,ib.1.N.2; with in and Acc.,
385,N.3; with Acc.Ger.,430.N.1; habeo
dicend m,ib N.2; be able,with Inf.,
423.2.N.2.
habit vbs.of,with Inf.,423 and N.2.
haerere with Dat.,346,N.6.
hanging vbs.of,with ex,ab,de,385.R.2.
happening -seq ence after vbs.of,513,
R.2; vbs.of,with q od cla se,525,1;
t instead,ib.N.5; vbs.of,with con-
sec tive cla se,553,3.
hardening in a verse,723.
ha d 441 and 443,with NN.; scio an,
457,2.
(h)avere 175,4.
hell ari with Abl.,407,N.2,e.
hendiadys 698.
heteroclites 68-
heterogeneo s s bstantives 67.
heterologa 69,c.
hiat s -defined,720;in Iam.Oct.,763,
N.; in Anap.Oct.,778.N.1;in Dact.
Hex.,784.NN.6.7;in Sapphic,726.N.
hic 104,landNN.; syntax of,305; con.
tempt o s character of,306.N.; and
ille,307,RR.1,2; strengthened by q i-
dem,ib.R.4;two forms of,refer to
different s bsts.,ib.N.3;hic illic,
hinc hinc,hinc inde,hinc illinc,
illinc hinc,inde nine,482,2;hOc
with t,557,R.; h ms,in Gen.of Price,
380,1;with Abl.of Time,393.R.4;in
O.O.,660,3;bine as coordinating con-
j nction,603.
hiems decl.of,40;in Abl.of Time,393,
R.6.
hindering-seq ence after vbs.of,643,
R.2 and N.2;vbs.of,with ne,648;with
q in,554-556;and vbs.of Preventing,
555; and vbs.of Do bt,ib.2.
Historical c m 585 and NN.
HISTORICAL INFINITIVE parallel with
Impt.,254,R.; syntax of,647;conj nc-
tions with,ib,N.2.
HISTORICAL PERFECT 224;force of,239;
and P re Pf.,235;and Impf.,231,240;
for Pl pf.,239.N.; as Potential of Past,
258.N.2.
HISTORICAL PRESENT 224 and 229; with
d m,229.N..570.
historical tenses 225.
hodiern s in pred.Attrib.,325.R.6.
homo in early Latin,42,N.
honor and honos,45,N.
hope constr.of,vbs.of,423,N.5; seq ence
after,vbs.of,615.R.3; vbs.of,withAcc.
and Inf.,527.R.4.
HORACE Lyric Metres of,826.
[GENERAL INDEX.519]
horrere with Inf.,423.2.N.2.
horrescere with inf.,423.2.N.2.
hortari with Inf.,423.2.N.2; with t,
646.N.1;hortat s,as Pr.,282.N.; nor-
tat ,as Abl.of Ca se,408.N.1.
h milis Comp.of,87,3.
h m s in Abl.of Separation,390,2,N.4;
h mi,as Loc.,411,R.2.
hypallage 693.
hyperbaton 696.
hypotaxis 472.
I and J.,1.R.2;so nd of,3;weakening
of,8,1; effect of,on preceding vowel,
12.R.2;I-class of vb.stems,133,vi.;
length of final,707,4.
iam with Pr.indie.,230; iam di ,iam
pridem,ib.; with Impf.Indic.,234;
iam iam,482,1,and N.1;iam vero,
487.N.3;iam d cl m,with Impv.,269.
lambeleg s verse 820.
Iambic law,716,717;foot,734;rhythm,
736; rhythms,767-767,
ict s conflict of,with Accent,749.
IDEAL CONDITION from present point of
view,596,1; from past point of view,ib.
2; = Unreal,ib.R.1; Bhift to Unreal,
ib.R.2; after non poss m,ib.R.3; in
O.O.,ib.R.5,658.
idem decl.of,103,2,and NN.; syntax of,
310;with q e,et,atq e,ib.R.1 ;the
same as,with q i, t,atq e,c m,
or Dat.,310.R.3,359.N.6,642.R.1;not
sed with is,310.R.3;in pred.attrib.,
325.R.2.
idone s constrs.with,552.R.2;with
q i and S bjv.,631,1.
iec r-decl.of,44,5,68,12.
igi n s with Gen.,374.N.1.
igit r position of,484.R.; sage of,501;
with ergo,502.N.3; correl.of si,590.N.1.
ignorance adjs.of,in pred.app.,325,
6;with Gen.,374.
Ignorare with Inf.,627.R.1.
ignoscere with Dat.,346.R.2.
ILLATIVE SENTENCES 499,500.
ille -decl.of,104,3,and NN.; forms from
olio,ib.N.1;Syntax of,307;and hic,
ib.BE.1,2;et ille,ib.R.2;strength-
ened by q idem,ib.n.4;repeats a
s bst.,ib.N.2: two forms with different
antecedents,ib.N.3;refers to obliq e
case of is,ib.N.4;with Abl.of Time,
393.R.4;illinc hinc,bine illinc,
hic-illic,482,2; ill d with t,657.R.;
in O.O,660,2.
ill dere with Dat.,etc.,347.R.2.
ill stris with Abl.of Respect,397.N.2.
imbecill s and imbecillis,84,1.
imber decl.of,44,2,45.R.1.
imberbis-and imberb s,84,2.
immane with q ant m and indie.,
467.N.
immens m with q ant m and indie.,
467.N.
Immo se of,471,c; scansion of,717,N.1.
immolare with Abl.of Means,401.N.4.
imm nis with Abl.of Sep.,390.3.N.1.
impedimento with esse and ne,548,
N.1.
impedire with Inf.,423.2.N.2;with ne,
548.N.1;with q omin s,649.N.1.
impellere with t,553,2; imp ls s,
imp ls ,of Ca se,408,NN.1 and 2.
impendio very,439,N.3.
impendere with Dat.,etc.,347.R.2.
impense very,439.N.3.
imperare with Dat.,346.R.2;with Inf.,
423,2,N.2,532,N.1; with t,546.N.1.
IMPERATIVE 112,4;early forms,130,5;
S bjv.for,263;answers deliberative
q estion,265.N.; sage,266-275;First
and Second,267;strengthening words,
269; negative of,270; prono ns with,
267.N.; concord with,211.N.2;periph-
rases of,271; representatives of,272:
of Past,272,3;tenses of,278;for Pro-
tasis,593,4;in S bjv.with O.O.,652
and R.1.
IMPERFECT 112,3 : early forms,130,2;
force of,223,231; and Hist.Pf.,232; of
Endeavor,Disappointment,and Resist-
ance to Press re,233;a tense of Evol -
tion,ib.N.1;overlapping,ib.N.2 : 562;
of Awakening,ib.N.3; with iam,etc.,
234; of opposition to Present,254,R.2;
in Apodosis of Action beg n,ib.R.3,
597.R.2;as Potential of Past,858;in
Wish,260; with vellem,ib.R.; S bjv.
as Concessive,264;S bjv.as Impv.oi'
Past,272,3;tense relations of S bjv.,
277; in Seq ence,510.R.; in Coincidence,
613,N.3;S bjv.as Principal Tense,517,
R.2.
impersonal verbs 208,1 and 2;divine
Agt.expressed,ib.i,N.; vbs.of Saying,
tic.,208,2,N.2,628; in Ger.constr.,427.
N.4;with t,553,4.
[520 GENERAL INDEX.]
impertire with Dat.and Acc.,or Acc.
and Abl.,348.R.1;laborem,with Dat.
Ger.,429,1.
impetrare with t,553,1.
implere with Gen.,383.1.
implorare with t only,546.N.3.
imponere with in and Acc.,385.N.2.
impos with Gen.,374.N.3.
iinprimere with in and Abl.,385,R.1.
impr dens in pred.attrib.,325,R.6.
imp ls as Abl.of Ca se,408,N.1.
in-in composition,9,4; vbs.cpd.with
take Acc.or Dat.,331,347; with Co ntries
and Towns,337,R.1;with Acc.for Dat.,
345,r..2;with app.to Towns,386,R.1;
with books,387; thro gho t,388,it.; with
recipere,389;with Abl.of Time,394,
R.and R.2; with Abl.of Ca se,408.N.3;
position of,413.R.1;as prep.,418,1;
with Acc.Ger.,432,and N.1;with Abl.
Ger.,433 and N.1;with part.,437.N.2;
in eo q od,525,2,N.2.
inanis with Gen.,374.N.1.
incedere with Dat.,etc.,347.R.2.
incendi with ira and inf.,533.R.1;in-
cens s ,of Moving Ca se,408.N.2.
incert m with an and S bjv.,457,2.
inchoative verbs 133,v.,191,2.
incidere with Dat.,etc.,347.R.2.
inddere with in and Abl.,385.R.1.
incipere with Inf.,423.2.N.2;with Or-
dinal,294,N.
incitat s of Moving Ca se,408.x.2.
inclination s ffixes for,182,2.
inclination adjs.of,in pred.attr.,325,R.
6;vbs.of,with Inf.,423 and N.2.
incl dere with in and Abl.,385,R.1.
incon nodare with Dat.,346.N.1.
incorporation of antecedent,616;q a
pr dentia es,616,1,N.2; of correlative,
619.
incredibile with Inf.,422.N.3; with
q ant m and Indic.,467.N.
increpare charge,with Gen.,378,R..1.
increpitare charge,with Gen.,378.R..1.
inc bare with Dat.,etc.,347.R.2.
inc mbere with Dat.,etc.,347,R.2.
[indago] defective,70,D.
inde as coordinating conj.,603;in con-
trast with bine,482,2.
indecor s and indecoris,84,1.
indefinite prono ns 107;syntax of,313-
319;q idam,313;aliq is,314;q is,
315;q ispiam,316;q isq am and
ll s,317;q isq e,318 : alter and
ali s,319;rel.with Indic.,254,R.4,
625.
INDICATIVE 112,4;early forms of,130,1-4;
meaning of,254; in Apodosis,254.R.3;
with i def.rel.,ib.R.4;Pr.for Delib-
erative S bjv.,ib.N.2; tense relations
of,276;neg.of,257;in q estions,463,
464; after nescio q is,etc.,467.R-1; in
Relative Sentences,ib.R.2;in Tem-
poral Sentences,560,1;to express De-
sign,630.N.2.
indigere with Gen.,383,1,405.N.2.
indignari with Inf.,533.R.1;with si,
542.N.1.
indign s with Gen.,374.N.10;with q i,
t,or Inf.,552.R.2;with q i and
S bjv.,631,1 and R.1.
indig s with Abl.or Gen.,405.N.3.
ind ere with Dat.and Acc.,or Acc.and
Abl.,348.R.1;ind i,with Acc.of Re-
spect,338,N.2.
ind lgere with Dat.,346.R.2 and N.2.
inermis and inerm s,84,2.
inesse with Dat.,etc.,347.R.2.
Inferior 87,2; with Dat.,296.N.3.
INFINITIVE 112,5; formation of,115,3;
early forms,130,6;aor.in -xe,etc.,
131,4,6,4;F t.in assere,ib.;act.for
pass.,213,R.,c.; sage of,279; as s bst.,
280; after debeo,ib.2.b.N.3; after
dec it,oport it,ib.2,b,R.1 and 2; as
representative of Indic.,281; after
memini,etc.,ib.2,N.; syntax of,419-
424; with Acc.as s bj.,420; as s bst.,
421;traces of Locative nat re,ib.N.1;
as s bj.,422; as obj.,423; t instead,
ib.N.4; as pred.with esse,425; with
preps.,ib.N.; F t.pass.,435,N.4; se-
q ence after,518;Acc.and Inf.after
vbs.of Saying and Thinking,527;part,
instead,ib.N.1;tenses after these vbs.,
529-531; after posse,velle,ib.N.3;
after sperare,ib.N.4; with vbs.of
Will and Desire,532;with vbs.of Emo-
tion,533; t instead,532,NN.3,4;in
Exclamations,534;and q od,ift.R.1;
Acc.and Inf.as s bj.,535; Acc.and
Inf.after vbs.of Emotion,542; with
vbs.of Will and Desire,646.N.3;with
vbs.of Fear,550.N.5;with dign s,etc.,
552,R.2;Acc.and Inf.in Relative Sen-
tences,635;after poti s,etc.,644.R.3,
646;in O.O.,650.See Hist.Inf.
[GENERAL INDEX.521]
Infinit m with est instead of sit,254,
R.1;with q ant m and Indic.,467.N.
infitias-vo.A.; ire,333,2,R.
inflection 17.
infra with Abl.of Meas re,403.N.1;as
adv.,415;as prep.,416,12.
infrgn s and infrgnis,84,1.
ingratiis as Abl.of Manner,399,N.1.
ingenii as Loc.,with adjs.,374.N.7.
ingredi with inf.,423.2.N.2.
inhaerere with Dat.,etc.,347,11.2.
inhiare with Dat.,etc.,347.R.2.
inicere man m with Acc.,342.
ini ria as Abl.of Manner,399,N.1.
innat s with Dat.,347.R.2.
Inner Object Acc.of,328,330,332; Abl.
instead,333.2.N.4;after vbs.of Taste
and Smell,ib.2.N.5.
inops with Gen.,374,N.1; with Abl.,
405.N.3.
inq am 175,2;inq it,impersonal,208,
2.N.2; inciting 6.R.,648.R.2; lacking
forms s pplied by dicere,ib.R.3.
inq iring vbs.of,with two Accs.,339,
and R.1.NN.1 and 2.
Inscribere with in and Abl.,385.R.1.
insc lpere with in and Abl.,385,R.1.
inservire with Dat.,347.R.2.
fnsignis with Abl.of Respect,397.N.2;
Insigniter as adv.of Degree,439.N.2.
Insidiari with Dat.,346,R.2.
Insin ate with Dat.,347.R.2.
Insistere with Dat.,347.R.2.
Instar 70.R.; with Gen.,373.
Instare with Dat.,347.R.2; with Inf.,
423,2,N.2.
Instr ere with de,339.N.3.
instr ment s ffixes for,181,6;in Abl.,
214,401; with ab,214,R.2;Abl.of con-
trasted with Abl.of Attendance,392.R.2.
INSTRUMENTAL Case,23,N.
ins et s with Gen.,374.N.4.
integr m with Inf.,422,N.3.
intellegere with inf.,527,R.1; intel-
lect as S p.,436.N.
intendere with Inf.,423,2,N.2; inten-
t s,with Abl.,etc.,359,N.5.
intensive verbs formation of,191,1.
inter with reflexive to express recip-
rocal action,221;vbs.cpd.with,take
Acc.or Dat.,331,347;to designate Time,
394.N.2; position of,413.R.1;as prep.,
416,13; with Acc.Ger.,432 and N.1; with
part.,437,N.2.
intercalaris and intercalari s,84,2.
intercedere with Dat.,347,R.2; with
ne,548.N.1; with q in,555,1.
intercl dere with Dat.and Acc.,or
Acc.and Abl.,348.R.1; with Abl.,390,2,
N.3;with ne,548.N.1; with q in,555,1.
interc rrere with Dat.,347.R.2.
interdicere with Abl.,390.2.N.3;with
ne,548.N.1; with q in,555,1.
interd m coordinates with alias,482,
l.N.1.
interesse with Dat.,347.R.2;interest,
with Gen.and Abl.,381; with Nom.,
ib.N.3;constr.of Object of Concern.
382.1 and 2;constr.of Thing Involved,
ib.3;with t,553,4.
Interest Dat.of Personal,350.
interior 87,2 and 8.
interjection 16.R.2; no syntax,201.R.1.
intermittere with inf.,423,2,N.2.
internecio defective,70,R.
interpellate with ne,548.N.1.
interponere with ne,548.N.1.
interrogare with two ACCS.,or de,339,
R.1 and N.1; with Indic.,467.N.
interrogative prono ns 106;distin-
g ished from rel.,467.R.2; with part..
469; in Final Sentence,470; do bling
of,ib.R.
INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES 450 -470;
simple and cpd.,452;particles in,454-
457; moods in,462-467; Indic.,463,464;
S bjv.,465,466;after vb.of Wonder,
542.N.1; after vb.of Fear,650,N.4; for
Protasis,593,4; in 5.O.,651 and RR.
intervenire with Dat.,347.R.2.
intra to designate Time,394.N.2; posi-
tion of,413.R.1; as adv.,415; as prep.,
416,14.
intransitive verbs sed impersonally,
208.2; sed transitively,213.R.b;con-
str ed as pass.,214,R.1;with ne t.
s bj.in pass.,217; with personal Ger.,
217.R.2; with Pf.part.pass, sed active-
ly,220,N.1; Ger nd of, sed imperson-
ally,251,2.
in sitat m with t,553,4.
invaderewith Dat.,347.R.2.
inveniriwith Nom.and Inf.,6E8.N.1;
invent in S p.,436.N.
inversedonec,571.N.C;c m,631;at-
traction of rel.,617,N.2.
invicemto indicate reciprocality,221.
R.2.
[522 GENERAL INDEX.]
inviderewith personal pass.,217.N.1;
with Dat.,346.R.2 and N.2; with Inf.,
533.R..1.
invid sconstr.of,359.N.5.
invit sin pred.app.,325.R.6;invito
est,353.N.2.
ioc loas Abl.of Manner,399.N.1.
loc sheterogeneo s,67,2.
ionicfoot,734;rhythm,736; rhythms,
815-819;s bstit tions for,815.
ipse decl.of,103,3 and N.; ips s,ibi.N.2;
syntax of,311; et ipse,ib.1.R.2; em-
phasises reflexive,ib.2; sed indeclin-
ably,16.2,R.; in O.O.,660,5.
iraof Moving Ca se,408.N-2; incendor
ira with Inf.,633.R.1.
irasciwith Dat.,346.R.2.
ire-169,2; omission of,209.N.5; with
Dat.,358.N.2; with S p.,435.N.1; with
Infitias,etc.,333,2,R.
is-decl.of,103,1 and N.; strengthened by
q idam,307,R.4;taken p by ille,ib.
N.4; two forms with different ante-
cedent,ib.N.3; syntax of,308; = talis,
ib.R.1;with et,atq e,q e,ib.R.2;for
reflexive,309.N.1; id temporis,aeta-
tis,336.N.2; eo as coordinating conj.,
503; ideo,idcirco,ib.; with q i and
S bjv.,631,1; with t,R.1,557.R.;
in O.O.,660,2.
islands in Local Acc.,337;with in,ib.
R.1 and N.3; prep,omitted with Large
islands,id.N.1.
iste decl.of,104,11.and NN.; syntax of,
306;contempt o s character of,ib.N.;
strengthened by q idem,307.R.4; in
O.O.,660,3.
ita with t,482,4; correlative of si,
_ 590.N.1;yes,471,a,1.
Italic s N mer s756.
itaq e sage of,500;position of,ib.R.;
with ergo,502.N.3.
iter decl.of,44,5.
iterative action 566,567;S bjv.in,ib.
N.; with c m,584;in Relative Sen-
tences,623.
Ithyphallic verse,774.
i bere with two Accs.,341,N.2;with
Acc.and Dat.,346.N.3; constr.after,
423,N.6;with Acc.and Inf.,528 and N.1;
with Inf.,423.2.N.2,632,NN.1,2; with
S bjv.,546,8.2;i ssii,defective,68,5;
i ss as Abl.of Ca se,408.N.1.
i dicare with inf.,423,2,N.2.
[i ger] decl.of,68,7.
i nct s with Dat.,etc.,359.N.3.
i s-with Inf.,422.N.2,428.N.2;with
respondere,333,2,R.; in phrases with
t,546.N.2; i re,399.N.1; i re in Abl.
of Respect,397.
i sto as Abl.of Respect,398.N.1.
i vare with Acc.,346.N.3.
i venis Comp.of,87,9-
i xta as adv.,415;as prep.,416,15.
J dgment vbs.of,with Abl.of Standard,
402.
K so nds of,1,R.1;name of,ib.N.
knowledge adjs.of,in pred.attrib.,325,
R.6;adjs.of,with Gen.,374.
Labials 6,1;s ffixes with,187.
laborem with impertireand Dat.Ger.,
429,1.
laborare with Inf.,423.2.N.2;with t,
546,^.1.
lac decl.of,53,8; 68,12.
laedere with ACC.,346.N.3.
laetari with Acc.and Inf.,533,R.1.
lamentari with Acc.and Inf.,533.R.1.
largiri with t,553,2.
later defective,70,D.
latit dine with Acc.of Extent,335,R..1.
lat s with Acc.of Extent,335.R.1.
la r s heteroclite,68,5.
leaving vbs.of,with Acc.Ger.,430.
lect s heteroclite,68,5.
length by nat re,12,1,and R.; by posi-
tion,ib.2;representation of long vow-
els,ib.N.
lengthening compensatory,9,6,a.
letters tenses in,252; advs.in,ib.; dated
from a place,391,R.3.
letting vbs.of,with Acc.Ger.,430-
levare with Abl.,390,2,N.2.
lex in .phrases with t,546.NN.1 and 2;
lege,397 and N.1,399.N.1.
liberalis with Gen.,374.N.1.
liberare with Abl.,390,2,N.2.
-libet added to reis.,111,3;exact se
of lib erit,244.R.3;libens,in pred.
attrib.,325.R.6; with Dat.,346.R.2.
licere -exact se of F t.Pf.,24i,R.3; with
Dat.,346.R.2;with Gen.,379; licet,
altho gh,603-607; with q amvis,ib.N.
2; with Indic.,ib.N.3.
likeness s ffixes for,182,4.
[GENERAL INDEX.523]
likeness adjs.of,with Dat.,349;with
atq e(ac),643.
ling als 6,1,N.
linter decl.of,44,2,45,R.1.
liq ids 6,2,A;3d Decl.stems in,39-46;
s ffixes with,189.
litare with Abl.of Means,401.N.4.
litotes 644.N.1,700.
litterae in phrases with t,646.N.2.
living vbs.of,with Abl.,401,N.1.
Local Dative 358.
locality s ffixes for,181,5,182,9.
locare with Gen.,379; within and Abl.,
386.R.1;with Acc.Gen.,430.
LOCATIVE 23,N.; of 1st Decl.,29,fi.2; of 2d
Decl.,33,RR.3,5;3d Decl.,37,6;forms
advs.,91,3; syntax of,411; in 3d Decl.,
ib.R.1;other Locs.,ib.R.2;app.to,in
Abl.,ib.R.3;domi,with poss.pron.,
ib.R.4.
loc s-67,2;in loco habere,340.R.1;
Abl.witho t in,385,N.1.
logacadic rhythms 790-805.
LOGICAL CONDITION 595;with S bjv.by
Attraction,ib.R,2; with Ideal 2d Person,
ib.a.3; sive sive,ib.s.4; si q idem,
ib.R.5;si modo,vero,tamen,6.a.6;
tenses in,ib.N.2;in O.O.,657,595,
R.1.
longinq s Comp.of,87,9.
longit dine with Acc.of Extent,335,
R.1.
long m with est for S bjv.,254.R.1;
longe strengthens Comp.or S perla-
lative,301,303;with Acc.,335.R.1.
loq i with Acc.and Inf.,527,R.2;with
Indic.q estion,467.N.
l bldo in phrases with Inf.,422.N.2.
l dos facere with ACC.,342.
l gere with Inf.,533,R.1.
l x 70,D;in Abl.of Time,393,R.5.
M final omitted,27.N.
macte 85,c,325.R.1.
maerere with Inf.,533.R.1.
magnific s Comp.of,87,4.
magnit dine with Acc.of Extent,335,
R.1.
magn s comparison of,90;constr.
with maior,296.R.5;magis,in com-
parison of Q alities,299;magni,as
Gen.of Price,380,1;mai s,with Inf.,
422.N.3;maximi,as Gen.of Price,380,
1;non magis q am,644,N.1.
making vbs.of,with two Noms.,206;
with two Accs.,340.
maledicere with Dat.,346.R.2.
maledic s Comp.of,87,4.
malle conj.of,174 and N.3; mal eram,
co ld have preferred,254.N.1;malim,
mallem,as Potential,257,2,258.N.1;
in Unreal Wish,261.R.; with Abl.,296,
N.1;with Abl.of Meas re,403.N.1;
with Inf.or t,423.2.N.2,638 and N.3,
546,N.1.
mal s comparison of,90; male as neg.,
439.N.2.
manare with Abl.of Means,401.N.5.
mandate with t,546.N.1.
manere as cop lative vb.,206.N.1;with
Abl.,401.N.6.
mani as Loc.,411,N.1.
manifest s with Gen.,374.N.2;with
Inf.,421,N.1,c.
Manner Abl.of,399 and NN.
man s inicere with ACC.,342.
mare in Abl.witho t in,385.N.1.
margarita heteroclite,68,1.
materia heteroclite,68,2.
Material Abl.of,396; indicated by adj.,
ib.; s ffixes for,182,4.
mat rate with Inf.,423.2.N.2.
mat r s Comp.of,87,1,R.2.
mat tin s in pred.Attr.,325,R.6.
Means Abl.of,401,and RR..NN.; s ffixes
for,181,6.
meas re vbs.of,take Abl.,402.
Meas re Abl.of,402; of Difference,403;
Abl.of,with vbs.involving Difference,
ib.N.1; with ante and post,ib.N.4.
mederi with Dat.,346.R.2 and N.4.
medioxim s 87,9,N.
meditari with inf.,423.2.N.2.
meditative verbs formation,191,5.
medi m s ffixes for,182,6.
medi s in pred.attrib.,325.R.6; sed
partitively,291.R.2;Abl. sed witho t
in,388.
memini 175,5,6; First Impv.wanting,
267,R.; with Pr.Inf.,281.2.N.; with Acc.,
376.R.2;with Inf.,423.2.N.2,627.R.2;
with c m and Indic.,580,R.2.
memoratii as Abl.S p.,436,N.
memoria teneo with Pr.inf.,281,2,N.
mend m heteroclite,68,3.
mans in phrases with t,557,R.; in
mentem venire,with Gen.,376,R.3;
in mentem venire,with inf.,422.N.5.
[524 GENERAL INDEX.]
merit s Comp.of,87,9;merito as Abl.
of Manner,399,N.1.
-met added to personal pron.,102.N.2;
to ipse,103.3.N.5.
metaplasts 68.
metathesis of consonants,9,8.
metre 730; nit of,731.
met ere with Dat.,346,N.2;with t,
ne,or Inf.,550 and N.1;with Inf.,423,
2.N.2.
met s with Inf.,550.N.5.
me s 73.R.,76;Voc.of,100.R.1: early
forms of,ifc.N.2; syniesis in,ib.x.3,727,
N.; mea mihi,309,N.2; mei with Gen.
Ger.,428,R.1; with t,657.R.
middle voice 218,R.,218; with Acc.of
Respect,338.N.2.
militia in Abl.of Time,393,R.5; inLoc.,
411.R.2.
mille a s bst.in Pl.,95.R.3;inscrip-
tio a) forma of,te.R.4;milia,with
masc.vb.,211,R.1,Ex.6; se of,in SG.
and PL,293;as e bst.with Part.Gen.,
293,N.; milia for distrib tive,295.N.
minari,mmitari with Dat.,346,R.2;
with Inf.,527,R.2.
minor -q am omitted with,296,R.1;
with vbs.of Rating and B ying,380,1;
minoris,minimi,as Gen.of Price,ib.;
min s,no 471,b,1; minime,no ,ib.;
sin min s,592;si min s,ib.R.; non
min s q am,644.N.1.
mirari with Inf.,423,2,N.2,533,R.1; with
q od,642;with si,ib.N.1.
mir m with fact m and ni,q ant m,
q in,209.N.2,467.N.; with q od,642;
with si,542.N.1; with ni,ib.N.2;with
Inf..422.N.3;with q am and Indic.,
467.N.; with t,553,4.
miscere -se,with Dat.,346.N.6; with
Dat.and Acc.,or Acc.and Abl.,348,R.1.
miserari -with Acc.,377.N.2.
miserere with Gen.,377.N.1;miseret,
with Gen.,377: misereor,with Gen.,
ib.; miseresco,with Gen.,ib.N.1.
mittere -mitte,with inf.for impv.,
271,2,N.2; with inf.,422.N.3; with q od,
525,1,N.1;followed by Impf.Indic.to
give Design,630.N.2;miss ,of Moving
Ca se,408.N.1.
mixed class of Verbs 133,vii.
moderari with Dat.,346,R.2 and N.2.
modo-strengthens Impv.,269;modo
mode,482,1;contrasted with t m,
vicissim,482,1,N.2; non modo sed
etiam,482,5 : non modo non,sed
ne q idem,ib R.1 : provided only,
573;modo ne,ib.N.2.
moliri with Inf.,423.2.N.2.
monere with Gen.or Acc.,376 and R.1:
with Inf.,423,2,N.2;with t,546.N.1.
mood 112,4,253; Indic.,254: S bjv..
255-265; Impv.,266-275;Inf.,279-281;
attraction of ,508,4;in Temporal Cla ses,
560 : in Relative Sentences,624-635; in
Comparative Sentences,639;in O.O.,
650-652.
morari with ne,548.N.1.
morigerari with Dat.,346,8.2.
mos(moris) with Inf.,422.NN.2 and 5;
with t,557.R.; morib s,399.N.1.
motion vb.of,with Inf.,421,N.1,a; vb.of,
with S p.,435;vb.of,with F t.part.,
438.N-; vb.of,with q od,525,1,N.G; end
of,conceived as Rest,412,R.1.
movere syncope in Pf.,131,3; with
Abl.of Separation,390,N.1;with t,
553,2: mot s,of Moving Ca se,408.N.2.
M lciber heteroelite,68,4.
m ltare with Abl.,378.R.3.
m ltit do s bsts.of,with PL,211,R.1,
Ex.o.
m ltit do with PL vb.,211,R.1,Ex.a.
m lt m for Abl.of Meas re,403,N.2;
very,439,N.3;m lto with Comp.,301;
with S perl.,303.
m n s with Inf.,422.N.2;with t,546,
N.2.
m tare with Abl.,404.N.1.
m tes 6,2,R.
m t o of reciprocal action,221.R.2.
myrt s heteroelite,68,5.
Nam- sage of,498 and NN.; position of,
ib.,N.1;asseverative,ib.N.2;yes for,
471.R.
naming vbs.of,with two Accs.,340.
namq e 498; position of,ib.N.1.
narrare with inf.,527,8.2.
nasals 6,2.A.: nasal class of vbs.,133,iv.
nasci with two Noms.,206;nat s,
constr.of,296.R.5; with Acc.,336.R.4:
with Abl.of Origin,395.NN.1.3;natti
in Abl.S p.,436.N.
nat ra in phrases with t,657.R.
na c m defective,70,R.; na ci,as
Gen.of Price,380,1-
ne-neg.of Opt.S bjv.,260; of Impv.,
[GENERAL INDEX.525]
270; contin ed by sq e,260; by
neve,270,444,2;with Pf.S bjv.,270,
R.2; syntax of,441,444; = non,444,1,
N.2; ne q idem,ib.1,N.2,445,448,N.2,
482,5 and R.1;in Final Sentences,543,
4; t ne,545.R.1; q o ne,ib.; paren-
thetical,ib.R.3;after vbs.of Hinder-
ing,548;after vbs.of Fear,550;ne
non,ib.N.1;with d m,573;as Con-
cessive.608.
ne-added to hic,104,1.N.3;to iste,ib.
2,N.3; to ille,103,3,N.4; as interroga-
tive,454; asseverative,ib.N.2; added
to interrogatives,ib.N.3;= nonne,ib.
N.5; added to n m,456,N.; strengthens
an,457,1,N.2;to introd ce do ble
q estions,458; necne or annon,459:
to introd ce second member of an indi-
rect q estion,460,2.
nearness adjs.of,with Dat.,359.
nec = non,442.N.3;see neq e.
necessari m with t,553,4.
necesse-85,C.; with est instead of S bjv.,
254.R.1; with Inf.,538; with t omit-
ted,638.R.2,553,4,R.1;with pred.at-
tracted,538.R.3; with t,563,4; with
habeo and Inf.,423.2.N.2,
necessity adjs.of,with Inf.,421,N.1,c;
expressed by Indic.,254.R.1,255,R.
ned m 482,5,R.2.
nefas 70,R.; with Inf.,428.N.2; with
Abl.S p.,436.N.2; with Inf.,422.N.2.
negare se of,444,1,N.2; contin ed by
neq e-neq e,445,N.; = dico non,
447; with Inf.,527,R.2.
negative-of Potential,257; of Opt.,260;
of Impv.,270; non with Opt.,260;
non with Impv.,270.R.1;noli with
Inf.,270.R.2;advs.,441-449;non,442;
ha d,443; nec = non,442.N.3; ne,
444;s bdivision of,445;combinations,
446;resol tion of,ib.N.2;positive
s pplied from,447.R.; position of,448,
449;two,449;nec non for et,ib.R.3;
in Cop lative Sentences,480;in Final
and Consec tive Sentences,543,4.
negoti m in phrases with t,546.N-2;
with Inf.,422.N.5.
nemo decl.of,70,D.; and ntill s,108;
with Pl.vb.,211,R.1,Ex.a; with Impv.
S bjv.,270,N.; and q isq am,317,2;
as adj.,ib.; et neino,ib.2.N.1;
strengthened by n s;-neq is,446,
R.3.
neq am 85,C.; comparison of,90.
neq e-with Opt.S bjv.for ne,260; adds
Impv.,270.N.; neq e neq e with PL,
285,N.1; s bdivides a general neg.,or
nego,445 and N.1;nec non,449.R 3;
for et non,480 and R.1; for nec tamen,
ib.R.3;for ne-q idem,ib.N.1;com-
pared with nec,ib.N.2;for non,ib.N.
4; for ngve,543.N.3.
neq ire conj.of,170,6;neq inont,
133,iv.N.2: with Inf.,423.2.N.2.
Nerio-decl of,41,4.
nescio-an,457,2;q is,467.R.1;q o-
modo,ib.N.; with Inf.,423,2,N.2,527,R.1.
ne ,neve-444,2;adds Final Cla se,
543,4; neq e instead,ib.N.3.
ne ter decl.of,76,108;ne tiq am,
442.N.2.
ne ter adj.with masc.s bj.,211.R.4;
demonstrative when s bst.is expected,
ib.N.3; SG.s ms p PL,ib.; PL pred.
to two ferns.,286,3;in app.to persons,
321,N.2;pron.and adj.in Cognate Acc.,
333,1,341.N.2;proii.and adj.with Part.
Gen.,369;pron.and adj.not attracted
to Ger.,427,N.3,
neve --see ne .
ni with mir m,209.N.2;range of,591,
N.2.
nihil for n ll s,108;with Impv.
S bjv.,270.N.; neg.of q isq am,317,
2; no,471,6,1;nihili as Gen.of Price,
380,1; for non,442.N.2.
nihilomin s 490,R.
nimis with q am and Indic.,467.N.
nimi m with q ant m,209.N.2,467.N.;
very,439.N.3; nimio as Abl.of Stan-
dard,403,N.3.
nisi with q od,525,2,N.2,591,6,R.3; with
t,557,N.2,591,5,R.4; and si non,591,6;
b t,except,ib.R.2;si,ib.; nisi forte,
vero,ib.R.4;nisi tamen,ib.N.1;in
asseverations,591,6,2;with Inf.,635,
N.2; with participle,667.N.
nitl-with Abl.,401.N.6;with Inf.,423,2,
N.2; with t,546.N.1.
nix-decl.of,52,7.
no how translated,470,6 and c.
nocere with Dat.,346.
nolle conj.of,174; exact se of nol e-
rit,244,R.3; nolim,nollem,as Poten-
tial,257,2,258; not in Unreal Wish,261,
R-; noli,with Inf.for Impv.,270,N.2,
271,2;nolim,with S bjv.for Impv.,
[526 GENERAL INDEX.]
271.2.N.2 : with Pf.Inf.pass.,280,2,c.N.;
nolens,in pred.app.,325.R.6 : with
Inf.,423,2,N.2 : with t,546.N.1;with
Inf.or t,538 and N.3.
nomen with esse and Cat.,349,R.5;
with Appositional Gen.,361,1;with
Gen.of Charge,378.R.2.
nominari with two Noms.,206.
NOMINATIVE defined,23,1; of 1st Decl.,
29 and N.1; of 2d Decl.,31,33,N.4; of 3d
Decl.,36,1 and 2,38,1,57.R.4; of Greek
s bstantives,68.N.4; of adjs.,75.N.4,79,
N.1; of Participles,89.R.2; for Voc.,201,
R.2;syntax of,203; two Noms.,206;
with Inf.after cop lative vb.,ib.R.3;
for Voc.in app.,321.N.1;with 5 and
gn,or ecce,343.1,N.1;with Inf.by
attraction,527,N.2; after pass.vbs.of
Saying and Thinking,628;nominativ s
pendens,627.N.2.
non neg.of Potential,257; neg.of Wish,
260; with Impv.,270.R.1; syntax of,441,
442;with ll s for n ll s,446.N.2;
non poss m non,449.R.1;nec non =
et,ib.R-3; no,471,6,1;non modo sed
etiam,482,5 and N.1;non modo sed
ne q idem,ib.R.1;for ne,573.N.2.
nonne syntax of,455;with indirect
q estion,460,1,N.2;with rhetorical
q estion,464,R.
nonn ll s 108.
noscere syncope in Pf.,131,3; novi,
nostri with Gen.Ger.,428.R.1.
no n defined,16;inflection of,17;and
prono n,16.N.2.
no rishing vbs.of,with Abl.,401,N.1.
novas Comp.of,87,9; with Inf.,422,N.
3;with t,553,4.
noX decl.of,53,8;with Abl.of Time,
393.R.5.
n bere with Dat.,346.R.2 and N.4.
n d s with Gen.,374.N.8.
n ll s -decl.of,76,90; and nemo,108;
with Impv.S bjv.,270,N.; and ll s,
317,2; for non,ib.N.2.
n m 456: with ne and nam,ib N.; in
indirect q estions,460,1 ,o; in rhetorical
q estions,464,R.
n mber SG.and PL,22; D al,ib.R.and
112,1; concord of,285 and NN.; violation
of Concord in app.,321.R.1;s bsts.of,
with Gen.,368;definite n mbers in
Abl.of Time,393.R.2.
n merals cardinals,94: ordinals,95 and
294: cpd.,96: omission of centena
milia,ib.6;insertion of et,ib.5; frac-
tions,ib.7; signs,96,ii.; distrib tives,
97 and 295; m ltiplicatives,97;propor-
tionals,97; advs.,98;d o,ambo, ter-
q e,292; mille,293: sing li,295:
distrib tives for cardinals,ib.N.; ali-
q is with,314.R.2;q isq e with,318,
2;with Part.Gen.,370.
n mero as adv.,399.N.1;(in) n mero
habere,340.R.1.
n nc strengthens etiam,478.N.1;n nc
n nc,482,1 and N.1.
n ntiare with Inf.,527.R.2; with Nom,
and Inf.,528.N.1.
n per m defective,85,1.
O-so nd of,3; weakening of,8,1; as
interjection,201.R.2,343.N.1; O si in
Wishes,261; length of final,707,5.
ob in composition,9,4; vbs.cpd.with,
take Acc.or Dat.,331,347;to give the
Ca se,408.N.3; as prep.,416,16; with
Acc.Ger.,428.R.2,432 a d N.1.
Obesse with Dat.,346.R.2,347.R.2; with
Inf.,422.N.4.
obicere with Acc.Ger.,430.N.1.
object direct,becomes s bj.of pass.,
216; indirect retained in pass.,217;
direct,330; inner,330,332,333; o ter,
338;indirect,344;of Ger.,427,2; after
Dat.Ger.,429.N.2;after Acc.S p.,435,
N.3; after Abl.S p.,436.
OBJECT SENTENCES 523-537;with q od,
524,525;with Acc.and Inf.,526,527;
with Nom.and Inf.,528; alter vbs.of
Will and Desire,532; after vbs.of Emo-
tion,533;in exclamations,534; as s bj.,
535; in part.,536,537; in O.O.,655.
Objective Genitive 363; of pers.pron.,
364.N.2.
obligate with se and Gen.of Charge,
378,R.1.
obligation expressed by Indic.,254.R.1,
255.R.
oboedire with Dat.,346.R.2.
obrepere with Dat.,347.R.2.
obsat rare with Gen.,383,1,N.2.
obsecro strengthens Impv.,269;with-
o t Inf.,546.N.3; with t,546.N.1.
obseq i with Dat.,346.R.2.
obsistere with Dat.,347.R-2;with ne,
548.N.1;with q in,555,1.
[GENERAL INDEX.527]
obstare with Dat.,347.R.2;with ne,
548.N.1 : with q in,555,1.
obstrepere with Dat.,347.R.2.
obtemperare with Dat.,346.R.2.
obtestor with Inf.,546.N.3.
obtingere with Dat.,347.R.2.
obtrectare with Dat.,346.R.2 andN.2.
obvenire with Dat.,347.R.2.
obversari with Dat.,347.R.2.
occ rrere with Dat.,347,R.2.
occ rsare with Dat.,347.n-2.
Ocior 87,7.
5di conj gation of,175,5,c;odio 6886 as
pass,of,if).N.
office s ffixes for,181,10.
officere with Dat.,346.R.2.
offici m in phrases with Inf.,422.N.2;
with t,546.N.2.
Olle-for ille,104.3.N.1.
omission of vowels,8,2,701,R.2,a;of
consonants,9,6; of s bj.,207; of cop la,
209; of other vbs.,ib.Tf.5; of ease i"
Pf.Inf.pass.,280,2,a,R.2 and c;of con-
j nction,474,N.,481.483.N.,492,N.; of
non,482,5,R.1;of vb.of Saying,545.R.3;
of vb.with sin,592,R.; of si,598; of vb.
of Protasis,599; of Protasis,600; of
Apodosis,601;of vb.after q asi and
tamq am,602.N.1;of vb.of compara-
tive cla se,640.
omittere with q od,525,1,N.1;with
Inf.,423,2,N.2; omitte,with Inf.for
Impv.,271,2,N.2.
omitting vbs.of,with q od,555,1; vbs.
of,with Inf.,423,2.
omnino yes,471,a,1.
omnis in Abl.,witho t in,388;omnia,
as Acc.of Respect,338,2.
on s with Inf.,422.N.2.
on st s with Gen.,374.N.1;with Abl.,
405.N.3.
operam in phrases with Dat.Ger.,429,
1 and N.1;with Inf.,422.N.5;with t,
546,NN.1 and 2.
Opinio in phrases with Inf.,527,R.2;
with t,557,is.; opinione as Abl.of
Respect,398,N.1.
opit lari with Dat.,346.R.2.
oportet Indic.for S bjv.,254,R.1;with
Pf.part,pass.,280.2,b,R.2; with Inf.or
S bjv.,635,R.2; with t,553,4,R.1.
Oppido very,439.N.3; with q ant m,
Oppid m has pred.adj.in agreement,
211.R.6; req ires prep.,337.R.1.; with
Epexegetical Gen.,336.N.1; in app.tp
Town in Abl.,356,R.1,391.R.1;in app.
to Loc.,411.R.3.
[ops] defective,70.D.
optare with Inf.,423,2,N.2;with t,ib.
N.4,546,N.1;optato,as Abl.of Manner,
399,N.1.
OPTATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 260-265;in
Wishes,260;particles with,261;in
Asseverations,262;as Impv.,263;as
concessive,264; in Deliberative Q es-
tions,265.
Optim m with Inf.,422.N.3.
op s with Abl.,406;with Gen.,ib.N.3;
with Nom.,ib.N.4;with part.,437.N.2;
with Inf.,422.N.2;with t,557,R.; With
Nom.and Inf.,628.N.2.
orare with two Accs.,339 and N.1; with
Inf.,546.N.3;with t,ib.N.1.
ORATIO OBLIQUA 608,2; partial,ib.3,ibA;
seq ence in,516; in Relative Sentences,
625,R.,628,R.,629.R.,648,649;comes in
witho t notice,649.N.2; shift to,ib.N.3;
moods in,650-652;interrogative in,
651;Impv.in,652;tenses in,653-655;
in Ca sal Sentences,655;Conditional
Sentences in,656-659; Logical,595,R.1,
657;Ideal,596,R.5,658;Unreal,597.R.4,
659; prono ns in,660;by Attraction,
508,4,662; partial,508,3,663; Represen-
tation,654 and N.
Orb s with Abl.,405.N.3.
order adjs.of,in pred.attrib.,326.R.6.
ordinals 94; early forms,95.N.5; alter
lor sec nd s,96,5; in dates,294; for
cardinals,ib.and 336,R.1; with q is-
q e,ib.N.,318,2; position of,676.R.2.
ordine as Abl.of Manner,399,N.1.
Origin Abl.of,395;preps,with Abl.of,
ib.NN.2 and 3;s ffixes of,182,7.
oriri -166,169,1;ort s,with Abl.of
Origin,395.N.1.
ori nd s with Abl.of Origin,395.N.1.
os bone,decl.of,48.R.; mo th,defective,
70,D.
ostendere with Acc.and Inf.,527.R.2.
ostrea heteroclite,68,1.
overlapping action 662,571,N.1.
oxymoron 694.
Paene with Indic.in Apod,of Unreal
Condition,597.R.3;position of,677.R.1.
paenitet with Gen.,377;with ne t.
[528 GENERAL INDEX.]
s bj.,ib.R.2;with Inf.,422,N.4;with .q od,542.
palam as prep.,417,8.
palatals vowels,2; consonants,6,1,N.
pal mbes heteroclite,68,7.
panis heteroclite,68,12.
par with est instead of S bjv.,254.R.1;
with Gen.or Dat,359.R.1; with Dat.
Ger.,429.N.1.
parare with Inf.,423.2.N.2; parat s,
with Inf.,421,N.1,c.
parataxis 472.
parcere with Dat.,346.R.2; parce,with
Inf.for Impv.,271,2,N.2.
parenthetical t and H8 645.R.3.
parere with Dat.,346.R.2.
pariter pariter,482,3.
pars with Pl.vb.,211,R.1,Ex.a;in Abl.
witho t in,385.N.1; t am partem,
334,R.2.
Part Affected in Acc.,338,1.
partial obliq ity 508,3,663.
particeps with Gen.,374.N.2.
participation adjs.of,with Gen.,374.
PARTICIPIAL SENTENCES 664-670 to eX-
press Time,665; Ca se,666; Condition
and Concession,667;relative cla ses.
668;F t re similarly sed,669,670.
PARTICIPLE decl.of,80,82; Abl.of,83;
Nom,and Acc.Pl.of,ib.N.1;compar-
ison of,88,89;Abl.of Cpmp.,ib.R.1;
Nom.Pl.of,ifc.R.2;Gen.Pl.of,ib.R.3;
defined,112,5; formation of,115,3;
early forms of,130,7; Pf.pass.,135,1.;
F t.Act.,ib.II.; Pf.pass,of Deponents
as act.,167.N.1; Pf.pass,of intrans.
vbs. sed as act.,220,N.1; Pf.with
habeo and teneo,238; F t.periphras-
tic,247; Pr.periphrastic with esse,ib.
N.2; Pf.with f i,250; as adj.,ib.N.2;
as pred.,261,R.1; sage of Pr.and Pf.,
282; sage of F t.act.,283 : concord
with two s bjs.in Abl.Abs.,285.N.3;
Pr.with Gen.,375; contrasted with adj.,
ib.N.1; Comp.of,with Gen.,ib.N.2;of
Birth with Abl.,396; Pf.pass,with
Op s and s s,406; in Abl.Abs.,409,
410,and NN.; Pf.pass,parallel with
Ger.,426.N.2,427.N.1;as s bst.,437;
F t.as s bst.,ib.N.1;as adj.,438;
F t.as adj.,ib.N.1; parallel with rel.
and S bjv.,ib.R.; with interrog.,469;
seq ence after,518; after vbs.of Percep-
tion,etc.,527,N.1,636; after vbs.of
Ca sation,etc..537; eq iv.to c m,686,
R.; for Prot.,593,2;for Prot.in Com-
parative Sentence,602,N.3; Concessive,
609;for rel.,637.
particles cop lative,474;adversative,
483;disj nctive,492: ca sal,498;illa-
tive,499; position of,679.
partitive apposition 322.
Partitive Genitive 367-372; with s bsts.
of Q antity,etc.,368; with ne t.SG.,
369: witli n merals,370; with prono ns,
371;with comparatives and s perla-
tives,372;preps,instead,ib.R.2;with
terq e,371.R.1;extensions of,372,
NN.: contrasted with Gen.of Character-
istic,369.N.1.
parts of speech 16.
parv s Comp.of,90;in Gen.of Price,
380,1.
passive voice,112,2;vbs.with two
Noms.,206; vb.agrees with pred.,211,
R.1,Ex.6;defined,214;Pf.with Dat.
of Agent,215,1;as reflexive,218;of
something end red,219;periphrastic
forms of,248-251; with Acc.of Respect,
338.N.2;impersonal,346.R.1.
pati with t,553,2;with Inf.,ib.N.
patronymics 182,11.
pa lo,pa l m with ante and post,
403.N.4.b.
pa se in Verse,742.
pavere constr.of,550 and N.1.
pax decl.of,70.D;in Abl.of Time,393,
R.5,394.R.1.
pec liaris with Gen.or Dat.,359,R.1.
pec s heteroclite,68,12.
pellere with Abl.of Separation,390,
N.1.
pendere with Gen.,379.
penes position of,413.R.1; se of,as
prep.,416,17.
pentameter elegiac,785; Pf.Inf.in,280,
2,6,N.2; position of words in,683.
pen lt 11.
pen s heteroclite,68,11.
per vbs.cpd.with take Acc.,331 : with
Acc.of Extent,335,336;to express
Time Within Which,ib.R.2,393.R.1;
here and there in,386.R.3; for Abl.of
Manner,399.N.1; with Person Thro gh
Whom,401;position of,413.R.1,and N.
2; se as prep.,416,18,
perceiving vbs.of,with Object Cla se,
523;with Acc.and Inf.,526,527;with
[GENERAL INDEX.529]
Nom.,528; with part.,627,N.1,536;
Nom.after,536.N.2.
percontari with two Accs.,339 and N.1.
perdi s defective,85,2.
PERFECT defined,112,3;System,114,2
and 3,b;formation of,114,115,121,2;
syncopated forms of,131,1-3;early
forms of,131,4;Stem,134;part,pass.,
135.1.; part,as s bst,167.N.1;pass,
with Dat.of Agent,215,1; part, sed as
act.,220,N.1;defined,223;Historical,
225;P re and Historical,235;force of,
236;trans,by Eng.Pr.,ib.R.; with
Aor.force,ib.; Gnomic,ib.N.; for F t.
Pf.,237; part,with habeo and teneo,
238;pass,with f i,250;S bjv.as
Potential,257,2 and N.1;in wishes,
260; S bjv.as Impv.,263,2,6,270.R.2;
tense relations in S bjv.,277;Inf.
as s bj.or obj.,280,2;after dec it,
ib.a,R.1;Emotional,ib.; after
oport it,ib.R.2; after velle,280,
2,6 and N.1; after posse,ib.; after
debeo,ib.N.3;after vbs.of Will and
Desire,280,2,c; se of part.,282 and
N.; part,as s bj.,437,N.1;Seq ence
after,611,RR.3,4;S bjv.in Final
Sentences,512.N.1;in Consec tive Sen-
tences,513 and NN.; Inf.,630; Inf.in
O.O.,659.N.
perficere with t,553,1.
pergere with Inf.,423,2,N.2.
perhibere as cop lative vb.,206,
N.1;with Nom.and Inf.,628 and
N.1.
period -Responsive and Apodotic,685;
forms disting ished by Naegelsbach,
686;Historical and Oratorical,687.
periphrasis for Impv.,271;for F t.
periphrastic,515.R.2;for F t.,531 and
R.1;for Apod,in Unreal Condition,
897,R.5.
PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION 129;act.,
247;pass.,251;with fin,247.R.1; with
forem,ib N.1;Pr.part,with esse,ib.
N.2; with f t r m esse t,248;with
in eo est,249;with posse,velle,248,
R.; Pf.part,with s m and f i,250 and
R.1;with forem for essem,ib.N.2;
with Ger.,251;F t.act.,283.
perire pass,of perdere,169,2,R..1.
peritUS with Gen.,374,N.4.
permanere with two Noms.,206.N.1.
permittere sed personally in pass.,
34
217,N.2;with Inf.,423.2.N.2,632.N.1
553,2,N.; with t,553,2.
permitting vbs.of,with Consec tive
Cla se,553,2.
pernox defective,85,2.
perper m defective,85,1.
perpet s and perpes,84,1;per-
pet m,as adv.Acc.,336.N.1.
perq am with indie.,467.N.
perseq ens with Gen.,375.N.2.
perseverare with inf.,423.2.N.2.
persons in conj gation of vb.,112,1;
concord of,287;order of,ib.R.
personal endings 114.
personal prono ns 304;omitted,ib.1;
Gen.of,as objective,ib.2,364,N.2; poss.
for,ib.2.N.2; Gen.of,as Partitive,ib.3;
for poss.,ib.3.N.1;circ mioc tion for
third personal prono n,ib.3,N.2.
perspicere with Acc.and Inf.,527.R.1.
perstare with Inf.,423,2,N.2.
pers adere sed personally in pass..
217.N.1; with Dat.,346.R.2,and NN.2,4;
with Inf.,423,2,N.2,527.R.2,646,R.1;
with t,646,N.1.
pertaes m est with Gen.,377-
pess m defective,70,A;with ire,435,
N.1.
petere with aand Abl.,339.R.1 and N.1;
with Acc.Ger.,430.N.1; with Inf.,423,
2,N.2; with t,546.N.1.
Phalaecean verse,796.
Pherecratean verse,794.
phonetic variations in vowels,8; in con-
sonants,9;in consonant stem-charac-
teristic,121.R.
piget with Gen.,377; with s bj.,ib.R.2.
pili as Gen.of Price,380,1.
pin s heteroclite,68,5.
pl s Comp.of,87.6.N.
place where,in Abl.,385;with vbs.of
Placing,ib.R.1;with Towns,386;as
Ca se,Means,etc.,389;with Books,
etc.,387;with tot s,etc.,388;in Loc.,
411: whence,in Abl.,390,391;with
Towns,391; of origin,395.N.2;whither,
in Acc.,337.
piacere with Dat.,346,R.2; se of F t.
Pf.,244.R.3.
pleas re vbs.of,with Dat.,346; adjs.of,
with Abl.S p.,436.N.2.
plebs decl.of,63.N.1,68,8.
plenty vbs.of,with Abl.,405;adjs.of.
with Gen.or Abl.,ib.N.3.
[530 GENERAL INDEX.]
plen s with Gen.,374.N.1;with Abl.,
405.N.3.
pleonasm 692.
pleraq e as Acc.of Respect,338,2.
pl ere with Abl.of Means,401.N.5.
PLUPERFECT 112,3;formation of,114,
115;Aor.forms of,131,4,6,3;defined,
223;force of,241; translated by Impf.,
ib.R.; sed as Aor.,ib.N.1; periphras-
tic,with habeo,ib.N.2;S bjv.as Po-
tential of Past,258.N.2;in Wish,260;
with vellem,261,R.; S bjv.as Conces-
sive,ib.N.; S bjv.as Impv.of Past,
273,3;tense force in S bjv.,277;in
Final Sentences,512,N.1;to express
Res lting Condition,563,1;Indic.in
Apod,of Unreal Condition,597.R.2.
pl ral of abstracts,204.N.5; sed for
SG.,ib.NN.6,7;pred.with two s bjs.,
285; ne t.pred.to two ferns.,286,3.
pl s-q am omitted with,296,R.4;pl -
ris,with vbs.of Bating and B ying,
380,1;pl rim m,with q ant m,467,
N.; pl rimi,as Gen.of Price,380,1.
poema heteroclite,68,7.
pollere with Inf.,423,2,N.2.
pollicerl with inf.,627.R.2,531.N.4.
pollis decl.of,41,4.
pondo defective,70.A.
pone sage of,416,19.
ponere with in and Abl.,386,R.1 and N.
2; s ppose,with Inf.,527.R.2.
poscere with two Accs.,339 and N.1; with
g and Abl.,ib.R.1;with Inf.or t,546,
NN.1,3.
position adjs.of,in pred.attrib.,325,R.
6; of advs.,440;of neg.,448 and NN.; of
rel.,612;of correlative cla se,620;
poetical pec liarities in,683.
positive degree lacking,87,2,7,8,and 9;
with prep,to express disproportion,
298,R.; in comparing q alities,299; with
q am after Comp.,299.N.2;with Part.
Gen.,372.N.2; s pplied from neg.,447,
R.
posse conj.of,119; potisfor posse,209,
N.2; se of F t.and F t.Pf.of,242,R.2,
244.R.3; needs no periphrasis,248,R.;
Indic.for S bjv.,254,R.1;Impf.Indic.
of Disappointment,ib.R.2;with Pf.
Inf.act.,280,2,b,and N.1;with q am,
etc.,to strengthen s perlative,303;
omitted,with q am,ib.R.1; with Inf.,
423,2,N.2;non poss m non,449.R.1;
in simple q estions,453,N.1 : for" peri-
phrastic,513,R.3,531.N.3 and 4; in Apod,
of Unreal Condition,597,R.5,c;restric-
tions with,627.R.2;in Logical Condi-
tion,657,R.; in Unreal Condition in
O.O.,659,N.
Possession Dat.of,349;compared with
Gen.,ib.R.2;of q alities,ib.R.3; Gen.
of,362; in 1st and 2d person,ib.R.1;
omission of governing word,ib.R.3.
possessive prono ns 100-102,106.N.4;
sage of s s,309,4 and NN.; syntax of,
312; intense se of,ib.R.1;for Gen.of
personal pron.,304,2,N.2;with Gen.in
app.,321,R.2;for 1st and 2d persons in
S bjective Gen.,364;as pred.,366,R.3 :
with interest a d refert,381;with
domi,411.R.4; position of,676.R.1.
possibility in Indic.rather than S bjv.,
254.R.1,255.R.
post vbs.cpd.with,take Dat.,347; with
Abl.or Acc.of Meas re,403.N.4; posi-
tion of,403,N.4,6,413.R.1;omission of,
with rel.,403,N.4; as adv.,415; as
prep.,416,20; with Pf.part.pass.,437,
N.2.
posteaq am see postq am.
poster m defective,74.R.2; Comp.of,
87,2 and 7.
postq am with Hist.Pf.or Pr.,561;
with Impf.,562;with Pl pf.,563;range
of tenses with,ib.NN.1-3; with S bjv.,
ib.N.4; Ca sal with Pr.and Pf.,564 and
N.1;in Iterative action,566,567.
postridie q am 577.N.5.
post lare with ga d Abl.,339,R.1 and
N.1;with Inf.,423.2.N.2,546.N.3;with
t,ib.N.3.
potens with Gen.,374.N.3.
POTENTIAL SUBJUNCTIVE 257-259; for Pr.
and F t.,267; for Past,258; in q es-
tions,259; for Indic.,257.N.3;not con-
ditional,257.N.2,600,2; of Past coincides
with Unreal of Present,258.N.2.
potiri with Abl.,407 and N.2,d;with
personal Ger.,427.N.5.
potis,e 85,C; potior,87,7; poti s
strengthens comparative,301;poti s
q am,with S bjv.or Inf.,577.N.6,631,
3.R.2,644.R.3;see posse.
power adjs.of,with Gen.,374;vbs.of,
with Inf.,423 and N.2; seq ence after
vb.of,515,R.3; in Indic.rather than
S bjv.,254,R.1,255.R.
[GENERAL INDEX.531]
prae to express disproportion,296.N.3;
vbs.cpd.with take Dat.,347; gives
Preventing Ca se,408.N.4; as adv.,415;
as prep.,417,9;prae q od,525,2,N.2.
praecellere with Abl of Respect,397,N.2.
praecipere with Inf.,423.2.N.2; with
t,646,N.1; sed personally in pass.,
217.N.2;praecept m,with t,546,N.2.
praecipitare with Abl.,390.2.N.3.
praecip m with t,557.R.
praeesse with Dat.Ger.,429,1.
praeficere with Dat.Ger.,429,1.
praegestire with inf.,423.2.N.2.
(in) praesentia -for the present,394,R.
praesidere with Dat.,347.R.2.
praestare with Dat.,347.R.2;with Abl.
of Respect,397,N.2; with Abl.of Meas-
re,403.N.1; with t,553,1.
praestolari with Dat.,346.N.2.
praeter to express disproportion,296,
R.3; vbs.cpd.with,take Acc.,331; posi
tion of,413.N.3; se as prep.,416,21;
with Pf.part,pass.,437.N.2;id q od,
q am q od,q od,625,2,N.2.
praeterire with q od,525,1,N.1.
precari with t,646.N.1.
predicate and cop la,205;with cop la-
tive vbs.,206;concord of,211;viola-
tion of concord of,ib.RR.1-6,NN.1-3;in
Pl.with two s bjs.,285;in Pl.with
neq e-neq e,ib N.1;concord of,in
Gender,286;in Person,287;Attrib -
tion,326; Apposition,ib.and R.6; with
Abl.Abs.,410.N.6; after Inf.,638.
prepositions assimilation of in composi-
tion,9,4;defined,16,6;repeated with
cpd.vbs.,331.RR.2,3;with Co ntries
and Towns,337,KR.1-4; with dom m,ib
R.3; omitted with Co ntries and Towns,
337,NN.1-3; instead of Dat.,347.R.1;
omitted with vbs.and adjs.of Separa-
tion,390,2 and 3; with Abl.of Origin,
395,NN.2,3;syntax of,412-416;origin of,
412; position of,413,678; repetition and
omission of,414; as advs.,415; with
Acc.,416;with Abl.,417; with Acc.and
Abl.,418;two with same case,414,R.4;
improper,412,N.; with participles for
abstract s bstantives,437.N.2.
PRESENT 112,3;System,114,3,a;r les
for formation of,121,1;notes on Sys-
tem,130;formation of Stem,133;de-
fined,223;Historical,224,229;Spe-
cific or Universal,227;Progressive,ib.
N.1;of Endeavor,ib.N.2;of Resist-
ance to Press re,ib.N.3;anticipates
F t.,228;with iam,etc.,230;con-
trasted with Pf.to give Effect in VER-
GIL,ib.N.3;part,with esse,247.N.2;
Indic.for Deliberative S bjv.,254.N.2;
S bjv.as Potential,287,2;S bjv.in
Wishes,260; S bjv.as Impv.,263,270,
R.2;S bjv.as Concessive,264;tense
relations in S bjv.,277;Inf.as s bj.or
obj.,280,1;Inf.after memini,281,2,
N.; part.,282;part,as s bst.,437,N.1;
Hist,seq ence alter,511.R.1;Inf.after
vbs.of Saying and Thinking,530;Inf.
for F t.,631,NN.3and 4.
preventing vbs.of,with ne,q omin s,
or q in,548,549,555,1.
previo s condition given by ex r ab,
and Abl.,206.R.2,396.N.2.
Priapean verse,805.
Price Gen.of,379; Abl.of,404.
pridieq am sage of,577.N.5.
primitive words 179,1.
primoris defective,85,1.
prim s with q isq e,318.N.3;primo,
prim m,325.R.7;in pred.attrib.,326,
R.6; sed partitively,291;prior,
87,8.
principal parts 120.
principal tenses 225.
pri sq am with Indic.,574,576;with
Pr.,675; with p re Pf.,ib.N.1; with
Pf.or F t,576; non pri sq am.-
d m,ib.R.; with S bjv.,677;with t
or Inf.,644.R.3.
pro to express disproportion,298;with
habere,340.R.1;with Nom.or Acc.in
Exclamations,343,1,N.1;for,compared
with Dat.,345.R.2 : position of,413,R.1 :
as prep.,417,10; with Abl.Ger.,433 :
pro eo q od,525,2,N.2;pro eo t,642,
R.4.
probare with inf.,527.R.2.
procreat s with Abl.of Origin,395,N.1.
proc l with Abl.of Separation,390.3.N.
2;as prep.,417,11.
prodesse conj.of,118;with Dat.,346,
R.2; with Inf.,422.N.4.
prodig s with Gen.,374.N.1.
profecto strengthens atq e,477.N.2.
proficere with t,553,1.
prof nd s never with Acc.,335.R.1.
[532 GENERAL INDEX.]
prof s s with Gen.,374.N.1.
prognat s with Abl.of Origin,395.N.1.
prohibere with two ACCS.,341.N.2;with
Abl.,390.2.N.3; with Inf.,423.2.N.2;
with ne,548.and N.1;with q omin s,
549,and N.1;with Inf.,532.N.1,549.N.1.
prohibiting vbs.of,with Dat.,345,R..1.
proinde strengthens Impv.,269;as
coordinating conj.,503;and proin,ib.
prolepsis of s bj.of leading cla se,468.
promising vbs.of,with Inf.,423,N.5,
527,R.4; 531.N.4.
promittere-with Pr.Inf.,527.R.2,531,
N.4.
PRONOUNS defined,16,3;compared with
no ns,ib.N.2;decl.of,17;Personal,
100-102;Determinative,103;Demon-
strative,104;Relative,105;Interroga-
tive,106;Indefinite,107;Pronominal
Adjectives,108;Possessive,100-102;
omitted,207;with Impv.,267.N.; syn-
tax of,304-319;Personal,304;Demon-
strative,305-307;hic,305;iste,306;
ille,307;Determinative is,308;Ke-
flexive,309;idem,310;ipse,311;Pos-
sessive,312;Indefinite,313-319;q i-
dam,313;aliq is,314;q is,315;
q ispiam,316;q isq am and ll s,
317; q isq e,318; alter and ali s,
319;with Part.Gen.,371;in O.O.,660.
pron ntiare sed personally in pass.,
217.N.2.
pren s constr.of,359,N.5.
prope as adv.,415;as prep.,416,22;
position of,678.R.1;propior and prox-
im s,87,8;with Acc.or ab,369.R..1.
properare with inf.,423.2.N.2.
prSpinare with Acc.Ger.,430.N.1.
propinq s Comp.of,87,9.
proponere with ACC.Ger.,430.N.1.
proposit m est,with Inf.,423,2,N.2;
with t,646.N.2.
propri s with Gen.or Dat.,359.R.1;
with t,557.R.
propter compared with Abl.of Ca se,
408,N.3;position of,413.R.1;as adv.,
415; as prep.,416,23; with Acc.Ger.,
432 and N.1.
propterea 503.
prosody 701-823.
prospicere with Dat.,346,R.2;with
Inf.,627,R.1;with t,546.N.1.
prostare with Gen.of Price,379.
protasis defined,589;eq ivalents of,
593;omission of vb.of,599;total
omission of,600.
protraction 743.
providere with t,546.N.1.
providing vbs.of,with Abl.,401.N.1.
provid s Comp.of,87,5.
proxim m i phrases with t,557.R.
pr dens in pred.attrib.,325,R.6;with
Gen.,374.N.4.
-pte added to personal prono ns,102.N.
3.
p det with Gen.,377 and R.1;with
s bj.,ib.R.2.
p er Voc.of,33.N.2.
p gnare with Dat.,346.N.6;with t,
546.N.1.
p rpose in Inf.,423.N.1;in Dat.Ger.,
429,2; in S p.,435; in F t.part,438.N.;
seq ence in cla ses of,512;reflexive in
cla ses of,521; rel.cla ses of,630; sea
Final Sentences.
p r s with Abl.of Sep.,390.3.N.
p tare with Gen.of Price,379; with two
Noms.in pass.,206;(non) p taveram,
254.N.1;p ta, t p ta,for example,
274; with Inf.,627.R.2.
p tting vbs.of,with Dat.and Acc.,or
Acc.and Abl.,348.
Q a q a,482,3..
q aerere with a,de,ex,339.R.1;with
Inf.,423.2.N.2;with Direct Q estion,
467.N.
q aeso 175,6;with Impv.,269; witho t
Inf.,546.N.3.
q ails in phrases instead of Compara-
tive,296,N.3.
Q ality -possession of,349,R.3;Gen.of,
365 and R.1;Gen.and Abl.of,ib.R.2.
400.R.1;Gen.of,as pred.,366; Abl.of,
400;personified q ality as person,ib.
R.2;Comparison of q alities,299.
q am after comparatives,296 and R.1;
omission of,ib.R.4;preps,instead,ib.
N.3;atq e instead,ib.N.4;with pro,
Ut,q i,to express disproportion,298;
with positive for comparative,299.N.2;
in comparison of q alities,299; with po-
t it and s perlative,303; with q i and
s perlative,ib.R.2; magis,non aliter,
q am t,557.N.2;q am si,with
S bjv.of Comparison,602 : with q i
or t after comparatives,631,3 : with
q am q i and s perlative,642.R.5;
[GENERAL INDEX.533]
after ali s or sec s,643,N.4,with Com-
parative Sentences,644;with poti s,
pri s,etc.,R.3.
q amdi 568; with Indic.,569; range
of,ib.N.1.
q amlibet 606.
q amq am 603 and N.; with Indic.,
605; with S bjv.,ib.RR.1,2,and N; and
yet,ib.a.3;with part.,609.N.1,667.N.;
with Inf.,635.N.2.
q amvlS 603 and N.; with S bjv.,606;
with Indic.,ib.N.1; inflection of vb.of,
ib.N.2;with licet,607.N.2; with part.,
609.N.1,667.N.; with adj.or adv.,609,
N.2.
q ando with Ca sal Indic.,640; with
S bjv.,641;early se,538.N.3,680.N.3;
conditional se,690.N.3.
q andoq e with ca sal cla se,641.N.5;
q andoq e q andoq e,482.1.N.1.
q antity r les for,702-706;of final
syllables,707-713; of polysyllables,707-
709; of monosyllables,710-713;of stem
syllables,714;of cpds.,715;in early
Latin,716,717.
q antity 12; s bsts.of,with Gen.,368.
q ant m - with minim,mini m,etc.,
209.N.2,467.N.; with maxim s and
pot it t strengthen s perlative,303;
q ant m q i,with s perlative,ib.R.
2; q anti,with vbs.of Rating and
B ying,380;with ad vs.and Indic.,
467,N.
q ant mvis 603 and N.,606.
q asi with s bst.,439,N.4; with S bjv.
of Comparison,602; with Indic.,ib.N.1;
to apologie,eft.N.2; to give an Ass med
Reason,id.N.4,666.N.
q aten s as a Ca sal particle,638.N.5.
q att or early forma of,95.N.3.
q e added to reis.,111,2;syntax of,
476 and NN.; for q oq e,479.N.2;adds
third member,481,N.
q emadmod m sic,482,3,N.
q erl with Acc.and Inf.,633.R.1.
q estions with Potential S bjv.,259;
deliberative,265,465 rpassionate eq iv.
to command,273,453.N.2;predicate
and nominal,451;rhetorical,265,451,
R.2,464,466;direct simple,453-457;
eq iv.to Condition,463.N.3; with ne,
454;with nonne,455;with n m,456;
with an,457;direct disj nctive,458;
neg.of,459;particles in indirect,460;
moods in,482-467;Indic.in,463,464;
S bjv.in,465,466;indirect,467;gen-
ine,463; disconnected,467.N.; ex-
clamatory,658.
q i interrogative 106 and R.
q i relative 105 and NN.; with q am
and S bjv.to express disproportion,
298;after dign s,etc.,552.R.2; eq iv.
to si q is,625,2; explicative,626;
strengthened by t, tpote,q ippe,
ib.N.1;q od sciam,627.R.1;eq iv.to
c m is,626.R.,633,634;eq iv.to t is,
630,631; after comparatives with
q am,631,3;eq iv.to adj.,ib.4;sed
q i,q i tamen,636.N.2-,q o q is-
q e,with comparative,642,R.2; see
q o and q a.
q ia after vbs.of Doing and Happening,
525,1,N.4; origin of and,correlatives
with,638,NN.1,2;with Ca sal Indic.,
540; with S bjv.,641; after vbs.of
Emotion,542,R.; with Inf.,635.N.2.
q ic mq e 106 and N.5; with Indic.,
254,4,625.
q idam 107,2;syntax of,313;with
q asi,319,R.2; strengthened by cer-
t s, n s,313.R.3.
q idem with demonstrative pron.,307,
R.4;position of,413.N.3,679;yes,with
sane,471,a.,1.
q ilibet 107 and N.
q in with mir m,209.N.2; strength-
ens Impv.,269;non q in as Ca sal,
541.N.2; force of,547; in Consec tive
Sentences,552,3;with vbs.of Prevent-
ing,555,1;with vbs.of Do bt and Un-
certainty,ib.2; after non d bito,ib.2,
R.1;eq iv.to t non,556;after vbs.
of Saying,etc.,555,2;in Relative Sen-
tences of Character,632 and R.; facere
non poss m q in,556.
q ippe 498.N.8; with q i,628.N.1.
q iq i 105 and N.4.
q ire conj gation of,170,a; with Inf.,
433,2,N.2.
q is indefinite and q i,107,1; for ali-
q is,ib.R.and N.1;syntax of,315;
aliq is instead,ib.N.1;familiar sage
of,317.2.N.2.
q is interrogative 106;and q i,ib.R.;
old forms of,ib.NN.1,2;q i in Wishes,
261; for ter,300.N.
q isnam 106 and N.5.
q ispiam 107,3,and N.1;syntax of,316.
[534 GENERAL INDEX.]
q isq am 107,3,and N.2; syntax of,317;
strengthened by n s,ib.1.N.1; nega-
tive of,ib.2; as adj.,ib.1,N.3.
q isq e 107,5,and N.; q isq is instead,
105.N.4; with Pl.vb.,211,R.1,Ex.a; with
ordinal,294.N.,318,2; syntax of,318;
with s perlatives,ib.2;with reflexives,
ib.3; attraction of,ib.N.2;s m q is-
q e,ib.N.4; with q o and compara-
tive,642,R.2; t q isq e,with s per-
lative,ib.
q isq is 105;as adj.,ib.N.4; with
Indic.,254,4,625.
q ivis 107,4 and N.
q o as Ca sal conj nction,541,N.2;non
q o in Final Cla ses,545,2;q one,ib.
R.1; q o seti s,549.N.4.
q oad force of,568;of complete coex-
tension,569; ntil,with Indic.,571; with
S bjv.,572; ntil,with S bjv.,ib.N.5.
q od in Inner Obj.,333 l.N.1;introd ces
Object Sentences,524; after vbs.of Add-
ing and Dropping,525,1 : after demon-
stratives,ib.2; and t,ib.1.N.5;q id
est q od,ib.1.N.2; after verba senti-
endi,ib.N.T; after demonstratives,
with preps.,ib.2.N.2; as to the fact that,
with S bjv.,ib.2.N.3; with S bjv.in
O.O.,ib.3; after vbs.of Motion,ib.1,
N.6; gives Gro nd in Exclamations,534,
R.1;with Ca sal Sentence in Indic.,
540; with Ca sal Sentence in S bjv.,
541;after vbs.of Emotion,542;with
diceret,ib.N.3;non q od,ib.N.2;
magis q od,641.N.2;correlatives of,
638.N.1;and q ia,ib.N.2; nisi q od,
591.R.3;q od si,610.R.2.
q om see c m.
q omin s force of,547; with vbs.of
Preventing,etc.,549; for ne,548.N.2;
and q in,549.N.3.
q omodo with Direct Q estion,467.N.
q oniam with Ca sal Indic.,540;with
S bjv.,641; original force of,538.N.3;
early tisage of,580.N.3.
q oq e syntax of,479;and etiam,479,
R.and N.1;q e instead,ib.N.2;with
sed and ver m,482,5 and N.1.
Bating vbs.of,with Gen.and Abl.,379,
380.
ratio in Abl.of Manner,399,N.1;with
t,546.N.2.
recens with Abl.,390,3,N.1.
recipere with Abl.or in,389.
reciprocal relations given by inter se,
221; by alter alter m,etc.,ib.R.1;by
invicem,m t o,etc.,ib.a.2.
recitation of verses 754.
recordari with Pr.Inf.,281,2,N.; with
Acc.,376.R.2.
rect m with Inf.,422,N.3.
rec sare with Inf.,423.2.N.2; with ne,
648.N.1; with q omin s,549 and N.1;
constr.with,549,N.1.
red in composition,9,4,715.R.3.
reddere with Pf.part.,537.N.2; reddi
and fieri,206.N.1,340.R.1.
red plication in Pr.stem,133,11.; in
Pf.stem,134,iii.; omitted in Pf.of
cpd.vbs.,ib.
Reference Dat.of,352.
refert with Gen.and Abl.,381,382;
Nom.with,381.N.3;origin of,ib.N.5;
expression of Degree of Concern,382,1
and 2;expression of Thing Involved,
ib.3.
refert s with Gen.,374.N.1.
reflexive 218;passive sed for,218;
approaches deponent,218,R-; prono ns,
309;is retained instead of reflexive,ib.
N.1;strengthened,ib.N.2;s m q is-
q e,318.N.3;with ipse,311,2;with
Acc.of Respect,338,N.2; in s bordinate
cla ses,520-522;not in Consec tive
Sentences,521,R.1;refers to real s bj.,
309,2,521.R.2; free se of,ib.R.3; Indic.
Relative Sentences,ib.a.4;ambig ity
in,ib.N.3;demonstrative instead of,
ib.R.1.N.3.
reformidare with inf.,423.2.N.2.
refragari with Dat,346.R.2.
refraining vbs.of,with q in,555,1.
ref sing vbs.of,with ne,548;with
q omin s,549; with Inf.,548.R.2; with
q in,555,1.
Reiian s Vers s 822.
regio in Abl.witho t in,385.N.1.
relation s ffixes for,181,8.
relationship s ffixes for,181,7,182,11.
relative prono ns 105;made indefinite,
111,1;or niversal,ib.2; in Inner Obj.,
333.1.N.2;instead of app.with refert,
381.N.2; contrasted with interrogative,
467.R.2,611,R.2; indefinite with Indic.,
354,R.4; with S bjv.,667.N.; advs.in-
stead,611,R.1; contin ed bydemonstra-
tive,636.N.1; repetition of,615-
[GENERAL INDEX.535]
RELATIVE SENTENCES 610-637;for Pro-
tasis,593,1: general consideration of,
610; how introd ced,611; position of,
612; antecedent in,613;concord in,614
and RR.; id q od,etc.,in app.to a sen-
tence,ib.R.2;incorporation of app.,ib.
R.4;repetition of antecedent,615; in-
corporation of antecedent,616; attrac-
tion of,617;correlative of,618;absorp-
tion of correlative,619; position of
correlative,620; indefinite antecedent,
621; tenses in,622,623; in Iterative
action,623;moods in,624-635;indefi-
nite and generic relatives with Indic.,
254.R.4,625,1; or S bjv.,ib.R.; condi-
tional,625,2;explanatory,626;S bjv.
in explanatory,627;q od sciam,etc.,
ib.R.1; restrictions with esse,posse,
attinet,ib.R.2; with S bjv.by Partial
Obliq ity,628;with S bjv.by Attrac-
tion,629;Final,630;attraction of
diceret,ib.N.3;Consec tive,631;after
definite antecedent,ib.1;after indefi-
nite antecedent,ib.2;after compara-
tive,ib.3; parallel to adj.,ib.4;with
q in,632; Ca sal,633; Concessive and
Adversative,634; in Inf.,635;combina
tion of,636; participle instead,637,668;
in O.O.,655 and RR.
relat as S p.,436.N.
relieving vbs.of,with Abl.,390,2.
relinq ere with Acc.Ger.,430.N.1.
reliq m est with t,553,4.
reliq s sed partitively with S bst.,
291.R.2;ali s for,319.N.1;reliq a,
as Acc.of Respect,338,2.
remembering vbs.of,with Gen.,376;
with Acc.,ib.R.2.
remex defective,70,D.
reminding vbs.of,with Gen.,376; with
Abl.or Acc.,ib.ER.1,2.
removing vbs.of,with Abl.,390,2.
rendering vbs.of,with Inf.,421,N.1,6.
reperiri with Nom.and Inf.,528.N.1.
repetition of relative,615-
replet s with Gen.,374.N.1.
reponere with in and Acc.,385,N.2.
reposcere with two Accs.,339 and N.1,
representatio 654 and N.,656.N.1.
representation vbs.of,with Acc.and Inf.,
526,527;with part.,527.N.1,536.
reprimere with n e,548,N.1.
rep gnare with Dat.,346,R.2;with ne,
548,N.1T
req ies heteroclite,68,8.
req iring vbs.of,with two Accs.,339
and R.1.N.1;with ab,ib.N.2.
reri -part,of,with Pr.force,282,N.
res for ne t,204.N.4; constr ed like
ne t.,211.N.2;with AppositionalGgn.,
361,1;in phrases with Inf.,422,N.2.:
divinam rem facere,with Abl.,401,N.
4;rem certare,333,2,R.
resistere with Dat.,346.R.2 -,with ne,
548.N.1;with q in,555,1.
resisting vbs.of,with Dat.,346.
resol tion of long syllable,732.
resolving vbs.of,with Inf.,423 and N.2;
with t,646.
Respect Acc.of,338; with vbs.of Cloth-
ing,etc.,ib.N.2;Abl.of,397;Abl.of,
with comparatives,398;Abl.of,with
words of Eminence or S periority,397,
N.2;preps,instead,ib.N.1.
respice with Direct Q estion,467.N.
responde with Direct Q estion,467.N.;
i s respondere,333,2,R.
rest conceived as end of Motion,412,
R.2.
restat with t,553,4.
restrictions in Relative Sentences,627,
RR.1,2.
res lt for Sentences of,see Consec tive
Sentences.
ret heteroclite,68,12.
retinere with n,548.N.1.
re s with Gen.,374.N.2;378.R.1.
ridere with Acc.and Inf.,533,R.1.
rhotacism 47.
rhythm in arrangement,627,2,6;de-
nned,739;ascending or descending,
735;names of,736;classes of,737;
rhythmical series,738; nion of Ian,
g age with,748.
reb r decl.of,44,5,45,R-2.
rogare with two Accs.,339,and N.1;with
Acc.Ger.,430.N.1;with t,546.N.1;
with Direct Q estion,467.N.; rogat ,
of Moving Ca se,408.N.1.; with Inf.or
t,546,N.3.
root defined,25,1,N.,177.
r dis with Gen.,374.N.4.
r s --as limit of Motion,337;in Abl.
of Separation,390,2; r rl in Loc.,411,
R.2.
S -final omitted,27,N.,703.R.3; s ffixes
with,188.
[536 GENERAL INDEX.]
sacer with Gen.or Dat.,359,R.1;sa-
cr m facere,with Abl.,401.N.4.
Sacramento as Abl.of Manner,399,
N.1.
sacrificare with Abl.,401.N.4.
sacrificing vbs.of,with Abl.,401,N.4.
saepe as attrib.to s bst.,439.N.4.
saltem strengthens at,488.N.2.
sal taris has no s perlative,87,9.
salvere conj gation of,176,4.
sane strengthens Impv.,269;very,439,
N.3;with concessive ne,608;with
q am and Indic.,467.N.; yes,471,a.
sang is decl.of,41,4.
sapiens as s bst.,437.N.1.
Sapientia in phrases with Inf.,422,N.
2;with t,657.R.
Sapphic verse,797,804.
satias heteroclite,68,8 and 12.
satis -very,439.N.3;attraction of pred.
after sati s est,535.R.3.
sat rate with Gen.,383,1,N.2.
Sat rnian -verse,758.
sat s with Abl.of Origin,395,N.1.
saying vbs.of,with Object Cla se,523;
vbs.of,with q od,625,1,N.7;vbs.of,
with Acc.and Inf.,626,527;vbs.of,
with Nona,in pass.,528;vbs.of,at-
tracted into S bjv.after q od,541.N.
3;vbs.of,omitted,645.R.3;vbs.of,
with q in,555,2.
scat6re with Gen.,383.1.N.2.
scaon verse,762.
scientia in phrases with t,657.R.
scilicet yes,471,a,2.
scire first Impv.wanting,267.R.;sciens
inpred.attrib.,325,R.6;q od sciam,
q ant m scio,627,R.1;with Inf.,
423,2,N.2,527.R.1;followed by direct
q estion,467,N.; sciens,with Gen.,
375.N.2; scit as S p.,436.N.
scribere with Acc.and Inf.,627,R.2;
with t,546,N,1.
season adjs.of,in pred.attrib.,325,R.6.
secondary words see Derivatives.
sec nd m as prep.,416,24; alter for
sec nd s.
sec s 70,B;seq i s,87,8;strengthens
sin,694; with q am,643.N.4.
sed in composition,9,4,715.R.1.
sed introd ces contrast to demonstra-
tive,307.R.4;with etiam,q oq e,
after non modo,482,5 and N.1; with
ne q idem,ib.R.1;omitted,ib.N.2;
with et,ib.N.2; syntax of,485;repeat-
ed,ib.N.2;strengthened,ib.N.3.
seeking vbs.of,with Final Dat.,356,N.2.
seeming vbs.of,with two Noms.,206.
semi-deponents 167-
semi-hiat s 720,R.1.
semi-vowels 6,2,A.
sempitern m as adv.Acc.,336.N.1.
senat s decl.of,61,68.5.
sending -vbs.of,with Acc.Ger.,430.
senex -decl.of,56,5;Comp.of,87,9.
sentence -simple or cpd.,201;syntax of
simple,202,ff.; simplest form of,202;
simple expanded,284,ff.; incomplete,
450-470;coordination of,473;Cop la-
tive,474-482; Adversative,483-491; Dis-
j nctive,492-497;Ca sal and Illative,
498-503;Object,523-537;Ca sal,538-
542;Final,543-550;Consec tive,551-
558;Temporal,559-588;Conditional,
589-602; Concessive,603-609;Relative,
610-637; Abridged,645-663; Partici-
pial,664-670.
sententia in phrases with t,646.N.2,
557.R.
sentire with Acc.and Inf.,627.R.2.
Separation Gen.of,374.N.8,383,2;Abl.
of,390.
SEQUENCE OF TENSES 509-519;r le and
modifications,509; general considera-
tions,610;shift from primary to sec-
ondary seq ence,511.R.2;in sentences
of Design,512;in sentences of lies lt,
613;in coincident sentences,ib.N.3;
representation of S bjv.in,614,515;
in O.O.,516;after other moods,517;
after Inf.or part.,518;original S bjvs.
in,619;derangement of,ib.R.; in Com-
parative Sentences,602,R.1;after Hist.
Pr.,611.R.1; after P re Pf.,ib.R.3,
613.R.1;after Hist.Pf.,511.R.4;after
accidit,etc.,ib.R.2;after vb.with
f t re character,615,R.3.
seq ester heteroclite,68,4.
seq it r with t,553,3.
sert m heteroclite,68,3.
servire with Dat.,346.R 2.
serv s omitted,362.N.1.
shortening of pen lt,701,R-2,ft; of vow-
els,716,717.
showing vbs.of,with two Noms.,206;
with two Accs.,340; with Acc.and Inf.,
526,527;with Nom.and Inf.,528.
si with O in Wishes,261 and N.1;with-
[GENERAL INDEX.537]
o t o in Wishes,ib.N.1;sis,sodes,
s ltis.with Impv.,269;in Indirect
Q estion after vbs.of Trial,460,1,6;in
Iterative action,666,667;sign of Con-
dition,690 and N.1;slq idem,ib.N.2,
596.R.5; si non and nisi,691; sin,692;
si iodo,tamen,vero,695,R.O; si
forte,ib.N.1; Concessive,604,R.1;with
Inf.,635.N.2.
sibilants 6,2,A; s ffixes with,188.
sic coordinate with other particles,482,
4,N.; correlative of si,690.N.1.
sic t gives Ass med Eeason,602,N.4.
significare with inf.,527.R.2.
sign m in phrases with t,646.N.2.
silentio as Abl.of Manner,399.N.1.
Bimilis--compared,87,3;with Gen.or
Dat.,359,R.1 and N.4.
sim l as prep.,417,12; sim l-sim i,
482,1 and N.1;Temporal,with atq e
(ac),as soon as,561-563;Ca sal with
Pr.and Pf.,564 and N.; with F t.and
F t.Pf.,565 and N.
sim lare with Inf.,527.R.2.
sin se of,592; strengthened by min s,
etc.,ib.R.
sine position of,413.R.1;as prep.,417,
13;with Abl.Ger.,433.N.2.
sinere with Inf.,423.N.C,553,2,N.; with
t,532,N.1,553,2.
sing lar in collective sense for PL,204,
N.8;Voc.with Pl.vb.,211.N.2;ne t.
s ms p preceding PL,ib.N.3;as a
s bj..combined with c m and another
word,285,N.2.
sing lare in phrases with Inf.,422.N.3;
in phrases with t,553,4.
sing l s with n merals,295.
siq idem 590,N.2,595,R.5.
sinister Comp.of,87,1,R.1.
sis strengthens Impv.,269.
sisti as cop lative vb.,206.N.1.
sive se of,496;sive sive,ib.2,595,
R.4; or ib.N.1;and se ,ib.N.3.
smell vbs.of,with Inner Object,333,2,
N.5.
socer and socer s,32,1,N.
sodes strengthens Impv.,269-
solere with Inf.,423.2.N.2; sOlito,as
Abl.of Respect,398.N.1.
sollicitari with Acc.and Inf.,533,R.1.
sol s decl.of.,76;in pred.attrib.,325,
R.6;non sOl m sed,etc.,482,5,and R.1;
with q i and S bjv.,631,1.
solvere with Abl.,390.2.N.2.
somniare with Acc.and Inf.,527.R.1.
sonants 6,2,R.
sortito as Abl.of Manner,399.N.1.
Sotadean -verse,816.
so nd vbs.of,with ne t.Acc.of Inner
Object,333.2.N.6.
Specification Gen.of,361.
spectare with ex and Abl.,402,R.2.
spec s heteroclite,68,9.
sperare with Inf.,527.R.2; with Pr.
Inf.,531.N.4.
spes with est and Pr.Inf.,631.N.4; in
phrases with Inf.,527.R.2; with t,
646.N.2;in Abl.of Respect,398.N.1.
spinter defective,70.R.
sponte defective,70,A.
Standard Abl.of,402,403;ex and Abl.
instead of Abl.,402.R.2;Abl.of,with
ante or post,403.N.4;Acc.of Extent
for Abl.,ib.N.3;of comparison omit-
ted,297-
Stare with Gen.of Price,379; to abide
by,with Abl.,401,N.6;to persist in,with
Inf.,423,2,N.2.
Stat ere with in and Abl.,385.R.1;with
Inf.,423,2,N.2;with t,546.N.1.
Stat s in phrases with t,557.R.
stem 25,1,132; Present,114,3,a,133;
Perfect,114,3,6,134; S pine,114,3,c,
135;Formation of Verb stem,132-135;
varies between Conj gations,136;
q antity of stem syllables,714.
stem-characteristic 26,120; e phonic
changes in,121.R.
stillare with AbL,401.N.5.
st dere with Dat.,346,s.2;with Dat.
Ger.,429,1 and N.1;with Inf.,423.2.N.
2;with t,546.N.1.
st dios s with Gen.,374.N.5.
st ltitia in phrases with Inf.,422,N.2.
s adere with Dat.,346.R.2,and N.2;
with Inf.,423.2.N.2;with t,646.N.1.
s b in composition,9,4; vbs.cpd.
with,take Acc.or Dat.,331,347; with
condicione,etc.,399,N.3; sage of,as
prep.,418,2.
s besse with Dat,347.R.2;timorem,
with Acc.and Inf.,533.R.1.
s bject 201;in Nom.,203;in Acc.with
Inf.,ib.R.1;forms of,204;omitted,
207; of impersonal vbs.,208,1,N.and
2.N.1; M ltiplication of,285,ff.; Q alifi-
cation of,288,ff.; prolepsis of s bj.of
[538 GENERAL INDEX.]
dependent cla se,468;of Inf.omitted,
527.R.3,532,R.2 and N.2; Acc.and Inf.
as,535;attraction of pred.after Acc.
and Inf.,ib.R.3.
S bjective Genitive,363,364; poss.pron.
instead,364.
SUBJUNCTIVE 112,4;early forms of,130,4;
Aorist forms of Pf.and Pl pf.,131,4,6,
2,3; Indic.for Deliberative,254.N.2;
with generic relatives,ib.R.6,625,R.;
force of,255;Indic.with vbs.of Possi-
bility,etc.,ib.R.; Ideal and Unreal,256,1;
Potential and Opt.,ib.2 Potential
of Pr.and F t.,257-259;Potential for
Indic.,ib.N.3;Potential of Past,258;
Potential of Past with vellem,etc.,ib.
N.1; Opt.,260; negs.of Opt.,^..parti-
cles with Opt.,261;Impf.for Unreal
wish,ib.N.2; in Asseverations,262;
as Impv.,263,267,270,R.,272; as con-
cessive,264 and N.; tense relations of,
277;with q am t or q am q i to
express disproportion,298; in Delib-
erative or Rhetorical q estions,265,
465,466;in Indirect q estions,467;
after vb.with F t.character,615,
R.3;Original in dependence,519;
with q od,as to the fact that,525,2,N.3;
in Final and Consec tive Sentences,543,
4;with t for Inf.,557.N.1;in Tem-
poral Cla ses,560,2,563,NN.4,6;initer-
ativo action,567.N.; in Contemporane-
o s action,572,573;in S bseq ent
action,577;with c m,585,588;in
Belative Sentences,627,628;by Attrac-
tion,509,4,629;after poti s,644.R.3;
in O.O.,650-652.
s blimis in pred.attrib.,325.R.6.
s bolet with Inf.,422.N.4.
s bordination-defined,472; syntax of
S bordinate Cla ses,504,ff.; division
of,505-507;moods in,508;Seq ence
of Tenses in,509-519.
s bseq ent action syntax of Sentences
of,574-577;with Indic.,574-576; with
S bjv.,577.
s bstantives defined,16,1,and R.1.N.1;
inflection of,17; division of,18; gender
of,19,20;mobilia,21,2;epicene,ib.
3;irreg lar,67-71;heterogeneo s,
67;heteroclites,68;metaplasts,ib,;
defective,69;sing laria tant m,ib.
A;pl ralia tant m,ib.B;hetero-
loga,ib.C;formation of,180,181;
witho t s ffixes,183;adjs.and parts,
sed as,204.XN.; Pl.of abstracts,ib.
NN.5,6; agreement of pred.,211 and
RR..NN.; with several adjs.in SG.,290,
R.2;common s rname in PL,290,
N.1;verbal with Acc.,330.N.3,337.N.5;
verbal with Dat.,356.N.3,357,358.N.2;
in Abl.Abs.,410.N.5;with Dat.Ger.,
428.N.5;with Inf.for Gen.Ger.,ib.N.
4;in phrases with Final Sentence,546,
R.2;in phrases with Consec tive Sen-
tence,557 and R.
s bter vbs.cpd.with take Acc.,331;
as adv.,415;as prep.,418,2.
s bvenire with Dat.,347.R.2.
s ecedere with Dat.,347.R.2.
s ccrescere with Dat.,347.R.2.
s cc mbere with Dat.,347.R.2.
s cc rrere with Dat.,347,8.2.
s dare with Abl.of Means,401.N.5.
s fferre-Pf.of,171.N.2.
s ffixes 180;primary and secondary,ib.
N.1; of s bstantives,181; of adjs.,182;
forming dimin tives,181,12,182,12; in
detail,184-189;with vowels,184;with
g tt rals,185;with dentals,186;with
labials,187;with s,188;with liq ids,
189.
s ffragari with Dat.,346,s.2.
s i decl.of,102 and N.1;with -met,
ib.N.2; with -pte,ib.N.3;circ mloc -
tion for Part.Gen.,304,3,N.2; sage of,
309,520-522;complement of Inf.,309,3;
is instead,ib.N.1; with s s,ib.N.2.
s ltis strengthens Impv.,269.
s m see esse.
s mm s comparison of,87,2; sed par-
ti tively,291,R.2.
s pellex decl.of,44,5.
s per vbs.cpd.with,take Acc.or Dat.,
331,347; as adv.,415; as prep.,418,4;
with Acc.Ger.,432,N.1;with Abl.Ger.,
433;id q od,q am q od,525,2,N.2.
s perare with Acc.of Respect,397.N.2.
s peresse with Dat.,347.R.2.
s perior 87,2 and 7.
s periority vbs.of,with Acc.of Re-
spect,397.N.2.
s perlative in issim s,86; in rim s,
87,1; in lim s,ib.3; in entissim s,
ib.4 and 5; lacking,ib.9; of parts.,89;
of advs.,93; meaning of,varies with
position,291,R.2,302; strengthened,303;
with q am,q ant m,q i,ib.R.2,642,
[GENERAL INDEX.539]
R.5; with q isq e,318,2; with Part.
Gen.,372; with preps.,ib.R.2; with
lit,642.R.2.
s persedere with Abl.,390.2.N.3.
s perstes with Gen.or Dat.,359,R.1.
SUPINE 112,5; system,114,3,e; formation
of,116,3,121,3; stem,135; in Abl.of
Sep.,390.3.N.3,436.N.4 : in Abl.of Re-
spect,397,1; with op s,406.N.5; de-
fined,434; Acc.of,435; Abl.of,436.
s ppetiae-defective,70,R.
s pplex with Dat.,346.N.5.
s pplicare with Dat.,346,it.2 and N-.4.
s pra with q am after a comparative,
296,N.3; with Abl.of Meas re,403.N.1;
as adv.,415; as prep.,416,25.
s rds 6,2,R.
s rname common,in Pl.,290.N.1.
s s -decl.of,59.
s scensere with Dat.,346,11.2.
s scipere with Acc.Ger.,430.N.1.
s spicari with Acc.and Inf.,527.R.2.
s spicere with Acc.and Inf.,627.R.1.
s spirare with Acc.and Inf.,533.R.1.
sUstinere with Inf.,423.2.N.2.
SUUS(OS) 102;syntax of,309; emphatic,
ib.2;with prep,phrases,ib.4;is in-
stead,ib.N.1;s m q isq e,ib.N.3;
s o tempore,ib.4; with Gen.Ger.,
428.R.1;in dependent cla ses,521 j
s om with tit,657.R.
syllaba anceps 741.
syllables division of,10;names for,11;
open,11.R.; close,ib.; length of,12;
common,13; q antity of final,707-713;
of polysyllables,707-709;of monosyl-
lables,710-713.
syllepsis 690.
sy apheia 728.
syncope 725-743;in Pf.forms,131,ff.
synecdoche 695.
synieais 727-
syntax defined,201.
systole 722.
T so nd of,7;t-clasa of vbs.,133,iii.
tabes heteroclite,68,8.
tabo defective,70,A.
taedet with Gen.,377; with prono n as
s bj.,377,R.2.
taking vbs.of,with two Accs.,340; End
For Which given by Dat.or ad,ib.R.2;
vbs.of Taking Away,with Dat.,347,R.5;
with Acc.Ger.,430-
talaris ana talari s,84,2.
talis with q i or t and S bjv.,631,1
and R.1.
tam with q am,q ant m,q i,and
s perlative,303.R.2; with q i or t and
S bjv.,631,1 and R.1.
tamen introd ces contrast,307.R.4;
position of,413.N.3; with sed,485.N.3;
syntax of,490;with at,488.N.2;em-
phasises adversative relation,587.R.1;
with tametsi,604,8.3.
tametsi form,603 and n.; sage,604
and RR.
tamq am with s bst.,439,N.1;with
S bjv.of Comparison,602; with Indic.,
ib.N.1; to give an Ass med Reason,ib.
N.4;with part.,666.N.; tamq am 81,
602,N.4; coordinate with sic,482,3,N.
tanti as Gen.of Price,380,1.
tantidem as Gen.of Price 380,1.
tant s with q i or t and S bjv.,631,1
and R.1; tanti,with vbs.of Eating and
B ying,380;tanti est,It is worth while,
ib.R.1; tant m,with q am,q an-
t m,q i,and s perlative,303,R-2;
tant m,for Abl.of Meas re,413.N.2;
non tant m sed,etc.,482,5;tant m
q od,625,2,N.2; tant m abest t,
552,R.1.
taste vbs.of,-with Inner Obj.,333,2,N.5.
teaching vbs.of,with two Accs.,339 and
NN.2,3.
temperare with Dat.,346,R.2 and N.2;
with ne,548.N.1;temper ans,with -Gen.,375.N.2.
templ m omitted,362.R.3.
TEMPORAL SENTENCES 559-588;division
of,559;moods in,560; Antecedent Ac-
tion,561-567; Iterative Action,566,567;
Contemporaneo s Action,568-573; S b-
seq ent Action,574-577; with c m,
678-688;general view of,579;Temporal
c m,580; c m invers m,581; Explic-
ative c m,582;Conditional c m,583;
Iterative c m,584;Circ mstantial
o m,585-588;Historical c m,585;
Cansal c m,586;Concessive c m,587;
c m-t m,588;in O.O.,655.
temptare with inf.,423,2,N.2.
temp s with Inf.orGer.,428,N.2; tem-
pore or in tempore,394,R.; id tem-
poris,336.N.2;with Inf.,422.N.2;
temperi,411.N.1.
tendency s ffixes for,182,3.
[540 GENERAL INDEX.]
tendere man s with Dat.,358.N.3.
tenere with Pf.part,to denote Main-
tenance of Res lt,238;memoria
teneo,with Pr.Inf.,281,2,N.;(se) with
ne,548.N.1;with q omin s,549;
with q in,555,1; with t,553,1;teneri,
with Gen.of Charge,378.R.1.
tenses 112,3; signs of,114,2; formation
.of,114,115,121;syntax of,222-252;
definitions,223; of contin ance,attain-
ment,or completion,224; Pr.,227-230;
Impf.,231-234;P raPf.,235-238;Hist.
Pf.,239,240; Pl pf.,241; F t.,242,
243; F t.Pf.,244,245; periphrastic,
246-251; in Letters,252; of Indic.,276;
of Impv.,278; Seq ence of,509; in
Final and Consec tive Sentences,643,
3;in Relative Sentences,622,623;in
O.O.,653-655; in Inf.,279,653; of
S bjv.,277,654,655;fiepresentatio,
654,N.
ten s position of,413.R.1; sage of,as
prep.,417,14.Q
terminatio st of cases 27.
terra in Abl.witho t in,386.N.1;ter-
raeas Loc.,411.R.2.
tertii m-est with t,553,4.
testis est with Acc.and Inf.,527,R.2.
thematic class of verbs 133,1.
thickness how expressed,335.R.1.
thinking vbs.of,with two Noms.,206;
with Object Sentence and q od,523,
625,1,N.7; with Inf.,627; vbs.of,at-
tracted into S bjv.after q od,641.N.3;
vbs.of,with q in,555,2.
threat vbs.of,with Inf.,423.N.5.
Tib ri as Loc.,411,R..1.
time adjs.of,in pred.attrib.,325.R.6;
s ffixes for,182,8; when,in Abl.,393;
how long,in Acc.,336; within which,in
Abl.,393; with per,336,393.R.1;with
tot s,ib.R.2; when = for which,ib.R.3;
with hic,ille,ib.R.4; preps,for Abl.,
394;lapses of,with c m,580,R.3; given
by part.,665,670,1.
timere constr.of,650 and N.1: with
Inf.,423.2.N.2.
timor est,with inf.,550,N.5 : timorem
s besse,with Inf.,533.R.1.
titles position of,676,R.4.
tmesis 726.
tot s decl.of,76; in pred.attrib.,325,
R.6; with Abl.of Place Where,388; with
Time How Long,393.R.2.
towns with Acc.,337; in Abl.of Place
Where,386; in Abl.of Place Whence,391;
in Loc.,411;with preps.,337.N.3.391,
R.1;with appositives,337.R.2,386.R.1,
391.R.1,411.R.3.
tractat ase p.,436.N.
trade s ffixes for,181,4.
tradere with Acc.Ger.,430,N.1;with
Acc.and Inf.,527.R.2.
tradesman s ffixes for,181,3.
training vbs.of,with Abl v 401,N.1.
trajection 696.
trans in composition,9,4;vbs.cpd.
with take Acc.,331;as prep.,416,26.
transitive verb defined,213; sed in-
trans.ib.R.a.
transposition of consonants,9,8.
tres decl.of,95.
trial vbs.of,with si,460,1,6; with im-
plied protasis,601.
tribes in Abl.of Origin,395,N.2.
trib ere with t,553,2.
trib t m heteroclite,68,5.
tricorporis defective,85,1.
trinl-97,R.3.
trit m with Inf.,422.N.3.
trochee shortened by Iambic Law,717;
trochaic foot,734; rhythm,736;
rhythms,768-776.
t decl.of,101 and N.1; syniesis in,ib.
N.4; with met and -pte,102.NN.2.3; ves-
tri and vestr m,304,2 and 3,364,R.;
poss.pron.for,304,2,N.2; t i,vestri,
with Ger.,428.R.1.
t eri with Acc.and Inf.,527.R.1.
t m with s bst.,439.N.4;with etiam,
478.N.1;as coordinating particle,482,1
and N.1; f m t m,482,1 and N.1;
Ct n t m,588; correlative of si,590,
N.1.
t s(OS) 101 and N.3;t m with t,
657.R; t i with Gen.Ger.,428.R.1.
U-length of Final 707,6.
bi -as soon as,with Indic.,561-563;
Ca sal,with Indic.,564,s.1.565 and N.1;
with Iterative action,566,567;with
S bjv.,567.N.; Conditional,590,N.3.
ll s decl.of,76;and q isq am,107,
3.N.2,108; syntax of,317.
ls 416,27.
lterior 87,8; ltim s in pred.attrib.,
325.R.6.
ltimate defined,11.
[GENERAL INDEX.541]
Ultra with Abl.of Meas re,403.N.1;
position of,413.R.1; as adv.,415; as
prep.,416,27.
ncertainty vbs.of,with q in,555,2.
nderstatement definition of,700.
ndertaking vbs.of,with Acc.Ger.,430.
niman s defective,85,2.
nlikeness adjs.of,with atq e(ac),643.
UNREAL CONDITION 597; with Impf.of
opposition to Past,ib.R.1;with Indic.
in Apod.,ib.ER.2,3;in O.O.,ib.R.4,
659;Apod,in,after vb.req iring
S bjv.,697,R.5; with absq e,ib.N.
n s decl.of,76,95.N.1;Pl.with pl -
ralia tant m,95,R.1;as distrib tive,
97,R.3; with s perlative,303;with
q idam,313,R.3; with q isq am,317,
1,N.1;with nemo,n ll s,317.2.N.3;in
pred.attrib.,325,R.6;with prep,for
Part.Gen.,372.R.2; with q i and
S bjv.,631,1.
n sq isq e 107,5.
rbs with name of Town,req ires
prep.,337.R.2,386.R.1,391.R.1,411.R.3;
with Appositional Gen.,361,N.1.
rgerl with Gen.of Charge,378.R.1.
rging vbs.of,with t,646.
sq e with Acc.of Motion Whither,337,
N.4; sage of,as prep.,416,28.
s s with Abl.,406;with other constr.,
ib.N.5; as pred.,ib.; with Pf.part.,406,
437.N.2;in phrases with t,557,R.;
s venit,with t,563,3.
t in wishes,261; with q am,to ex-
press disproportion,298,631,3,R.1;
omitted,298.R.2;with pot it,to
strengthen s perlative,303; t ita,
482,4;after vbs.of Adding and Hap-
pening,525,1,N.5;in Final and Con-
sec tive Sentences,543; t non,ib.4,
545.R.2,552;parenthetical,ib.R.3;
t ne,545.R.1,546.R.3;after vbs.of
Fear,550 and N.1;to add restriction,
552.R.3;after vb.of Ca sation,553,1;
after vbs.of Compelling and Permit-
ting,ib.2;after vbs.of Happening,ib.
3;after impersonals,ib.4;Explana-
tory,557;Exclamatory,558;with
magis q am,557.N.2; t prim m,as
soon as,with Indic.,561-563;Ca sal,
564,N.; with Iterative sentences,566,
567;nisi t,567.N.2,591.R.3;with si
and S bjv.,602; with S bjv.,to give
an Ass med Reason,ib.N.4;Conces-
sive,608 and R.1; with q i,626,R.1;
after comparatives,631,3,R.1;with
q isq e and s perlative,642.R.2; pro
eo t,as Ca sal,ib.R.4; t q i,with
s perlative,ib.a.5;introd ces O.O.
after vbs.of Will and Desire,652.R.1;
with part,to give Ass med Reason,
666.N.
ter,bag -decl.of,44,2,45.R.1.
ter,which -decl.of,76,106; q is for,
300.N.; tr m as interrogative parti-
cle,468;in Indirect Q estion,460,2,N.
3; tr m,whether or no,459,N.2.
terlibet 108.
terq e decl.of,108;with Pl.vb.,211,
R.1.Ex.a,292,R.; to express reciprocal
action,221,R.1 and 2;force of,292;
with Part.Gen.,371.R.1.
ter m heterogeneo s,32,1,N.
tervis 108.
ti with Abl.,407 and N.2,a;other
constrs.of,ib.N.3;with personal Ger.,
427,N.5.9
tinam in wishes,261 aiidN.1.
tpote with q i,626.N.1.
V and ,1.R.2;pron nciation of,7.
vacare with Dat.,346.N.2;attraction
of pred.after,635.R.3.
vac s with Gen.,374.N.8.
vae with Dat.,343,1,N.1.
valde very,439.N.3;with q am and
Indic.,467.N.
valere with Inf.,423.2.N.2; with t,
553,1.
valid s with Abl.or Gen.,405.N.3.
vas heteroclite,68,7.
Ve sage of,495;ve-ve ib N.2.
vehementer very,439.N.3.
vel with s perlative,303; sage of,494;
vel vel,ib.2;for example,ib.N.1;at
well as,ib.N.3.
velle conj gation of,174;exact se of
F t.or F t.Pf.,242,N.2 and R.3;has
no periphrasis,248,R.,531,N.3;velim,
257,2;vellem,as Potential,268,N.1 :
vellem,as Unreal,261.R-;with S bjv.
for Impv.,270.N.2;with Pf.Inf.act.,
280,2,b,and N.1;with Pf.Inf.pass.,
280,2,c,N.; volens in pred.attrib.,
325.R.6; sibi velle,351,N.2; volenti
est,353.N.2; with l f.or t,532,and
N.3,646,R.1;with Inf.,423.2.N.2; with
t,646,N.1.
[542 GENERAL INDEX.]
vel t with S bjv.,602 : with part,to
give Ass med Reason,666,s.
vel tsi with S bjv.,602.
venalis with Abl.,404.N.4.
vendere with Gen.of Price,379;bene
vendere,380,2,R.
venire omitted,209.N.5; venit mihi
in mentem,with Gen.,376.R.3; with
S p.,435,N.1;vent r s as adj.,438,
N.; in s spicionem,with Nom.and
Inf.,528.N.2;with Inf.,422.N.5; s
venit,with t,553,3.
venire pass,of vendere,169,2,R.i;with
Gen.of Price,379.
venter decl.of,44,2,45.R.1.
verbals defined,179,1; pred.agreement
of,211; e bst.with Acc.,330.N.3,337,
R.5; adj.with Acc.,ib.N.4; in bilis,
with Dat.,355.N.; in ax,with Gen.,
375;formation of verbalia.191.
VERBS defined,16,4;conj gation of,17;
inflection of,114;deponents,113;per-
sonal endings,114; reg lar,120,ff.;
classes of,133;Stem or Thematic class,
133,1.; Red plicated Class,ib.II.;
T-class,ib.iii.; Nasal class,ib.IV.; In-
choative class,ib.V.; i-class,ib.VI.;
mixed class,ib.VII.; listof,137-162; De-
ponents,163-166;Semi-deponents,167;
Irreg lar,168-174; Defective,175;form-
ation of,190 200; division of,190;Ver-
balia,191;Denominative,192;com-
position of,199,200;Impersonal,208;
intrans. sed personally,ib.2; Concord
of,210,211,285-287;trans,and in-
tra s.,213;trans, sed as intrans.,
ib.R.a;intrans. sed as trans.,ib.
R.6.
verb m with Appositional Gen.,361,1;
in phrases with t,546.N.2.
vereri co str.with,550 and N.1;veri-
t sasPr.,282.N.; with Inf.,423,2,s.2,
533.R.1.
verisimile in phrases with Inf.,422.N.
3;in phrases with t,553,4.
vero position of,413.N.3;yes,471,a,l;
with atq e,477.N.2;with sed,485,N.3;
syntax of,487;with nisi,591.R.4;with
Bin,592.
verse 745;methods of combining,746;
Italic,755;Sat rnian,756;compo nd,
820,823.
versification 729-823; anacr stic scheme
of,738.
vers s position of,413.R.1; sas
prep.,416,29;vers s Italic s-755.
vertere with Final Dat.,356.R.2.
ver m introd ces contrast to demon
strative,307.R.4;yes,471.a,l: >
etiam,482,5 and N.1; syntax of,
with Inf.,422.N.3;with t,553,4.
very -translations of,439.N.3.
vesci with Abl.,407 and N.2,e;with
personal Ger,427.N.5.
vesper -decl.of,68,10;in Abl.of Time
393.R.5; vesperi 37,5,411.N.1.
vester 101 and n.3.
vetare with Acc.,346.N.3;with Inf
423,2,NN.3 and 6,532.N.1 and 2.
vet s decl.of,82,2; comp.of,87,1,R.2
via as Abl.of Manner,399,N.1.
vicissim gives reciprocal relation,221
R.2;as coordinating particle,482,1,
N.2.
videre with Acc.and Inf.,527.R.2;with
t,546.N.1; with ne,548.N.1;with
Direct Q estion,467.N.; with td
Noms.in pass.,206;videri,and vi
det r,628.R.2;vide,with S bjv.for
Impv.,271.N.2,548,N.3; videris,
Impv.,245,N.
vilis with Abl.of Price,404.N.2.
vincere with Abl.of Respect,397,N.2;
ca sam,333.2.it.
violent s and violens,84,1.
vir s defective,70,C.
Vis 70,D; with Pl.vb.,211,R.1,Ex.a; vi,
as Abl.of Manner,399,N.1.
-vis with relatives,111,3.
viti m with Epexegetical Gen.,361,2 ;
with Inf.,422,N.2;vitio as Abl.of
Manner,399.N.1.
vivere with Abl.,407,N.2,e.
[vix] 70,D;t am vicem,334.R.2.
VOCATIVE defined,23,5;in I ? 33,R.2;
adjs.of 1st and 2d Decl.,73; no synta:
of,201,R.1;Nom.instead,ib.R.2;ii
app.,ib.R.3;in pred.,211,R.3;Sg
with Pl.vb.,ib.N.2; Nom.instead,321
N.1; in pred.app.,325,R.1;with O or
pro,343,1,N.1.
voice-112,2,212; act.,213; pass.,214 ;
middle,212.N.
Vol ntas in phrases with t,546,N.2;
vol ntateas Abl.of Manner,399.N.1.
vol p indeclinable,85,C.
vomer decl.of,45,s.2.
vowels 2;so nds of,3;phonetic varia-
[GENERAL INDEX.543]
ions in,8;weakening of,ib.1;omis-
sion of,ib.2;epenthesis of,ib.3;
issimilation of,ib.4;q antity of final,
707;s ffixes with,184.
vox -with Appositio al Gen.,361,1.
v lgo as Abl.of Manner,399.N.1.
v lt s -heteroclite,68,5.
Want-vbs.of,with Abl.,405;adjs.of,
with Gen.and Abl.,ifc.N.3.
warning vbs.of,with t,546.
weakening of vowels 8,1,701.R.2.
weight s bsts.of,with Gen.,369.
willvbs.of,with Inf.,280,2,c,423,2,532;
seq ence after vbs.of,516,R.3; t in-
stead of Inf.after,632.N.1-4; with Final
sentence,546;with Inf.instead,ib.R.1;
with simple S bjv.,ib.R.2.
wishes in S bjv.,260,261;apodosis
omitted with,601.
witho t translated by t non,552,R.4;
q in,556;c m non,587.R.2.
wonder constr.with vbs.of,542.N.1.
words Formation of,176-200.
Y -1.R.3; length of final,707,3.
yes -trans,of,471,a and c.
yielding vbs.of,with Dat.,346.
Z -when introd ced,1.R.3;so nd of,
ib.N.
e gma 690.
SYNTAX OF INDIVIDUAL AUTHORS.
The syntactical sage of individ al a thors is treated as follows:
ACCIUS 358.N.1; 625,1,N.1.
AFRANIUS 498,N.1.
APULEIUS 336,N.1;365,N.; 406.N.3; 498,
N.1;691.N.3; 607.N.3;626.N.1.
CAELIUS 574.N.
CAESAR 208.2.N.2;209,N.5;228.N.1;239,
N.; 250,N.1 and 2; 260; 280,2,c,N.; 285,
N.2; 286,3,N.; 311.1.R.2;323,N.1;324;
335.N.; 336,N.2;337,N.1; 341.N.2; 349.R.5;
354.N.2; 356.N.2 and 3; 358.N.3; 359.N.1;
369.N.2; 372.N.2 and 3; 374.N.1 and 9;
375.N.2; 381.N.4; 386.N.; 391,N.;395,N.2;
401.N.7; 407,N.2,d; 410.N.4; 413.R.1; 415;
416,2,3,8,15,16,19,22,and 24;418,2; 422,
N.2; 423.N.2 and 3; 427.N.2; 429.N.1; 432,
N.1; 435.N.2; 436.N.1;443.N.3; 458.N.1;
460,2,N.1 and 2; 467.N.; 475.N.3; 476.N.5;
478.N.2;480.N.2 and 3; 482,3; 482,5,R.2
and N.1; 496.N.1; 503; 512,N.1;513.N.1
and 2; 525,2,N.3; 527.R.3; 528,N.1;538,
N.4;541,N.1 and3;642,N.1; 545,R.1; 549.N.
1 and 2;563.N.2 and 3;667.N.; 569.N.1;
671.N.3; 691,8.2 and N.2; 602.N.5; 615.N.;
616,1,N.1;626.N.1; 627,8.2; 636.N.1; 644,
R.3; 647.N.2; 650.N.; 666.N.
R.Hisp.407,N.2,d; 416,8.
R.Afr.407,N.2,d;417,7.
CATO 285.N.2; 394,3,N.1; 401.N.7; 407.N.2;
417,7; 418,4;437.N.2; 477.N.5; 548,N.3;
574.N.
CATULLUS-207.N.; 236.N.; 380:417,3; 454,
N.2; 455.N.; 458,N.1;477.N.5; 480.N.3;
546,N.3;567,N;644,N.2.
CELSUS 602.N.4.
CICERO 204.N.7;206.N.1; 809.N.3 and 5;
211.R.4 and N.3; 214.R.2;828.N.1;239,
N.; 242.R.3; 245,N.; 250.N.1 and 2;252,
N.; 264.R.6 and NN.1,2;257.N.1;261;
269; 271.2.N.2; 280,2,c,N.; 285,N.2;
293.N.; 298.N.1;299.N.1;301;311,
1.R.2;318.N.1;319.N.2;323.N.1;324;
336.N.2;337.N.1.2,and 4;341.N.2;
343.N.1;346.N.1 and 2;347.R.2;349,
[544 GENERAL INDEX.]
R.5; 361.N.1;352.N.; 354.N.2; 356.R.3
and N.3;357; 358.N.3 and 5;361.N.1;
362.N.1;364.N.1; 369,N.2;372.N.2 and 3;
374,N.1,2,4,and 5;375.N.2 and 3;376.R.
1,2,and 3; 380.1.N.1 and 4; 383.N.1; 385,
N.1; 386.N.; 390,2,N.2 and 3; 391.N.; 395,
N.1 and 2; 396.N.1; 398.N.1; 403.N.4; 406,
N.6;407,N.2,d;410.N.4;411.R.1 and 2,
and N.1; 413.R.1;416,1,2,3,5,7,13,14,15,
16,19,24,25,28,and 29;417.1.N.3 and 14;
418,4; 422.N.2.3,and 5;423,N.2and3;
427.N.2 and 5;428,R.2 and N.1; 429.N.1;
432.N.1;435.N.1;436.N.1; 438.N.; 439.N.
2,3 and 4;443.N.3;453,N.1;457,1,N.1
and 2,2 and N.; 458.N.1;459.N.1;460,1,
N.2;467.N.; 476.N.5;477.N.4 and 5; 478,
N.2;480.R.1 and N.3;481.N.; 482.1.N.1
and 2,2,3,and 5,R.2 and N.1;484.N.1
and 2; 485,N.1 and 2; 486,N.; 488,N.1 and
2; 489.N.1; 491,N.; 493.N.1;494.N.1;
495; 496.N.1; 497; 498,N.3,4,G and 8; 501;
603;511,R.4;513.R.1 and NN.1,2;525,1,
N.1 and 4,2.N.2 and 3;527.R.1 and 3,
and N.2;628.N.1 and 2;532.N.1 and 3;
633.R.1; 536.N.1; 538.N.4; 541,N.1,2,3 and
5; 542,R.and N.1;543.N.3;548.N.3;549,
N.1,2 and 4; 550,N.1,2 and 5; 553,1; 555,
R.1;563,N.2,3,4 and 5;567.N.; 569.N.1;
671,N.2and3; 573.N.2;574.N.; 576.N.1;
677.N.4 and 5;580,N.3;590.N.1; 691.R.4
and N.2; 602,N.5;604,R.2; 605.N.; 606,N.
1; 608; 615.N.; 616,1,N.2,and 2,N.; 617,
N.1; 626.N.1; 627,R.1 and 2; 635,N.1 and
2;636.N.1;643.N.4;644.R.3;647.N.2;
666,N.; 677.N.
COLUMELLA 592,N.
CORNIFICIUS 439,N.3;500,R.; 549,N.4.
CURTIUS 416,16;532.N.1.
DICTYS 545.R..1.
ENNIUS 411.R.2;478.N.5.
FLORUS 467.N;525.2.N.2.
FBONTO 525,2,N.3.
GAIUS 625,2,N.3.
GELLIUS 580,N.3.
HIRTIUS 423.N.2 : 532.N.1.
HORACE 211,R.1,Ex.a.N.; 271.2.N.2;301;
346.N.2; 361.N.1; 416,5.17,19,and 21;
417,8;418,4;421,N.1,c;422.N.4;427.N.
2; 439.N.3; 454.N.2;457.N.2; 458.N.1
and 2;460.2.N.3;477.N.8;480.N.1;482,
V 3; 498.N.1;500.R.; 525,1,N.1,2.N.2;533,
R.1;536.N.1;538.N.5;641.N.5;563.N.3;
569.N.1;591.R.2;592.N.; 616.1.N.2;644,
N.2.
JUVENAL 602.N.4;605.N.
LIVY 204.N.8;209.N.3; 211,R.1,Ex.a,N.;
247.N.1;249.N.; 250,N.1 and 2; 285,Ex.
3 and N.2;293.N.; 3U,1,R.2,2,N.: 317.N.
1; 319.N.1; 323,N.1;335.N.; 337.N.4;
338.N.1; 346.N.2; 347.R.2; 350,1,N.; 351,
N.1;353.N.2;356.N.2;359.N.1 and 4;
363.R.1;366.R.1; 371.N.; 372,N.1a d4;
373.R.1;374,N.2and 3; 383.N.1;385.N.
1;390.2.N.3;391.R.1 and N.; 395.N.1;
399.N.1 and 3;401.N.2 and 6;403.N.3;
406.N.3; 410.N.2.3,and 4; 411.R.1 and
N.1;413.N.1;415;416,2,7,15,16,22,23,
24,and 28;417,1,8,10,11,and 14;418,2,
and 4;423,N.2;427.N.2;429,2 and N.1;
430.N.1;435,N.2;436,N.1;437.N.2;438,
N.; 439.x.3 and 4;442.N.3;443.N.4;
457,1,N.3;458,N.1;460,2,N.3;467.N.;
477,N.4,5 and 9;478,N.1 and 2;480.N.3;
482,1,N.1,2 and 5,R.2 and N.1; 497;498,
N.1,3,and 8;502.N.3;503;513,N.1 and
2;525,1,N.1 and 7 and 2.N.2;632,N.1;
636.N.1;641,N.2 and 5;642,R.and N.2;
643,N.3;545.R.1;549.N.1;550,N.5;655,
2,N.; 657.R.and N.2;563,N.2,3,and 5;
667,N.; 569,N.1; 570.N.4;671,N.6;676,
N.2;577,N.3,4,and 5;597,R.5;602.N.5;
615,N.; 616,1,N.1 and 2,and 2,N.; 626,N.
1;635.N.2;636.N.1;644.R.3;651.R.1;
666.N.; 687.
LUCAN 254,N.1;468,N.1.
LUCILIUS 383.1.N.2; 486,N.1.
LUCRETIUS 372,N.2;383,1,N.2;405,N.3;
406,N.6;422,N.4;459.N.1;480.N.2;482,
1,N.1;496.N.1;500.R.; 525,1,N.1;533,
R.1;564,N.1;571.N.4;606.N.1;636.N.1.
MARTIAL 280,2,6,N.1.
NAEVIUS 633,N.1.
NEPOS 249,N.; 250,N.2;356.R.3;408,N.2,
c;416,10;513.N.1;536.N.1;655,2,N.;
571,N.4;605,N.; 606,N.1;687.
OVID 270.N.; 280,2,6,N.1;349.R.5; 364,
N.1;401,N.7; 411.R.2; 416,7; 417,7; 427,
N.2; 494,N.3; 625,I,N; 545,R.1; 616.N.2.
[GENERAL INDEX.545]
PETRONIUS 207,N.; 625,1,N.1.
PLAUTUS 206.N.1;211,R.1,Ex.a.N.; 270,
N.1;330.N.3;336,N.1;347,R.2;357,N;
358,N.1;361,N.1;374,N.1,2,3,and 5;
375,N.3;383,1,N.2,and 3;398 : N.2;406,
N.6;407.N.2;411,R.1;415;416,6,7,16,
19,21,and 24; 417,7; 418,4; 422,N.2;
439,N.3; 454.N.2; 455,N.; 467,N.; 476.N.
3 and 5;477,N.1 and 6;478.N.2;487,
N.1;494,N.1 and 6;496,N.1;498.N.3;
602,N.3;525,1,N.4 and 2.N.2;533,R.1;
638,N.1 and 3;541,N.1;645,R.1;646,
N.3;648,N.3;649,N.2;563,N.3;569,N.
1;571,N.5; 576,N.1;577.N.5;580,N.1
and 3;597,N.; 602,N.5;610,N.1;615,N.;
626,N.1;643.N.3;677,s.
PLINY MAJOR 381.N.3;398.N.2; 460,2,N.3;
467.N.; 482,2; 49R.1.N.1; 592.N.
PUNY MINOR 209.N.5;262.N.; 418,4; 460,
2.N.3; 638.N.5; 548.N.3; 602.N.4; 605.N.;
616.1.N.2.
POLLIO 410,N.3.
PROPERTIUS 406.N.3; 421,N.1,c;457.1.N.2;
458.N.1; 480,N.2a d3; 498.N.1.
QUADRIGARIUS 407,N.2,b.
QUINTILIAN 359.N.5;406.N.3; 612.N.1;
525,2,N.2; 538.N.5; 602.N.4; 604.R.2;
627.R.1.
SALLUST 207,N.; 208,2,N.2;247.N.1; 260,
N.1; 280,2,c,N.; 285.N.2; 286,3,N.; 311,1,
R.2; 323.N.1; 338,N.1; 347.R.2;349.R.4;
353.N.2;356.N.3;359.N.1 and 6;369.N.
2;372.N.2 and 3;374,N.1,3,and 8;390,
3.N.1; 391.N.; 407,N.2,d; 410,N.1,2and 4;
416,2,4,7,16,20 and 24;417,7; 418,4; 423,
N.2; 428,R.2; 436.N.2;436.N.1;437.N.2;
439.N.3; 460.2.N.1; 467.N.; 476.N.3; 476,
N.5; 478.N.2; 480.N.3; 482,3 and 5.R.2 and
N.1;488,N.2; 491.N.; 496.N.1;601; 503;
612.N.1; 513.N.1; 625,2,N.2; 532.N.1;536,
N.1;638,N.1; 541,N.2and3; 542.N.1; 545,
R.1; 548.N.3;563.N.2;569.N.1;591.R.2;
604.R.2; 616,1,N.1 and 2;626.N.1;636,
N.1.
SENECA 374.N.3;616.1.N.2;635,N.2.
SENECA RHETOR 44.5,N.
SUETONIUS 349.R.5; 407,N.2.c;416,22;
513.N.1; 642.R.; 646.N.3; 677.N.5; 602,
N.4; 665,N.2.
TACITUS 208.2.N.2;209.N.3; 211,R.1,Ex.
a,N.; 254.N.1; 285,Ex.3 and N.2; 346.N.
3; 353,N.2; 354.N.2; 356,N.2; 359,N.5; 364,
N.1;372.N.2;376.R.1;390.3.N.1;401.N.6
and 7;407,N.2,a;410,N.2and 4;411,N.
1; 416,10.16,23 and 24; 417,3 and 12;
423.N.3; 428.R.2 and N.4;432,N.1; 437,
N.2 442,N.3; 443.N.4;460.2.N.3; 476,
N.1;476.N.5;477,N.4;480.N.3;482,2,3
and 5.N.1;484.N.2;493.N.2;496.N.1;
497;513.N.1;525,1,N.7,and 2,N.2and3;
532.N.1;538.N.5;542.R.and N.1;546,
N.3; 563,N.2,3 and 5; 567,N.; 569,.N.1;
571,N.1 and 3; 673,N.1; 675.N.2;676.N.
1;602,N.4;604.R.2;605,N.; 616,1,N.2;
635.N.2; 647,N.2; 666,N.; 687.
TERENCE 211,R.1,Ex.o,N.; 271,N.2;286,
N.2;337.N.4;358.N.1;361.N.1;383,1,
N.2; 399,N.1;407,N.2;411.R.2;415; 416,
1,8,and 28; 423,N.2;428,R.2; 439,R.3;
454,N.2;455,N.; 482,5,R.2;487,N.1;489,
N.; 494,N.1;496,N.1 and 2;498 N.3;602,
N.3;525,1,N.1;533,R.1;641,N.1;645,
R.1;649.N.2;669.N.1;571,N.4;674.N.;
676.N.1;578,N.; 680,N.1 and 3;597,
N.; 610,N.1;615.N.; 626.N.1;644,N.2;
677,N.
TIBULLUS 455,N.: 457,1,N.2;468.N.1 :
498.N.1.
VALERIUS MAXIMUS 285,N.2;432,N.1;
460,2,N.3;538.N.5;577,N.5.
VARRO 416,7,15,and 23;422,N.4;427.N.
2;437,N.2;449,R.3;574,N.; 606,N.1.
VATINIUS 606,N.1 .
VELLEIUS 209,N.5;285,N.2;349,R.5;391,
N.; 460,2,N.3; 513,N.2.
VERGIL 211.R.1,Ex.a,N.; 230,N.2;269;
276,2,N.2;301;336,N.1;346.N.2;374,
N.3;383,1,N.2 and 3;390,2,N.4;411.R.
2;417,3;421,N.1,c;422,N.4;442,N.3;
443,N.1;458,N.3;477,N.5;480,N.2;482,
1,N.1 and 2;486,N,3;526,1,N.1;542,N.
1; 546,N.3; 563,N.2;591,R.2; 644,N.2.
VITRUVIUS 353,N.1;386,N.; 416,5 and 25;
418,3;439.N.3;636,N.1;649.N.2;671,
N.4.
THE HISTORIANS 209,N.5;211,R.1,Ex.b;
214,R.2; 363,R.1;391,N.; 484,N.2;485,
N.1; 487,N.1; 491; 501.N.; 567,N.; 628,R.
THE POETS 211,R.1,Ex.a,N.and R.4; 217,
N.1 and 2; 230,N.2;241,N.1;261;269;
270; 271,2,N.2;280,2,6 and N.2; 290,N.
2;295,N.; 296,N.1,3,and 4;321.N.1; 332,
2.N.2 and 3;333,2,N.6;336.N.3;337,N.
[546 GENERAL INDEX.]
1 and 2;338,N.1 and 2;346.N.6;350,1,
N.; 351,N.1;352,N.; 354,N.2;358; 361,
N.1;362,N.1;373,R.1;374,N.1,3,6,8,and
10;375;383,1,N.1;385.N.1;386,N.; 390,
3.N.1 and 2; 391,N.; 394,3,N.1;396.N.1
and 3; 397.N.2;401,N.4and 6 : 404,N.1;
407,N.2,e;413,R.1 and 3,and N.1;416,
14,and 20;417,5,12,and 24;418,3 and
4; 421,N.1; 427.N.5;428,N.2 and 3;
435,N.1;436,N.1 and 3;437,N.1;439,N.
2; 440.R.; 446,N.2;449,R.3;454,N.3;
457,1,N.3; 460,2,N.2;467,N.; 476.N.2.3,
and 5;477.N.4;482,3;488,N.1 and 2;
495,N.2;496.N.1;498,N.1 and 5;502.N.
1; 626,1,N.7; 527,N.2; 532.N.1 and 6;
535,R.3;536.X.2;538,x.5;546,R.2 and
N.3;552.R.2;591,N.2;604,R.2;617.N.
2;631,2,N.1;683.
THE COMIC POETS 211,R.1,Ex.a,N.; 228,
N.1; 242.N.2; 243; 244.N.1;247.N.2;
263,2,N.; 267,N.; 269; 280,2,c.N.; 346.N.1;
351.N.1; 406.N.2; 416,4; 443.N.4;453,
N.1 and 2; 467.N.; 468.N.; 477.N.3;553,1;
617.N.2.
LATER PROSE 211,R.1,Ex.a,N.; 217.N.1
and 2; 221,8.2; 269; 361.N.1; 372.N.3;
374.N.1 and 3; 375; 386.N.; 390,2,N.3;
404.N.1; 413.N.1; 415; 416,20,23,25,and
27: 417,5; 427.N.5; 428.N.1,2,and 3;
449.R.3; 460,1,a; 467,N.; 476.N.5; 477.N.
4; 528.R.2 and N.4; 535,R.3; 538.N.5;
546,8.2; 555,2,N.; 589.N.1.
ANTECLASSICAL LATIN 211.N.1 and 2; 220,
N.2; 221.R.2; 241,N.1; 248.N.1; 254.N.2;
257.N.1; 260; 261.N.2; 271.1.N.1 and 2,
and 2.N.1 and 2; 272,3,N.; 280,2,a.R.2;
293.N.; 296.N.1: 301; 303; 309,N.2; 319,
N.1; 330.N.2; 339.N.1; 341.N.2 346.N.2;
347.R.1; 350.1.N.; 373,R.1; 374,N.4;375,
N.2;3834.N.2; 385.N.2; 390,2,N.1; 390,
N.3; 391,8.2 and N.; 395.N.2; 397.N.2;
399.N.1; 403.N.3; 407.N.2; 408.N.6; 410,
N.1,4,and 5; 413,R.1; 416,10,12,16,23,
24,and 27; 417,2,9,and 10; 421.N.1;
422.N.2 and 4; 423,N.2 and 3; 427.N.2;
428.N.1; 429.N.1; 430.N.1: 432.N.1; 433,
N.2; 436,N.1 and 4; 437.N.2; 439,N.3; 442,
N.3; 443.N.1 and 4; 444,1,N.2; 454,N.1 and
5;456,N.;457,1,N.1,2,and 3,and 2,N.;
459.N.2; 475.N.1; 476,N.1,2,and 5; 479,
N.1; 480.N.1; 482,1,N.1,and 5.N.1; 487,
N.2; 488,N.1; 495,N.1; 498,N.5,6,and 7;
500; 503; 513.N.1; 525,1,N.2,6,and7,and
2.N.2,and 3; 627,8.3; 528,N.1; 636,N.1;
537,N.2; 541.N.5; 542,R.and N.2; 546,
N.3; 549,N.4; 550,N.1 and 2; 553,3,N.;
557,R.; 563,N,1,2,and 5; 564,N.1; 571,
N.2,3,and 5; 574,N.; 576.N.1; 677,N.1;
680,N.3; 591,8.2 and N.2; 602,N.5; 614,
N.; 617,N.1 and 2; 626.N1.and 2; 627,
R.1;634,N.;636,N.1; 651,R.1.
CLASSICAL LATIN 220,N,1;241.N.1 : 260;
263.2.N.; 269;270,N.; 282.N.; 285,Ex.3 :
301:303; 309.N.2; 318,N.2;830,N.2; 339,
N.1 and 4; 342;343.N.1; 346,N.2; 347.R.1;
348.R.2; 356,8.2; 359.N.4; 363.N.; 374,
N.1,2,3,4,5,and 9;381.N.1;383,1;385,
R.1 and N.1,2,and 3;390,2,N.1,and 2;
391.R.1;393,8.5;394.N.1;398 ;399,N.1:
401.N.2 and 6;403.N.3 and 4;407.N.2;
408.N.6;410.N.1.2.5 and 6; 413,8.3; 416,
9,12,16,23,and 29;417,9 and 11;421.N.
1 and 2;422.N.4;423.N.4;429,1 and 2;
430.N.1; 432.N.1; 437,1; 438.N.; 439.N.3;
442.N.3;444.1.N.2;449.R.3;460,1,N.1,
and 2,N.3; 467.N.; 475.N.2: 477.N.8; 479,
N.1; 482,4,N.; 494.N.2 ande; 498.N.3 and
4; 500,R.; 501.N.; 502.N.1; 503;511,R.1; .
525,1,N.1;528.R.2,and N.1;632.N.1.3,
and 4; 535,R.3; 537.N.2; 538.N.2 and 3;
541,N.1 and 2; 545,R.1; 546,N.3; 549.N.1;
556; 571.N.2; 602,N.1; 610.N.1;631,3.R.
1; 643.N.3: 644,R.3; 651,R.1.
POST-CLASSICAL LATIN 211,R.2;239,R.;
241.N.2; 247.N.1; 251.N.2; 254,R.6,and
N.2; 257.N.1; 271.2.N.2; 292,N.; 296.N.
land 2; 298.N.1; 299.N.2;301; 309,
N.2;319.N.1;330.N.4;333,2,N.6;337,
N.1 and 2;338.N.2;339,N.1 and 3;
346,N.2; 349,R.5; 355,N.; 356,R.3;
362.N.1 and 2; 366,R.2;374,N.2and 3;
378,R.4;380,1,N.2;390,3,N.1;391,x.;
393,R.5; 397.N.2; 398.N.1: 399,N.2: 403,
N.4; 405.N.3; 407.N.2; 408.N.6;410.N.1,
2,3,and 5;411,R.1; 415;416,7,10,12,14,
16,17,18,and 22; 417,7; 418,4; 422.N.2.4,
and 5;423,N.2 and 3;431.N.1 and 3;
432.N.1;433; 435.N.1; 436.N.1: 437.N.1;
438,N.; 439,N.2 and 3;479,N.1 and 2;
480,N.1;482,1,N.1 and 2,3,4,N.,and.6,
N.1 and 2;494,N.2;498,N.1,3,6,and 8;
503;513,N.2;525,1,N.7,and 2.N.2; 528,
R.2; 532,N.1; 541.N.1; 543,N.3; 545,R.1;
546,N.3; 549,N.2; 553,2,N.and 4,R.2;
557,N.2;563,N.4and 5; 573.N.2;576,N.
2; 590,N.1;595,R.6; 602.N.5; 605,N.;
606,N.1;616,2,N.; 625,1.R.and 2,R.; 626,
N.1;669;677,N.